■ iirtB'trjjsixnia 
 
CORNELL 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
 GIFT OF 
 
 J. c. ■'■'rautvdne 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tliis book is in 
 the Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924029486382 
 
^ 
 
 yt^ . 6 . ^-ra ct€c< •/ / t.o %- 
 
 (/ 
 
 // 
 
 S3o c.-f' <^^ .J/- 
 
 
THE 
 
 COMPLETE PHONOGRAPHER: 
 
 |tt Mubttftibc Exposition 
 
 PHONOGRAPHY, 
 
 WITH ITS APPLIOATIOiT TO ALL BEAjrOHE8 OF KEPORXIira, AND 
 
 AFFOEDING THE FTILLKST INSTEITOTION TO THOBE WHO HAVM 
 
 NOT THE ASSISTANCE ov ' -v r,T.AL -l"^. iflHEE J ALSO 
 
 INTENDED ^JHOOL BOOK. 
 
 JAMES E. MUNSON, 
 
 Om'-'Ali STENOGKAPHBR TO THE SUBBOOATE'S OODKT OP NBW TOBK. 
 
 KEW YORK : 
 OAKLET & MASON, 
 
 21 MUEEAY STREET. 
 1868. 
 
2L 
 
 EsrrEBED, ACCOBDINO TO AcT OF CONGBESS, IN THE YEAB 1866, ET 
 
 J. E. MTJNSON, 
 
 IN THB Clerk's OrncE of the District Coitrt fob the Southern District 
 OF New York. 
 
 Daties & Kent, Press of the 
 
 Mectrotypers and Stereotypert, New York Printing CojtpANr, 
 
 188 W11J.IAM St., N. Y. 81, 83, & 85 Centkb St. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The use of Phonography by shorthand writers has become bo gen- 
 eral, and the superiority of the system over all other kinds of ste- 
 nography so universally acknowledged, that it is now unnecessary to 
 say anything of its comparative merits, or to press its claims upon the 
 public, for no one about to commence the study of shorthand would 
 think for a moment of taking up any other. The principles, too, of 
 the Science of Phonetics, upou which Phonography is based, are, in a 
 sort of general way, so commonly understood, that an extended ex- 
 planation of them seems to be no longer necessary. It is, however, 
 highly proper, on presenting this new phonographic instruction-book 
 to the public, that I should state my reasons for so doing, aijd more es- 
 pecially as it introduces several important modifications of the system. 
 
 The leading features of Phonography are the result of the labors of 
 Mr. Isaac Pitman of England, who for nearly thirty years has devoted 
 much of his time to its development and propagation ; but the high 
 degrfi' bf perfection to which it has been brought, is owing in great 
 measure to the suggestions of thousands of practical phouographers, 
 both in England and the United States. This mode of development 
 has its merits and demerits. Coming as it has from the brains of such 
 a va^t number and variety of people, Phonography possesses a richness 
 of material which could hardly have been obtained in any other way ; 
 but, on the other hand, this kind of growth has had » tendency to 
 render the system less uniform and consistent in matters of detail 
 than it would have been had it emanated from a single mind. 
 
 K^w, my first aim has been to restore, as far as possible, simplicity 
 aul harmony, by adhering to general principles and discarding all 
 ur necessary expedients ; and my second, to more completely adapt the 
 system to the requirements of the reporter. Mr. Pitman, in his very 
 laudable desire and efforts to bring the benefits of Phonography 
 within reach of the masses of England, has seriously, and as I think 
 unnecessarily, impaired it as a mere system of stenography. This 
 work, however, has been prepared expressly in the interest of report- 
 ipg, and hence everything that would tend'to hinder the learner in 
 acquiring a knowledge of the art for that purpose, has been omitted. 
 
IV PEEFACE. 
 
 With this end in view, what is termed the "Corresponding Style' - 
 cif Phonography has been entirely discarded, because its tendency waa 
 to foster a disoonnected and lengthy style of writing wholly incom- 
 patible with reporting habits ; for, as it is a principle of the human 
 mind that first impressions are the mcst lasting, it often takes years 
 of practice to fully acquire the "Reporting Style" when the writer has 
 once indulged himself for any considerable time in the use of the 
 "Corresponding." In fact, I have often heard many of the oldest 
 reporters say (and I will add that it also accords with my own expe- 
 rience) that in very rapid reporting they were still troubled with a 
 tendency to use long and disconnected forms ; or, in other words, to 
 return to the forms and style of writing that they used while learning. 
 Therefore, instead of dividing Phonography into two distinct styles, 
 one to he used as a stepping-stone to the other, I have treated it as 
 one unbroken system, and have endeavored to furnish a series of les- 
 sons that will conduct the learner as rapidly as possible, and without 
 any intermediate halting, directly to a knowledge of the principles 
 and practice of the art in its highest develQpment. 
 
 The other most important changes that I have made are those of 
 simplification ; and in this respect I have merely adhered or returned to 
 established rules and principles where other authors have departed 
 from them. And this has been done at an occasional sacrifice of 
 apparent brevity, though not of real or practical brevity ; for it must be 
 borne in mind that swift writing is quite as much a mental as a man- 
 ual process, and consequently any attempt to shorten the outlines 
 of words by exceptional expedients, or by deviations from general 
 rules, is only transferring the labor from the fingers to the brain, and 
 should never be done unless the gain in brevity is very inarked, aa 
 the hesitation caused by the anomalous form is apt to more than con- 
 sume the time saved by the relief to the hand. These seemingly 
 obvious principles have heretofore been but little understood by writ- 
 ers on the subject of Phonography, and the system has in consequence 
 become so complicated by exceptional forms and expedients that it has 
 as yet failed to exhibit its full powers. In one of the earliest Ameri- 
 can phonographic books* this tendency to complication is noticed and 
 deprecated. The writer says, "Who does not know that a few hun- 
 dred words subject to exceptional or particular rules throw doubt and 
 uncertainty over every word in the language." This remark must 
 not, however, be construed as condemning the use of contractions, 
 for, to use the words of the same writer, ' ' imperfect skeletons create 
 no confusion, inasmuch as if the contraction happens to be unknown 
 
 • The Phonographic Wora-Book No. 1, by Andrews & Boyle. ia49. 
 
PEEFACE. V 
 
 to the writer, he merely writes the word in full, and no breaeh of any 
 rule is committed ; while, when known, they contiibute to brevity, 
 and seldom, in any case, cause any difficulty in reading. They ought, 
 therefore, to be provided for, and are not to be considered as falling 
 under the condemnation of exceptional and particular rules." 
 
 The chief material phonographic change introduced in this work, 
 because it is the one upon which most of the other modifications de- 
 pend, is the adoption of the vowel-scale of Isaac Pitman's Tenth Edi- 
 tion. This scale differs from the old one in the inversion of the order 
 of the dot- vowels (the dash-vowels remaining the same as before), as 
 shown in the following arrangements : 
 
 OLD SOALE. NEW SCALE. 
 
 e, i — aw, o ah, a — aw,. 6 
 
 a, e — 0, u a, e — o, ii 
 
 ah, a — 00, 66 e, i — oo, 66 
 
 So radical a change as this would not be adopted by me except for 
 what I consider to be good, and, indeed, imperative reasons ; in fact, 
 nothing would justify it unless it can be shown that the new scale 
 ■offers some very considerable advantages over the old. This, how- 
 ever, I think I shall have no difficulty in fully demonstrating. But, 
 as no gains can ever be secured in Phonography by introducing 
 changes, without some corresponding losses, and as such losses are 
 always sure to present themselves to the casual observer a groat deal 
 sooner, and with much more force, than the gains, it will be necessary 
 for me to state this matter somewhat in detail. 
 
 The most importarit fundamental principle of Phonetics is what is 
 termed the "Second Law" of Dr. Latham, which requires "that 
 sounds within a determined degree of likeness be represented by signs 
 within a determined degree of likeness ; while sounds beyond a certain 
 degree of likeness he represented by distinct and different signs, and 
 that uniformly." The observance of this law in the arrangement of 
 the various details of the phonographic system has made it the most 
 perfect and scientific method of shorthand writing ever devised. In 
 the representation of the consonant-sounds the rule has been strictly 
 carried out, and, although a few exceptions occur, they are only such 
 as could not possibly be avoided. Thus, we see the four Gutturals 
 loay, gay, ing, and kay represented by four of the horizontal signs ; the 
 six Palatals dhay, jay, ish, sihee, ree, and yay by signs inclined to tho 
 right ; the six Dentals tee, dee, ees, see, ith, and dhee hy perpendicular 
 signs ; and the five Labials ^ee, bee, ef, vee, and way by signs inclined to 
 the left. Again, the distinction between the breath-consonants and 
 the subvocals is very appropriately marked by a mere difference in 
 
\1 PEEFACE. 
 
 the shading. But when we come to the vowels, a vei r material de^ 
 ■nation is seen, for in the old vowel-scale this important law seeniii 
 to have been in a measure ignored or violated, and that without the 
 excuse of a real or even apparent necessity. By examining into the 
 nature of the vowel-sounds it will be found that they are susceptible 
 of three different and distinct classifications ; namely, into long and 
 short vowels, palatals and labials, and into open and close, vowels. 
 Now, in the old vowel-scale the first two of these classifications are 
 very appropriately and fully shown ; the first by employing heavy 
 signs for long, and light signs for short vowels ; and the second, by 
 writing the palatals with dot-signs, and the labials with dashes. But 
 the third, and the most important classification practically, and the 
 one that should have been indicated by the marked distinction of dif- 
 ference of position, is entirely overlooked. In the new vowel-scale 
 this glaring defect is removed, and the consistency and harmony of the 
 system completely restored. Still, if the innovation had not carried 
 along with it great practical benefit, as well as the mere mental satis- 
 faction of being right in principle, I should probably never have felt 
 justified in making it. Indeed; it was the practical gain to be derived 
 from the change which first attracted my attention. But I have found 
 In this instance, as on many other occasions while preparing this work, 
 that it was impossible to separate principle from practice, and that the 
 more implicitly I obeyed general and fundamental rules, and the more 
 closely I adhered to correct principles, rejecting as much as possible 
 all expedients and compromises, the less difficulty I had with my 
 practice. 
 
 In the early part of my experience as a shorthand reporter, some 
 eight or nine years ago, I found, and I had also heard it remarked 
 by others, that in swift writing a great deal of uncertainty was 
 oftentimes caused by the indistinctness of the tick or dash word-signs, 
 arising from the liability, on the one hand, of mistaking them for half- 
 length signs, and on the other, of confounding them with the dot word- 
 signa. This difficulty I conceived the idea of remedying, by substi- 
 tuting for these ticks, full-length stem signs, which would not only 
 offer the great advantage of being always distinct, but, as a compen- 
 sation for loss of brevity owing to the increased length, and sometimes 
 the curvature of the new signs, would furnish much greater facility in 
 phrase writing, from the application to them of the various principles 
 of abbreviation and consonant modification, which was not possible 
 with the tick-signs. But at the very outset of my attempt 1 encoun- 
 tered ii serious obstacle, and one which for a time seemed insurmount- 
 able. I found that as the vowels were then arranged it would ba 
 imDOSsible to effect anything but a partial reform in this respect, ex 
 
PEEFACE. VH 
 
 cept by throwing a great many words out of their proper positions^ 
 and thus, while remoring one defect, introduce or augment anothei 
 perhaps equally undesirable. However, after a long series of experi- 
 ments, in which Mr. Charles E. Wilbour gave me very valuable as- 
 sistance, I discovered that by reversing the order of the dot-vowela 
 of the old scale, the difficulty of position would also disappear ; and I 
 immediately adopted the new scale, introduced the proposed change in 
 regard to tlie word signs, and have continued to use these improve- 
 ments ever since. 
 
 There are also other advantages that have arisen from the use of tho 
 new scale, one of the most important and practical of which is the in- 
 creased legibility it gives to Phonography. Formerly, when broad, 
 open vowels were paired with close ones, if by accident, in writing 
 vocalized Phonography, a first-place vowel was a sort of " neutral," 
 that is, neither a proper dot nor a proper dash, we had to choose be- 
 tween the dissimilar sounds e and aw, — ^the one not being at all sug- 
 gestive of the other. In the new scale we have to choose between ah 
 and aw, two sounds so similar that the one would, in all probability, 
 immediately suggest the other. Thus, an occasional stumbling in the 
 reading of phonographic writing, owing to uncertainty as to the in- 
 tended character or length of a vowel-sign, is rendered much less 
 likely to occur in the new scale than in the old. It is also properly 
 claimed by the advocates of the new scale that it is an improvement 
 upon the old one, because in practice it renders the process of writing 
 the vowel-signs much briefer and more simple than it was before. 
 For instance, as the short vowel a (the sound of a in maS) is much 
 oftener used than the vowel i (the sound of i in pin) as the initial 
 sound of words, and as it is the common practice of phonographers, 
 although in deviation from the general rule, to write the signs of 
 initial vowels before commeucing to write the consonant outhne, it 
 follows that a is more conveniently, as well as most appropriately, 
 written in the first position. Again, the sound t is best written in 
 the third position, because that vowel (which is often represented in 
 the common spelling by the letter y) occurs much more frequently 
 than any other at the end of words, and immediately preceding the 
 last consonant or syllable of a word. By writing first according to the 
 old scale, and then according to the new, such words as pity, eity, At- 
 lantic, ability, aptly, fossil, many, etc., the gain will be very apparent. 
 Then, too, the third position for final ? comes more easily to the 
 writer's hand than does the first, because there is an analogy between 
 the position which it now occupies in a phonographic outline, and its 
 position in the common spelling of the word, — being in both cases at 
 the end. 
 
Till PREFACE. 
 
 The greatest practical benefit, however, that comes from the x\m 
 of the new arrangement of the vowels, is the increased leglhilHy it 
 gives to unvocalized Phonography, by more generally throwing words 
 that contain the same or similar consonants into different positions. 
 The reason of this is, that as in the case of such words the consonants 
 cease to be a means of distinction, there is a natural tendency to make 
 It by a marked difference between the sounds of the vowels, and espe- 
 cially those upon which the accent falls ; and, hence, as in the new 
 scale those vowels that differ most in sound are represented by signs 
 that differ most in position, and as words are written in the position 
 ■of their accented vowels, it follows that words of similar outlines 
 will be more likely to take positions distinct from each other, than 
 if the old scale were used. It was this very peculiarity of the new 
 scale that so readily and completely solved the problem — of which 
 mention has already been made— of replacing the tick-signs by simple 
 stems, without detriment to the system. 
 
 I have also rejected from general use the dot-sign for h and the 
 brief signs for w and y and a following vowel. In the early editions 
 of Phonography, before w and y were considered as consonants, no 
 stems were appropriated to represent them, and hence from necessity 
 they were written with signs detached from the skeleton of the word. 
 And even after these. sounds were placed on a footing with the other 
 consonants in respect to having stem-signs, it still remained neces- 
 sary to retain the old signs in certain classes of words, because the 
 modifications of the new stems were arbitrarily used for other pur- 
 poses ; as, for instance, the half-lengths of the signs for w and y to 
 represent respectively rd and Id, instead of wt and yt. Now, however, 
 as the stems which are provided for these sounds, may be modified in 
 the same manner and to the same extent as any other consonant- 
 sign, the old brief signs are not only useless, but, if employed, ser\'e 
 to perpetuate irregular and inconsistent outlines, and thus to unneces- 
 sarily complicate the system. The rejection of the detached signs for 
 w and 2/ has enabled me, too, to construct a new and much more scientific 
 scheme for representing the diphthongs and double vowels than has 
 heretofore been possible. I have also, for the sake of convenience, 
 adopted the plan which prevails with the English phoneticians, of 
 never using the diphthong ew at the commencement of words, but 
 treating the initial element as a consonant, and representing it by 
 the sign yay ; and, on the other hand, of seldom or never nsiug 
 the sign yay in the middle of words, a vowel-sign being substi- 
 tuted. This somewhat arbitrary rule has been adopted because it is 
 often difficult to decide whether a 1/ or J sound is the one used ; and 
 because uniformity of writing among phonographers is even mora 
 
PEEFACE. IX 
 
 desirable than absolute accuTaoy of representation in each particular 
 case that may arise. I have taken great pains to fully classify the 
 words given in the Writing Exercises, so that the learner, from the 
 heading of each section, will be able to determine readily the outline 
 of every word in it. These exercises will also be found to be very full, 
 containing in fact nearly all the words of the language ; so that while 
 the hasty learner is at liberty to make omissions at his pleasure, the 
 wants of those who wish to be more thorough are amply provided for. 
 I ought, too, in justice to say, that had I not had the old Word Books 
 of Andrews & Boyle to assist me, I never would have had the time or 
 inclination to do this part of the work. 
 
 It has been a common fault with writers of stenographic books, from 
 the beginning of shorthand down to the present day, to plagiarize to 
 an unlimited extent from other authors," trusting no doubt to the 
 almost universal ignorance of the public in regard to the art, or to 
 its mystery, to screen their wholesale piracies from detection. To the 
 honor of authors of phonographic works, however, it should be said, 
 that they have very generally been exceptions to this rule. In emula- 
 tion of the more honorable of these writers, and also by way of a per- 
 sonal acknowledgment on my part to those who have so kindly and 
 freely assisted me in preparing this work, I propose, as brieiJy as pos- 
 sible, to give the credit of the more important changes now intro- 
 duced, to whom it rightfully belongs. 
 
 There is probably no one phonographer who has contributed more 
 to the later improvements of Phonography than Mr. Wilbour. It was 
 he, I believe, who first suggested the plan of distinguishing on all curves 
 the i-hook from the r-hook by making the former large and the latter 
 small ; thus removing the necessity for the inconsistency of changing 
 the forms of/, v,th, dh, m, andn, when ther-hook was attached, and of 
 making exceptions to the r and Z-hook principle, of the letters s, z, I, ng, 
 n, m, h, w, y, and downward and upward r. We are also indebted to 
 him tor the ter-hook ; and to his experiments and practice is due in 
 great measure the' high degree of perfection to which the art of phrase- 
 writing has now been brought. To Mr. J. A. MacLauchlan, whose in- 
 vestigations respecting the vowels, and the best modes of representing 
 them, have been very extensive, belongs the credit of having first sug- 
 gested the idea of arranging and representing the group-vowels sub- 
 stantially as I have done in my double-vowel schemes. The nomen- 
 clature that I have adopted is the same as that given by Mr. Pitman 
 in the Seventh Edition of his Manual, with a few slight changes adapt- 
 ing it to the recent alterations of the system. The yay and way hooks 
 were first suggested by myself. I take this opportunity, too, of ex ■ 
 pressing my obligations to the reporters of New York generally for tha 
 
 1* ■ 
 
X PEEFACE. 
 
 interest they have manifested in this work, and for the encou; af. emenl 
 they have so constantly extended to me during its preparation ; and 
 especially should I thank Mr. Andrew Devine, whom I have often 
 consulted on doubtful points, and whose reliable judgment has been 
 of very great service to me. The engraving of the illustrations in the 
 text and of the Beading Exercises was done by the skillful hand of Mr. 
 Chauncey B. Thome, of Skaneateles, N. T. ; and for neatness, clear- 
 ness, and beauty, I confidently assert that this work has never been 
 equaled by any other phonographic engraver. And when we considei 
 that the whole of it was done over three hundred miles away from thi 
 author, its entire freedom from errors and mistakes is almost marvel 
 ous. To the carefulness and attention of the reader of the proofs of 
 this work, Mr. Stephen Jenkins, is due in great measure the high de- 
 gree of accuracy of .the letter-press matter. 
 
 While preparing this work, I have consulted all the phonographic 
 instruction books, and most of the phonographic periodicals, that have 
 been published from time to time in this country and in England, as 
 well as quite a number of works on other systems of stenography ; also 
 many phonetic works, including those of Mr. A. J. ElUs, and Dr. La- 
 tham's "Hand-Book of the English Language.'" I have, however, 
 derived by far the most assistance from the old, but very philosophic, 
 works of Andrews and Boyle. A new, uncompleted work, by Mr. A. 
 J. Marsh of San Francisco, shows, in many respects, a keen percep- 
 tion of what is required by learners of Phonography, although it does 
 not introduce any extensive reforms of the system. From it I bor- 
 rowed the rule at section 120. But I had written section 103 almost 
 in its exact words, months before I ever saw Mr. Marsh's work, which 
 contains the same new and useful rule. 
 
 At the time sections 51, 52, 53, and 91 were written and stereotyped, 
 I had not examined the new (1864) edition of Webster's Unabridged 
 Dictionary. Had I done so I should have found that my own conclu- 
 sions as to the nature of the elements of the diphthong ew had been 
 anticipated in the introduction to that work, and I also should not 
 have written section 91 as it now stands. Indeed, when I consider how 
 deficient most lexicographers have been in knowledge of the science of 
 Phonetics, and that not one single dictionary (previous editions of Web- 
 ster's included) had been up with the times in this respect, I am do 
 lighted to find that this new edition is an exception, and that it ib 
 everything the most exact and thorough phonetician could desire. 
 
 J. E. M. 
 No. 41 Park Row, New Tobk, 
 September, 1S66. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Preface 3 
 
 In TEODUCTION 15 
 
 Explanation of Tekms ; 17 
 
 Table of Consonants 18 
 
 SIMPLE CONSONANT SIGNS. 
 Consonant Defined— Number of Consonants— Remarks on the Table of Conso- 
 nants — Classification of tlie Consonants — Quality of Cotisonauts — ^Formation 
 of Consonant-Sounds— Origin of the Consonant-Signs— Analogy in the Ap- 
 propriation of the Signs — Mnemonic Assistance in Learning the Phono- 
 graphs Page 19-23 
 
 OP THE MANNER OF WRITING THE CONSONANT SIGNS. 
 Exceptions — Chay and Eee distinguished — ^Hints to the Beginner — Size of the 
 Phonographs — Shading of the Heavy Signs, etc.— Phonographic Speed— Exer- 
 cises to he Read as well as Written at-26 
 
 SIMPLE VOWELS. 
 Definition — ^Number of Vowel-Sounds — ^Method of Vocalization — ^Vowel- 
 Scale — Names of the Vowels — Reckoning of Vowel-Po^itions — Vocaliza- 
 tion OF Single Consonant-Stems— Consonant Always Written First- 
 Method of Reading Single Vocalized Consonant-St-ems — Manner of Writing 
 the Vowel-Signs- The Vowel-Scale not Perfectly Phonetic— Two Sounds 
 Sometimes Represented by One Sign 26-38 
 
 DIPHTHONGS. 
 Definition— Number of Diphthongs — Analysis of the Diphthongs — Remarks on 
 the Diphthong BW— Table of Diphthongs- Direction of the Diphthong- 
 Signs Never Changed— Two Vowels Concurring— Diphthongs Joined to Con- 
 sonants 30-32 
 
 CONSONANT POSITIONS. 
 Position of Hobizontal Stems — Position of Pekpendiciilae and Inclined 
 Stems 32 
 
 JOINING THE CONSONANT STEMS. 
 Consonant-Stems Repeated — Mode of Joining Certain Stems — Order of Reading 
 Consonant-Stems .33 
 
 METHOD OF WRITING VOWELS BETWEEN CONSONANT SIGNS. 
 
 Rule— Exceptions 34 
 
 POSITION OF WORDS. 
 When a Word is Written in Position— Examples— Mental and Manual Process in 
 Writing Phonography 34. 3S 
 
Xil TABLE OF OOlTrEin'S. 
 
 PHONOGEAPHIC ANALYSIS. 
 
 General Rule— The Ear Misled by the Eye— Words Spelled ALke hut Pro 
 nounoed Differently— Words Pronounced Alike hut Spelled Differently— 
 Caution respecting CH, SH, TH, and NG— W and T at the End i)f Syllahlea— 
 Double Consonant-Sounds Rare— Disparity in Number Between. Letters and 
 Sounds— C, Q, and X— N Before the' Sounds of Kay and Gay— Silent Letters 
 Omitted— Pinal E generally Silent— EW Not Used after E— Unaccented Vow- 
 els : General Eule— Exceptions— Phonographio Spelling ...."... Page 35-39 
 
 ESS AND ZEE CBKCLE. 
 Name of the Ess-Circle— Method of Joining the Circle to Consonant-Stcms— 
 Names of the Ess-Circle Compoundo— Same Sign Used for Ess and Zee— Ess 
 and Zee Distinguished— Method of Wkiting the Cibole Between two 
 Consonant-Stems— Short Eule— Vocalization op Stems with Ciecles At- 
 tached— Order of Writing— Order of Reading- Caution : The Circle Joined 
 to Up-Stroke Stems— Vocalization when the Gibole Occup^s in the Mid- 
 dle OP A Word- Uses of the Circle— Exceptions— When the Stem-Sign 
 should he Used Instead of the Ckcle 4(W3 
 
 THE LARGE CIRCLE. 
 Name and Use of the Large Circle— The Large Circle Joined to Consonant-Stems 
 — Vocalization op Stems with the Large Circle Attached — ^Vocalization 
 of the Large Circle— Ess and Zee Sounds Distinguished— Loops for ST OB 
 ZD, AND STR— Small Loop, ST or ZD— Large Loop, STR— Names of the 
 Loops — ^Vocalization of Stems with Loops Attached — Small Loop Shaded 
 for ZD— The Small Circle Addtd to SIS, ST, and STR 43-45 
 
 RULES FOE THE USE OF ISH, SHEE, EL, LEE, ER, AOT) REE. 
 Uses of Isli— Uses of Shee— Either Ish or Shee— Uses of El— Uses of Lee— Either 
 El or Lee— Uses of Er— Uses of Eee— Either Er or Eee 45-47 
 
 GROUP CONSONANTS Alffl) THBIK SIGNS— INITIAL HOOKS. 
 
 The Liquids L and E— The El-Hooks — The Er-Hooks— Names of the El and Er 
 Hook Combinations— Caution— Mnemonic Assistance in Learning the El and 
 Br Hook Signs^VooALizATioN op Double Consonant-Signs — Order of 
 Eeading Vocalized Double Consonant-Signs — Uses of the El and Er Hook 
 Signs — E\ or Er Hook Signs Joined to Preceding Stems — Exception, Eel — 
 Special Vocalization — Two Forms for SL, SR, ZL, ZR — Their Uses at 
 the Commencement of Words — The Ess-Circle Prefixed to the El and Er 
 Hook Signs— The Circles and ST Loop Prefixed to the Straight Er-Hook 
 Signs— Order of Eeading VociUized Skel and Sker Signs— The Way Hook 
 —The Yay Hook— Hook por En, In, or Un— Name and Use of the Initial 
 En-Hook 47—63 
 
 FINAL HOOK AND OTHEE MODIFICATIONS. 
 
 Ep and Veb Hooks- Names of the Ef-Hook Compounds— Vocalization— Eule for 
 Writing— Eule for Eeading— Ef and Vee Distinguished— Ef and Vee Hook on 
 Curves— BN-HooK-Names of the En-Hook Compounds — Vocalization — When 
 an Ef or En Hook should Not be Used— Shdn Hooks— Names of the Shnn- 
 Hook Compounds— Vocolizatlon—Shen Used Instead of Shun — Small Hook for 
 Shun— Its Name— Hook por TE, DE, or DHE— Names of the Tr-Hook and iti 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. Xlll 
 
 Compounds— Ter and Der Distingaished— Special Vocalization of the Ter-Hool; 
 — Circles and Loops At)DED to the "Penal Hook Signs — Ess-Circle Added 
 to tlie Ef, Shim, Ter, and Curved En-Hook Signs— Circles and Loops Added 
 to the Straight En-Hook Signs — Names of the Combinations of Stems, Final 
 Hooks, and Circles or Loops — Caution ; The En-Hook Circles Seldom Used 
 in the Middle of Words— Ess-Circle Used for Ens — The Ess-Circle and Ishun 
 Added to the Eu-Hook Circles and Loops— The Ess-Circle Added to Ishun— 
 Final Hooks Used in the Middle of Words— Circle Inside of Hooks— Length- 
 ENiNQ — Double-Length Curved Sign^Names of Double-Length Curves — 
 Positions of Lengthened Stems — Positions of Horizontal Stems — Positions 
 of Downward Lengthened Curves — Positions of Upward Lengthened Curves 
 — ^Vocalization of Lengthened Curves— Final Hooks Eead Before the Added 
 Consonants— Pinal Circle or Loop to be Read After the Added Consonants 
 — Special Vocalization — ^Positions op Double-Length Straight Stems- 
 Halving — Half-Length Stems- Names of the Half-Length Signs— Caution : 
 Halving of Stems with Final Circles or Loops Attached— Positions or Half- 
 Length Stems— Horizontal Stems— Perpendicular and Inclined Stems— Vo- 
 calized Half-Length Signs — Order of Reading — Dee and Tee Distinguished^ 
 Special Remarks upon the Half-Lengths — Improper Joinings — Sht After 
 Ef or Vee — Straight Half-Lengths in Same Direction Not Allowed — Syllables 
 Ted and Ded — Half-Lengths Disjoined — ^Est Struck Upward — Medial Vowel 
 After Half-Length — Stem-Signs for Tee or Dee Before a Final Vowel — ^Excep- 
 tion : Special License — Ambiguous Outlines, How Avoided — Half-Length Ree 
 — Two Vowels before Final Tee or Dee— Final Dee Preceded by El, Ree, or 
 En, etc.— Upward and Downward Stems Halved Page 53-63 
 
 GROUP VOWELS AND THEIR SIGNS— IMPROPER DIPHTHONGS. 
 General Remarks — Coalescence of the Double- Vowels — Composition of the 
 Double-Vowels— Remarks on the Double-Vowel Signs— Table of Double- 
 Vowel Signs- Simple Signs Instead of Double Allowable — Treble Vowel. 
 Signs — Same Sign Used for Other Double or Treble Vowels — ^License as to 
 Direction of the Group-Vowel Signs 64r-6C 
 
 THE ASPIEATB HAT, AND NOMINAL CONSONANT. 
 Dot-Signs— Tick-Signs 67 
 
 STBNOTYPT. 
 
 Consonants — 'Shee,' *Lee,' 'Re.' and 'Ess' — Stenotypes of Stems and of Cir- 
 cles, Hooks, etc., Distinguished — Stenotypes of Shaded Circles, etc. — Steno- 
 types of Outlines Containing- More than One Stem— Ess-Circle Between 
 Stems— Vowels 67-TO 
 
 GENERAL REMARKS ON OUTLINES OF WORDS. 
 
 SpECLiL DiEEOTiONS AS TO CERTAIN OUTLINES — Initial Letters— Final Syllables 
 _' -Ly'— ' -Ey'— ' -Ty'— ' In' and ' On'—' -Ture'— The Past Tense 70-73 
 
 ABBREVIATION. 
 
 Omission of Vowels— Vowels to be Omitted— Vow els to be Inserted- Words 
 Distinguished bt Difference of Outline, Position, etc. — Words Com- 
 mencing with * II,' 'Im,' 'In,' 'Ir,' 'Un,' 'En' — List of Words Distingniehed 
 by Difference of Outline, Position, or Vocalization— Omission of Conso- 
 nants— Word-Signs— Ijist of Word-Signs—' Now' and ' New'— Oontrao. 
 
XIV TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 TioKS— Prefixes and Suffixes— Prefixes— Sufflxee— Omission of SliglitlyBnm 
 ciated Consonants— Arbitrary Contractions— Omission of Final Syllables- 
 Omission of Hooks— Exceptions— List of Word-Signs and Contractions— 
 Besaiies on the JVobd-Signs and Contkactions— Same Sign for Present 
 and Past Tenses— The Plural of Nouns— The Possessive Case of Nouns- 
 —Third Person Singular of Verbs— Same Sign for Adjective and Ad- 
 verb Page 74-97 
 
 PHEASBOGKAPHT. 
 Two Kinds of Phrases— Cibcles aitd Loops — 'As,' 'Has,' 'Is,' 'His,' or 'Ua' 
 Added by the Ess-Circle—' To,' ' It,' or ' The' Added by Changing the Circle 
 to a Small Loop—' There,' or ' Their' Added by Changing the Circle to a 
 Large Loop— The Hooks— ' All,' or 'Will' Added by the El-Hook— ' Are,' 
 'Our,' or 'Or' Added by the Er-Hook— ' We,' 'Were,' 'Would,' or 'What' 
 Added by the Way-Hook—' Tou,' ' Tour,' or ' Tear' Added by the Yay-Hook 
 — ' In' Added by the In-Hook— ' Have,' ' Of,' or ' If Added by the Ef-Hook— 
 'And,' "An,' ' Own,' ' One,' ' Been,' or ' Than' Added by the En-Hook— ' There,' 
 ' Their,' or ' Other' Added by the Ter-Hook, and by Lengthening — ' The,' ' It,' 
 or ' To' Added by Halving — ' Not' Added by the En-Hook and Halving Prin- 
 ciple—Combination of Foregoing Principles — Position of Phrase-Signs, 
 ETC. — ^Exceptions — ^Position of the Signs for ' Mr.,' ' Mrs.,' and ' Miss' — Words 
 Written by an Initial and Final Modification of the Preceding Stem— Certain 
 Words Distinguished— ' Ever' and ' Have' Distinguished— Ticks for T 'A,' 
 ' An,' and ' And'— Hooks on the Ticks—' I," A,' etc.. When Standing Alone or 
 Followed by Com, Con, etc.— Tick for ' The'— Joining of Ticks with Circles, 
 etc.- Stenotypes of the Ticks—' -Ing The' and ' -Ing A'— Ehles for Phease- 
 Writing— General Eule — Special Eules— Caution— Omission of Consonants 
 IN PHEASE-WRiTrNG— Omission of Words-' Have' Omitted — 'Of Omitted 
 —'To' Omitted— 'From— To' Omitted— ' And' Omitted— Hep eated or Similar 
 Words in Phrases — Phrase Contractions — Special Phrase and Word 
 Contractions 98-109 
 
 PUNCTUATION AND OTHEE MAEKS. 
 
 General Eemark^ on PuKOTnATioN— The Period— Exclamation and Interro- 
 gation Points— Parenthesis and Brackets— Dash — Accent— Emphasis — 
 Capitals— Initials of Proper Names, etc.- Consonant Initials — Cau- 
 tion—Vowel Initials— Initials of Titles— Numbeks, etc.— Phonographic 
 ^ig«eB 110-U3 
 
 Forms Modified by Motion 114 
 
 ON PEEPAEDSTG COPT AND EEADINQ PEOOF. 
 Preparation of Copt— Proof-Eeading— Specimen of a Corrected Proof- 
 Sheet— Specimen on Opposite Page Corrected— The Crowning of Pe- 
 tff'il' 115-119 
 
 EEPOETING. 
 General Ebmarks- Method of Practice— Huw to Learn the Word-Signs and 
 Contractions- Materials Used in Writing Phonography— Law Ebpobting— 
 Form of Law Eeports— Forms- The Title Page, Form 1— The Title Page 
 Form !^-The Title Pago, Form 8— The Title Page, Form 4— The Trial— On 
 Taking Notes in Law Reporting— Name of Witness, etc.— Question and 
 Answer Distinguished— Passages Marked for Correction— Cases Cited— Hints 
 on Transcriblug— Newspaper REPoaTiNa— Appendix 120-137 
 
INTKODUCTION. 
 
 Is order to write shorthand expertly, one must possess a thorough 
 and familiar knowledge of the principles and rules of the art, which 
 is to be attained by study, and a hand trained to accuracy and brought 
 to a high state of discipline by a long and thorough course of practice 
 in writing. Each of these requirements is of the highest impprtance, 
 as no amount of excellence in one will make up for defects in the 
 other. 
 
 There are two radically different modes of pursuing the study of 
 Phonography, either of which may be adopted at the option of the 
 learner. One plan is to commence by learning to read it only, so as to 
 be able to decipher the outlines with considerable facility before any 
 attempt is made to write it at all ; and the other, to learn to both read 
 and write it at the same time. With the first plan the learner should 
 confine himself, the first time he goes through the book, to reading 
 the engraved exercises (commencing on page 205), in connection with 
 the study of the rules given in the text ; and then the writing exer- 
 cises (commencing on page 139) may be afterward taken up in the same 
 manner. If the learner chooses the second plan, he should commence 
 both kinds of exercises at once, and alternate the reading lessons wi;h 
 the pen exercises as he goes along. This latter metJhod is the one 
 usually adopted by learners, and is probably to be preferred where they 
 can command their time so as to be tolerably regular in their practice ; 
 but where business or other engagements interfere to prevent such a 
 proreoution of the study, the former method is better, because, although 
 it may not perhaps he quite so short a course as the other, yet it is 
 more apt to be attended with final success, as it divests the study of 
 much of its drudgery, making it indeed a very agreeable recreation for 
 a leisure hour. This mode also has peculiar advantages for lawyers, aa 
 after they have learned to read Phonography they may employ pho- 
 nographers to take notes which they can use immediately, it not being 
 necessary, of course, for their own use to wait for, or to be at the ex- 
 pense of, transcribing. Thus, in the trial of a long cause, a couuiel 
 who could read Phonography, even though he were not able to write 
 it, might take the phonographic minutes at the adjournment, and so 
 have an opportunity to examine each day's proceedings before going 
 
XVI INTKODI CTION. 
 
 on with the next, and thereby secure benefits that are unattainabla 
 when the reporter is required to make a longhand transcript before hia 
 notes can be of any use. This plan is not open to the objection that 
 one shorthand writer has difficulty in reading the notes of another, 
 because as the lawyer who is to read the report is thoroughly familiar 
 with the subject, and has listened to every word contained in it, he 
 will be even less likely than the writer to have trouble in deciphering. 
 The reporter, however, sliould always write a legible Phonography, 
 and should adhere strictly to the system as given in this book, and 
 not have gleaned anything from other authors. 
 
 It is a common habit with phonographers to be constantly suggest- 
 ing changes and alleged improvements to learners for their adoption ; 
 and it is the misfortune of learners that they are apt to listen to them, 
 as they would be much more likely to excel in speed if, after having 
 selected some approved instruction-book, they adhered strictly to the 
 system as taught in it. This work is intended for beginners ; and those 
 phonographers that have already attained considerable proficiency in 
 writing according to some other author, are not recommended to 
 change, lest their loss in speed should more than counterbalance any 
 gain from the intrinsic improvement of the system. 
 
 In the arrangement of this work, it has been the aim of the author 
 to present the lessons substantially in the order that would be adopted 
 by a good teacher, so that those learners who have not the advantage 
 of any guide except the book, will find no difficulty in this respect. A 
 few additional hints, distinguishing the most from the least essential 
 parts, however, may be of use to some in the first part of their course. 
 
 HINTS TO THE LEAKNER. 
 
 Bead over carefully sections 1 to 18. Commit to memory sections 
 20 to 23. Read over sections 25 to 30. Learn the Table of Conso- 
 nants, on page 18. Read- over sections 31 to 44 ; learu the Vowel 
 Scale, and commit to memory sections 41 to 43. Read, on page 205, 
 the fifth, sixth, and seventh lines. Commit to memory sections 61 
 and 62. Read the last six lines of page 206. Read over sections 48 
 to 68, and learn the Table of Diphthongs. Read, on page 207, the 
 thirteenth and fourteenth lines. Write a portion or all of the words 
 u section 428, on page 139. Read sections 63 to 69, and commit to 
 memory sections 64 and 65. Spell all the compounds in Exercise II., 
 commencing on page 205. "Write the outlines indicated in section 
 430. Read over sections 70 to 73. Commit to memory the rules in 
 sections 70 and 72 Read page 207. Write section 431, or a portion 
 of it. These suggestions are sufficient to show the learner how to 
 proceed with the remaining lessons. 
 
EXPLAJSTATION OF TEEMS. XVII 
 
 At section 10 the consonants are arranged to correspond with, the 
 new vowel-scale ; but the reverse of that arrangement, as here given 
 is thought, in some respects, to be preferable. 
 
 Front-Montli. 
 
 Middle-Month. 
 
 
 Back-Month. 
 
 \ 
 
 
 1 
 
 / 
 
 . 
 
 \ 
 
 
 1 
 
 / 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ( 
 
 ) 
 
 
 J 
 
 *^ 
 
 ( 
 
 ) 
 
 
 J 
 
 r -\ 
 
 r 
 
 EXPLANATION OF TERMS. 
 
 Pho-net'ics, Pho-nol'o-gy, or Phon'ios (from (pwvi), a soand, torn). 
 The science which treats of the different sounds of the human voice 
 and their modifications. The style of spelling in accordance with this 
 science is called Phonbtio ; the common style, such as is used in this 
 book, being called Komanic, because the alphabet employed was de- 
 rived from that which was used by the Eomans. 
 
 Pho-not'y-pt (from (pwv^, and I'uifog, a type). The art of repre- 
 senting sounds by distinct characters or types ; also, the style of 
 printing in accordance with this art. 
 
 Pho'no-ttpe. a type or character indicating a sound or modificar 
 tion of sound, used in phonotypic printing.- 
 
 Pho-nog'ra-pht (from ipuvTj, and ypaipsiv, to iimte). A method of 
 writing in which each sound has a distinct letter or character ; also, » 
 system of shorthand invented by Isaac Pitman. 
 
 Pho'no-geaph. a type or character for representing a sound ; a 
 character used in Phonography. 
 
 Pho-no-ge,aph'ic. Relating to Phonography. 
 
 Ste-itog'ea-pht (from (fTSVog, narrow, close, and ypa(p6iv). The art 
 of writing by means of brief signs which represent single sounds, 
 groups of sounds, whole words, or groups of words. 
 
 NoiJi.— Stenography is a generic term, embracing all systems of short- 
 hand or brief writing, Phonography included ; while Phonography is a 
 specific name for a single system. 
 
TABLE OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 Phoiwgraplu 
 
 Sound represented hy the Phonograph, 
 
 "1 
 
 / 
 / I 
 
 \- 
 \ 
 
 J 
 J 
 ) 
 ) 
 ( 
 ( 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 kay 
 
 gay 
 
 tee 
 
 dee 
 
 chay 
 
 jay 
 
 pee 
 
 bee 
 
 iah, shee 
 
 in can, 
 
 and 
 
 ed 
 
 ed 
 
 tch 
 
 9 
 
 PP 
 
 hh 
 
 s 
 
 k in Hit. 
 g " gOt- 
 
 looko^, 
 
 loverf, 
 
 maidi, 
 
 gem, 
 
 co^jper, 
 
 ebb, 
 
 sure, 
 
 asiure, 
 
 icy, 
 
 zee 
 
 s 
 
 
 was, 
 
 ith 
 
 a 
 
 " 
 
 e 
 
 dhee 
 
 the 
 
 (( 
 
 brea^i 
 
 ef 
 
 ph 
 
 (t 
 
 ^Aase, 
 
 vee 
 
 f 
 
 41 
 
 of. 
 
 ing 
 
 n 
 
 H 
 
 finger. 
 
 en 
 
 kn 
 
 H 
 
 foiow. 
 
 em 
 
 nib 
 
 it 
 
 lamft, 
 
 el, lee 
 
 In 
 
 (t 
 
 ki2n, 
 
 er 
 
 rr 
 
 u 
 
 burr. 
 
 ree 
 
 WT 
 
 (( 
 
 write, 
 
 hay 
 
 wh 
 
 li 
 
 loAole, 
 
 yay 
 
 e 
 
 14 
 
 euchre, 
 
 way 
 
 u 
 
 it 
 
 persuac 
 
 t 
 
 d 
 
 eh 
 
 3 
 
 P 
 
 b 
 
 ih 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 z 
 
 th 
 
 Vi 
 
 f 
 
 V 
 
 «g 
 n 
 m 
 I 
 r 
 r 
 h 
 
 " feme. 
 
 " dame. 
 
 " cAest. 
 
 " yest. 
 
 " J'ay. 
 
 " iay. 
 
 " sAun. 
 
 " vision. 
 
 " seal. 
 
 " zeal. 
 
 " ttigh. 
 
 " %. 
 
 " /an. 
 
 " can, 
 
 " Binyor, 
 
 " no. 
 
 " ha»n. 
 
 " fa.y. 
 
 " fur. 
 
 " right. 
 
 " Aole. 
 
 " you. 
 
 " tcade. 
 
THE 
 
 COMPLETE PHONOGRAPHER. 
 
 GENEKAI BEMABK3. — PHONOGRAPHY DEFINED. 
 
 % 1. Phonooraphy, in the widest sense of the word, is the art of ex- 
 pressing the sounds of a language by characters or symbols, one character 
 being appropriated exclusively to each sound. As usually understood, 
 however, the term is applied to the system of Phonetic Short-hand, 
 invented by Isaac Pitman, of Bath, England. 
 
 CONSONANTS PRESENTED FIRST. 
 
 § 2. In writing according to the common long-hand method, all the 
 letters of a word, both consonants and vowels, are written one after 
 another, in the order in which they are pronounced. In writing pho- 
 nographically this is not the case, but, as will be more fully explained 
 hereafter, the consonant-signs and vowel-signs are wiitten separately, 
 the consonant-signs being first written, and the vowel-signs afterward 
 placed to them. Hence the more natural order of presentation, and 
 the one adopted in this book, is to treat of the consonajits first, and 
 afterward of the vowels. 
 
 SIMPLE CONSONANT SIGNS. 
 
 CONSONANT DEFINED. 
 
 § 8. A consonant is a sound made by either a complete or a partial 
 contact of the organs of speech obstructing the sounding breath, in 
 some degree varying from an entire break or stoppage of it, as ^ in 
 rap, b in rob, etc., to a simple roughness or aspiration impressed upon 
 a vowel' sound, as h in Jimt, hate. 
 
 NOMBER OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 § 4. In the English language there are twenty-two simple consonant 
 sounds. This number does not include ch and J, which are considered 
 compounds, as they are susceptible of being analyzed into simpler ele- 
 ments ; ch Boeming to be composed of t and sh, andj of d and zh. 
 
20 THE COMPLETE PHONOGKAPHEE. 
 
 EEMABKS ON THE TABLE or OONSONAUTS. 
 
 § 5. The table on page 18 exhibits all the characters used in Phonog- 
 raphy to represent each and every simple consonant sound in our lan- 
 guage, as well as the double sounds of ch a,ndj. The first column con- 
 tains the phonographic signs or letters, called phmographa ; the sec- 
 ond, their names; and the third column furnishes examples of the 
 powefr of each phonograph in the common spelling. In every case but 
 one, two words are given ; the first in an unphondw or farced orthograr 
 phy, tending more to conceal than to indicate the true consonant 
 sound, which must always be determined before it can be expressed 
 by its proper phonographic sign ; while in the second the orthogra- 
 phy is more natural, and the consonant sound less dif&cult to be 
 ascertained. 
 
 § 6. The object in thus presenting the irregular example first is to 
 impress on the learner's mind at the very outset, the fact that the 
 common spelling of words is no reliable guide to the phonographic ; for 
 the sooner he learns not to associate the phonographic signs with the 
 letters of the common alphabet, the more rapid will be his progress. 
 
 § 7. If the attention be again directed to the column of phono- 
 graphs in the table, it will be observed that the first sixteen are ar- 
 ranged in pairs, one of each pair being a thin or light line, and the other 
 a corresponding thick or heavy line. The reason of this arrangement is 
 Important, and should be thoroughly understood. By comparing the 
 sounds of any two signs thus classed together, it will be found that 
 one is but a slight modification of the other ; that they are produced 
 at the same point and by the same contact of the organs of speech in 
 almost precisely the same manner, the only difference being that, in 
 one case, the action of the organs is accompanied by a slight sound — • 
 a sound of the breath simply, and in the other, the same action is ac- 
 companied by a partially suppressed vocal sound. This undertone or 
 sub-vocal constitutes the only difference between the words kiU and 
 giU, tame and dame, chest a,nd Jest, pay and bay, shun and -sion in vision, seal 
 and aeal, thigh and thy, and/an and van, given in the last column of ex- 
 
 § 8. To follow nature, therefore, and preserve a correspondence be 
 tween signs and sounds, and to show their resemblance as well as 
 difference, the Ught or breaih consonants are represented by light or thin 
 lines, and their corresponding heavy sounds by the same lines shaded 
 Thus, written in Phonography, gilt would differ from kilt, or damt 
 from tame, etc. , only in the heavier shading of their initial signs gay, 
 dee, etc. 
 
 § 9. None of the remaining consonants in the table have any proper 
 
SIMPLE CONSONANT-SIGNS. 21 
 
 mates in the English language, therefore they are not arranged in 
 pairs ; and although the heavy signs ing, hay, yay, and way coiTespond 
 with the light signs era, em, el, and er, the likeness is accidental and 
 does not, as in the case of the others, indicate similarity of sound. 
 
 ) CLASSIFICATION OF THE C0NS0NAST3. 
 
 § 10. The following arrangement of the consonants classifies them 
 according to their nature or quality, and their mode of formation. To 
 make the view pomplete, the two compound consonants are inserted. 
 
 1 
 
 Talrttala, 
 
 
 LlUBUO- 
 
 dcntala. 
 
 Labio- 
 deiuats. 
 
 LaUnlH. 
 
 
 chay 
 
 tee 
 
 
 pee 
 
 
 jay 
 
 dee 
 
 
 bee 
 
 ish 
 
 
 ess ith 
 
 ef 
 
 
 zhee 
 
 
 zee dhee 
 en 
 
 vee 
 
 em 
 
 er 
 
 
 el 
 
 
 
 Gruttiii-als. 
 
 ., , ( Breathed* , . . kay 
 
 JbruipU < „ 
 
 I Sonant gay 
 
 J Breathed .... 
 
 ( Sonant 
 
 Nasals Sonant ing 
 
 Liquids Sonant 
 
 Aspirate Breathed hay 
 
 Coalescents . Sonant yay way 
 
 QnAUTZ OP CONSONANTS. 
 
 § 11. The consonants are arranged in six divisions, called Ahrupts, 
 Continuants, Nasals, Liquids, The Aspirate, and Coalescents . 
 
 I. The Abrupts are so called because of their abrupt or explosive na- 
 ture, being made by a complete contact of the organs of speech, inter- 
 rupting or entirely stopping the breath or voice. They are the most 
 perfect of the consonants. Sometimes they are termed Explodents. 
 
 II. The Continuants permit a freer escape of the breath or voice, and 
 begin to approximate toward the character of vowels. They admit 
 of indeflnite prolongation, and hence their name. 
 
 m. The Nasals combine in their formation the character of the ab- 
 rupts and liquids. They are made by complete contact of the parts 
 of the mouth, while at the same time the sounding breath or voice is 
 permitted freely to escape through the nose. 
 
 IV. The Liquids permit a still freer escape of the breath or voice than 
 the continuants, approaching more nearly than they to the nature 
 of vowels. They have in fact so much of the vowel character that 
 
 * The word T>reathed has been used here in preference to wMirpered, which is 
 the one generally, but improperly, employed to designate the nature of the light 
 consonant-sounds. That the term wMfipered does not indicate the true charactei 
 of the sounds, is clearly demonstrated by the fact that the aaiianta are as easily 
 uttered in wJdsper as the hreath condonauts. 
 
22 THE COMPLETE PHONOGkAPHEK. 
 
 they readily unite with the other consonants, forming double con90> 
 nants, and sometimes syllaWes, without the aid of any vowels. 
 
 V. The Aspirate and Coalescents are the feeblest of all the conso- 
 nants, seeming to be mere modifications of vowels, by which the 
 breath or voice is very slightly obstructed. 
 
 FOEMATION OF OONSONANT-SOnilDS. 
 
 § 12. In the arrangement of the consonant-sounds according to their 
 mode of formation, we begin with those formed at the root of the 
 tongue, near the throat, as kay, gay, etc. ; and then go forward to the 
 hard palate, or roof of the mouth, as isA, zhee, etc. ; then to the region 
 of the tip of the tongue and the teeth, as fee, dee, etc. ; then to the 
 teeth and lips, as ef, vee; and finally to the lips alone, as j)ee, bee, etc. 
 Hence these several classes are called,' I. ChMwals ; II. Palatals; rU. 
 Jnnguo-deniak ; IV. Laiio-dentals; and V. Labials. 
 
 § 13. In sounding these consonants, the different parts of the mouth 
 are brought into action as follows : With the Gutturals, the root or 
 body of the tongue is pressed against the roof of the mouth ; with the 
 Palatals, the tongue just back of the tip is pressed against the roof of 
 the mouth at a little distance from the teeth ; with the Linguo- 
 dentals, the end of the tongue is placed against, or nearly against the 
 base of the upper teeth ; with the Labio-dentals, the upper teeth are 
 placed upon the lower lip ; and with the Labials, the lips are quite or 
 partially closed. 
 
 ORIGIN OP THE CONSONANT-SIGXS. 
 
 § 14. The remarkable brevity that distinguishes Phonography from 
 all other systems of Short-hand, is chiefly owing to the extreme san- 
 plicity of the consonant-signs it employs ; each being a simple straight 
 or curved line, which requires but a single motion of the pen in its 
 formation. The source from which these signs are derived is shown 
 in the following geometric diagrams : 
 
 © 
 
 Experience has shown that the straight line can not be placed in 
 more than four positions, with a suiBcient difference to be readily dis- 
 tinguished, and to prevent mistaking one sign for another. These 
 
 ; positions are illustrated b^ the four dimmsterE -n *''- nV--- — =— l-- 
 This gives us four distinc 
 
SIMPLE CONSONANT-SIGNS. 23 
 
 and heavy lines the number is doubled. Again, if the circle be 
 divided into quarters in the two ways shown in the diagrams, eight 
 distinct curved signs are obtained. Then by making them light and 
 heavy, we have eight more, making sixteen in all, which, added to the 
 eight straight signs, make twenty-four — the greatest number of lines, 
 straight and curved, that can be used without confusion, and corre- 
 sponding exactly with the number of consonant-sounds (including ch 
 and j) that there are in our language. 
 
 ANAIOGT IN THE APPEOPEIATION OP THE SIGNS. 
 
 § 15. In the appropriation of these signs to the consonants, the re- 
 quirements of analogy are strictly observed, the eight inflexible and 
 explosive sounds called ahruplx being represented by unyielding straight 
 lines, while the more flowing and pliable sounds, as the mn&nuain)^, 
 nasals, etc., are represented by curved and flowing lines. 
 
 § 16. The signs of the compound consonants, ehay and jay, take the 
 form of their first elements tee and dee, and the direction of the second, 
 isk and zhee. 
 
 MNEMONIC ASSISTANCE IN LEARNING TEU! PHONOGRAPHS. 
 
 § 17. The memory is often greatly aided by local association, and 
 the learner will derive assistance in memorizing the phonographs and 
 their names by studying the table in connection with the following 
 diagrams, in the first of which is shown the position and direction 
 of each straight consonant-sign, and in the second, the location, in the 
 circumference of the circle, of each curved consonant-sign. The names 
 of the heavy or shaded signs are in foil face type. 
 
 pee I chay 
 
 kay . D--, gay 
 
 y^|\ 
 
 dee 
 
 § 18. Single consonant-signs are sometimes caJled stems, as well as 
 
24: THE COMPLETE PHOmlGEAPHEK. 
 
 OF THE MANNER OP WRITING THE CONSO- 
 
 NANT SIGNS. 
 
 § 19. With one exception (ree), every consonant-sign employed in 
 Phonography is written in the direction of one of the lines of the 
 following diagram : 
 
 § 20. Sarmntal letters are written from left to right. 
 
 § 21. Perpendicular and inclined letters are written downward. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 § 22. (a) When not joined to another stem, _J (sh) is written down- 
 ward, and (^" {t) upward ; but when either is so joined it is sometimes 
 written upward and sometimes downward, (b) The straight sign for 
 r, / ree, is always written upward. 
 
 § 23. When written downward, _J and (^ are called respectively 
 tsA and d ; when upward, shee and lee. Rules by which the learner may 
 determine whether to use ish or shee, el or lee, er or rce, will be given 
 hereafter. 
 
 OnAT AND REE mSTINGUISHED. 
 
 § 24. As the stems chay and ree are inclined in the same direction, 
 they are distinguished, when not joined to other stems, by difference 
 Lq inclination ; chay being written at an angle of sixty degrees from tha 
 line, and ree at an angle of thirty degrees : thus, / ch/iy, ^ ree. When 
 joined to other stems, they are distinguished by the direction of tha 
 
 stroke, which is apparent : thus, \/ pee-ree, \ pee-chay, j/ chay-ree, 
 
 /f ree-chay. 
 
 \ HINTS TO THE BEQINNER. 
 
 § 26. Phonography is best written on ruled paper ; and some recom- 
 mend double lines, but the ordinary single-lino ruling is generally pre- 
 ferred by practical phonographers. The learner should accustom 
 himself to write with either pen or pencil, holding it the same as in 
 writing long-hand. The pen should have a smooth and tolerably fine 
 point, and may be either gold, steel, or quill. Very fine hair lines 
 are found in practice not to bo the most legible, especially when read- 
 
MANNEE OF WEITING THE CONSONANT-SIGNS. 25 
 
 ina- or transcribing notes at night. If a pencil be used, Faber's No. 3 
 is of about the right hardness. 
 
 § 26. No effort should be made by the learner at the outset to write 
 with rapidity. Accuracy alone should be aimed at ; and when his 
 hand has become accustomed to trace the phonographic characters with 
 correctness and elegance, he will find no difficulty in writing them 
 quickly. But if he let his anxiety to write fast overc -me his resolu- 
 tion to write well, he will not only be longer in atti pg real swift- 
 ness, but will always have to lament the illegibiliir- of his writing. 
 Each phonograph should be drawn slowly, great care being taken to 
 give it its proper direction, shading, and length. Beginners are apt to give 
 the curved signs a little twist or flourish at the end, and also, to incline 
 the perpendicular stems a little to the right, — defects that should be 
 carefully avoided. The reading and writing exercises near the end of 
 the book will afford ample practice upon every principle of Phonog- 
 raphy, and, as far as practicable, in the exact order, section by sec- 
 tion, of their presentation in the following pages. Those exercises 
 have been carefully selected, so that no word will be found which in- 
 ■ volves principles not previously explained. They should be carefully 
 and repeatedly read and written, in connection with the sections which 
 relate to them. The learner should also scrupulously avoid writing any 
 words except those that he finds in the exercises, or even writing words 
 that are there given, but which are in advance of his regular lesson. 
 By so doing he will save himself much unnecessary discouragement, and 
 escape the annoyance of having afterward to unlearn, or forget, im- 
 proper word-forms. 
 
 SIZE or THE PHONOGRAPHS. 
 
 § 27. At first the phonographs should be made about one sixth of an 
 
 inch in length, or, for example, about the size of kay, tee, \ ef, 
 
 ) zee, ^^ ing. But after considerable proficiency is attained, they 
 may, with advantage, be reduced to about one eighth of an inch. The 
 phonographic illustrations throughout this book are models in every 
 respect for the advanced writer. 
 
 SHADING or THE HEAVY SIGNS, ETC. 
 
 § 28. In making the heavy curved signs, care should be taken not 
 to shade them at or near the end ; they should be shaded in the middle 
 only, and taper off toward each extremity, otherwise they will present 
 a clumsy appearance. And both straight and curved heavy signs 
 should only be shaded sufficiently to distinguish them from the corre- 
 sponding light signs. If there be too great a contrast between the 
 heavy and light lines, the writing will appear stiff and ungrace- 
 ful. UTie distance from point to point of any curved sign should be 
 
 2 
 
26 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEB. 
 
 about equal to the length of a straight sign written in the same direc- 
 tion. 
 
 PHONOGRAPHIC SPEED. 
 
 § 29. The rapidity of phonographic writing, lilce that of the common 
 script, must vary with the organism of the writer. Expert phonogra- 
 phers generally write about six times as fast in Phonography as in 
 long-hand. 
 
 EXERCISES TO BE READ AS WELL AS WRITTEN. 
 
 § 30. It will greatly facilitate the acquirement of Phonography if the 
 exercises written by the leai-ner are carefully read and re-read by him 
 until they can be deciphered without hesitation. The consequences 
 of omission in this respect are admirably stated by Mr. Diclsens in the 
 88th chapter of " David Copperfield," which may be read with both 
 instruction and amusement. 
 
 SIMPLE VOWELS. 
 
 DEFINITION. 
 
 § 31. A vowel may be defined to be the smooth or harmonious 
 emission of sounding breath, modulated but not obstructed by the or- 
 gans of speech ; as the sounds of a in arm, a in ale, ea in eoL 
 
 NDSTBER OF VOWEL-SOUNDS. 
 
 § 32. In the English language there are twelve distinct vowel- 
 sounds, six of which are long and six short. They are denoted by the 
 italic letters in the following words : 
 
 Long vowels — arm, ale, eat, all, note, food. 
 Short vowels — at, ell, it, on, up, foot. 
 
 § 33. In producing each of these short vowel-sounds, the position 
 of the vocal organs is nearly the same as in uttering the long vowel- 
 sound of the corresponding word in the line above. 
 
 § 84. For these twelve sounds the common alphabet furnishes but 
 the five letters a, e, i, o and« (w and y having no vowel-sounds of thoir 
 own), while Phonography gives a distinct representation to each. 
 
 METHOD OF VOOALIZATION. 
 § 85. In writing phonographioally, the consonant-sign is made first, 
 and the vowel-sign afterward placed to it. Of the six long vowels, 
 three are indicated by a heavy dot, written to the consonant in three 
 positions, viz., at the beginning, middle, and end; and the other three, 
 by a heavy dash, wiitten to the consonant in the same positions. Of the 
 
SIMPLE VOWELS. 
 
 27 
 
 six corresponding short vowels, three are indicated by a light dot, and 
 three by a ligM dash, written to the consonant in the same manner. 
 
 § 30. A vowel is said to be first', second, or Ihird place, according as it 
 is written at the beginning, middle, or end of a consonant-stem. 
 
 § 37. The six vowel-sounds indicated by the dot are lingual in thei», 
 nature, and the six dash-vowels, labial. 
 
 ■S 
 
 LONQ. 
 
 ■ First place 
 
 Second " 
 
 .Third " 
 
 First place ' 
 Second " ' 
 L Third " 
 
 VOWEL-SCALE. 
 
 DOT-VOWELS. 
 
 ,;■'" a in arm. 
 V" a " ale (air). 
 !'" ea " eat (ear). 
 
 DASH-VOWEIS. 
 
 .;•'" a in fall. 
 y" " note (whole). 
 ,-•" 00 "food. 
 
 NAMES OE THE VOWELS. 
 
 SHOKT. 
 
 .;•■" a in at (ask). 
 '{"' e " met (her). 
 ••"" J " pin. 
 
 .;■'' oin on (lost). 
 V" « "up {cut). 
 .■■■ 00 "foot. 
 
 § 38. The long vowels may be named by their respective sounds 
 ah, a, e, awe, o, oo (not double o) ; and the short vowels by pronouncing 
 them with the consonant tee subjoined to each ; thus, at, et, it, ot, ut, 
 dot. The short vowels may also be named by their sounds, without the 
 consonant (ee, as soon as the learner is sufficiently advanced to be able 
 to pronounce them correctly without the aid of a consonant. Their 
 common letter representatives would then be a, e, z, S, u, do. 
 
 E.E0KONINQ OP VOWEL-POSITIONS. 
 
 § 39. It has been already remarked that the first vowel-place is at 
 the beginning of the consonant ; the second at the middle, and the 
 third at the end. From this it follows that with horizontal consonant- 
 signs the vowel-positions number from left to right ; with down- 
 strokes, from top to bottom ; with up-strokes, from bottom to top ; 
 and with signs that are sometimes written upward and sometimes 
 downward, tlie numbering of the vowel-positions is from the bottom 
 or top, according as the consonant is struck upward or downward ; 
 tlius, with shee, lee, or ree, the first position is at the bottom, whUe 
 with isk, el, or er, it is at the top. 
 
 § 40. In the above scale, the dots and dashes are written near a 
 dotted tee, to show the three vowel-positions in connection with a 
 
28 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 down-stroke stem ; and near a dotted lee, to show the positions in 
 connection with an up-stroke stem. The dotted lines of course form 
 no part of the vowel-sigu. 
 
 VOCALIZATION OF SINGLE CONSONANT-STEMS. 
 § 41. When a vowel occurs before a, consonant, the vowel-sign ij 
 written to the left of the consonant-sign, if it be perpendicular or in- 
 clined; and aiiwe, if it be horizontal; thus, •\aid, \ Ab, ■ ache, i oak. 
 When a vowel comes after a consonant, the vowel-sign is written to 
 the rigM of the consonant-sign, if it be perpendicular or inclined ; and 
 IdmD, if it be horizontal ; thus, \ bay, —^ gay, ^— ^ hay. 
 
 u 
 CONSONANT AlWATS WEIITEN FmST. 
 
 § 42. In either case, whether the vowel precedes or follows the con- 
 sonant, the consonant-sign is always written first. 
 
 METHOD OF EEADING SINGLE VOCALIZED CONSONANT-STEMS. 
 
 § 43. When a vowel-sign is placed to the left of a perpendicular or 
 inclined consonant-stem, or above a horizontal, the vowel is read first ; 
 thus, -| die, 'f ah, ^ aim. When a vowel-sign is placed to the right 
 of an upright or sloping consonant-stem, or below a horizontal, the 
 consonant is read first ; thus, \ pay, [• day, — Co. 
 
 MANNER OF WRITING THE VOWEL-SIGNS. 
 
 § 44. The dash vowel-signs should be written at right-angles to the 
 consonant, or, when more convenient, they may be a little inclined ; 
 
 thus, Co. may be written or as well as in the manner shown in 
 
 the last section. Both dot and dash vowels should be written at a little 
 distance from the consonant, for if allowed to touch, mistakes would 
 be occasioned. 
 
 THE VOWEL-SOALB NOT PERFECTLY PHONETIC. TWO SOUNDS SOMETIMES 
 REPRESENTED BY ONE SIGN. 
 
 § 45. If we make a close analysis, we will find thatthe number of vowel- 
 Bounds in the English language is somewhat greater than is indicated 
 by the above vowel-scale. What the exact number is it is difScult to 
 determine, phoneticians not being able to agree in regard to it among 
 themselves. This is owing partly to difference of pronunciation among 
 speakers, and partly to the fact that the shades of distinction between 
 several of the vowel-sounds are so very slight, that, to some ears, they 
 are quite imperceptible. As Phonography is not intended to repre- 
 
SIMPLE TOWELS. 29 
 
 Bent all the nice shades of sound, but to be a ^pradica?, rather than a crit- 
 kally exact means of writing the language, the twelve-vowel scale ia 
 found to be entirely sufificient. From this it follows that in some in- 
 stances several vowel-sounds, which are recognized as being distinct 
 elements by all accurate orthoepists, are confounded with each other, 
 and represented by a single sign. 
 
 § 46. The attention of the learner ia called to the following exam- 
 ples of inexact phonetic representation, which are the only ones of im- 
 portance, or that will be likely to cause him any embarrassment. 
 
 I. The second heavy dot-vowel sign, representing primarily the 
 sound of a in cHe, fate, is also used to represent the more open vowel- 
 sound heard in air, there, their, fare, etc. Beginners sometimes fall into the 
 error of employing the light dot-sign of the first position for this 
 sound. 
 
 II. The third heavy dot-vowel sign, representing primarily the sound 
 of ea in eat, is also used to represent the more open sound of ea in ear. 
 Beginners also err in sometimes using for this sound the light-dot sign 
 of the same position. 
 
 III. The first light dot- vowel sign, representing primarily the sound 
 of a in at, is also used to represent the sound of a in ask. To many 
 ears these sounds are identical ; and, as frequently spoken, there is 
 really no difference, but when correctly uttered, the sound of a in 
 ask approaches more nearly the sound of a in arm. 
 
 IT. The second light dot-vowel sign, representing primarily the 
 sound of e in met, ell, is also used to represent the sounds of e in her, 
 and i in Urd, fir. As commonly pronounced, the sounds of e and i, be- 
 fore r, very closely resemble the sound of m in fur ; but, as pronounced . 
 by our most careful public speakers, they approach nearer the short 
 sound of e, as heard in met. • 
 
 T. The second heavy dash-vowel sign, representing primarily the 
 sound of in note, is also used to represent the shorter sound of o in 
 wholly. This sound of o is said to be peculiar to American pronuncia- 
 tion. It is frequently heard here in the words stone, home, coat, whole, etc. 
 
 TI. The first light dash-vowel sign, representing primarily the sound 
 of in cm, is also used to represent the sound of o in ha, math, cloth, nor, 
 etc. This latter sound is less broad than the sound of aw in law, and 
 yet broader than the sound of o in cm, not, etc. 
 
 TII. The second light dash-vowel sign, representing primarily the 
 sound of u in up, is also used to represent the longer sound of u in cur. 
 
 § 47. For the use of the critical student, a complete vowel-scale, in 
 which a distinct representation is provided for each and every vowel- 
 sound of the language, is given in the Appendix. 
 
30 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEA-PHEE. 
 
 DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 DEFINITION. 
 
 § 48. A diphthong is a coalition or union of two simple vowel 
 sounds, pronounced in one syllable ; as oi in oil. 
 
 NCMBEK OF DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 § 49. There are but four proper or perfect diphthongs in the English 
 language. They are illustrated by the italics in the words 
 by, boy, hough, few. 
 
 ANAITSIS OF THE DIPITTHONGS. 
 
 § 50. A proper diphthong is a compound or transition vowel-sound, 
 the organs of speech being in the position to utter one simple vowel- 
 sound at the beginning of it, and in a position to utter a different simple 
 vowel-sound at the conclusion of it, so that the two simple sounds are 
 both heard in full or in part, but often so blended together as to seem 
 to the &,r but one sound. 
 
 1. I — In uttering the sound of i in ice, or y in by, or ai in aisle, 
 the organs at the commencement of the sound are in position to pro- 
 nounce the vowel a in ask, and, at the end, they are in position to pro- 
 duce the sound of i in it. 
 
 2. 01 — The sound of oi in oil, or oy in hoy, is composed of the sounds 
 of in lost, and i in it. 
 
 3. OW — The sound of ow in now, or ough in hough, or oa in our, is com- 
 posed of the sounds of o in on, and oo in foot. 
 
 4. EW — To produce the sound of ew in few, or eu in feud, or u in na- 
 ture, the organs at the commencement are in position to pronounce the 
 sound of e in'Se, and at the end to pronounce oo in food or foot. 
 
 KEMAKKS ON THE DIPHTHONO BW. 
 
 § 51. This last sound has probably perplexed lexicographers and pho- 
 neticians more than any other in the language. This has been owing 
 partly to difference of pronunciation among speakere, and partly to the 
 obscure and changeable character of the two close vowels of which the 
 diphjjfiong is composed. When properly pronounced, its first element 
 is very short, the organs merely taking the position to sound the close 
 vowel e, and then, the instant the sound commences, passing to the 
 position of the final element oo, upon which the voice rests a, much 
 longer space of time. In England, this is its uniform pronunciation ; 
 but in this country, it is sometimes spoken as if its first element were 
 the more open sound of i in it. - This change occasions the difference in 
 the sound of the syllable twie heard in the word oppoiiune, as usually 
 
DIPHTHONGS. 31 
 
 prontiimced in this country, and in the word misfortune, of which out 
 pronunciation does not vary from the English. The close quality and 
 almost imperceptible quantity of the e sound of the diphthong, as heard 
 in the last example, and in the final syllables of the words nature,feature, 
 virtue, etc. , has led may to suppose that the real sound was that of the 
 consonant y, which is a sound so nearly allied to it that it has some- 
 times been called the "squeezed sound of e." And even now this 
 is the pronunciation given in most dictionaries, and also the one 
 adopted by the American phoneticians. But the phoneticians of 
 England, in their later publications, invariably treat this double 
 sound as a diphthong, — that is, as composed of two vowels, instead 
 of a consonant and a vowel. On the other hand, however, they 
 eiT in giving the sound of i in 'U as its first element, that vowel sel- 
 dom, if ever, entering into the composition of this diphthong, espe- 
 cially as heard in their own pronunciation. 
 
 § 52. The final element of this diphthong is also subject, under cer- 
 tain circumstances, to a slight change. In accented syllables, it is 
 clearly the long sound of oo ; as in the words duly, beauty, remeif, etc. ; 
 but iu unaccented syllables, it seems to be the short sound of oo, as in 
 the words value, virtue, etc. 
 
 § 53. From the above observations it appears that, according to the 
 American pronunciation, as a general rule, when the diphthong u oc- 
 curs in an accented syllable, its components are the sounds of i in it 
 and 00 in. food, and that in unaccented syllables, it is composed of the 
 vowel-sounds of ea in eat and oo in boat. 
 
 § 54. The four proper diphthongs are represented by four angular 
 characters, written, like the simple vowel-signs, to the consonant, 
 three occupying the first, and one the third position, as shown in the 
 following table. 
 
 TABLE OP DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 I ^i ^f Sound of ffli va. aisle and t mfine. 
 
 01 'i <;'"■ " " oy " bay " at " bail. 
 
 OW '"! L,.''" " " ough" 'plough" ow "cam. 
 
 EW ^i .--" " " iev> " view " u " tube. 
 
 § 55. If the writer should wish to distinguish between what w^may 
 call the American and English pronunciations of this diphthong, it may 
 be done by making both strokes of the sign light for the former, and 
 by shading the first stroke of the sign for the latter, to indicate that the 
 first element is of the long e quality. But in practice, no confusion 
 will result from using uniformly the light sign, as, in the common 
 print, we are accustomed to sp^ng one letter used for both sounds. 
 
32 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEB. 
 
 DIEEOTION or THE DIPHTnONO-SIONS NEVER CHAU6ED. 
 
 § 56. Unlike the dash vowel-signs, the signs for the diphthongs are 
 never inclined to correspond with the di+ection of the consonant-sign. 
 The signs for oi and ew may, however, when more convenient, be in- 
 clined a little from the horizontal. [See § 246.] 
 
 TWO VOWELS CONCDBKINO. 
 
 § 57. When two vowels occur together, either before or after a con- 
 sonant, the vowel that is sounded nearest to the consonant should be 
 written a little nearer it than the others ; thus, -|' iota. 
 
 niPHTHONGS JOINED TO CONSONANTS. 
 
 § 58. It is allowable, when convenient, to join a diphthong to the 
 consonant sign ; thus, -^y- idea,' 1 eyed. A ' '^^ 
 
 CONSONANT POSITIONS. 
 
 § 59. Each of the consonant-signs may be written, with respect to 
 the line of writing, in three different positions, corresponding with the 
 throe vowel-positions, and like them, respectively called first, second, 
 and third. 
 
 § 60. In the following illustrations, the dot-line running under, over, 
 or through the consonant-stem, serves to indicate the line of writing. 
 
 POSITIONS OF HOEIZONTAL STEMS. 
 
 § 61 . The positions of the horizontal stems are as follows : 
 
 PiEsr Position. — Above the line, the highest part of the stem distant 
 from it about the length of a tee; thus, '"^ em, ^— ' ing, kay. 
 
 Second Position. — The lower part of the stem resting on the line ; 
 thus, . ,.-^ hay, .^ en, gay. 
 
 TiiiED Position. — Below the line, about one third of the length 
 of a tee; thus, em, ing. 
 
 PeSITIONS OF PERPENDICULAR AND INCLINED STEMS. 
 
 § 62. The positions of perpendicular and inclined steins ai-e as follows : 
 
 FiiisT Position. — Above the line, about one third the length of a 
 tee; thus, \ pee, "^ way, I tee, C yay. 
 
 Second Position.— Resting on the line ; thus, ^ ef, _\ dee, ..L.chay. 
 
 Third Position.— Written through the line, so as to extend about 
 one third below; thus, .\.pee, ..!.. dee. 
 
JOINING THE CONSONANT-STEMS. 33 
 
 JOIISriNG THE OONSOlSrANT STEMS. 
 
 § 63. In writing a word phonographioally, the first thing ior tha 
 learner to do is, to analyze it into its elementary sounds. Having 
 done this, the consonant-signs are then all to be written first, without 
 taking off the pen ; the second sign commencing where the first ends, 
 the third at the end of the second, and so on ; thus, the consonants 
 of the words became and knave are respectively \__^-% lee-kay-em and 
 ~^^ en-vee. This is called the outline or skeleton of the word. Until 
 otherwise instructed, the learner may write each outline so that its 
 first perpendicular or.inclined stem shall rest upon the line ; or, if all 
 of its stems be horizontal, so that its first stem shall rest upon the line 
 
 CONSONANT-STEMS EEPEATED. 
 
 § 64. A straight consonant-stem is repeated by doubling its length ; 
 thus, gay-gay, dee-dee, \ bee-bee. 
 
 §65. Curved consonant-stems are repeated thus: ,_,^-.^„ em-«B, 
 ^-1 vee-vee. 
 
 MODE OF JOINING CERTAIN STEMS. 
 
 § 66. There should always he an angle between the stems of the fol- 
 lowing combinations : L-^_> ef-en, ^^.^^ vee-en, L-v^y vee-ing, (^"^^ lee-em, 
 ^~\ hay-ess. ' ~ 
 
 § 67. When two stems are joined that do not form a distinct angle, 
 if one or both be heavy, they should be so blended that the precise 
 point of junction shall not be discernible, as in the following exam- 
 ples : ~\ pee-bee, dee-tee, 1^ ef-gay, ^ vee-Jcay, (^ dee-vee, (. 
 
 vee-gay, \_^ bee-ing, (^^dhee-ing, '^ hay-zee. 
 
 § 68. There should be no angle between the stems of the combina- 
 tions V_.y pee-en, L ef-kay, (_^ Uh en, \dee-ef, (^ ke-er, (^ lee-ess, 
 
 . — ^ lee-shee, (O lee^h, ^ em-ess. ^ 
 
 CEDMl OF KEADINO CONSONANT-STEMS. 
 
 § 69. The consonant-signs aie read in the same order that they are 
 written. It will sometimes happen that a sign which is further along 
 than another in the line of writing, must be read first ; thus, ^ is 
 read ish-dee, and not dee-shee ; for, by the rule, dee is written down- 
 ward, and as the signs must be made without taking off the pen, it is 
 obvious that the J was written first, and downward, and the ] writ- 
 ten last. 
 
 2* 
 
34: THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 METHOD OF WRITING VOWELS BETWEEIST 
 
 CONSONANT SIGNS. 
 
 § 70. Vowels and diphthongs occurring between two consonants, 
 are written according to the following 
 
 KTILB. 
 
 1. All first-place, and all long second-place vowels are written to tha 
 Btom which precedes thena ; thus, V--^ balm, \ — . back, .. V.. file, 
 \ bake. 
 
 2. All short second-place, and all third-place vowels are written to 
 the stem which follows them ; thus, \ ■ beck, |^ dumb, -k:y- tomb, 
 '^" jpuU, ...rr^ lick. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 (ffl) The rule as to first and third place vowel-signs may be violated 
 where its observance would throw a vowel into an angle, and thus oc- 
 casion ambiguity. The vocalization in .......^ ju i^etter than in 
 
 "O" "C^ """ ^°^ nick-nack. 
 
 1 b) When two simple vowel-sounds, or a simple vowel and a diphthong, 
 occur between two consonant-stems, and both, /according to the rule, 
 would be written to the same consonant, write one to each stem 
 if convenient ; thus, -^^^-^- cooing, ■yi<.' duel. Sometimes it is prefer- 
 able to write both to the same stem ; thus, .-\^- puerile. 
 
 POSITION OF WORDS. 
 
 § 71. There are three positions, with respect to the line of writing, 
 in which the consonant outlines of words may be written. These po- 
 sitions correspond with the three vowel-positions, and, like them, are 
 called first, second, and third respectively. A word is assigned to one 
 of these positions according as it has in its accented syllable a vowel 
 which would be represented by a fird, second, or third place vowel-sign. 
 If a word be a monosyllable, the position to whiok it should be as- 
 signed, is determined by the place of its only vowel. 
 
 WHKN A WORD IS WEITTEN IN POSITION. 
 
 § 72. A word is said to occupy a particular position when its first 
 perpendicular or inclined consonant-stem is written in it, in accordance 
 with §§ 59, 01, and 62. If, however, the consonant outline consists 
 entirely of horizontal stems, the position of the first determines the 
 
PHONOGEAPHIC ANALYSIS. 35 
 
 position of the word, as all of the stems must necessarily fall in the 
 same line. Throughout this work, the line of writing is indicated, ii 
 connection with words of the first and third positions, by the dat-lini. 
 All words that occur without the line of writing being so represented 
 are to be regarded as belonging to the second position. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 FmsT Position: ]]^ cap, .'!^. fowl, ,^. foil, .\^_ calm, T^_ eaw, 
 OL alike. 
 
 Sjsoond Position : j^ pail, pale, , X\ rope, ~^ gcde, T Keay, 
 
 ^^ make. 
 
 Thiud Position: ■-^- fool, ■^" fed, ^^cow, 3 Icing, .-^.me, 
 
 .Vj);. bumhy. 
 
 MENTAL AND MANUAL PROCESS IN WRITING PHONOGRAPHY. 
 
 § 73. Before commencing to write a word phonographically, the 
 writer must determine what are its consonant-sounds, and also its ac- 
 cented vowel. Then its consonant outline is written in the proper 
 word-position, as directed at §§ 71 and 72 ; and lastly, the vowel-signa 
 are written to the consonant-stems in accordance with §§ 41 and 
 70. But, as the beginner will find it difficult to carry the consonant 
 outline of a long word in his melnoiy while his attention is directed 
 to ascertaining the accented vowel and its position, it will be well for 
 him, in his early practice, first to write the outline without regard to 
 position, and then, when he has determined what is its accented 
 vowel, to rewrite it in its proper position. 
 
 PHONOGRAPHIC AISTALTSIS. 
 
 GENERAL RULE. 
 
 § 74. It may be stated, as a general rule, that before the learner is pre- 
 pared to write a word with its proper phonographic signs, he must first 
 analyze it into its elementally sounds, observing ^carefuUv distinguish 
 the consonants from the vowels. 
 
 § 75 . If the common orthography of our language were phonetic, — 
 that is, if each sound had a letter of its own, which always represented 
 it wherever it occurred, the student of Phonography would need no 
 other instruction in analysis than the general rule given in the last 
 section. But unfortunately this is not the case. An alphabet of 
 twenty-six letters, three of which c, j, and x) have no sounds of their 
 
36 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 ovm, thus practically reducing the number to twenty- three, is com- 
 pelled to attempt the service of representing some forty different and 
 distinct sounds. This disparity between the number of sounds and tha 
 number of signs to represent them, is the source of so many defects in 
 our written language, and has caused the adoption of such an irregular 
 and whimsical orthography, that the analysis of words into their true 
 elements, to one who is unaccustomed to it, is rendered exceedingly 
 difficult. It therefore becomes necessary to furnish assistance to the_ 
 learner in overcoming these difficulties which beset him at the very 
 commencement of his com'se. 
 
 THE EAR MISLED BY THE EYE. 
 
 § 76. The principal cause of embarrassment is the liability of the 
 ear, in the comparison of sounds, to be misled by the eye, which is 
 itself deceived from seeing frequently the same sound, in different 
 words, represented by different letters, or different sounds represented 
 by the same letter. Thus, the sounds of ph and of / in Philip and 
 fMip, differ in their representation to the eye, but to the ear they are 
 identical. The sounds of th in thigh, and of th in thy, differ to the ear, 
 but to the eye seem the same. In Phonography, the sign ef would be 
 used to represent the sound of both ph and /, while the two sounds 
 of th would be represented by the two signs iih and thee. 
 
 WORDS SPEJjaiD ALIKE ECT PRONOUNCED DIFFERENTLY. 
 
 § 77. Sometimes words that are written alike in the common spell- 
 ing, are pronounced differently ; as how, an instrument for shooting 
 arrows, and bow, an act of respect ; job, a piece of work, and Job, a 
 man's name ; row, a number ranged in line, and row, a tumult. In all 
 such cases the phonographic spelling changes to correspond with the 
 change of sound or pronunciation. 
 
 WORDS PRONOUNCED ALIKE BUT SPELLED DUTERENTLY. 
 
 § 78. In some cases where a sound is used for the expression of sev- 
 eral ideas, a difference is made in the common spelling corresponding 
 to a difference in signification ; thus, ale, ail ; arte, arc ; aught, ought, etc 
 As such words are alike in sound, they are written alike in Phonography. 
 
 CAUTION RESPEOTINQ CIT, SH, TH, AND NO. 
 
 § 79. The sounds of ch in che-tl, sh in she, th in thigh or thy, and t^ iu 
 eing, are not the natural sounds of the combinations c and h, s and h, 
 t and h, and n and g, but they are pimple single sounds, for which the 
 combinations ch, sh, th, and tjg are' conventional modes of expression 
 Ulie learner must be careful to represent them respectively with the 
 
PHONOGEAJPHIC ANALYSIS. 37- 
 
 Signs chay, ish, ilh or thee, and ing, and not to write ess-hay for eh or sh, 
 tee-hay for th, or en gay for n^r. It should also be noted, that the com- 
 bination ng has two sounds, — that of ing,. as heard in sing, singer, 
 hanger, and that of ing gay, in the words linger, hwnger, etc. 
 
 W AND T AT THE END OE STLLAEI,Eg. 
 
 § 80. TF' and y, at the end of syllables, are never sounded as conso- 
 nants. One of the most common errors of beginners is to write the strokes 
 tjay and way at the end of such words as gay, day, pay, they, may, way, boy, 
 eoy, buy, cow, dew, caw, etc. In each of these words there is but one 
 consonant-sound, and that is initial. In gay, day, they, etc., the com- 
 pounds ay and ey, which are pronounced alike, have a pure simple 
 vowel-sound, represented by the second-place heavy dot vowel-sign. In 
 hoy, the sound of oy is that of the diphthong oi. In buy, the sound 
 of uy is that of the diphthong i. In cow, mo has the sound of the diph- 
 thong ow. In dew, the sound of ew is that of the diphthong ew. In 
 caw, aw has a pure simple vowel-sound which is represented by the 
 first-place heavy dash vowel-sign. 
 
 DOUBLE CONSONANT-SOmroS BARE. 
 
 § 81. It can not be too clearly understood that in words like pitted, 
 slabbing, massy, etc., there is no real reduplication of the sounds t, b, and 
 s, respectively. The reduplication of the consonant is a conventional 
 mode of expressing in the common orthography the shortness of the 
 vowel preceding, an expedient which would be entirely unnecessary 
 if each sound had a letter of its own, as is the case in' Phonography. 
 
 § 82. Real reduplications of consonant-sounds are extremely rare. 
 In English they occur only in compound and derived words, where 
 the original root either begins with the same consonant-sound as tho 
 final one of the prefix, or ends with the same that commences tho 
 suffix. 
 
 § 83. In the following words we have true specimens of doubled 
 consonant-sounds. Kay is doubled in book-case ; m in imnatur(d, unneces- 
 sary, etc. ; em in immortal, immaterial, etc. 
 
 § 84. A consonant-sound can never bo reduplicated in the same 
 syllable ; hence, in Phonography, a single sign should be used to rep- 
 resent all such double letters as are fonnd in the words fagged, whipped, 
 ebb, fuss, whizz, off, planned, programme, call, burr, etc. 
 
 DISPAEITT IN NUMBER BETWEEN LETTERS AND SOUNDS. 
 
 § 85. Another source of confusion js the frequent use of a larger n am- 
 ber of letters than there are sounds in a word. Thus, the word though has 
 SiX letters and but two sounds ; through, seven letters and but three 
 
38 THE COMPLETE PHONOGRAPHEE. 
 
 sounds ; scene, five letters and three sounds ; day, dey, and a large n am 
 Ler of similar words, three letters and two sounds. 
 
 C, Q, AND X. 
 
 § 86. The letters c, q, and x of the old alpliahet, have no sounds 
 of their own. sounds like Ic in can, like s in cdl, like z in suffice, and 
 like sh in comr>ercial. Q always has the sound of k ; and x sounds like 
 7cs in exercise, like gz in exert, and like z in Xemphan. These letters, of 
 course, have nothing corresponding to them in Phonography, except 
 that each of their different sounds has its appropriate sign, — c, in its dif- 
 ferent uses, heing represented by either kay, ess, zee, or ish; q by kay, 
 and X by hay-ess, gay-zee, or zee. 
 
 N BEFORE THE SOUNDS OF KAT AND GAT. 
 
 § 87. Before the sounds of hay and gay, n has generally the sound 
 of ing instead of en ; as in ink, zinc, distinct, distinguish, anguish, etc. Its 
 proper sign in such cases is ing. 
 
 SHENT lEITEKS OMITTED. 
 
 r 
 
 ' § 88. All silent letters, such as 6 in dAit, c in seme, ch in drachm, h In 
 
 hour, k in know, etc. , are, of course, omitted In Phonography, as signs 
 are provided only for the sounds actually heard. 
 
 § 89. It is not unfrequently the case that a letter is sounded in cer- 
 tain words, while in others of similar orthography it is silent ; thus, I 
 , is sounded in bulk, bUk, dk, etc. , but silent in balk, talk, chalk, etc. 
 
 riNAL E GENEB.ALLT SILENT. 
 
 § 90. At the end of a large class of words the letter e is silent, being 
 placed there simply as a conventional mode of indicating that the preced- 
 ing vowel has its long sound ; as in the words fate, mete, ripe, tone, tune. 
 The final e in these words represents no vowel-sound, its only office 
 being to inform the reader that the preceding vowel is long, for by 
 dropping this final letter, we have the words fat, met, rip, ton, tun. 
 
 EW NOT USED AFTER K. 
 
 § 91. In regard to the sound of u, when it occurs immediately after 
 the consonant r, the authorities diifor. Mr. Webster marks it in such 
 words as rude, rule, as if it were pronounced like « in tube. On the 
 other hand, Mr. Worcester, in his dictionary, says, "Whenu is pre- 
 ceded by r in the same syllable, it has the sound of oo in fool." Dr. 
 Russell, the elocutionist, says, "jThe vowel u, immediately preceded 
 by the letter r, takes properly the sound of oo in rood, or of oo in root," 
 giving as examples the words rule, rude, fruit, true, etc. Walker also gives 
 
PHONOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS. 39 
 
 the same prominciation. The weight of authority, therefore, seems t« 
 he in favor of pronouncing u in this connection like oo, and hence, the 
 proper phonographic sign to represent it, is the thivd-place heavy 
 dash-sign ; thus, write -y^-- rather than —/\-. for the word rude. 
 
 UNAOCESTED TOWELS. GENERAL KULB. 
 
 § 92. It is often difficult to determine satisfactorily the quality and 
 quantity of vowel-sounds in unaccented syllables. That the learner 
 may not he without some guide In this respect, it may be stated that 
 in a majority of cases, when the precise quality can not be readily de- 
 termined, the vowel should he regarded as the short sound of the letter 
 used to represent it in the common spelling ; thus, again, tenable, mental, 
 melal, travel, refer, prefer, peruse, receipt, reform, peril, idol. And, gen- 
 erally, when the quality is clear, but the quantity is in doubt, the 
 short vowel is preferred to the long ; thus, e represents better than a, 
 the sound of ai in certain, captain. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 § 93. Sometimes, however, unaccented vowels retain their proper 
 long sound, and should be so written ; as a in the final syllable -ate, 
 in carbonate, sulphate, vacate; mandate, etc. ; o in obey ; e in re-seat, re-form 
 (to form again), eto. And some writers always regard these obscure 
 sounds as long in quantity and quality, except in cases where they 
 clearly appear to be short ; thus, they would write again, tenable, refer, 
 etc. ; but mentll, metHl, etc. 
 
 PHONOGRAPHIC SPELLING. 
 § 94. Although in Phonography there is, strictly speaking, no such 
 thing as spelling, in the usual sense of the term, yet there is a process 
 of analyzing words into their elements, and pronouncing the names 
 of those elements, very analogous to spelling, and which the learner 
 will find to be an excellent practice for the purpose of training his ear 
 and judgment to habits of accuracy and quickness in the discernment 
 of sounds. In this phonographic spelling, the consonants should first 
 he analyzed and named, afterward the vowels, then the consonants 
 and vowels in the order that they are spoken, and lastly, the complete 
 word should be pronounced. An illustration of this process may be 
 had by pronouncing the following words and syllables : ought, tee, aw, 
 aw-tee, aught ; awn, en, o, o-en, own ; me, em, e, em-e, me ; take, tee, Tcay, a, 
 iee-a-kay, take ; orb, er, bee, aw, aw- er-bee, orb ; dbow, lee, bee, e, o, e-lee-bee-o, 
 elbou! The words and syllables separated by commas should he spoken 
 deliberately, with considerable pause between, while those connected by 
 hyphens are to be pronounced in rapid succession, with little or no pause. 
 
iO THE COMPLETE I'HONOGKAPHEE. 
 
 ESS AND ZEE CIRCLE. 
 
 § 95. The s and z are consonant elements of sucli frequent recur- 
 rence, that it has been found convenient to furnish thorn with an ad- 
 ditional and briefer means of representation . The /»ZZ or stem forms ara 
 given in the Table of Consonants ; the other form is a small circle ; 
 thus, o ^^^ ^^6- 
 
 § 96. The circle is extremely useful because it affords great facility 
 for joining the consonant-stems, and also because it compresses the 
 writing into smaller apace, thus tending to preserve its lineality. 
 
 NAME OP THE ESS-OIKOLE. 
 
 § 97. The ess-circle, when not named in conjunction with a stroke- 
 consonant, may be called see. This name should not be confounded 
 with that of the common letter C, which, besides having the sound of 
 ess, often has the sound of Icay. 
 
 METHOD OF JOINIKG IHE OIKCLE TO OONSONAST-STESIS. 
 
 § 98. The circle is joined to consonant-stems as follows : 
 
 I. To single straight stems, by a motion from the right over to the 
 left ; thus, (SLo s-kay-s, [ s-tee-s, \^ s-pee-s. ^ — "^ 
 
 II. To simple curved stems, by writing it on the inside of the curve ; 
 thus, ^ s-ish-s, Q s-tthrS, °) s-ess-s, g-f, s-em-s, ^_5, 3-en-s, ^ s-lee-s. 
 
 NAMES OF TIEE ESS-OIKCIE COMPOUNDS. 
 
 § 99. These compounds may be named by inserting the short vowel- 
 sound e between the sounds represented by the circle and the stem to 
 which the circle is attached ; thus, s-kay is called sek ; kay-s, hess ; 
 B-kay-s, seks or skess ; s-gay, seg ; gay-s, ^rcss; s-tee, set; tee-s, less; 
 s-tee-s, sets or aiess ; s-dee, sed; dee-s, dess; s-dee-s, seds; s-chay, sech; 
 chay-6, chess ; s-chay-s, schess or seches ; s-jay , sy ; jay-s, jess ; s jay-s, 
 sejess ; s-ish, sesh ; ish-s, shess ; s-ish-s, seshess ; s-ith, sdh ; ith-s, tliess ; 
 s-ith-s, sethess ; sem, sem ; em-s, mess; s-em-s, sems or smess; s-en, sen; 
 en-s, ness ; s-en-s, sens or sness ; er-s, erss. 
 
 § 100. When the circle is joined to stems that are written upward, 
 the names of the compounds should be formed by using the long 
 sound e ores instead ofe; thus, s-shee, seesh; shee-s, shees; s-shee-s, 
 sesliees ; s-lee, slee; s-ree, sree or seree; but ree-s is called ress ; s-ree-s, 
 stress ; lee-s, leas ; s-lee-s, sless. The compound s-way should be reptfx- 
 sented by sway ; but way-s by wess. When it is difficult or impos- 
 sible to form syllabic names in the manner just described, the full 
 names of the circle and stem should be given; thus, s-hay, see-My ; 
 
ESS AND ZEE CIECLE. 4t 
 
 B-yay, see-yay. The compounds s-el and B-er are named see-d and 
 see-er. 
 
 SAME SIGN USED FOE. ESS AND ZEE. 
 
 § 101. Except in rare cases, no confusion results from employing the 
 same sign for both ess and zee, because we are accustomed in the com- 
 mon print to the frequent use of the single letter s for both of those 
 sounds ; as In the words, hose, hays, lease, lees, rise (noun), rise (verb), 
 gas, has, etc. 
 
 ESS AND ZEE DISIINGDISHED. 
 
 § 102. If, however, it should sometimes be necessary to make a dis- 
 tinction, the circle may be made a little heavier on one side for the 
 sound of zee; thus, j, 2; as in the sentence, " I said the iC laws of the 
 state, not the C° loss of the state." But in rapid writing this distinc- 
 tion can not easily be made, and therefore should not be attempted. 
 
 METHOD OF WRITING THE CIRCLE BETWEEN TWO 
 CONSONANT-STEMS. 
 § 103. The circle Is written between consonant-stems as follows : 
 
 I. Between two straight stems, both of which are written in the 
 same direction, — by writing it to the first the same as if it were not 
 followed by another stem ; thus, n hess-Tcay, t dess-iee, \; j)ess- 
 
 bee. 
 
 II. Between two straight stems that form an angle at their junc- 
 I tion, — by writing it on the outer side of the angle ; thus, ~f kess-jay, 
 ^ 1 y° less-jay, J dess-kay, J ress-kay. 
 
 in. Between a straight and a curved stem, — by writing it on the 
 inner side of the curved stem ; thus, ^^^ pess-vee, X tess-el, j[~ Uss-le:, 
 f''°\ less-pee. 
 
 IV. Between two curved stems, if both are arcs of circles struck in 
 the same direction, — by writing it on the inner side of both ; thus, 
 K= f ess-el, ^~C mess-lee, ^—^-^ messrem. 
 
 V. Between two curved stems that are arcs of circles struck in oppo- 
 site directions, and that do not form a distinct angle at their junc- 
 tion, — by turning it on the inner side of the first stem ; thus, ^-i>^^ 
 mess-en, ^^ fess-er, ^^^p. — ^ ness-em, ^~\_ mess-vee. 
 
 VI. Between two curved stems that form an angle at their junction, 
 and that are arcs of circles struck in opposite directions, — by turning 
 it on the outer side of the angle ; thus, v.^ fess-lee, (^ thess-lee, ^_^ 
 }iess-lee. i .-— r ^ .--' 
 
 SHORT HOLE. "^ d ' * 
 
 § 104. All of the examples given in the last section, of the citcla 
 
42 THE COMPLKTE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 occurring between stems, except a few under heads III. and IV., are 
 covered by the following rule : When the circle occurs between two 
 stems of any kind, if there be no angle at their junction, it is written 
 to the iirst stem as if it stood alone ; — if there be an angle between 
 the stems, the circle is written on the outer side of the angle. 
 
 VOCALIZATION, OF STEMS WITH CIRCLES ATTACHED. 
 
 ORDKK OF WHITING. 
 
 § 105. When a vowel immediately precedes a consonant-stem that 
 has an initial circle, or immediately follows a consonant-stem that has 
 a final circle, the vowel-sign is Written to the stem as if it had no circle 
 attached; thus, --^..seat and-l-feas are vocalized the same as -A- eat 
 and.-Lfca. 
 
 OKDEH, OF KEADING. 
 
 § 106. In reading words in which circles are used, an initial circle 
 is read first ; then the vowel-sign, if one precede the stem ; thirdly, 
 the stem ; then its following vowel-sign, if there be one ; and lastly, a 
 final circle ; thus, ^ s-vrpp-o-se. 
 
 CAUTION. — THE CIECLE JODTED TO UP-STEOKE STEMS. 
 
 § 107. With up-stroke stems, an initial circle will, of course, be at 
 the bottom, and a final circle at the top ; thus, '^ sale, sail; (^ lace, 
 lays; y^ race, rays. 
 
 VOCALIZATION WHEN THE CIECLE OCCURS IN THE MIDDLE 
 OF A WORD. 
 
 § 108. When a circle occurs between two consonant-stems, if a vowel 
 immediately precede the circle, — write its sign to the first stem ; thus, 
 J- desk ; — but if the vowel immediately follow the ^circle, — write its 
 sign to the second stem ; thus, ^■'-^ unsafe. , 
 
 § 109. The rule at § 70 as to vowels-signs between stems, does not 
 apply to these outlines. 
 
 USES or THB CIBOIE. 
 
 § 110. Thecirde is generally used at the commencement of words 
 that begin with the ess sound ; at the end of words that terminate 
 with an ess or zee sound, and for the sounds ess and zee when they occur 
 
 In the middle of words ; thus, ^jl. s^^^i 5\ soap, ■ f said, d case, [■ days, 
 
 O" mouse, l^ vase, and the words desk and unscffe in § 108. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 § 111. When an ess nr zee sound is immediately preceded, or imrap- 
 
THE LARGE CIECLE. 43 
 
 diately followed, by two concurrent vowels, the stem-sign should be 
 used, as it furnishes moie convenient facilities for vocalization ; thus, 
 l^ science, ") chaos. 
 
 § il2. "When two ess-sounds are the only consonants in a word, one 
 should be written with the circle, and the other with the stem-sign. 
 But, as the circle may be joined to either end of the stem, we have two 
 forms, ') and '^ , which are equivalent to each other. Tlie first of these 
 forms should be used in words where the sormd of ess is final, — that i?, 
 where no vowel is sounded after both the consonants ; thus, -^- cease; — 
 and the second form, in words that end with a vowel thus, j. saucy, 
 %. sissy. There is a third form, ^, that is generally used in words 
 where the second of the two consonants is a zee-sound ; thus, j sis». 
 
 WHEN THE STEM-SIGN SHODLD EE USED INSTEAD OF THE CIRCLE. 
 
 § 113. The stem-sign should be used when the ess-sound is the first 
 consonant in a word that commences with a vowel ; thus, ) ask. 
 
 § 114. The stem-sign for the sound of see is always used when that 
 sound is the first consonant in a word, whether there be an initial vowel 
 or not ; thus. -J)^ oozing, ■-)^-- zero. 
 
 § 115. The stem-sign is also used when the sound of ess or zee is the 
 last consonant in a word that ends with a vowel ; thus, X) Racey, 
 racy ; X) rosy ; — also when either of those sounds is the only conso- 
 nant in a word ; thus, •) ace, )■ say, )■ essay, •) ayes. 
 
 THE LARGE CIRCLE. 
 
 § 116. When the sound of ess or zee occurs twice in a word, with no 
 other consonant between, or when the sounds of ess and zee occur in 
 like proximity, the two sounds are generally represented by making 
 the cii'cle twice the size of the single ess- circle ; thus, □ ess or zee, q ess- 
 ess, or zee-zee, or ess-zee, or zee-ess. 
 
 NAME AND USE OF THE IAUGE CIRCtE. 
 
 § 1 17. The large circle may be called sis or siz. It is commonly used 
 to represent any of the combinations ses, sis, ces, cis, sas, sos, sits, etc., 
 of the common spelling. 
 
 THE lARGB CIKOLE JOINED TO CONSONANT-STEMS. 
 
 § 118. The large circle is joined to consonant-stems precisely in the 
 same manner as the small circle, and such combinations are named in 
 
4i THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 a manner similar to tliat described in § 99 ; thus, q_ sis-hay, _o kesia, 
 {j~i fessis, _^ Icessis-ree ; — and also, like the small circle, may be used 
 either at the beginning, in the middle, or at the end of a word ; 
 thus, — P;^ system, ^ necessity, d cases. 
 
 VOCALIZATION OF STEMS "WITH THE LARGE CIRCLE 
 ATTACHED. 
 
 § 119. The rule at §§ 105, 108, in reference to the vocalization 
 of stems that have the small circle attached, also applies in vocalizing 
 stems with the large circle attached. 
 
 VOCALIZATION OF THE lAKGE CIBOIE. 
 
 § 120. When necessary, a vowel that occurs between the two sounds 
 represented by the large circle, may be expressed by writing its sign 
 inside the circle, and, if convenient, in the vjiper, middle, or lower part 
 of the circle, according as the vowel is first, second, or third place ; thus, 
 -w— • season, g^ schism, ...Q.. secede, c^„ Sussex, ..L. decease, .^•. recess. 
 
 ESS AND ZEE SODNDS DISTINGUISHED. 
 
 § 121. When great exactness is required, the large circle may be 
 shaded a little on one side to indicate that both of its sounds are that 
 of zee; thus, ^ raises, instead of ^ races. 
 
 LOOPS FOE ST OE ZD, AND STE. 
 
 SMAIL LOOP, — ST OK ZD. 
 
 § 122. When the consonant-sound tee immediately follows ess (as in 
 the words most, cost, etc.), or, when dee follows zee (as in the words 
 amazed, raised, etc.), the two sounds are represented by lengthening 
 the circle into a small loop, extending about one half the length 
 of the stem ; thus, ,;;, si-kay, _^ kay-st, ^_^ stkay-st. 
 
 LAEGE LOOP, — STE. 
 
 § 123. A large loop, extending about two thirds the length of the 
 stem, may be used to represent the sound of s)r, with any vowel-sound 
 that occurs between the ( and the r (as In the words viasla; cador, 
 etc.) ; thus, _^ kay-str. 
 
 NAMliS OP TIU! LOOPS. — VOCALIZATION OP STEMS WITH LOOPS ATTACnED. 
 
 § 124. When not sounded in conjunction with a stroke-consonant, 
 the small loop may be called stee; and the large loop may invariably 
 be called ster. When the loops are joined to consonant-stems, the com- 
 
SHEE, EL, I/EE, ETC. 45 
 
 binations may be named in a manner similar to that given for the ess- 
 circle compounds at § 99 ; thus, st-kay, stek ; kay-st, hat; st-kayst, 
 stekesl; kay-str, kester ; em-str, nrnter, etc. 
 
 § 125. The rule at §§ 105, 108 also applies to the vocalization of 
 stems with loops attached. The small loop, like the circle, may be used 
 both at the beginning, in the middle, and at the end of words ; thus, 
 •f »taie, \^ destiny, ^ taste, ^ cast, (T lost. The large loop is not used 
 at the commencement of words, but may be in the middle and at the 
 end ; thus, k disturb, ^'^ castor, '^'^ master. 
 
 SMALL LOOP SHADED FOK ZD. 
 
 § 126. If great accuracy be required, the small loop may be shaded 
 when it represents the sounds zee-dee j thus, ^ raised, instead of ^ 
 raced. 
 
 THE SMALL CIRCLE ADDED TO SIS, ST, AND STB. 
 
 § 127. The small circle is added to the large circle and to the loops 
 by turning it on the opposite side of the stem ; thus, _^ excesses, —^ 
 coasts, ^-~> coasters. 
 
 RULES FOR TPIE USE OF ISH, SHEE, EL, LEE, 
 ER, AND REE. 
 
 § 128. In order to secure among phonographers a uniform manner of 
 writing, and to give increased legibility to certain words, the following 
 tules are prescribed regulating the use of those signs that may be 
 written either upward or downward. These rules are general in their 
 application, covering nearly all the words in which those stems 
 occur. They may, however, be violated in a few cases, where their 
 observance would occasion difficult or awkward forms. 
 
 USES OF ISH. 
 
 § 129. The consonant-stem _J is written downward (being then called 
 tsA) in the following cases : 
 
 I. When it is the only consonant-stem in a word ; thus, -jj- iJie, J 
 sash. 
 
 II. "When it is the first consonant-stem of a word that commences 
 with a vowel ; thus, _y^_ Asliby. ^ 
 
 III. When it is the final element of a word ; thus, p) ^*- 
 
 rSES OP SHEE. 
 
 § 130. The consonant-stem _J is written, upward (being then called 
 
4:6 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 ehee) wheu it is the last stem of a word tlie final element of wMch 
 is a vowel ; thus, .\-);. I 
 
 EITHER ISII OR SHEE. 
 
 § 131. At the commencement and in the middle of words, either iah or 
 s!ue may be used ; thus, ..t^. or -jA sAop, J^ or _J, shake, ";%" oi 
 \:i^" Insltop J — ish, however, is generally more convenient in such cases. 
 
 USES OF EL. 
 
 § 132. The consonant-stem /^ is written downward (being then 
 called el) in the following cases : 
 
 I. When it is the first consonant-stem in a word that commences 
 with a vowel, and is next followed by a horizontal stem ; thus, cL alike, 
 fi^ alum, (^ Olney, 'C\ Elihu. 
 
 il. When it is the final element of a word ; thus, "V" gale, '^" pull, 
 
 USES OF I.EE. 
 
 ^ 133. The consonant-stem (^ is written upward (being then called 
 lee) in the following cases : 
 
 I. When it is the only consonant-stem in a word ; thus, y" ale, ail, 
 (^ lay, ,f^ allay, '^ sail, sale, (^ lam. 
 
 II. When it commences a. word ; thus, (". lake, ('^"'"^ lame. 
 When, however, I (whether preceded by a vowel or not) is the first 
 consonant-sound in a word, and em, followed by pee or hee, is the sec- 
 ond, the down-strolie el may be used invariably, as better outlines ara 
 thereby secured ; thus, ^^v '"™P- 
 
 III. When it is the last consonant-stem in a word the final element 
 of which is a vowel ; thus, Kjp fdVy, j^ Kdley. 
 
 IV. Generally, when it is the first consonant-stem in a word 
 (whether it commences with a vowel or not), and is next followed by 
 a down-stroke stem ; thus, Y\ elbow, (<\ lobe, '/^ degy. 
 
 EITHER EL OK LEE. 
 
 § 134. In the middle of words, either d or he may be used ; but Xee 
 is generally preferred, because more convenient. 
 
 USES OF EE. 
 
 § 135. The down-stroke stem "^ er is used in the following cases : 
 I. When r is the first or only consonant-sound in a word that coni- 
 
 menoes with a vowel ; thus, '"> ark, arc, ~^ air, ^ array, /) airith, 
 
 [X^_ orb. For exceptions, see § 186, heading III. 
 
GEOUP CX)N80NAIJTS AND THEIE SIGHS. 47 
 
 n. When r is the final element of a word ; thus, X-, lore, ••-^^- 
 fear, °>( soar, sore, T) store. 
 
 ni. Always for r, before the stems em and Jtay, whether an initial 
 vowel precede it or not ; thus, ^V^ arm, """v^ Eome, roam, _^'. ?•«■ 
 hash. 
 
 TJSliS OF EEB. 
 
 § 136. The np-stroke stem / ree is used in the following cases : 
 
 I. "When r commences a word ; thus, /C] road, /\ rope, ^ nah. 
 For exceptions, see § 135, heading m. 
 
 II. When r is the last consonant-sound of a word the final element 
 of which is a vowel ; thus, \/- berry, Vc' sorrow, ^- story. 
 
 III. Always for r, before the slemsiW, dhiee, chay, and jay, whether it is 
 preceded by an initial vowel or not ; thus, >^ earth, /{_ wrath, •// arch. 
 
 BITHEB BR OK HEE. 
 
 § 137. In the middle of words, either ct or ree may be used ; but 
 ree is generally preferred, being more convenient. 
 
 GEOUP CONSONANTS AND THEIR SIGNS. 
 
 § 138. If the learner has carefully studied and mastered the princi- 
 ples thus far explained, he has acquired the means of writing phono- 
 graphically, and with tolerable brevity, any word in the language. 
 But there yet remains unemployed much stenographic material, with- 
 out which no system of short-hand can justly claim to be complete. 
 If we were obliged to write all the consonants with their full stem- 
 signs, there are many words in which they are so grouped together and 
 pronounced with such rapidity that the pen would find it difficult, if not 
 impossible, to keep pace with the tongue. To obviate this difficulty, 
 Phonography adopts the very natural plan of modifying the simple 
 stem of some one of the consonants to provide a sign for the entire 
 gi-oup. There are four different ways of modifying or altering simple 
 stems into group-signs, namely : 1. By an initial hook ; 2. By a final 
 hook ; 3. By lengthening ; and 4. By halving. 
 
 INITIAL HOOKS. 
 
 THE LIQUIDS L AND R. 
 
 § 139. The liquids I and r, in a, large number of words, are found 
 immediately folloiving other consonants, and blending with them so 
 as to form double consonant-sounds somewhat analogous to the double 
 
48 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 vowel-sounds or diphthongs. Thus, in the words day, flay, gray, fray, 
 the first consonant of each of the combinations cl,fl, gr,fr, glides so 
 q\iickly and imperceptibly into the second, or liquid, that the two seem 
 to become actually one sound. In Phonography, such compounds are 
 represented by the stem of the consonant that precedes the liquid, 
 modiiied by an initial hook. 
 
 THE EL-HOOKS. 
 
 § 140. A small hook at the beginning and on the circle side of any 
 straight stem, and a large hook at the beginning and on the concave 
 side of any curved stem, indicates that such consonant is immediately 
 followed by the liquid I; thus, 
 
 Stkaioht stems : ^ Tcay-l, = gay-l, [ iee-l, \ dee-l, /' chay-d, /' 
 
 jay-d, \ pee-l, \ hee-l, y ree-l, 
 
 CuKVED stems : J? ish-l, ^J shee-l, J) zhee-l, Q ess-l, *} zee-d, Q ith-l, 
 Q dhee-l, ^ ef-l, Q_ vee-l, z_^ ing-l, cL^ en-l, c~s em-l, (^ lee-l, (^ drl, 
 "^ er-l, cr^ hay-l, (^ yay-l, CN^ ( 
 
 THE ER-HOOKS. 
 
 § 141. A small hook at the beginning, and on the side opposite the 
 ?-hook, of any straight stem, and a small hook at the beginning and on 
 the concave side of any curved stem, indicates that such consonant is 
 immediately followed by the liquid r ; thus. 
 
 Straight stems : ,. kay-r, ^ gay-r, ] Ue-r, 1 dee-r, /" chay-r, ^ 
 
 Jay-r, "X pee-^, 'X hee-r, /" ree-r. 
 
 Cdrved stems : J) ish-r, ^ shee-r, J) zhee-r, ') ess-r, ') aee-r, ( ilh-r, 
 C dhee-r, <^ ef-r, t^_ vee-r, ^_^ ing-r, ,^_^. en-r, ^-^ em-r, C lee-r, f d-r, 
 ^ er-r, ^^—^ hayr, (^ yay-r, '^ way-r. 
 
 § 142. These hooks for I and r being initial, will of course, when 
 joined to ('~ or ^ , be at the top or bottom, according as the stem is 
 written downward or upward. 
 
 § 143. The signs sAce and d, with the dor er hook, should never be 
 used except in connection with other stem-signs (see §§ 22, 129, I., 
 and 133,1). 
 
 NAMES OP TnE EL AND EB HOOK COMBINATIONS. 
 
 § 144. The double consonant-signs of the d and <»■ hook series should 
 not be called kay-d, kay er, gay-d, gay-er, etc. , but by names formed, like 
 those of the ess-circle compounds, by inserting the short vowel f. be- 
 tween the two consonant-sounds represented by the sign ; thus, kel-, her, 
 
GKOtJP CONSONANTS AND THEIE SIGNS, 
 
 49 
 
 gd, ger, eel, ser, zd, zer, net, ner, etc. The hook-signs formed with the 
 stems ing, ish, slice, d, lee, er, Tee, are named respectively ingl, ingr, 
 uh'l, ish'r, shd, sher, d'l, d'r, Id, ler, erl, er'r, rd, rer. 
 
 CADTION. 
 
 § 145. The d and er hooks, though made at the beginning of the stem- 
 Bigns, are not read before hut after them. The learner, therefore, 
 
 should he very careful not to confound such signs as ^ kd, ^ fer, 
 
 etc., with C lee-kay, / ree-kay, etc. 
 
 MNEMONIC ASSISTANCE IN LEAENINQ THE EI, AND EK H00E-SIGN3. 
 
 § 146. The following diagrams will assist the learner in rememheriug 
 the sides of the d and er hooks on the straight stems. If the left hand, 
 with the first finger bent, be held up and turned in the directions 
 of kay, pee, tee, arid chay, the outlines of hd, pd, td, and chd will be 
 formed'; thus, 
 
 id 
 
 n 
 
 pel 
 
 And if the right hand be held up and turned in the same way, the 
 outlines of ker, per, ter, and cher will be formed ; thus, 
 
 char 
 
 kcrC 
 
 Observe that the Left hand (which word commences with L) is asso- 
 ciated with the c?-hook, and the Bight hand (which commences with R) 
 with the er-hook. 
 
 VOCALIZATION OF DOUBLE CONSONANT-SIGNS. 
 
 § 147. The double consonant-signs of the el and er hook series are 
 vocalized the same as if they were simple stems ; thus, -| ode, -^ odor, 
 
 8 
 
60 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 OEBEU OF KEADISQ VOCALIZED DODBLE CONSONAHT-SIGNS. 
 
 § 148. If a vowel he placed to the left of a perpendicular or inc'ilncd 
 double consonant-sign of the d or er hook series, or above a horizon- 
 tal, it is read be/ore both elements of the compound ; thus, Q_ oval, -—; 
 mgU ; if it be placed to the right of a perpendicular or inclined sign, or 
 under a horizontal, it is read after both elements ; thus, "X pray, 
 5 — ghw. 
 
 § 149. A vowel may be placed on each side of a double consonant 
 sign ; thus, ^^ only. 
 
 § 150. If a distinct vowel-sound is heard between the liquid and the 
 preceding consonant, each must be written by its stem-sign ; thus, 
 ^ pail, -y- fed, "_^" fool, \~. bore, '^—^ fair. 
 
 TOES OF THE EL AND ER HOOK SIGNS. 
 
 § 151. The double signs of the d and er hook series are used princi- 
 pally for such close combinations of the liquids with other consonants 
 as occur at the commencement of the words clay, grow, flow, pry, brow, 
 etc. ; but they are also generally used where there is a slight unac- 
 cented vowel separating the liquid from the preceding consonant, as in 
 '\ apple, --Q^-. evil, ^ every. 
 
 EL OE ER HOOK SIGKS JOINED TO PREOEDINQ STEMS. 
 
 § 152. An el or er hook sign may be joined to a preceding stem with- 
 out raising the pen from the paper; thus, , , ' knucJde, ^) busily, 
 ~~r\ caper, 'i~~% copper, yf) razor. 
 
 § 153. But when an el or er hook comes on the outside of a right or 
 an acute angle, formed by two straight stems, and sometimes when it 
 occurs after the ess-circle, the hook can not be perfectly formed with- 
 out interfering with speed. In such cases, however, a slight offset or 
 
 shoulder serves instead of a hook ; thus, ^^ reply, \ tiger, P_ checker, 
 
 i^^ gospd, ■^ registry. 
 
 § 154. The rules for the use of ish, shee, etc , commeucing on page 45, 
 olso apply when those stems are modified by initial hooks ; thus, "■'^"' 
 official, -"-W^-- officially, "^' falier, ■'v^- fishery, y^fairer. 
 
 EXCEITION — REL. 
 
 4 165. The sign y' rd, however, is generally preferred at the end 
 of a consonant outline, whether the word end with a vowel or not ; 
 thus, \y peatt, '\y' pearly, K:^ fairly, K^furl, y girl. 
 
GEOITP CONSONAITTS AND THEIE SIGNS. 51 
 
 SPKCIAL VOCALIZATION. 
 
 § 156. For the sake of obtaining briefer and more convenient out- 
 lines, double consonant-signs are occasionally used even where there ia 
 a distinct vowel-sound between the two consonants they represent. 
 When necessary, such intervening vowel may be represented as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 I. DoT-vowEM are indicated by a small circle, written in the three 
 vowel positions and placed lefore the double sign for the long vowels, 
 and after it for the short vowels ; thus, ,_£_ care, ..l, dear, f- teU, ..f... till. 
 But when the position of the consonant-signs renders it inconvenient 
 to observe this rule, the circle may be written on either side for a long 
 or a short vowel ; thus, ^^^^ engineer. 
 
 II. Dash- VOWELS and diphthongs are struck through the double con- 
 sonant-sign ; thus, ^^_ coal, ._,j, coarse, ^\^ burst, .>rrr3... endure. When a 
 hook would interfere with the striking of a vowel-sign through the 
 stem, it may be written at the end ; thus, .'"^77, call, ^^~\ empire. 
 
 TWO FOKMS rOE SL, SB, ZL, ZR. — IHEIK USES AT THE OOmiENOEMEJII 01 
 
 WOKDS. 
 
 § 157. The signs for I andr with the ess-circle prefixed, and the stems 
 ess and zee with the el and er hooks, give two modes of representing the 
 combinations si, sr, zl, and zr ; thus, (~ she, °~^ see-er, Q set, ') ser, 
 zd, y zer. According to the rules laid down at §§ 110, 113, and 114, 
 the above forms that have the initial circle should be used in words 
 that begin with the sound of ess ; thus, ^ sail, '^ soar ; the forms sel 
 and ser, when an ess-sound is the first consonant in a word that com- 
 mences with a vowel ; thus, '^ assail, •) acer ; and the forms zd and 
 zer, when a zee-sound is the first consonant in a word, whether there be 
 an initial vowel or not ; thus, .^j.. easel, .%.zeal, ■') Ezra. 
 
 THE ESS-CIRCLE PREEIXED TO THE EL AND BB. HOOK SIGNS. 
 
 § 158. The ess-circle may be prefixed to all the eZ-hook signs, and 
 to the curved er-hook signs, both at the commencement and in the 
 middle of words, by turning it on the inside of the hook ; thus, „ 
 thd, \ spd, Q_ sfd, Q sthd, 'S^^ serl, (^s smd, c^^ end, (J^ sfer, ^_^ 
 
 eingr, ^-^ smer. 
 
 § 159. A loop or large circle is never prefixed to an eZ-hook sign, be 
 cause it would be liable to be mistaken for the small circle. 
 
52 THE COMPLETE PHOlTOGEiPHEE. 
 
 niB CIBCLES AND ST LOOP PEEFIXED TO tHE SIKAIGHT EK-HOOK 8IGNS. 
 
 § 100. The two circles and the st loop are prefixed to the straight 
 «r-hook signs, hoth at the commencement and in the middle of words, 
 by merely writing them on the w-hook side of the stems, or, in other 
 words, by making the hook into a small circle, a large circle, or a 
 loop, as the case may be ; thus, "X per, °\ sper, °\ m-per, "X steper, 
 
 — o — Icay-sker, (^ tee-sker, Lchay-sper, \ pee-sker, »^ pee-sper, 
 
 q dee-sis-ier. 
 
 § 161. The classes of signs treated of at §§ 158 and 160 may bo 
 called respectively the " skel series" and the " sker series." 
 
 OKDEK OP EEADINQ VOOAIIZED SKEL ANB SEER SIGjra. 
 
 § 1 62. When signs of the s!cel and sker series are vocalized, the con- 
 Bonants and vowels are read in the following order : firstly, the initial 
 circle or loop ; secondly, all vowels written before the stem ; thirdly, the 
 «tem with its hook, and the intervening vowel, if there be one ; and, 
 fourthly, any vowel written after the stem ; thus, ^ sable, '\ saber, 
 "\ spraj/, 5s supply, °\ suspire, •/ stager, ii^ disclosed, ^_^ disgrace, 
 
 yV . prosper, QdisaMer. 
 
 § 163. Sometimes, in the middle of words, it is more convenient to 
 express both the circle and the er-hook distinctly ; thus, ^ eispress, 
 "^^^^1;;:;; extreme. 
 
 ■ § 164. The consonant r may generally be omitted from the syllablca 
 scribe and scrip, in such words as describe, prescribe, prosaibe, description, etc. ; 
 thus,..tT\.. describe. 
 
 THE WAT HOOK. 
 
 § 165. The semi-consonant sound way, when preceded by several of 
 
 the consonants, also coalesces with them in a manner similar to the 
 
 liquids I and r, as in the words twist, request, etc. To represent these 
 
 combinations, a large initial hook is used on the eZ-hook side of any 
 
 straight conson.ant ; thus, c kay-w, q gay-w, P iee-v>. 
 
 § 166. These signs may be named Icwee, gwee, twee, etc. Tliey are vo- 
 calized the same as the M and ker series ; and the ess-circle is prefixed 
 to them the same as to the kd signs. 
 Examples : f * twice, '5 — ^ acquire, ■ ^-■■■y quick, "r— squaw, /^ 
 
 THE TAY HOOK. 
 § 167. For stenographic reasons, the consonant yay is expressed by a 
 large hook on the «r-hook side of the straight stems ; thus, <;— kay-y. 
 
GEOUP CONSONANTS AND THEIE SIGNS. 53 
 
 '] tee-y, ^ hee-y. The use of this hook will he fully explained heie- 
 after, it heing seldom employed, except iu phrase writing. 
 
 HOOK FOB EN, IN, OR UN. 
 6 168. The syllables en, in, and un rasiY he prefixed to the straight 
 treble signs of the " tker series," by turning a small backward hook on 
 the eZ-hook side of the stem ; and to curved stems with initial circles, 
 by turning a similar hook on the outside of the curve ; thus, » \ in 
 seribe, g^:^ umcrew, 't^_^ unstrung, ,^\^ enslave. 
 
 NAME AKB USE OP THE INITIAI. EN-HOOK. 
 
 § 169. This hook may be called either the in, en, or un hook, accord- 
 ing to which of those syllables it represents. It is used before any 
 straight stem of the " sker series," and before any curved stem that is 
 the arc of a circle struck in the direction opposite to that of the stem en. ^ 
 
 °^ ^^ ^ FINAL HOOKsf— ^ ' 
 
 ^^•^ EF AND VEE HOOKS. X 
 
 § 170. Ef or vee may be added to any straight stem (whether it he 
 simple, or have an initial hook, circle, or loop) by a small final hook on 
 
 the circle side ; thus, ^kay-forv, [^ Ue-forv, / chay-f or v,\ hee-fox 
 
 V, ^_3 ger-f or », „_j sekf or v, \^ stifp-f or ». 
 
 NAMES OE THE EF-HOOK COMPOUNDS. 
 
 § 171. These compounds may be named respectively kef, Uf, chef, 
 lef, gref, skef, stepef. 
 
 VOLCALIZATION.— KUBE K)B WKITINQ. 
 
 § 172. When a vowel occurs between the consonant represented by 
 the stem-sign and the ef or vee indicated by the hook, the vowel-sign 
 is written to the stem as if no hook were affixed ; thus, \ pay, \ pave. 
 
 KULE FOK BEADING. 
 
 § 173. A vowel-sign written to a stem that has an ef or vee hook, is 
 always read before the hook ; thus, [■ deaf, = cave. 
 
 EE AND VEE DISTINGUISHED. 
 
 § 174 AVhen great exactness is required, the hook maybe made 
 heavy for vee; thus, --^-i- prme, instead of ..'X^v proof. But generally 
 DO confusion will result from using the light-hook for both ef and vee. 
 
51 THE COMPLETE PHONOGRAPHEE. 
 
 EP AND TEE HOOK ON CDKTES. 
 
 § 175. A long narrow hook may be written to the curved st'^ms fci 
 ef or vee ; thus, (^ dhef, ^-^ mef. This hook should, however, be used very 
 sparingly by inexperienced phonographers. It is principally used by re- 
 porters in phrase writing. 
 
 EN HOOK. 
 
 § 176. The consonant en may be joined to any straight stem 
 (whether simple, or compounded with an initial hook, cirde, or loop) 
 by a small final hook on the side opposite the ^-hook ; and to any 
 
 curved consonant, by a small final hook on the concave side ; thus, , 
 
 km/-n, J iee-n, ^ ef-n, (^ lee-n. 
 
 NAMES or THE EN-HOOK COMPOUNDS. 
 
 § 177. The ere-hook signs are named in a manner similar to the ef- 
 hook signs ; thus, the characters in the last section are called respect- 
 ively ken, ten, fen, len. The signs el-n, ish-n, shee-n, er-n, ree-n are called 
 el' n, sfien, sheen, ern,ren. 
 
 VOCALIZATION. 
 
 § 178. The cn-hook signs are vocalized the same as those of the ef- 
 hook ; thus, -^ cane, J • attair., ^ shown, ^ vain, (^ Jlomn. 
 
 WHEN AN EF OE EN HOOK SHOULD KOI BE USED. 
 
 § 179. When ef, vee, or en is the final consonant-sound in a word that 
 ends with a vowel, the stem-sign must be used, because the hook docs 
 not furnish the requisite position for the sign of such final vowel ; 
 thus, I cough, ' L: coffee, ,__= grave, "^^"V; gravy, ^-r^ men, ,~^:^_ fiuiny. 
 
 SHUN HOOKS. 
 § 180. The syllables shun or a/ran, as heard in nation, fusion, etc., may 
 be added to any straight stem by a large final hook on the ef-hook. side ; 
 and to any curved stem, by a large final hook on the concave side ; 
 thus, _^ kay-shun, \_^ ef-shm. 
 
 NAMES or THE SIIUN-HOOK COMTOUNDS. 
 
 § 181. The s7iun-hook signs are named as follows: kay-shun is 
 called te/mii; ef-shun,/i;s/(un; el-shun, elshun; lee-shun, leshun; em' 
 ehun, meshun, etc. 
 
 VOCALIZATION. 
 
 § 182. The shun-hook signs are vocalized the same as the ^ and en 
 
 hook signs ; thus, i---^ caution, i_^occasion, '--^motion, -^s^nation, ^fashion, 
 
 § 183, If it should be necessary to distinguish between shun and 
 
GKOUP CONSONANTS AND THEIE SIGMS. 55 
 
 than, the hook may he thicki ned for the latter ; thtis, (^ evasion, in 
 stead of js^^ ovation, which words, in unvocalized phonography, might 
 in rare instances be confounded. 
 
 § 184. In the common orthography, the two sounds represented hy 
 this hook are indicated by a variety of spelling, as Hon in notion, eean in 
 ocean, ssion in mission, sion infusion, shion in fashion, dan in logician, sktii 
 in Persian, etp 
 
 SEEN USED INSTEAD OF SHDN. 
 
 § 185. When ish and en final are the only consonant-sounds in a 
 word, the sign ^ shen must be used ; thus, ^' ocean. Shen should 
 also be used when the only other consonants in the word are repre- 
 sented by an initial circle or loop ; thus, J' session, ^' secession, jj' 
 station. 
 
 § 186. The word ocean, and any similar word, may, however, be repre- 
 sented by the sAun-hook by joining it to the preceding word ; thus, " "\""\ 
 Padfic Ocean. 
 
 SMALL HOOK FOR SHUN — ITS NAME. 
 
 § 187. The syllable shun or zhun may be added to any stem that has 
 a final circle or loop, by turning a small hook on the back of the stem ; 
 
 thus, e kess-shun, (^^ fess-shun, f^ lesler-shun, etc. This may be called 
 
 the isAMK-hook. It may be vocalized by writing a, first or second 
 place vowel before the hook, and a third-place vowel after it ; thus, ■ ^ 
 accession, --(;v- physidan. But ishun may generally be left unvocalized 
 without endangering the legibility- of the writing ; thus, \ cessation. 
 
 HOOK FOE TR, DK, OR DHR. 
 § 188. The compounds tr, dr, and dhr, with any intervening vowel, 
 may be added to any straight sign by a large final hook on the en-hook 
 side; thus, — -, Tcay-tr, \ tee-tr ; and such combinations are vocalized 
 the same as those of the other final hooks ; thus, -73 cater, 1~p actor, '^~^ 
 datier, <^-^ equator, '^"^ gather, Z' rather. 
 
 jjAina or the tb-hook and its compounds. 
 § 189. This hook maybe called ter, der, ordher;a,nA its compounds 
 may be named like those of the ess-circle, or those of the en and e/ hooks 
 thus kay-ter or-dher is called Mler or kedher ; gay-ter or-dher, getter 01 
 gedher ; ree-ter or -dher, relter or redher, etc. 
 
 TER AND DER DISTINGUISHED. 
 
 § ISO. When necessary, the hook may be shaded for der; thus, <^ 
 
 r-'da-, instead of <^ writer. 
 
56 THE COMPLETE PHOKOGEAPHEE. 
 
 SPECIAL VOCALIZATION OF THE TER-HOOK. 
 
 § 191. Whenever it is necessary to express a vowel or diphthong 
 that occurs between the tee and er sounds represented by the ^«r-hook, 
 it may be done in accordance with the rule for " special vocalization" 
 at § 156, or, if it belong to the third position, by writing it within the 
 hook; thus, "i=^' creature. 
 
 CIRCLES AND LOOPS ADDED TO THE PINAL HOOK SIGNS. 
 
 ESS-CIEOLB ADDED TO THE EF, SHTJU, TBR, AND CURVED EN HOOK SIGNS. 
 
 § 192. The ess-circle (but not the loops or large circle) may be added 
 to an ef, shun, or ter hook, and to an cre-hook on a curved sign, by 
 
 writing' it inside the hook ; thus, => caves, i_3 occasions, ^Ca fashions, 
 
 ^7^ actors, (^ vaties. 
 
 CIRCLES AND LOOPS ADDED TO THE STRAIGHT EN-HOOK SIGNS. 
 
 § 193. All the circles and loops may be added to the straight en-hook 
 signs by simply writing them on the en-hook side, without attempting 
 to show the form of the hook ; thus, X P"'": X puns, >^ punster, J- 
 K, J - dunces, ^^>= ag^ 
 
 NAMES OE THE COMEINATION.S OP STEMS, PINAL HOOKS, AND CIRCLES OR LOOPS. 
 
 § 194. These compounds are named by adding the sound of the circle 
 or loop to the name of the sign to which it is afl&xed ; thus, kef-s is 
 called fe/s; keshun-s, Aresfans ; ketters, Wters; ven-s, vens; ken-s, fens; 
 ken-ss, kensis ; ken-st, kenst ; ken-str, kenster. The circles and loops on 
 the e;^-h(iok side and end of straight stems are also called the ens and 
 ensis, circles, and the ensi! and ensier loops. 
 
 CADTION. EN-HOOK CIRCLES SELDOM USED IN THE MIDDLE OP WORDS. 
 
 § 195. The en-hook circles and loops should never be used in the 
 middle of words, except that ens may in a few instances be written, 
 when the direction of the stems bet.veen which it occurs permits both 
 the circle and hook to be distinctly formed ; thus, /^'~^ ransom, ~^ 
 
 ffainsaid. Therefore, such outlines as J dess-kay, —^ kessis-ree, 6, 
 
 pee-sper, — „ — kay-sker, etc., must not be read respectively dens-kay, 
 kensis-ree, penspee, kens-leay, etc. 
 
 ESS-CIROLE USED TOR ENS. 
 
 § 196. In the middle of a few words the simple ess-circle may be used 
 for ens without endangering the legibility of the writing, the en being 
 
GEOUP CONSONANTS AND THEIE SIGNS. 57 
 
 omitted from the word ; thus, i, transpose. And, in a few instances, 
 the ess-circle may be so used in connection with a succeeding straight 
 sign from which an r-hook is omitted in accordance with § 164 ; thus, 
 2_o transgress. But the ens-circle may sometimes be distinctly written 
 when it can be turned on the back of a succeeding curve ; thus, i!_j. 
 dancing. 
 
 THE ESS-niROLE AND JSHOJ ADDED TO THE EN-HOOK CIKCLES AND lOOPS. 
 
 § 197. The ess-circle and isJmn may be added to the en-hook circles 
 and loops by turning them on the opposite side of the stem ; thus, ^ 
 punsters, -^- iransiiion. 
 
 * THE ESS-OIKOLE ADDED TO ISHTN. 
 
 § 198. The ess-circle may be added to' ishun by turning it inside the 
 hook ; thus, --U-- physicians, -X- transitions. 
 
 FINAL HOOKS USED IN THE MIDDLE OE WOKDS. 
 
 § 199. When more conyenient, the final hooks may.be used in the 
 
 middle of words instead of the stem-signs ; thus, i^ cover, -p?_j, 
 
 cunning, sl3 national, ^ processional, -^- transitional, ^^ coUaleral. 
 
 CmCLE INSIDE OF HOOKS. 
 
 § 200. When the ess-circle is written inside of the hooks, it may be 
 made a little smaller than usual, and it is not essential that it should 
 be a perfect circle, as there is no danger of its being confused with the 
 loops, which are never so used. 
 
 LENGTHENING. 
 
 DOUHLE-LENGTH CURVED SIGNS. 
 
 § 201. Doubling the length of any curved sign adds either tr, dr, oi 
 (JArythus, ^ _, en-ir, etc. 
 
 NAMES OF DOUBLE-LENGTH CURVES. 
 
 § 202. The double-length curved signs, like the fer-hook combina- 
 tions, are named generally by inserting the vowel sound e between the 
 sound of the simple stem and the added consonants or syllable ; thug, 
 ef-tr is called /e<fer; ef-dr,fedder ;e{-dh.T,fe(^ier; em-tr, metferj way-dhr, 
 wedher ;ha,-y-ti, hetter ; en-dr, nedder. But ish-tr, shee-tr, el-tr, lee-tr, 
 er-tr, and ing-tr are named respectively ishter, shetter, elter, letter, erter, 
 and ingter. 
 
 POSITIONS OP LENGTHENED STEMS. 
 
 § 203. Some phonographic writers indicate any given position of a 
 
5S THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 lengthened curve ty commenorng it at the same point in relation to tht 
 line of writing that the single length of the same stem is commenced 
 at for the same position. But the following rule is found to give 
 greater distinctness and increased legibility to these signs. 
 
 POSITIONS 01' HOKIZONTAL STEMS. 
 
 § 204. The positions of horizontal double-length curves are necessa- 
 rily the same as those of single lengths ; thus, 
 
 FmsT POSITION : ^^^^, tneUer, ^TTT^. netler. 
 
 Second position : .,^::7>^ melier, ^ ^ ingler. 
 
 Thikd position : ..^^^^ hetier, netter. 
 
 positions op DOWNWAKD lengthened CttllTES. 
 
 § 205. The positions of downward double-length curves are as 
 follows : 
 
 FiEST Position. — ^The lower end resting on the line ; thus, l^ 
 vetter, •) shetta: 
 
 Second Position. — Divided by the line into two equal parts ; thus, 
 -(■ dhdter. 
 
 Third Position.— About two thirds of the sign below the line ; thus, 
 "^^!11 /^^! ' (' iheiter, '")" shatter. 
 
 positions op upwabd lengthened ooeves. 
 
 § 206. The positions of upward double-length curves are as follows : 
 
 First Position. — Commencing about one third the length of a fe« 
 above the line ; thus, f Utter . 
 
 Second Position. — Commencing at the line ; thus, f^^ letter. 
 
 Third Position. — Commencing about one third the length of a t« 
 below the Kne ; thus, ../^. Utter. 
 
 VOCALIZATION OP lENQTHENED CURVES. 
 
 § 207. Any vowel or diphthong sign written to a lengthened curve 
 is read before the added consonants ir, dr, or dhr; thus, v^j_^ under 
 (^ Utter, ^-^-.^ mother, ../^' Uader, ^ flatter, r~ psalter. 
 
 UNAL HOOKS BEAD BEFORE THE ADDED CONSONANTS. 
 
 § 208. The power of any final hook on a lengthened curve takes 
 effect before the added coa-:onants tr, dr, thr, or dhr; thus, /^ slender, 
 1-—.^ tormentor. 
 
GEOUP CONSONANTS AND THEIB SIGNS. 59 
 
 FIIfAI CIKCLE OR LOOP TO BE KEAD AFTER THE ADDED CONSONANTS. 
 
 § 209. A final circle or loop is read after the added consonants tr, 
 dr, etc. ; thus, ^_^__, mailers, ,— p^ mothers, . -^ cylinders. 
 
 SPECIAL VOCALIZATION. 
 
 § 210. A vowel or diphthong occurring immediately before the final 
 »• of a lengthened curve may be written in accordance with the rule for 
 
 "special vocalization" at § 156; thus, "^-^-^ mtire, '\^ ^ adventure, 
 
 "l^ soldier. 
 
 POSITIONS OF DOUBLE-LENGTH STRAIGHT STEMS. 
 
 § 211. The positions of the double-length or repeated perpendicular 
 or inclined straight stems may be indicated in the same manner as 
 those of the lengthened curves ; thus, 
 
 First position: dee-dee, y^ ree-ree. 
 
 Second POSITION : - -/---jay jay, y"^ ree-ree. 
 
 Third position : -^sT bee-bee, _yf_ ree-ree. 
 
 HALVING. 
 
 HALF-LENGTH STEMS 
 
 § 212. Either iee or dee may be added by halving to any consonant- 
 sign, whether simple or compounded with an initial circle or loop, or 
 with any hook, final as well as initial ; thus, _ kay-t, „_ sek-t, ^ 
 ttek-t, ^ ds-pee-t, ^ sker-t, ^ kel-t, ^ ker-t, c_ kwee-t, ^ pef-t, \ pen-t, \j 
 peskun-t, N, petter-t, \ plen-t, -\ pren-t, \ spen-t. 
 
 NAMES OF THE HALF-LENGTH SIGNS. 
 
 § 213. The half-length compounds are named by pronouncing the 
 vowel e with the consonants represented by the sign, the vowel being 
 placed where it will make the most easily uttered name; thus, the 
 half lengths at § 212 are respectively called ket, seM or sket, stdct, sis-pel, 
 skrei or skeri, klet or kelt, kert or kret, kwet, peft, pent, peshunt, petierd, plent, 
 prent, spent. But the stems ess, ish, shee, el, lee, er, and ree, when halved, 
 are named, respectively, est, isht, shel, ell, let, ert, and ret. 
 
 CAUTION. HALVING OF STEMS WITH FINAL CIRCLES OR LOOPS ATTACHED. 
 
 § 214. It will be observed that when a stem with any final hook is 
 halved, the added tee or dee is read after both stem and hook ; but when 
 a stem with a final circle or loop is halted, the added tee or dee must he 
 
60 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 read immediately before the circle or loop. In other words, final cir- 
 cles and loops are added to the half-length signs in the same manner 
 as to the full-length stems ; thus, ^ kay-s ■ Icess), _^ kay-t-s (JceUi), "J^ 
 
 dcr-f-s (drefs), '[^ der-f-t-s (drefts), _„ kay-n-s (Jeens), ^ kay-n-t-s (fente), 
 ,— ^ cm-at (meat), ,-^ em-t-st (metst or nadst). 
 
 POSITIONS OF HALF-LENGTH STEMS. 
 
 HORIZONTAL STEMS. 
 
 § 215. The positions of half-length horizontals are, of course, the 
 game as the positions of the full-length horizontals (see § 61) ; thus, 
 
 First position : TT. ""^'i °r! *^i .^. **"'• 
 Second position : ^ net, _, gent, ^ ingt. 
 Third position: -... ingt, -- sent, get. 
 
 PEEPENDIOULAR AND INCLINED STEMS. 
 
 § 216. The positions of perpendicular and inclined stems are aa 
 follows : 
 
 First Position. — Above the line, the lower end of the stem distant 
 from it about one third the length of a tee ; thus, ' iel, "~i bre?it, ^ 
 teft, ■^ rets, J jmt, J dent. 
 
 Second Position. — Resting on the line ; thus, J" stent, j jent, j dent. 
 
 Third Position. — Just below the line ; thus, -|C- tlent, -- dent. 
 
 §217. For the third position, some phonographers write half-length 
 perpendicular and inclined stems through instead of bdm the line ; thus 
 .1.. dent. 
 
 VOCALIZED HALP-LENGTH SIGNS. — ORDER OF KEADINO. 
 
 § 218. A vocalized half-length sign is read in the following order : 
 First, the^gtem (with its hooks, initial circle or loop, if there be any) 
 and its vowel-signs, in accordance with rules heretofore given, the 
 same as if it had not been halved ; second, the tee or dm added by halv- 
 ing ; and, third, the final circle or loop, if there be any. 
 
 Examples : _ get, \. date, ^ yet, ^ sect, ^ pleUe, ^ jirate, ^ hurt, n^ 
 viord, .(> settled, ^^ sobered, j. trained, ^ sprained, -.^^ patient, ^ Uend, %^ Uenda, 
 ,3 ancient, ]^ brands, J"_ stand, ;f^_ approved, r-,- efficient. 
 
 DEB AND TEE DISTINGUISHED. 
 
 § 219. When a stem with an en-hook is halved, if it be deemed de- 
 sirable ever to distinguish whether the added sound l e dee or tee, it may 
 
GEOTTP CONSONANTS AND THEIR SIGNS. 61 
 
 be (lone by shading the hook for dee ; thus, ~^ pained, instead of ^ paint. 
 This distinction is, however, seldom necessary in practice, the context 
 being generally a sufficient guide. 
 
 § 220. The half-length signs may be joined with other signs, whether 
 of the same or different lengths, or whether simple or compound ; and 
 they may be used either at the beginning, in the middle, or at the end 
 of words; thus, V— ^ bottom, \^^ ascertain, ^^^ry intimation, viv.;- 
 
 intimate, 'J^ ascertained, ^^ fortifitd, W- affidavit, „^^^ sentiment, / ■\ 
 
 reputable, ^^ named, \\piiiszled, '"^ muzzled. 
 
 SPECIAL EEMAEKS UPON THE HALF-LENaTHS. 
 
 IMl'EOPER JOININGS- " 
 
 § 221. A full-length and a half-length stem must not be joined, if 
 one or both be straight, or if both be curved, but are arcs of circles 
 struck in the same direction, except they form an angle at the point 
 of junction ; for instance, kay and ket, lee and ket, e^and ket, etc., are not 
 allowable combinations, because it is difficult to distinguish such signs, 
 on the one hand, from a full-length stem, and on the other hand, from 
 two full-length stems. Thus, kay-ket joined, might be supposed to be 
 kay made a little too long, or kay-kay made too short. In these cases 
 
 the full- leng th stems should be used ; thus, write '^ | not ^ for 
 
 "arreet, C I not Ci for liked, ^ — ^ not ■ ( for effed. 
 
 SHT AFTER EF OK VEE. 
 
 § 222. "When the combination shi is immediately preceded by ef or 
 vee, it must be represented either by the full-length stems shee-tee, or 
 by the downward half-length isM; thus, C^ — \ lavished, "^fished. 
 
 STRAIGHT HALF-LENGTHS IN SAME DIRECTION NOT ALLOWED. 
 
 § 223. Two straight half-lengths running in the same direction can 
 not of course be joined, because they would appear the same as one full- 
 length stem ; thus, | is dee, not ded-ded. To avoid the inconvenience 
 of disjoining in such cases, the first compound should be written with 
 full-length stems, and the other with a half-length, as in the word 
 ' L catgut. 
 
 '■■■ SYLLABLES -TED AND -DED. 
 
 § 224. The syllables -ted and -ded, terminating adjectives and the 
 perfect participle and preterit of regular verbs, are generally written 
 with the signs ted and ded, without regard to the manner of writing 
 the primitive word; thus, write ~ act, but I- not ^ for acted; _ 
 ^Offd, but -r-|. not "^ fox goaded. 
 
G2 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 HALE-LENGTHS DISJOINED. 
 
 § 225. Sometimes it is necessary to detach a half-length from the 
 preceding stem, or else to write its equivalent full-length stems ; thus, 
 
 ~^'i waited, \\ dreaded, ~^", or ] 
 
 EST STEUOK UPWAKD. 
 
 § 226. Occasionally, when it is difficult or inconvenient to join the 
 half-length est to a final shun or en hook, it is allowahle to strike it up- 
 ward; thus, L s factionist, ■■'i^-'V- doaiiionist. 
 
 MEDIAL VOWEL AEIEtt HALE-LENGTH. 
 
 § 227. When a vowel occurs immediately after tee or dee added by 
 halving, if the next succeeding consonant-sign be a circle or loop, there 
 is no position in which to write the vowel-sign, and it must be omit- 
 ted ; as the first i in 'iv; anticipate. But if the next consonant after a 
 tee or dee sound be written with a stem-sign, the vowel may be written 
 to that ; thus, -.v-;- esteem. 
 
 STEM-SIGNS FOR TEE OR DEE EEEORE A FINAL VOWEL. 
 
 § 228. When either to or dee is the last consonant-sound in a word, of 
 which the final element is a vowel, it should be wiitteu w ith the stem- 
 sign, because, if the halving principle were used, no vowel-position would 
 be provided for the sign of the final vowel ; thus, .^r:^.. ireto. The sajne 
 is also true when a word ends with a circle or loop preceded by tee or 
 dee, with an intervening vowel ; thus, .>rr|^.^. induce. This rule gives a 
 distinction by outline between such words as ■"^"" pity and ■^-- pit, 
 "rX. notice and ^ notes, etc. 
 
 EXCEPTION.- — SPECIAL LICENSE 
 
 § 229. When, however, the final vowel of a word Is third place, and 
 the consonant immediately preceding it is the sound of tee or dee, it is 
 allowable, by way of license, to use the halving principle, and then to 
 write the vowel-sign at the end of the halved stem ; thus, ^ facuUij, 
 '^ vitality, --j^' neutrality,'^ frailty. Such vowel-sign is read before 
 a final circle or loop joined to the half-length ; thus, ^s^. faculties. 
 
 § 230. The above exception must not be extended to vowels of either 
 the first or second position ; its chief use is to shorten the outlines of a 
 large claBS of long words that end with the vowel-sound » preceded by 
 either a tee or dee sound. 
 
GEOUP CONSONANTS AND THEIE SIGNS. 63 
 
 AMBIGUOUS ODTLINES. HOW AVOIDED. 
 
 § 231. The use of the halving principle to indicate hoth tee aud dee 
 will sometimes give the same form for two different words ; thus, ~ 
 may he either got or God, '^ either hat or tad ; hut, in the great majority 
 of cases, the context will show which word is intended. If. however, 
 it should ever he deemed desirable to distinguish hetween such words, 
 the consonant tee may he indicated hy halving, and dee written with the 
 
 full stem-sign ; thus, x pale, as distinguished from ^ paid; though, 
 
 generally, no ambiguity would arise from writing paid the' same as 
 pate, and so with most other words of the same class. 
 
 HALl-LENGTH KBE. 
 
 § 232. Half-length ree, when standing alone, should generally he 
 used for ree followed by the sound of tee, and ree-dee written with the 
 two stem-signs ; thus, ^ rate, X\ raid. But after another consonant- 
 stem, ree may be halved to add either a tee or dee sound ; thus, -T"^ 
 marl or marred, Vx 
 
 TWb VOWELS BEFORE EINAL TEE OR DEE. 
 
 § 233. When the sound of tee or dee is immediately preceded by two 
 vowels, the stem-sign should be used ; thus, ^ pod. This rule, and 
 the one given at § 232, secures a distinction by outline hetween such 
 words as -5' right, <M ride, and ^ riot. 
 
 FINAL DEE PRECEDED BY EL, REE^ OR EN, ETC. 
 
 § 234. When the sound of dee is final, and is preceded by either Ice, 
 ree, or m, which is itself both preceded and followed by a vowel, the 
 s«em-sign should generally be used ; thus, ^C\ soMd,\/]tamed, ^~^ 
 numeyed. 
 
 HFWARD AND DOWNWARD STEMS HALVED. 
 
 § 285. When convenient, the rules for the use of upward aud down- 
 ward stems (see page 45 and onward) should be observed when those 
 stems are halved ; thus, ;X' pulled, '\: appellate ; but half-length ree 
 is generally preferred to halved er, even In violation of the rule. Sue 
 the example mart, at § 232, 
 
fii THE CbMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 GROUP VOWELS AISTD THEIR SIGNS.— 
 IMPROPER DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 GENERAL KEMAKKS. 
 
 § 236. As has been 'before remarked, there are but four proper diph- 
 thongs recognized in our language. These diphthongs and their signs 
 have been already fully treated of at page 30 and onward. We have, 
 however, many other double vowels that do not come strictly within 
 the definition of proper diphthongs, but which are yet so like them in 
 their nature, and are of such frequent occurrence in words, that it has 
 been found convenient to represent them in a similar manner, and to 
 give them signs that may be made with facility and vrithout taking off 
 the pen. 
 
 § 237 . These double sounds differ from the chse or proper diphthongs 
 in having a less intimate connection of their components ; they may, 
 therefore, be termed openroi improper diphthongs. 
 
 COALESCENCE OF TBE DODELE VOWELS. 
 
 § 238. The degree of intimacy with which these double sounds co- 
 alesce varies in different words. Sometimes they abroach very nearly 
 to the character of close diphthongs, as, for instance, the sounds of 
 ah-i in the word aye (yes), or oo-i in Lowis, etc. ; while in other words 
 the two concurrent vowels are entirely severed, as ahiiu hurroAing, 
 oo-t, in cooing, etc. When, however, the primary accent of the word falls 
 upon the second of the two vowel-sounds, as in deistk, the most com- 
 plete separation occurs, and they cease in any degree to resemble proper 
 diphthongs, except in the fact that they are -two vowels pronounced in 
 Buocession, with no consonant intervening. 
 
 COMPOSITION OP THE DOtmLE VOWEIS. 
 
 § 239. It will also be seen that in nearly all of the double vowels, 
 whether they are close or open diphthongs, the short sound t is one of 
 the elements, being united, cither Initially or finally, with some one 
 of the other vowel-sounds of the scale, as well as with another i sound. 
 
 EEMAEKS ON THE DOUBLE-VOWEL SIGNS. 
 
 § 240. The improper dipIUIiongs, like the proper dipMhongs, are repre- 
 sented by small angular characters, which are written to thVconsonant- 
 stem in the position of the distinguishing vowel, or the vowel with 
 whicl. the sound i is joined. The first or second stroke of the sign is 
 maiie heavy, according as the first or second vowel of the combination 
 Is lon{/. The signs representing the dot-voiods in combination with 1, 
 
GROUP VOWELS iND THEIE SIGN'S. 
 
 65 
 
 open upv.'ard and downward, while those representing the dash-vawds so 
 combined, open to the right and left. In the table below, at the right 
 of each sign are placed the letters that represent its two sounds ; and 
 under the sign is given a word in which they are heard. We have not 
 been able to find any English word containing the double sounds u-i, 
 as represented at No. 17, and some of the others occur very rarely ; 
 but they, together with the proper diphthongs, i, oi, ow, and ew, 
 have been inserted in their appropriate places in order to make a 
 complete exhibit of the scheme of double-vowel signs. The learaer 
 will observe that the compound i-i has given to it two signs, Nos. 
 6 and 12. These are so exhibited, because the mode of constructing 
 the scale gives such a result ; but, as in practice only one sign would 
 be required for those sounds, the sign No. 12 may be invariably used 
 for them, and No. 6 used for the diphthong i when it will be more 
 convenient than its proper sign, No. 4, of the first position. The 
 diphthong ew has also two signs, Nos. 21 and 24, the first representing 
 the sound of the diphthong in accented, and the latter in unaccented 
 syllables ; but in ordinary practice. No. 24 is employed in all cases, 
 whether the syllable be accented or not. By bearing in mind that 
 the double-vowel signs are arrangfed in the precise order of the scale 
 of simple vowels? the learner will be greatly aided in committing 
 them to memory. 
 
 TABLE OF DOUBLE-VOWEL SIGNS. 
 
 DOT-VOWEIfl. 
 
 4. 
 
 *i ah-t, 
 
 vj d-z, 
 
 vl ^-». 
 
 'I a-m) 
 
 v| e-i, 
 
 hurmfang, 
 
 saving, 
 
 seeing, 
 
 i, 
 
 hygcjst, 
 
 T. 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 
 10. 
 
 11. 
 
 "i i-ah, 
 
 a; l-d, 
 
 J »-^. 
 
 ^i i-S, 
 
 a| i-e, 
 
 /ago, 
 
 opiate, 
 
 hygiene, 
 
 maniac. 
 
 carrier, 
 
 l-t, (l) 
 
 12. 
 carrying. 
 
 18. 
 
 11. 
 
 BASH-VOWEtS. 
 15. 16. 
 
 IT. 
 
 o-i (oi),- 
 
 satving, going, doing, oil, 
 
 19. 20. 21. 22. 
 
 *; i-av>, >': i-o, ! i-oo (bw) 
 
 carry-all, olio, duly, 
 
 ExAicTLES : '^ opiate, '^■" o^date, 
 "^^lyi Ontario, -;[^- vUom. 
 
 i-o. 
 
 23. 
 
 18. 
 
 Bedouins, 
 24. 
 
 1-56 (ew), 
 
 idiom, varioifs, rescue. 
 
 « maniac, if. Anibia., 
 
f6 THE COMPLETE PHONOGBAPHEE. 
 
 § 241. In a similar manner, another series of double signs might 
 also be provided for double vowels having as their basic component 
 the other short close vowel do ; but it would be of little practical value 
 in writing English, as we have only one instance of such a combina- 
 tion that does not fall within the series given in the above table, 
 namely, the proper diphthong '"i 0-60 (ow). 
 
 SIMPLE SIGNS INSTEAD OP DODBLE ALLOWABLE. 
 
 § 242 It is not imperative that the double signs should be used : 
 the double vowels may be correctly represented by the simple sigus of 
 their elements, written to the consonants in accordance with the 
 principles laid down at §§ 35 and 57 ; thus, we may write ----;- or 
 .^^__^. fgj. cgffi„g^ or ^_ foj. clayey. 
 
 TREBLE VOWEL-SIGNS. 
 
 § 243. When the vowel-sound » precedes the proper diphthongs i, 
 M, and ow, it may be represented by an initial tick ; thus, 
 
 t-i, 
 
 J-OI, 
 
 Examples : "o;- genii, '^ijr' JBoneoye. 
 § 244. When the vowel-sound i follows one of the four proper diph- 
 thongs, it may be represented by a final tick ; thus, 
 
 Examples : 
 renewing, .-I-- dewy. 
 
 same signs used eor other double or treble vowEia. 
 § 245. No confusion will result in reading if the above series of signs 
 are also sometimes used to represent such double or treble vowels as 
 are composed of an accented long-vowel or diphthong, and a7iy short- 
 vowel, except So; thus, sign No. 14 may be employed for 6-e in 
 ^£^ Owen. In like manner, sign No. 8 may be used for ed in creator. 
 No. 22 for ed in theology, etc. 
 
 LICENSE A3 TO DIRECTION OF TIIE GBGUP-VOWEL SIGNS. 
 
 § 246. When more convenient, the signs opening to the right and 
 left may be inclined a little from the horizontal ; thus, "l 01, ''I to, "■. 
 oi-t, as in the words 5:. void, 1^_^ drawing, _J^ showy, {.' JT folio, f^ 
 loyis^. Care must be taken, however, not to incline them so much 
 that they will bo liable to be mistaken for those opening upward ana 
 downward. 
 
STENOTTPT. 67 
 
 THE ASPIRATE HAT. 
 
 § 247. When the aspirate occurs 'bofore either pee, hee, ef, or vee, it 
 may be represented by a light dot placed before the sign of the inter- 
 vening vowel or diphthong ; thus, ;]^;. habit, X Iwh, -N,- heap, ' *v_ half. 
 This sign is used to avoid the awkward junctions which those conso- 
 nants naake when joined to a preceding stem hay. The dot-sign may 
 also be used before other consonants in the middle of words, from 
 which, for the sake of brevity, or to secure an easier form, the stem liay 
 has been omitted ; thus, J>y<._Alhar>tbm, '\,^^ perhaps. 
 
 § 248. The consonant way may be aspirated by a perpendicular ini- 
 tial tick ; thus, 'Sj whey. It is also allowable to aspirate way with the 
 dot-sign written after the stem and before the sign of the succeeding 
 vowel or diphthong ; thus, ">' white. 
 
 THE NOMINAL CONSONANT. 
 
 § 249. It is sometimes necessary to express one or more vowels or 
 diphthongs without a consonant-stem, as is the case with a few words 
 that contain only vowel-sounds. In such cases any one of the signs 
 1 -|- I having no specific value, may be employed as an outline to 
 which to write the vowel-signs ; thus, .X -Eah, "]_- So. This sign, 
 which is used only for the purpose of showing the vowel positions, 
 is called Thj: Nominal Consonant. 
 
 STENOTYPY. 
 
 § 250. Phonographic outlines may be represented in much smaller 
 space, and with far less expense, by the letters of the ordinary printing 
 alphabet than by the use of engraved short-hand characters. This 
 Btyle of printing is called Stenottpt. 
 
 § 251. The system of stenotypy employed in this work, although 
 similar in some of its details to that found in other phonographic 
 books, is believed to be greatly superior to any like means heretofore 
 devised for the same purpose. The plan is as follows : Each co,nso- 
 nant-sigu is represented by the letter or letters of the common alpha- 
 bet by which it is most readily and naturally suggested. In the list 
 
68 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 below, the phonographic name of each consonant-stem is placed di 
 rectly under its stenotype. 
 
 
 
 CONSONANTS 
 
 
 
 
 K, 
 
 G, 
 
 T,. 
 
 D, 
 
 
 CH, 
 
 J, 
 
 p, 
 
 kay, 
 
 gay, 
 
 tee. 
 
 dee, 
 
 
 chay. 
 
 jay. 
 
 pee, 
 
 B, 
 
 SH, 
 
 SB, 
 
 ZH, 
 
 
 s, 
 
 z, 
 
 TH, 
 
 hee, 
 
 ish, 
 
 shee, 
 
 zhee, 
 
 
 ess. 
 
 zee, 
 
 ith. 
 
 DH, 
 
 F, 
 
 V, 
 
 NG, 
 
 
 N, 
 
 M, 
 
 L, 
 
 ihee, 
 
 ef, 
 
 veo, 
 
 ing, 
 
 
 en. 
 
 em. 
 
 el. 
 
 L, 
 
 R, 
 
 B, 
 
 
 H, 
 
 
 T, 
 
 W, 
 
 lee, 
 
 er, 
 
 ree, 
 
 
 hay, 
 
 
 yay, 
 
 way. 
 
 'SHEE,' 'lee,' 'EEE,' and 'ESS.' 
 
 § 252. The stenotypes of the upstroke stems shee, lee, and ree are dis- 
 tinguished from ish, el, and er respectively, by being printed in italics. 
 The stenotype of ess, when struck upward, as in Y'V" elocutionist, 
 V S factioniM, etc., should also be printed in italics. 
 
 STENOTYPES OF STEMS AND OH CIRCLES, HOOKS, ETC., DISTINGUISHED. 
 
 § 253. The stenotypes of the stem-signs are distinguished from the 
 stenotypes of consonants represented by the circles, loops, and hook 
 modifications, and the dot and tick signs for liay, by printing the former 
 
 in capitals and the latter in small letters; thus, K, | D, V^ F ; 
 
 I sTs, ^ sSs ; Q_ ssKj_ _o KsS, (^ Fss ; _ stK, _^ Kstr ; =_ Kl, 
 /' Jl, J? ZHl, c~N HI ; ^ Kr, / CHr, ( THr, ^^^ Wr ; \ sPl, 
 (>_ sFl, ^ sFr, 'X sPr, »\ ssPr, ^X stPr ; c_ Kw, P Tw ; :^ Ky, 
 ■N By; a_nsKr; _^ Kf, ( DHf; _, Kn, (^ Fn ; ^> Kshn, Vi 
 Fshu ; ._,Ktr ; _3 Kfs ; \ Pns, \ Pnstr ; ,__^ Ktr, Q^ Fltr, 
 /^ itr, I Dt, •v^ Pint, ^ sKt, ^ sKit, -s, Prnt, i Drfts. 
 
 § 254. When a stem modification may be employed to write more 
 than one consonant, or group of consonants, its stenograph may vary 
 accordingly ; thus, \, sPs or sPz, ,_j sNs or sNz, _o Kss, Ksz, or 
 Kzz, _^ Eat or iJzd ; ^-^ Mf or Mv, ,_^ Grf or Grv, „^ sKf or sKv 
 J Ttr, Tdr, orTdbr,,_^ Mtr, Mdr, or Mdhr ;\ sPnt or sPnd. 
 
 STEN0TYPE3 OE SHADED OIROLliS, ETC. 
 
 § 255. The phonotype of a consonant written with a shaded circle, 
 
STENOTYPY. 6S, 
 
 loop, or hook, may be printed in full-faced type ; thus, (C^ Lz (laws') 
 ^ RzA. (raised), ^ Rzz (raises), ^^.^. Prv (prove), y^ RCx (rider) 
 The stenotype of the ishun-hook. is printed in italics when it occurs 
 after the ess-circle ; thus, g KssAn,-(^ FzsAn. 
 
 STENOTTPES OF OUTLINES CONTAINING MORE THAN ONE STEM. 
 
 § 256. A hyphen is printed between two stenographs (whether of 
 single or group stems) to indicate that the signs they represe.n1; are 
 joined ; an inverted semicolon, to indicate that they are disjoined and 
 written near each other ; a colon, to indicate that they are disjoined, 
 and the second sign written close to, but a little under the first ; an 
 inverted period, to indicate that they are disjoined, and the second sign 
 lapped over the first ; and a cross (+), to indicate that they are dis- 
 joined, and the second sign written through the iirst. A simple space 
 marks the ordinary separation between words. A numeral just after 
 and generally near the upper part of a stenotype, whether of a simple 
 or compound sign, indicates the position of its phonograph. Wlien no 
 numeral is given, the second position is understood. A stenotype should 
 be named according to the phonographic nomenclature already given. 
 
 Examples : ^-^^ N-V, V^-s B-K-M, G-G, L.^ P-N, \ 
 
 P-B, 1. V-G, ^ H-Z, Q L-Sa, „ Ks-K, ]_ Dj-K, "^ 
 
 Ps-V, J_ SH-K, J— SS-K, C~. L-M, r^ i-M, '^ T-K, 
 
 V P-.fi, — \ K-Pr, \y P-i21, ^^ nsKr-B, /V nsi-V, =-v^ 
 
 Gr-V, 3^ Trs-Ps, L Trs-Gs, J_^ Dns-NG, '^ Prss^m-L, y^ 
 
 Kltr-L, /\ iJ-Pt-Bl, V) P-Zld, ',_ K-T-Gt, ^ P-Ld, V 
 
 P-it ; ~L K : Dshn ; l^ DTd ; 4f-, Nn-FD-Ktr ; '^ M', ..|.. D', 
 
 /I ^'-T, "^"' P»-T. 
 
 § 2-57. When one of the signs mentioned in the last section is 
 printed before a stenograph standin^alone, it indicates how its out- 
 line is to be written in relation to any outline that may precede it ; 
 thus, iPln'' denotes the outline of complain, and also that it should be 
 wi-itten near the next preceding word. See the prefix com, § 284. 
 
 ESS-CIRCLE BETWEEN STEMS. 
 
 § 258. A circle between two stems may be considered as joined to 
 either ; thus, ,—(--. Ms-M or M-sM, ^— ^ Ms-i or M-si. Generally,, 
 however, the circle should be represented in connection with the stem 
 that precedes it, except in cases where the phonographic outline would 
 be best suggested by attaching it to the succeeding stem ; thus, 
 -f Ks-J, ^ Bs-J, f— .Es-K ; but )f- T-s£, L^ F-si, ,_J~ N-sL. 
 
70 
 
 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEArHEE. 
 
 VOWELS. 
 § 259. The vowel-signs, both single and double, though seldom 
 used in advanced Phonography, may, when necessary, be indicated aa 
 follows : 
 
 S, o, a, e, i, 6, u, Q, 
 
 a. 
 
 a, 
 
 ow. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i -• 
 
 
 ! 
 
 
 
 EW or ii. 
 
 &i, 
 
 at, 
 
 61, 
 
 ai 
 
 J 
 
 v: 
 
 V; 
 
 v: 
 
 <; 
 
 01, etc. 
 <\ etc. 
 
 § 260. The stenotypes of the vowels may be written in with the 
 consonant stenotypes in the order of their occurrence in the word. A 
 hyphen between the stenotype of a vowel or diphthong commencing or 
 ending «. word, and the stenotype of the nearest stem, indicates that 
 they are to be joined in writing. The stenotypes of vowels to be writ- 
 ten according to the rule for " special vocalization" at § 156, are in 
 parentheses. 
 
 Examples: .| aD, ^j^ oN, __ Go, V^ Bai'-M, ..^.. Fl'-L, 
 V_ B-eK, -l^.. Ts-oM ; 1 I-D' ; ^ K(a)r, ..■).. D(e)r3, f. T(e)l, 
 .'."rr.. K(a)lS -.^-. D(u)r», \ ssP(I)ri. 
 
 GENERAL REMARKS ON OUTLINES OP WORDS. 
 
 § 261. One of the peculiarities of Phonography is its variety of con- 
 sonant forms, it often l»eing possible to represent the consonants of a 
 single word with several different, and sometimes very unlike, out- 
 lines. This variety results from the employment of more than one 
 means of representing certain of the consonants, some of them having 
 both an upward and a downward sign, and others being sometimes 
 written with a stem, and sometimes included in a group sign. This is 
 frequently the source of not a little perplexity to the beginner, who is 
 embarrassed at having to select outlines before he has become familiar 
 with the principles that should control such choice. Tliis is a difB- 
 oulty, however, which a little practice, in both reading and writing, soon 
 overcomes. The general rule in regard to sucli words is, that they 
 should be written with the briefest outlines that are consistent witi 
 legibility and ease of vocalization; care being taken to observe Anal- 
 ogy of Form, which requires, without regard to their derivation or 
 meaning, that words of similar construction, as regards the consonants 
 and vowels and their arrangement, be written in a similar man 
 
(JENEEA.L EEMAEK8 ON OUTLUSTES OF WOEDS. 71 
 
 ner ; thus ~J suddenly, /Oy . lovingly, ■^yj//'-- nearly, — p]. goaded, 
 iC"" likewise, C^~^ slachwaia-; their primitives, or components, being 
 written -J- sudden, /'^^^ loving, .-..„.■ naar, — goad, i'-K like and 
 Ws' wise, si'-K slack and Wtr' water. 
 
 § 262. There are occasional exceptions to the rule given in the last 
 section, as where uncommon, rarely used, or peculiarly formed words, 
 for the sake of increased legibility, are written according to what may 
 hie called Analogy of Derivation or Composition, which requires that 
 the derivative be written like its primitive, the signs for the addi- 
 tional sounds being simply joined on, or that a compound word should 
 bo written by merely joining together the ordinary outlines of its com- 
 ponents, even in violation of the requirements of Form Analogy. 
 But when both analogies agree in requiring a word to be written with 
 a particular outline, but which can not easily be made without taking 
 off the pen, it is better to disjoin than to change the outline ; thus, 
 write F2-Kshn:T, instead of F^-K-SH-Nt, for affectionate. 
 
 SPECIAL DIRECTIONS AS TO CERTAIN OUTLINES. 
 
 § 263. Speed in writing Phonography depends chiefly upon the 
 ability of the writer to make the various outlines of words without hesi- 
 tation. This facility can be more readily attained by becoming thor- 
 oughly familiar with the best modes of writing those syllables, or 
 small groujjs of consonants, that are common to classes of words, than 
 by attempting to learn the outline of each word of the language sep- 
 arately. The following tables and rules will be found useful in this 
 connection. 
 
 INITIAI lETTERS. 
 
 Examples, 
 antagonist, antedate, antidote 
 caligraphy, calumet, calumny 
 carbon, caricature, carpet 
 catalogue, catamount, category 
 centage, centennial, centiped, centuple 
 chirography, chironomy, chirurgeon 
 Christmas, chromatic, chronic 
 circuit, circus, Circassian 
 circle, circulate 
 cis-alpiue, cistern 
 collateral, collect, colloquy 
 cork, correct, coroner 
 counterfeit, countersign 
 cuticle, cutlet, cutting 
 
 Prefix. 
 
 
 Sign. 
 
 ant, 
 
 ^ 
 
 Nt 
 
 cal, 
 
 
 Kl 
 
 car, 
 
 
 Kr 
 
 cat, 
 
 
 Kt 
 
 cent, 
 
 
 sNt 
 
 chir, 
 
 
 Kr 
 
 chr, 
 
 
 It i 
 
 cir, 
 
 
 sR 
 
 (t 
 
 
 sfl 
 
 cis; 
 
 
 ss 
 
 col. 
 
 
 Kl 
 
 cor, 
 
 
 Kr 
 
 coTinter, 
 
 
 Knt-iE 
 
 cut, 
 
 
 Kt 
 
72 
 
 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 Pre.1x. 
 
 
 Sign. 
 
 
 Examples. 
 
 del, 
 
 by 
 
 Dl 
 
 in 
 
 delicate, deliver 
 
 enter, 
 
 (t 
 
 Ktr 
 
 (( 
 
 entertain, enterprise 
 
 far. 
 
 (( 
 
 Fr 
 
 (( 
 
 farm, farther, farthing 
 
 fer, 
 
 11 
 
 ft 
 
 (C 
 
 ferment, fervid, fervor 
 
 fur, 
 
 tt 
 
 It 
 
 (( 
 
 furlong, furnace, further 
 
 hept, 
 
 It 
 
 pt 
 
 tt 
 
 heptagon, heptachord, heptarchy 
 
 hydr, 
 
 tl 
 
 Hdr 
 
 tt 
 
 hydraulic, hydrogen, hydrometer 
 
 typ, 
 
 tt 
 
 P 
 
 1( 
 
 hypocrite, hypothesis 
 
 iut. 
 
 tl 
 
 Nt 
 
 tt 
 
 intent, intense, intention 
 
 inter, 
 
 tt 
 
 Ntr 
 
 tc 
 
 intercede, interdict, interline 
 
 jur, 
 
 tt 
 
 Jr 
 
 tl 
 
 jurisdiction, jurist, jurisprudence 
 
 met. 
 
 tt 
 
 Mt 
 
 tl 
 
 metal, metaphor, meteoric 
 
 mult, 
 
 " 
 
 Mlt 
 
 tl 
 
 multifarious, multiform, multiple 
 
 Oct, 
 
 tt 
 
 Kt 
 
 tt 
 
 octave, octennial, October 
 
 par. 
 
 tt 
 
 Pr 
 
 11 
 
 paragraph, parchment, parliament 
 
 per, 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 tl 
 
 percolate, perfect, person 
 
 phil. 
 
 *' 
 
 Fl 
 
 tl 
 
 philanthropy, Philadelphia 
 
 pol, 
 
 (( 
 
 PI 
 
 tt 
 
 polemic, polyglot, polygon 
 
 quad. 
 
 tt 
 
 Kwd 
 
 tl 
 
 quadrant, quadruped, quadruple 
 
 rel, 
 
 tt 
 
 m 
 
 11 
 
 relation, relevant, relief 
 
 retro, 
 
 " 
 
 ^tr 
 
 tt 
 
 retroaction, retrograde, retrospect 
 
 sept. 
 
 tl 
 
 sPt 
 
 It 
 
 September, septennial, Septuagint 
 
 Bubter, 
 
 It 
 
 sBtr 
 
 " 
 
 subterfuge, subterranealn 
 
 super, 
 
 " 
 
 sPr 
 
 (t 
 
 superb, supercargo, superfine * 
 
 supr. 
 
 (C 
 
 (1 
 
 It 
 
 supramundane, supreme 
 
 • sis,sys, 
 
 BUS, " 
 
 BS 
 
 (( 
 
 sister, system, sustain 
 
 under, 
 
 tt 
 
 Ndr 
 
 (( 
 
 underdone, undersign 
 
 val. 
 
 tt 
 
 VI 
 
 (t 
 
 valid, value, valve 
 
 ver. 
 
 i( 
 
 Vr 
 
 tl 
 
 verbal, verge, version 
 
 vol. 
 
 (( 
 
 VI 
 
 tt 
 
 voluntary, voluptuous 
 
 vul. 
 
 It 
 
 (( 
 
 tt 
 
 vulgar, vulture 
 
 FINAL STLLAELBS. 
 
 § 204. The following are the principal final syllables that are liable 
 to trouble the novitiate. 
 
 Examples, 
 rrecise, criticise, exercise 
 ostracism, criticism, solecism 
 childhood, sisterhood, boyhood 
 thermometer, barometer, hydrometer 
 basis, thesis, crisis, colossus 
 quietude, solicitude, latitude 
 
 Suffix. 
 
 Sign. 
 
 cise, 
 
 by ss 
 
 cism. 
 
 " ssM 
 
 hood. 
 
 " Hd 
 
 ometer. 
 
 " Mtr 
 
 sis, sua, 
 
 " 83 
 
 tude, 
 
 " Td 
 
GENEKAl EEMAEKS ON OUTLINES OF WOEDS. 73 
 
 § 265. When the final syllable -ly is preceded by a consonant written 
 with a stem-sign, and there is no distinct vowel intervening, it is 
 generally expressed by the e^-hook on such preceding stem ; thus, 
 \X pearly, \^-- officiaUy, ^-^^^ calmly. In all other cases it should 
 
 be written, if possible, with the upstroke fee; thus, 'p Kelly^ 
 
 Grs-£ grossly, M.t-LP mutdy, Fthr'-i fatherly. But when lee can not 
 conveniently be written, el may be used instead, or else a disjoined 
 fee ; thus, Jnt'-L, or '.LjoivUy, J-sNt-L, or \L adjaceMy. 
 
 ' -BY.' 
 
 § 266. The final syllable -ry is sometimes expressed by the er-hook 
 and sometimes by the stems ree and er, being governed by the same 
 rule as -ly ; thus, \^- fishery, L drudgery ; but \/- lerry, y- story, 
 Ms-i2' misery, Rt'-.B artery. 
 
 ' -TT.' 
 
 § 267. The final syllable -ty may generally be expressed by halving 
 the stem of the preceding consonant ; thus, "f'' utility, ^- acdmiy, 
 .):.. fatality. See § 229. 
 
 ' in' and ' ON.' 
 
 § 268. In and on at the end of words may generally be written with 
 the en-hook ; thus, —C.. therein, (, thereon. 
 
 ' -IDEE.' 
 
 § 269. The final syllable -ture, as well as -fer, -tor, and -der, may usu- 
 ally be indicated by the te--hook on straight stems, by the lengthening 
 of curves, and by changing an ess-circle into the sfer-loop ; thus, 
 'i~,' creature, L_^_^ adventure, \j^ texture. The loop, when so used, 
 may be vocalized by. writing the sign for u within the loop, in the 
 same manner as with the fer-hook (§ 191), or by placing it at the end 
 of the loop. 
 
 THE PAST TENSE. 
 
 § 270. The past tense of regular verbs is written as follows : 
 
 1. When the present tense ends with a full-length stem, whether 
 simple or compounded with anything but a final circle or loop, — by 
 halving such final stem ; thus, Bl-M blame, Bl-Md blamed. Pin plane, 
 Tlnd planed, Brv brave, Brvd braved, Kshn' caution, Kshnd' cautioned. 
 
 2. When the present tense ends with a half-length stem, — by 
 making its final stem full length, and then adding tet, ted, or ded, 
 thus, 7it-Kt protect, Yit-K-Td j»-otected, RF-Rt repatt, B-F-B-Td r^orted, 
 D-Grd degrade, D-Gr-Dd degraded. See § 224. 
 
 4 
 
74 
 
 THE, COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 3. When the present tense ends with the ess-circle, not written inside 
 of a final hook, — by changing the circle to an 3<-loop ; thus, Ks^ accuse, 
 Ksd^ accused, Gins' glance, Glnst' glanced. But when the circle is written 
 inside of a final hook, the consonant represented by such hook should 
 be written with its stem-sign, and the circle changed to a loop ; thus, 
 Fns fence, F-Nst fenced, Tns' evince, V'-Nst evinced. 
 
 4. When the present tense ends with the sMoop, — ^by changing the 
 loop to the ess-circle, and adding ted; thus Kst' accost, Ks-Td' accosted. 
 
 ABBREVIATION. 
 
 § 271. Although Phonography provides an exceedingly perfect 
 means of representing all the sounds used in the English language, so 
 that it meets the requirements of a very exact phonetic analysis, yet 
 it is by no means essential to legibility that in actual practice the 
 signs of all those sounds should be written. The advanced phonogra- 
 pher from choice, and the practical reporter from necessity, omit 
 almost entirely the signs of the vowels and diphthongs, and aJso ab- 
 breviate many of the consonant outlines. 
 
 OMISSION OF VOWELS. 
 . § 272. To the casual observer it might seem that the omission of the 
 vowel-signs would occasion great uncertainty, if not absolute illegibil- 
 ity, in reading Phonography. This, however, is so far from being the 
 case that all experienced writers prefer unvocalized to vocalized out- 
 lines, and consider that an extensive insertion of the vowels is an 
 actual detriment in reading. The principal causes of this legibility 
 are these : (1.) As the vowel-signs form no part of the outline, the 
 general appearance of a word is not changed by "their omission. (2.) 
 The great majority of words are distinct from others in their conso- 
 nant sounds, and consequently have different and distinct outlines. 
 (3.) As the outlines of words are placed, in respect to the line of 
 writing, in three positions, according as their accented vowels are 
 of the first, second, or third place, even if two or more words 
 should happen to be written with the same outline, they may gen- 
 erally be distinguished by this difference of position. (4.) In the few 
 cases of words that contain the same consonant-sounds, and that be- 
 long to the same position, when necessary, distinctions are obtained by 
 some arbitrary difference of position or outline, or else by vocalizing, 
 partially or in full, one, and generally the more uncommon, of the 
 conflicting words 
 
ABBBETIATION. 7^ 
 
 VOWELS TO BE OMITTED. 
 
 § 273 When the learner has mastered the principles of Phonogra- 
 phy thus far explained, and has heoome somewhat familiar with the 
 outlines of words, he should begin to leave out the signs of the 
 vowels, or, in other words, to write what is called ' ' TJn vocalized Pho- 
 nography. ' ' But, in order that his writing may not become illegible to 
 him by a too sudden transition, it will he found the safer plan to com- 
 mence by omitting the vowel-signs only in the following cases : 
 
 I. When the existence of the vowel is indicated by some peculiar 
 method of writing the consonant outlines, as is the case with the ital- 
 icized vowels in the words ask [§ 113] ; racy [§ 115] ; bushy [§ 130] ; 
 olike [§ 132] ; felly [§ 133] ; ark [§ 135] ; berry [§ 136] ; coffee, gravy, 
 many [§ 179] ; into, induce [§ 228] ; poet [§ 233] ; solid [§ 234] ; appel- 
 late [§ 235]. 
 
 II. Fromshortwordsof frequent occurrence, as in by, be, at, 4t,«p,say, 
 they, on, in, etc. 
 
 in. Unaccented vowels, as in votary, capital, possible, enemy, prom- 
 inence, etc. 
 
 IV. In long words, medial vowels, whether accented or not, as in 
 unostentatious, incidental, statesmanship, etc. 
 
 VOWELS TO BE IHSEKTED. 
 
 § 274. The vowel-signs most essential to legibility, and which the 
 learner should still continue for a while to insert, are the following : 
 
 I. An accented in preference to an unaccented vowel ; thus, ^ oc 
 
 casion. 
 
 II. A diphthong, whether accented or not, in preference to a simple 
 vowel. 
 
 m. An initial or final vowel, unless it is indicated by some pecu- 
 liarity of the consonant outline ; thus, I attic, '\-^ ergo. 
 
 IV. The sign of the diphthong i generally at the end of a word, and 
 usually at the commencement when it can be joined to the first 
 
 consonant-stem ; thus, L defy, -^ -- idea. Initial i, when joined, 
 
 may generally be abbreviated, its last stroke Only being written, which 
 may be struck either upward or downward, as is most convenient , 
 thus, f eyesight, '^ island. The stenotype of this sign is i ; the 
 direction of the accent mark showing the inclination of the sign. 
 
 V. In words having a vowel before and after a single consonant- 
 stem, both should be written, if possible ; but if only one can be 
 inserted, the accented one will generally afford the best clue to tho 
 word ; thus, X or X obey. 
 
76 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 "WOBDS DISTINGUISHED BY DIFFEKENCE OF OUTLINE, 
 POSITION, ETC. 
 
 § 276. The general omission of the vowel-signs, as we have seen, 
 renders it necessary to make distinctions between certain words by ar- 
 bitrary differences of outline, position, or vocalization. 
 
 WOKDS COMMENCmO WITH 'iL,' ' IM,' 'IN,' 'IE,' 'UN,' 'EN.' 
 
 § 276. When negatives are formed by prefixing the particle in to 
 positive words that -begin with I, m, or r, for the sake of euphony, the 
 particle is changed respectively to U, im, or ir, so that the first conso- 
 nant of the negative becomes doubled, as in the words illegal, immaie- 
 rial, irregular, etc. This doubling of the first consonant also occurs, of 
 course. In negatives made by prefixing in or un to positive words be- 
 ginning with n, as in innoxious, unnerve, etc. Now, in ordinary speech, 
 we frequently hear but one of these consonants spoken, the negative 
 being distinguished from its corresponding positive word only by the 
 sound of its initial vowel. In unvocalized Phonography, however, 
 this distinction would not appear, and therefore both consonants 
 should be written, even in those cases where only one is heard ; thus, 
 write ■■f^rrr legal, -(^Trrrr illegal, ^^ moderate, CI^^Z^. immoderate, y^ 
 ^^ irresolute, ^y noxious, " " ' aJ innoxious, \_x>^ 
 unnecessary. But if a negative so formed have no 
 corresponding positive in use, only one of the consonants should be 
 written, unless both are actually heard ; thus, ...— .j. innocence. The 
 preceding remarks are also applicable to those similarly formed, 
 though not negative, words .that begin with the prepositional, or in- 
 tensive particle in or en ; thus, N-Nt innate, N-Nr-V inuerve, N-N-Bl 
 ennoble, M-Mnt-i/> emmantle. 
 
 § 277. MSI or WOHDS DISTINOmSHED BY DIFFERENCE OF OBTLINE, PO- 
 SITION, OB VOCALIZATION. 
 
 Kst', cost — Ks-D', caused 
 
 K-Jl, cudgel — K-J-L, cajole 
 
 KssAn', causation — KssAn', accession — KssW, accusation 
 
 sT-Nshn, extenuation — sTn, extension 
 
 Klshn', collision — K-ishn', coalition — K-Lshn^, collusion 
 
 Ks-TJss, exercise— Ks-6iBs8, exorcise 
 
 Kr-Pr>-L, corporal — Kr-P^-iJl, corporeal 
 
 Gd', God— G-D', guide 
 
 Grd'-N, garden— Gr-Dn>, guardian 
 
 T'-i2tr, tartar— Trtr2, traitor— Tr»-Dr, trader 
 
ABBEEVIATION. 77 
 
 Tm, train — T-2Jn, turn 
 
 Tr2, truth— Tr3, true 
 
 Tn-B, attainable— T-N-Bl, tenaWe 
 
 Dtr', daughter, doubter — Dti-E, auditor — Dt^-B, auditory 
 
 Dtr, debtor — Dt-R, editor 
 
 Dlt-R, adultery— Dl'-Tr, idolatry— Dltr", idolater 
 
 Ds'-Tu, destine— Dst-N, destiny 
 
 Dss', decease — D^-sZ, disease 
 
 Dss'-T, deceased, desist — D'-sZd, diseased 
 
 Dl'-Ns, idleness — D-i-Ns, dullness 
 
 D-M-Nstrshu, administration — D-Mns-Tshn, demonstration 
 
 D'-M-Nshn, damnation— iD-M-Nsbn, condemnation — D-Mn, dimen- 
 Bion — D6-M-Nshn, domination 
 
 D'-iJsbn, adoratiou^Drshn, duration 
 
 Jnt', gentleman — J'-Nt, giant 
 
 Jnt, gentlemen— J-Nt, agent 
 
 Jnti-L or '.L, gentlemanly — Jnt^-L, gentle — Jnt^-L, genteel 
 
 Ptm', pattern — Pt'-i2n, patron 
 
 Pshnt'^, patient — Pshh'-T, passionate 
 
 P-5-Ps, purpose — Pr-Ps, propose 
 
 Pr'-P, property — Pr'-Prt, propriety 
 
 Pr-Prshn, appropriation — Pr-P-iPshn, proportion — Pr-P-Eshn, prep- 
 aration 
 
 Pr^-P-iJshnd, proportioned — Pr^-P-iEsbniT, proportionate 
 
 Pr'-Bsbn, approbation — Pr'-Bshn, probation — Pr'-Bshn, prohibition 
 
 Prt-Ksbn, protection — Pr-Dshn, production — Pr-D-Ksbn, predication 
 
 Pr-Tn, pertain — P-iJ-Tn, appertain 
 
 Prs'-Kt, prosecute — P-5s-Kt, persecute 
 
 Pr'-sK, proscribe — Pr'-sK, prescribe 
 
 Pr^-sR, oppressor — P'-iJ-Sr, pursuer 
 
 Pr-SH, Prussia— P-iJ-SH, Persia 
 
 Prshn'^, Prussian — P^-iE-SHn, Persian — P'-TJshn, Parisian 
 
 P'-i2shn, apportion — P-^-iZshn, portion 
 
 Pr>-Fr, proffer^Prf2-ie, prefer 
 
 Pr'-Ms, promise — Pr'-Mis, premise 
 
 Pr'-M-N-Nt, permanent — Pr'-M-N-Nt, preeminent 
 
 Prt'-Nr, partner — P'-Nr, part-owner 
 
 Bt3-F, beautify— B'-T-F, beatify 
 
 B'-sit, obsolete — B'-sit, absolute 
 
 B-^-TH, birth— Br-TH, breath 
 
 Bn'-Dnd,abandoned — Bnd-Nt, abundant 
 
 BtD, steady, study — sTd, staid 
 
 stj, stage — sT-J, stowage 
 
78 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEB. 
 
 eP-Rt, support — sPrt, separate 
 
 sTshn, situation — stSHn, station 
 
 THst', atheist— THs3-T, theist 
 
 THs»-K, atheistic— THs3-T-K, thelstio 
 
 TH-sM, atheism— TH»-Z-M, theism 
 
 F-Vrd, favored— F-V-iJt, or Fv-iJt, favorite 
 
 F'-i, formal-ly— F'-7?l, formerly 
 
 F3-Nr-L, funeral— F»-N-51, funereal 
 
 Fs'-Kl, physical— Fs3-K-L, fiscal 
 
 F3-Es, fierce— F'-iSs, furious 
 
 F'-Wrd, forward, Fr-Wrd, froward 
 
 Fr-M, affirm— F', form 
 
 Vl'-Bl, valuable, voluble— V-J-Bl, available 
 
 Vlshn, valuation — V-£shn, violation 
 
 Vlshn', evolution — T'-£sbn, volition 
 
 V'-int, violent — V'-Lnt, valiant 
 
 V'-Kshn, avocation — V^-Ksbn, vocation 
 
 N'-Bd, nobody — N'-Bd, anybody 
 
 Nd-Kshn, indication — ^N-Dshn, induction 
 
 'N-Y-SSn, innovation — N-Vshn, invasion 
 
 NDf2-Nt, indefinite- Nd-Fnd", undefined 
 
 Nd'-Ls, endless — Nd'-Ls, needless 
 
 N-Js-Ns, ingenious — ^N-J^^-N-S, ingenuous 
 
 M-Pshni ;D, impassioned — M-Pshu'-T, impassionate — M-Pshnf , im- 
 patient 
 
 M-B12, amiable— M-B13, humble 
 
 Ml-i?shn', amelioration — Ml-i?shn', melioration 
 
 M'-N-Nt, eminent— M3-N-Nt, imminent 
 
 Ms-S3, Mrs. — Mss', misses 
 
 M-N-TH, month— Mn-T3, minute 
 
 M'-Grt, migrate — M^-Grt, emigrate — JP-Grt, immigrate 
 
 M'-Grshn, migration — M'-Grshu, emigration — M'-Grshn, immigra- 
 tion 
 
 Mshn', mission — M-SHn', machine 
 
 Mshn-iJ°, missionary— M-SH'-Nr, machinery 
 
 iJnd', ruined — iJ'-Nd, renewed 
 
 JJ-Prshn, repression — i2-F-i?shn, reparation 
 
 iJfi-TJshn, refraction — iJ-F-Kshn, reflection 
 
 Us'-M, resume — iJ'-S-M, reassume 
 
 is, less — eis, else 
 
 it'-Td, latitude— it'-T-D, altitude 
 
 i-ind', island — ^JD^d', land 
 
 W'-Mn; woman — W'-Mn, women 
 
ABBEEVIATION. 79 
 
 OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 § 278. The omission of consonant-signs from the outline of words 
 will he treated of under the general heads of " "Word-Signs" and "Con- 
 tractions." 
 
 WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 § 279. It has heen ascertained hy calculation that ahout a hundred 
 different words constitute more than one half of all the English that is 
 spoken or written ; that is, in a sermon, newspaper, speech, or debate, 
 in which say ten thousand words occur, full five thousand will be 
 made up by the repetition of certain common words, not exceeding a 
 hundred in number. Now one of the prime necessities of a practica- 
 ble system of shorthand, is a simple and brief means of writing these 
 frequent words. Many of them are short words of but one consonant, 
 which, being written by a single stroke of the pen, do not, of course, 
 require abbreviation. But a considerable number contain several 
 consonants, which, if written in full, would make outlines of incon- 
 venient length ; therefore, as far as possible, they are contracted, and 
 one, two, or three consonants, as the case may be, used to represent 
 the entire word. Strictly speaking, all such abb^e^-iations would come 
 under the general designation of "Contractions;" but, for the sake 
 of convenience, such of them as are written with only one stem-sign, 
 either simple or compovmd, are called "Word-Signs," and the use of 
 the word " Contractions" restricted to those that contain two or more 
 stems. The term Word- Sign is also applied to uucontracted outlines 
 containing single stems, simple or compound, that are written out of 
 the position to which their accented vowels would entitle them, as 
 well as to the signs of a few words that are written with vowel or diph- 
 thong signs not in connection with any consonant-stem. A word that 
 is represented.by a word-sign is called a " Sign- Word." 
 
 § 280. The following is a list of the word-signs arranged in the 
 order of the tables of consonants and vowels. Each consonant word- 
 sign is represented by its phonotype, and opposite it are its sign- words, 
 printed in three lines and united by a brace. The words in the 
 upper line are writteii with the word-sign placed in the first position ; 
 those in the second line with it in the second position ; and those in 
 the third line with it in the third position. When several words of 
 the same position are represented by the same sign, they are such 
 words as from practical experience are found not to conflict when so 
 written, the context always showing which is intended : and the word 
 for which the sign is most frequently employed is given first. When a 
 word-sign outline is used for sign-words of only one or two positions, 
 
80 
 
 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 the vacant positions are filled by words that are fully and properly 
 expressed hy the outline and position. As such words, however, do 
 not come within the definition of Sign-Words, they are distinguished 
 hy being printed in italics. In case no word at all can be found to fill 
 a place, a blank is left in the brace. A few signs have opposite them 
 words printed with double terminations ; thus, here-ar, different-ce, 
 give-n; to intimate that the corresponding signs represent hear and 
 here, different and differenee, give and given. 
 
 § 281. UST OF WORD-SIGNS. 
 
 j can, counsel 
 -< come, Co. 
 
 ( could, kingdom 
 
 I because 
 \ comes, Go's 
 
 (accuse 
 
 I call 
 } claim 
 
 (cod 
 
 {cycle 
 J, exclaim 
 
 { school 
 
 -| exclamation 
 I seclusion 
 { Christianity 
 ^care 
 I christian 
 ( describe 
 .< succor 
 ( secure 
 
 i [i'jeonsecration 
 ( description 
 I inscribe 
 
 I unscrew 
 
 ( inscription 
 ( acoord-ing-ly 
 J. court 
 ( accrued 
 
 - 1 
 
 I quality-ify 
 -j question 
 ( equal 
 (quaff 
 
 I equivalent-ce 
 i cough 
 ^ cover 
 
 f county 
 J^Kent 
 
 G 
 
 go 
 gave 
 give-n 
 (sag 
 
 I signify 
 
 ( significancy 
 
 [ significance 
 
 ( significant 
 ■j signification 
 
 glory 
 glee 
 
ABBEEVIATION. 
 
 81, 
 
 J glories-ou8 
 (eagles 
 
 -I glorificatiou . 
 
 ( augtir 
 J. grow 
 I degree 
 
 language 
 
 [ began, organ 
 J. begun 
 { begin 
 
 { organs-ize 
 ■l gains 
 I begins 
 
 I organized 
 
 1' 
 
 J govern-ment 
 
 -J organization 
 
 ( altogether 
 J. together 
 
 T. 
 
 ( at, out, ougH 
 -J what 
 ( took, U, to 
 ( satisfy 
 
 f society 
 
 I system 
 
 i circumstantial-ly 
 -j extension 
 ( citizen 
 
 f satins 
 
 -| circumstance 
 
 ( citizens 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 f 
 
 J 
 1 
 
 r 
 I 
 
 / 
 
 (try 
 i truth 
 (true 
 
 { extravagant-ce 
 J strove 
 
 (town 
 i attain 
 ( between 
 
 D. 
 
 (had ■ 
 
 -! do, defendant 
 
 ( did, diflferent-ce 
 
 i advertise 
 -j does 
 (dues 
 
 i advertised 
 \ dust 
 { didst 
 
 ( deliver-y 
 idleness 
 
 deliverance 
 
 delinquent-cy 
 Doctor 
 
 during 
 
 \ dwell-ing 
 
 ( advance 
 
 -j develope-ment 
 
 ( difficult-y 
 
 CH. 
 
 { charge 
 J. change 
 (which 
 
 I children 
 
82 
 
 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHRE. 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 r 
 / 
 / 
 / 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 \ 
 
 J. 
 
 
 surprise 
 
 f large 
 
 "So 
 
 • suppress 
 
 ■ advantage 
 
 
 
 Jew 
 
 
 apply 
 
 . 
 
 \ 
 
 ■ play 
 
 joys 
 ■ advantages-ous 
 
 
 people 
 
 ( religious 
 
 
 f practice 
 
 largely 
 - angel 
 
 X 
 
 ■ perfect-ion 
 principle-al 
 
 ( practiced 
 
 ( larger 
 
 ^X 
 
 -J oppressed 
 
 danger 
 
 
 { 
 
 ju/ry 
 
 
 (prick 
 
 ( 
 
 '^^ 
 
 \ prate 
 
 - dangers-ouB 
 
 
 \ particular 
 
 jwriea 
 
 
 pine 
 
 join 
 
 X 
 
 ■ punish-ment 
 
 general-ly 
 
 
 pin 
 
 religion 
 
 
 
 { John's 
 
 
 B. 
 
 ■ generalize 
 
 
 i object, hy 
 
 gins 
 
 \ 
 
 \ but, object 
 [he 
 
 ■J generalization 
 
 
 ( 
 
 ( 
 
 N:, 
 
 \ objection 
 
 ( gentleman 
 
 
 I 
 
 .- gentlemen 
 
 
 (so5 
 
 p. 
 
 \ 
 
 i subject 
 
 { part-y, happy, patent 
 \ plaintiff 
 
 Vi 
 
 ■| subjection 
 
 ( opportunity 
 
 
 V. 
 
 i possible 
 
 \ 
 
 ( belong-ing 
 lahU 
 
 J. hopes 
 
 { believe-f 
 
 ( opportunities 
 
 
 ihrom 
 
 {spy 
 
 -j spoke, special 
 
 N 
 
 J. number 
 [breu) 
 
 ( speak 
 
 
 span 
 ■ spoken 
 
 
 i subordinatte-d-ion 
 
 •s 
 
 ■j Mired 
 
 [spin 
 
 
 I 
 
 I spry 
 
 
 insubordinate-ion 
 
 i supper 
 
 <^ 
 
 ■ 
 
 ( supreme 
 
 
 
V -< before 
 [beef 
 
 ABBEEVIATIOK. 
 
 83 
 
 SH. 
 
 { shall 
 _^ i show 
 
 ( should 
 
 I washed, shalt 
 _j i showed 
 { shoot 
 
 ZH. 
 
 [ oasual-ly 
 _J J. pleasure, 
 ( usual-ly 
 
 J) -J measure 
 J \ measured 
 
 ( .9 
 
 ( astonish-ed 
 
 ) \ 
 
 l^east 
 
 ( astronomy-ical-er 
 ] -J Esther 
 
 Z. 
 
 f was 
 ( these 
 
 TH. 
 
 f thank-ed, hath 
 \ worth 
 ( think 
 
 DH. 
 
 (that 
 
 -(them 
 
 (with 
 
 ( 
 
 i other, either [Idhr] 
 < their, there 
 ( either [edhr] 
 
 (than 
 -I then 
 (within 
 
 P. 
 
 ( form, half 
 
 4 for 
 
 [if 
 
 {fast 
 
 \ first • 
 
 (. 
 
 {Phonography 
 fun 
 fin 
 
 fashion 
 formation 
 [;] eonfimon 
 
 < friend 
 
 ( frequent-ly 
 
 ( philanthropy 
 
 < fUmn 
 
 f have, halve 
 -j ever 
 yview 
 
 (salve 
 
 J. several. Savior 
 
 I sieve 
 
 -j [i] converse 
 ( universe 
 
 NG. 
 
 ( along, long 
 -| among 
 ( thing 
 f longer 
 •< himger 
 
84: 
 
 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 
 amongst 
 
 ^J) 
 
 n imng 
 
 ( sing-le-ular 
 
 ( extinguish 
 
 N. 
 
 I own 
 
 J know, no 
 (any 
 
 C noise 
 i knows 
 { influence 
 
 (noises 
 
 i [!] commences 
 
 ( influences 
 
 f honest 
 
 -j next 
 
 ( influenced 
 
 ( entire, another 
 i nature 
 (neither 
 
 M. 
 
 ( from, time, my 
 4 member, home 
 [me 
 
 ( almost 
 -J most 
 (< 
 
 C> < multitude-ply 
 ( million-th 
 
 ■< mercy 
 (Mr. 
 
 (man 
 i mm 
 ( human 
 
 ( amount 
 } mental-ity 
 / movement 
 
 r 
 r 
 
 y 
 ^ 
 
 r 
 
 "^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 (aM, 
 ^ well 
 ( will-ing 
 
 \ revelation 
 ( revolution 
 
 E. 
 
 f or, are [middle or end 
 X her of phrases] 
 
 ( here-ar 
 
 R. 
 
 mencing phrases] 
 ( our, are [alone or com- 
 X were, where, recollect 
 ( here-ar 
 
 -< world 
 [ruled 
 
 ( arrive 
 
 < reference ^ 
 
 [roof 
 
 -j recollection 
 
 H. 
 (how 
 
 -j he, him 
 ( who-m 
 
 Y. 
 
 ( beyond 
 ■j yet, young 
 ( you-r, year 
 
 "W. 
 
 ( why, without 
 •< when 
 ( would, we 
 
 ( while 
 X. wealth-y 
 [weal 
 
 f toafer 
 ■( whether 
 ( whither 
 
ABBEEVIATION. 
 
 85 
 
 CmOiaS AKD VOWELS. 
 
 ( as, has 
 J self 
 (is, his 
 
 .| selres 
 
 (ah 
 
 i aye [meaning ' ever'] 
 ( the [emphatic] 
 
 ( an, and 
 (the 
 
 Iawe 
 owe, oh ! 
 
 awes 
 owes 
 
 I, eye 
 
 [ aye [meaning ' yes'] 
 
 'NOW ASD 'NEW. 
 
 § 282. ^ is the only consonant-sound of so large a number of words 
 that it becomes necessary to increase their legibility by mating a some- 
 what arbitrary distinction in the case of the two words now and new ; 
 the first being written with the first stroke of the sign ow joined finally 
 to the stem, and the other with the last stroke of ew joined also at the 
 end ; thu^ "^ now, new. 
 
 CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 PREFIXES AND SUFFIXES. 
 
 § 283. One of the most convenient modes of abbreviation is the use 
 of contractions for certain initial or terminal syllables that are of fre- 
 quent occurrence, called pkefixes and suffixes. By this means a large 
 number of words may sometimes be abbreviated without burdening 
 the memory with more than a single sign. 
 
 PREFIXES. 
 
 § 284. The prefixes are written as follows : 
 
 1. Con, COM; coo, and oum — by a light dot written near the begin- 
 ning of the remainder of the word ; thus, j content, \^ complain, 
 ---^-ri cognomen, 'W cwmhersame. Usually, however, the dot is not 
 employed except at the commencement of a paragraph, sentence, or 
 line ; for when either of these prefixes is preceded by a consonant, 
 whether in the same or the preceding word, it may be indicated by 
 proximity — that is, by writing the remainder of the word near, 
 and sometimes a little under, the preceding consonant-stem ; thus, 
 S' inconstant, /fi irreconcUiation, /-^ recommend, |\, decompose, 
 [N^ discompose, ^^^\ unrecompensed, ;]- incognito, ^^ incumbent, 
 
86 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 " — 'is encumbered, Lj\ Msencumier, (f_^ (hey complained. Sometimes il 
 is allowable to join the latter part of the word to the first, without 
 taking off the pen ; thus, L? instead of ^^^ for uncamdcms, 
 [j instead of (j for accommodation, -t^^^^ instead of "i:^; for in- 
 complete or in complete, -x:^" inconsistent, ■•X--- incomiderdble or in 
 considerable. But the joining of the parts should only be done in the 
 case of a word of frequent occurrence, and when the outline so formed 
 is unlike that of any other word with which it might conflict. It may, 
 however, be generally done with safety in words commencing with 
 circvm; thus, c/^K^ drcumference, Q circumflex. 
 
 2. For, tokb— by F written near, or joined to, the remainder of the 
 word; thus, 'O"/ forelmawledge, \^ forward, ^^-, forever. For-e 
 in the middle of a word may also be written in the same way ; thus, 
 ."rrrrU;-^ unforeseen. But sometimes it is better to write these syllables 
 in full ; thus, Fr'-Bd/orM, F^-R-sL foresail. 
 
 3. Magna, magne, magni — by the stem M written partially over 
 the remainder of the word ; thus, ^^^—tt" magnanimous, \\_ mag- 
 netic, l^ magnify. 
 
 i. Self — by the word-sign for self written in its proper jjpsition on 
 the line, and joined to the remainder of the word ; thus, -^- selfish, 
 ..(^j^.. self-evident. When the remainder of the word begins with the 
 ess-circle, it may Ije enlarged to sis to indicate the prefix ; thus, ^j-^ 
 self-same. The negative particle un may be prefixed to self by the in- 
 hook ; thus, --^-- unselfish. Con or com, after this prefix, is indicated by 
 proximity; thus, ^ self-command, .s>f.. self-conceit. 
 
 5. With— by the stem DH joined to the remainder of the word ; thus, 
 withdraw. 
 
 4 
 
 SDTFIXES. 
 
 § 285. The suffixes are written as follows : 
 
 1 . BiE or ELY — by the stem B j oined, when it can not conveniently be 
 written by Bl; thus, *-\ sensible-y, [^ profitable^. If neither B not 
 Bl can be joined, B may be used disjoined, or the suffix omitted ; thus, 
 ife-PnsiB or iJs-Pns, responsible-}/. 
 
 2. Bleness— by Bs detached ; thus, ^\„ profitableness. 
 
 3. EvEE — by the «^-hook ; thus, [ whateDer, -/■■ whicheeer. 
 
 4. FpL— by the ^-hook ; thus, ^^ careful, / joi'M. 
 
 5. Fulness —by Fs detached ; thus, ..U... dmiitfukiess. 
 
 6. Lessness— by is detached ; thus, ^_C carelessness, ^(^ (houghU 
 lessness. 
 
ABBEEVIATION. 87 
 
 7. Ia'Q — ^by a light dot at the end of the preceding part of the word, 
 when it can not conveniently he expressed by the stem NG ; thus, 
 \ petting, ._.. meeting. The pinral ings may he expressed by either a 
 
 heavy dot or two light ones ; thus, •^■- or •;^-.- meetings. 
 
 8. Mentai, mentality — by Mnt written near the end of the pre- 
 ceding part of the word; thus, f^ imtrvmental-ity, [^ fundamental-ity. 
 
 9. Ology — by J joined to, or disjoined and written partially under, 
 the preceding part of the word, when it can not as conveniently be 
 
 vcritten in full ; thus, ..Sf.. physiology, j astrology. 
 
 10. Selp — ^by the word-sign for self, joined to the preceding part 
 of the word ; thus, '~° myself, -I- itself. 
 
 11. Selves — by the word-sign for selves, joined to the preceding part 
 of the word ; thus, ^ themselves. 
 
 12. Ship — ^by the stem SH written near, or joined to, the preceding 
 part of the word ; thus, (^J lordship, .'^^... partnership. 
 
 13. Soever — by sV joined to the preceding part of the word ; thus. 
 
 L 
 
 OMISSION OF SLIGHTLY EKDNOIATED CONSONANTS. 
 
 § 286. The signs of slightly or imperfectly enunciated consonants 
 may generally be omitted from the outlines of words without impair- 
 ing their legibility ; therefore, it is generally safe to omit the signs of — 
 
 1. K — between the sounds of injr and tee, ish, ess, or zee; thus, 
 ""VC^ sandify, 'O sanction, ^. anxiety. 
 
 2. A T sound— at the end of a syllable immediately after the ess- 
 circle, when the next syllable begins with a stem-sign ; thus, ^<^^ 
 
 3. P — between the sounds of em and hay, tee, ish, or ess; thus, 
 \^'-^_^ pumpkin, [j^ tempt, ')j-j assumption, -^-y^ glimpse. When it i^ 
 necessary to distinguish md from mpt, it should be written with the 
 full stem-signs ; thus, (j^ thumped, {' thumbed. 
 
 4. An S sound— at the end of a syllable, when the next syllable 
 commences with the sound of ish, or another ess; thus, ^ misshape, 
 '^. misstate. 
 
 AEBITEAET CONTEACTIONS. 
 
 § 287. The reporter frequently makes contractions by dlnitting from 
 outlines the following signs : 
 
 1. K, and sometimes & — before the sound of tee, ish, or ess, when no 
 vowel-sound intervenes, and occasionally at the end of a word ; thus, 
 
88 THE COMPLETE PH0N6GEAPHEE. 
 
 S-. /«<:«, V:3 affedim, \ explain, \ take, L_^ dogmatic. But wHen a 
 aistinot vowel-sound oocurs between the consonants, the kay should 
 be expressed ; thus, li ^ vaeaMon. 
 
 2. K, or G— generally after ing ; thus, ^ angle, \_^ banker. 
 
 8. P, or B— occasionally before the sound of tee, or ish ; thus, 
 V-v baptim,, c/' chapter, -(F^- Scripture, -.--",■■ inseription. 
 
 4. N — ^frequently before J ; thus, ^.. passenger. 
 
 5. M— frequently before P or B ; thus, L temper, /(^ chamber. 
 
 OMISSION OE FINAL SYLLABLES. 
 
 § 288. Most words ending in -ntial-ly, -ntiaie, and many in -ntion or 
 -rmon, and -graphical-ly, may be abbreviated by leaving off respectively 
 the final syllables -tial-Iy, -tiate, -titm or -sion, and -ical-ly ; thus, ] prur 
 dential-ly, %... subsUmtial-l/y-ie, R^ su^ension, ^ apprehenmm, / ^ geogra- 
 phy-icaJrly. 
 
 OMISSION OE HOOKS. 
 
 § 289. It frequently happens that although in certain combinations 
 a consonant may be best written with a hook, it would be incon- 
 venient, and perhaps impossible without taking off the pen, to repre- 
 sent it so when additional signs are joined to the outline. In such 
 cases the hook may be replaced by the stem-sign, or, as is moire fre- 
 quently done, the hook-consonant entirely omitted from the out- 
 line ; thus, !■ attain, V aUainmeni, j assign, X. assignment, J trance, 
 
 X- transpose, '"k"'" transfuse, -f lord, f^ landlord. If , after com- 
 pleting such an outline, the writer should deem it essential to legi- 
 bility, he may, when possible, go back and make the hook. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 § 290. The foregoing rules for making arbitrary contractions should 
 never be applied in a word whose outline when abbreviated would be 
 like that of any other word with which it might conflict ; neither 
 should they be used unless the contraction would be a positive gain, In 
 point of brevity, over the complete outline of the word ; thus, faction 
 should be written in full to av6id its conflicting with fashion, and the 
 outline STrd'-Kshn is better than STr'-Dshn for contradiciion. Proper 
 names should also generally ba written in full. If, however, a proper 
 name occur frequeivtly in a report, it may be abbreviated either in 
 accordance with the foregoing rules, as Ms^^-K Mexico; or, if it be a 
 long, inconvenient outline which can not be shortened according to 
 rule, an arbitrary contraction m^ be extemporized by the reports 
 
ABBKETIATION. 
 
 89 
 
 after having first written the name once or twice in full ; thus, if the 
 name Van Valkenburgh should occur often, it might he written V'-V, 
 or Vni-V. 
 
 LIST OE WOKD-SIONS AND CONTKACTIONS. 
 
 § 291. The following is a list of word-signs and contractions ar 
 ranged for convenience of reference in alphabetical order. The tahla 
 contains but few contractions formed in accordance with the foregoing 
 general rules of abbreviation, it being generally left to the writer to 
 make the proper application of the rules. A few words, however, have 
 been inserted, in which the proper mode of abbreviation was some- 
 what obscure or difficult. 
 
 A(.) 
 
 abrupt, B-iSt 
 according-ly, Krd' 
 acknowledge, K-J' 
 admeasurement, D'^-ZHr-Mnt 
 administer, D^-M-Nstr 
 administered-rate, D»-M-Ns-Td 
 administration, D^-M-Nstrshn 
 administrator, D-Mn 
 administratrix, D-Mn-Ks 
 advance, Dv' 
 advancement, Dv'-Mnt 
 advantage, J" 
 advantages-ous, Js^ 
 advertise, Dz' 
 advertised, Dzd' 
 advertisement, Dz>-Mnt 
 agency, J-N-S 
 agent, J-Nt 
 
 ah! • 
 
 almost, Mst' 
 
 along, NGr' 
 
 already, Lt 
 
 altogether, Gdhr' 
 
 ambitious, M-B^ 
 
 America, Mr-K, or M-i2-K 
 
 American, Mr-Kn, or M-iJ-^n 
 
 among, NG 
 
 amongst, NGst 
 
 an-d, 
 
 angel, Jl* 
 anniversary, ViB-iJ 
 another, Ndhr' 
 antagonism, Nt'-Gns-M 
 antagoniat-ic, Nt'-Gnst 
 any, N^ 
 
 anybody, N'-Bd 
 
 anything, N°-NG 
 
 applicability, Pl'-K 
 
 applicable, Pl'-K 
 
 arbitrary, Ri-Bt 
 
 archangel, K-Jl 
 
 archbishop, JJ'-CH-B 
 
 architect-ure-al, E'-K-T 
 
 are, B' (£', commencing phrases) 
 
 aristocracy-tic, Bs'-T-K 
 
 arrange-ment, E-N-J 
 
 arrive, iSv' 
 
 arrived, iSvd" 
 
 artificial, R\?-'S-Sa 
 
 as, ° 
 
 ascribe, S'-Kr 
 ascription, S^-Krshn 
 assemble-d-y, S-M 
 assignment, S'-Mnt 
 astonish-ed, Sti 
 astonishment, St'-Mnt 
 astronomy-ical-er, Str' 
 atonement, To Mnt 
 attainment, T-Mnt 
 auspicious-ly, S'-P-SH 
 
 awful, 
 aye, .1 
 
 B. 
 
 Bank, Bi-NG 
 bankable, B'-NG-Bi 
 bankrupt, Bi-NG-Pt 
 bankruptcy, B' NG-S 
 because, Ks' 
 become, B-K 
 
90 
 
 THE COMPLETE PHONOQEAPHEE. 
 
 before, Bf 
 began, Gu' 
 begin, Gn' 
 beginner, Gn-R' 
 begun, Gu2 
 belief-ve, BV 
 belong-lng, Bl' 
 belonged, Bid' 
 beneficial, Bn?-F-SH' 
 benevolent-ce, B-N-V 
 benignant, B'-N-G 
 bespeals, B'-sP 
 between, Tn' 
 beyond, Y' 
 bishopric, B3-SH-K 
 broken-hearted, Br-Kn-iJ-Td 
 brother, Br 
 brother-in-law, Br-lS'l 
 but, B2 
 
 C. 
 
 Cabinet, K-Bi 
 calculable, Kl-K-B' 
 Calvinism, Kl-Vs'-M 
 can, K' 
 
 canonical, K'-Nn-K 
 capability, K-Blt^ 
 capable, K-BI2 
 captain, K-Pn' 
 casual-ly, ZH' 
 catholic, K-TH' 
 Catholicism, K-THss'-M 
 celestial, s/ sL 
 certificate, sSV-F 
 change, CH^ 
 changeable, CH^-Bl 
 character, Kr'-K 
 characterize, Kr'-Ks 
 characterized, Kr'-Kst 
 characterizes, Kr'-Kss 
 characteristic, Kr^-Ks-K 
 charge, OH' 
 chargeable, CHi-Bl 
 children, CHP 
 Christian, Kr^ 
 Christianity, Kr| 
 ciroumstance, ~ 
 circumstantial, sTn' 
 claim, Kl 
 come, K 
 Cometh, K'-TH 
 company, Co., K' 
 
 iKr' p 
 
 6, BTns ■ J 
 
 conformable, ! F'-Bl 
 consequencfe, ! sKns' 
 consequent, ; sKnt' 
 consequential, ; sKn" 
 contingency, ST^-N-J 
 contradistinguished, :Trdst'-NG 
 could, K3 
 counsel, K' 
 county, Knt' 
 covenant, K-V 
 cover, Kv 
 
 D. 
 
 Danger, Jr 
 dangers-ous, Jrs 
 dark, Dr' 
 debenture, D-B 
 December, D-sM 
 declaim, D-Kl 
 defendant, D 
 deficient-cy, D'-F-SH 
 deform-ed, D'-F 
 deformity, D'-F-T 
 degenerate, D-J 
 degeneration, D-Jshn 
 degree, Gr' 
 delinquent-cy. Din' 
 deliver-y, Dl' 
 deliverance. Dins' 
 democracy, D'-iVI 
 democrat, D--M 
 democratic, D'-M-K 
 demonstrate, D'-Mns-Tt 
 demonstration, D-JXns-Tshn 
 denominate, D'-N 
 denomination, D'-N 
 denunciatory-ion, D-Nn 
 describe, sKr' 
 description, sKrshns 
 designate-ion, D-sG 
 destructive, D'-sTrv 
 develope-ment, Dv 
 did, D' 
 didst, Dst' 
 difference-ent, D^ 
 differences, Ds' 
 diificult-y, DP 
 dignity-fy-fied, D*-0 
 disadvantage, Ds-J 
 disbelieve, Ds^-Bl 
 discharge, Ds'-CH 
 disclaim, Ds-Kl 
 
ABBEEVIATION. 
 
 91 
 
 discover-y, Ds-Kv 
 discovered, Ds-Kvd 
 discrepancy, D-sKr-P 
 discriminate-d, D^-sKr-M 
 discrimination, D^-sKr-M 
 disorganization, Ds^-GnsaAra 
 disorganize, Ds'-Gns 
 disorganized, Ds'-Gnst 
 displeasure, D-sZH 
 disqualify, Ds'i-Kw 
 disqualification, Ds-Kw-Kshn 
 dissatisfy-ed, Dss'-T 
 dissatisfaction, Dss'-Tslin 
 dissimilar, D^-ssM 
 distinguish-ed, Dst^-NG 
 distinguishable, Dst^-NG-Bl 
 do, D2 
 doetor, Dr' 
 doctrine, D'-Trn 
 domestic, D^-Ms-K 
 down-stairs, Dnstrs' 
 downward, Dn'-Wd 
 during, Dr^ 
 
 dwelling-house, Dw-Hs 
 dwelling-place, Dw-Pls 
 
 B 
 
 Eoclesiastic-al, Klss-T' 
 emphatic, M-Ft> 
 endanger, N-Jr 
 endeavor, N-Dv" 
 enlarge, N-Ji 
 enlarged, N-Jd' 
 enlargement, N-J>-Mnt 
 enthusiasm, N-THs-Zs-M 
 enthusiastic, N-TH'-Zs-K 
 entire, Ntr' 
 episcopal-cy, Ps'-K 
 episcopalian, Ps-K 
 equal, Kw^ 
 equinoctial, Kwn'-K 
 equivalent-oe, Kwv^ 
 especial-ly, S-P 
 establish, St'-B 
 establishment, St'-B-Mnt 
 evangelical, V-N-J 
 ever, V 
 
 everlasting, V-ist 
 exchange, sCH-J 
 exchangeable, sCH-J-Bl 
 exchequer, Ks-CH^ 
 exchequer-bill, Ks-CH-B 
 
 exclaim, sKl 
 exclamition, sKlshn 
 excommunication, Ks^ -N- Kshn 
 executor, sKtr 
 executrix, sK-Ks 
 extempore-ary, sT-M 
 extemporaneous, sT-Ma 
 extension, sTn 
 extenuate, sT-N-T 
 extenuation, sT-Nshn 
 extinguish, stNG^ 
 extraordinary, sTr'-S 
 extravagant-ce, sTrv' 
 
 V 
 
 ^y^' ... 
 
 F. 
 
 familiar, F^-U 
 familiarity, F'-M 
 fantasm, Fnts'-M 
 favorable-y, Fv-iJ-B 
 February, F-B 
 financial, Fn>-N 
 first, Fst (or Fs in phrases) 
 for, F2 
 forever, F-V 
 forgive-n, F'-G 
 form, Fi 
 formality, F'-it 
 formal-ly, F'-i 
 formation, Fshni! 
 former, Fi-Mr 
 formerly, Fi-Mr-i 
 formless, F'-is 
 forward, F'-Wrd 
 frequent-ly, Fmt^ 
 from, M' 
 
 G 
 
 Gave, G^ 
 general -ly, Jn 
 generalize, Jns 
 generalization, JnssAn 
 gentleman, Jnt' 
 gentlemen, Jnt* 
 give-n, G^ 
 glory, Gl 
 
 glorification, Glshn 
 glorious-ies, Gls 
 go, G' 
 
 government, Gv 
 governmental, Gv ;Mnt 
 
92 
 
 THE COMPLETE PH0N06BAPHEE. 
 
 governor, G-V 
 grandchild, Grnd'-CHd 
 grandchildren, Grnd'-CH 
 
 H. 
 
 Habeas corpus, B-sKr 
 had, D' 
 half, Fi 
 halve, VI 
 happy, Pi 
 
 has, ° 
 
 hathr™' 
 
 have, V 
 
 he, H2 
 
 hear, Rs, or S? 
 
 henceforth, Hns'-F 
 
 her, E2 
 
 here, E», or E' 
 
 hereditament, Hrd'-Mnt 
 
 heretofore, JJt»-F 
 
 hieroglyph-ic-al, Hr^-Glf 
 
 him, m 
 
 his, ... 
 
 historical, Sti-.K-Kl 
 history, SV-B 
 home, M^ 
 how, H> 
 human, Mn' 
 hunger-y, NGr 
 
 I. 
 
 ignorance, Nrns' 
 ignorant, Nrnt' 
 immeasurable, M-ZHr-B 
 immediate-ly, M'-Md 
 imperfect-ly-ion, M-Pr« 
 Important-oe, M-Prt> 
 impossible-ility, M-Ps' 
 impoverish-ed-ment, M-Pv' 
 impracticable-ility, M-Pr' 
 improbable-ility, M-Pri-B 
 improve-ment, M-Pr° 
 inartificial-ly, Nrt-F'-5'H 
 inauspioiou9-ly, Na-P^-SH 
 incapable, N-K-Bl 
 inconsiderate, nsDrt' 
 inconsistent, Nss-Tnt' 
 indefatigable, Nd-Ft' 
 indefinite, N-Df 
 
 indescribable, Nds'-K 
 indifferent, N-D^ 
 indignity-ant-ation, N-D'-O 
 indiscriminate, Nds'-K 
 indispensable, Nds Pns" 
 individual, Nd-Vd" 
 indoctrine, N-D'-Trn 
 infer, N-F» 
 inferred, N-Fd^ 
 inference, N-Fs' 
 inferential, N-Fn' 
 infinite, N-F', or Nf 
 inflniteness, N-F'-Ns, or Nf-Ng 
 infinitesimal, F-Fs' 
 infinitive, N-Fv' 
 infinitude, N-F'-Td 
 infirm, N-F^-M 
 infirmity, N-F^-Mt 
 influence, Ns' 
 influenced, Nst^ 
 influences, Nss' 
 influential, N-5fll2 
 inform, N-F' 
 informed, N-Fd> 
 informal, N-F'-L 
 informality, N-F"-it 
 infringe, N-F'-J 
 infringement, N-F'-Jnt 
 infringer, N-F'-Jr 
 inhabit, N-Bti 
 inhospitality, Ns-Pt>-Lt 
 inquiry, N'-Kw 
 inscribe, nsKr' 
 inscribable, nsKr-Bl' 
 inscription, usKrshnS 
 insignificant, Ns'-G 
 insignificance, Ns'-Gns 
 institute, Ns-T'-T 
 insubordinate-ion, nsBrd' 
 integrity, Nt-G 
 intellect, Nt-Lt' 
 intellectual, Nt-Lt«-L 
 intellectuality, Nt-Lt'-lt 
 intelligence, Nt-Jns" 
 intelligent, Nt Jnt" 
 intelligible, Nt-J^-Bl 
 intelligibility, Nt-J-s-Blt 
 intemperance, N-T-Prns 
 intemperate, N-T-Prt 
 interrogative, Ntr'-Q 
 intvinsio-al-ly, Ntrs'-K 
 Iowa, I-W 
 
ABBEEVIATION. 
 
 93 
 
 irrecoTerable, Er-Kv 
 irrefragable, iSr'-Fr-Gr 
 irregular, Sr-G 
 irrelevant, R-X-Vnt 
 irreligion, iSr^-Jn 
 irreligious, ^r^-Js 
 irrespective, iJrs-Pv 
 irresponsible, iJr'-sPns 
 
 January, Ji-N 
 joint-stock, Jt'-sK 
 jurisprudence, Jr^-sP 
 juxtaposition, Jst-Pzshn 
 
 K. 
 
 Kingdom, K^ 
 
 knew, 
 
 knowledge, N-J' 
 
 Language, Gwi 
 languisb, i'-NG-SH 
 large, J' 
 largely, Jli 
 larger, Jr' 
 largest, Jst' 
 legislature, L-J 
 length, NG-TH2 
 lengthen, NG-THn' 
 lengthened, NG-THnd" 
 long, NG' 
 longer, NGr' 
 
 M 
 
 Magazine, M^-G 
 magnificent, M-F' 
 magnificence, M-Fs' 
 majesty, M-Ji 
 malformation, Ml-Fshn 
 malignant-cy, Ml^-G 
 manufactory, M-N-Pi 
 manufacturer, M-N-F'-E 
 manuscript, M'-Ns-K 
 Massachusetts, Ms-CH^ 
 meanwhile, M-Wl' 
 measure, ZHr 
 measured, ZHrd 
 mechanic-al, M'-Kn 
 mechanism, M^-K-bM 
 member, M* 
 
 memoranda, M-M-D' 
 memorandum, M'-M 
 memory, M^-M 
 mental-ity, Mnt 
 merchandise, Mr-CHd-Z 
 merchantable, Mr-CHt-Bl 
 mercy, Mr 
 Messrs., Ms-Ss 
 million-th, MV 
 misdemeanor, Ms-D^ 
 misfortune, Ms-Ft'-N 
 misrepresent-ed, Ms-^B-P 
 misrepresentation, Ms-5-Pshn 
 mistake, Ms'-K 
 mistaken, Ms'-Kn 
 mortgage, Mr'-G 
 movement, Mut^ 
 Mr., Mr' 
 Mrs., Ms-S3 
 multitude-ply, Ml 
 
 N. 
 
 Never, N-V, or Nv 
 nevertheless, N-Vdh-Ls 
 next, Kst 
 nobody, N^-Bd 
 nondescript, Nnda'-Kt 
 north, Nr (commencing phrases; 
 notwithstanding, Nt-DHsti 
 November, N-V 
 number, Br 
 
 0. 
 
 0, oh ! , 
 
 object, Bi or B" 
 objection, Bshn^ 
 obligatory, Bl'-G 
 observe, Bs-.ffi 
 observation, Bs-2Jshn 
 oftentimes, Fn'-Ms 
 ofttimes, Ft'-Ms 
 Ohio, HI' 
 
 omnipotent-ce, M-N-P^ 
 omnipresent-oe, M-N-Pr^ 
 omniscienit-ce, M-N-SH' 
 opinion, Nn' 
 opportunity, ps 
 organ, Gn' 
 organic, Gn'-K 
 organism, Gns'-M 
 organize, Gns" 
 organization, Gnzshn' 
 
94: 
 
 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHBR. 
 
 organized, Gnzd' 
 original-ly, S^-J 
 orthodox-y, iS'-TH-D 
 ostentatious, St'-Nt-SH 
 otiier, DHri 
 our, ^1 
 over, Vr> 
 
 owe, , 
 
 owes, ^ 
 
 owing, , 
 
 own, N' 
 
 Parliament- ary, Pr'-L 
 particular, Prts 
 part-y, P' 
 partner, Prt'-Nr 
 part-owner, P'-Nr 
 patent, P' 
 patentable, P'-Bl 
 peculiar, P^-K 
 peculiarity, P'-K 
 pecuniary, P'-Kn 
 people, P13 or Ps-P 
 perfect-ion, Pr^ 
 perfected, Pr !D 
 perform, Pr'-l? 
 performance, Pr'-Fs 
 perpendicular, Pr^-Pn-D 
 perpendicularity, Pr'-Pn-D 
 perpetual, Pr--P 
 philanthropic, Fln'-K 
 philanthropy. Fin' 
 phouographer, Fn-iJ 
 phonographic, Fn-K 
 Phonography, Fn 
 plaintiff, P" 
 platform, Plt'-F 
 pleasure, ZR' 
 plenipotentiary, Pln'-P 
 popular-ation, P'-P 
 possible, Ps' 
 poverty, Pv' 
 practioal-ly, Pr'-Kl 
 practice, Pr' 
 practiced, Prst' 
 practices, Prs' 
 prejudice, Pr-J 
 prejudiced, Pr-Jst 
 preliminarf, Prs-i-M 
 
 prerogative, Pr'-iZ-G 
 prescriptive, Pr^-sK-Pv 
 preserve, Pr-siJ 
 preservation, Pr-sifehn 
 principal-le, Pr' 
 privilege, Pr'-Vl 
 probable, Pr'-B 
 proclaim, Pr^-Kl 
 proclamation, Pr'-Klshu 
 productive, Pr Dv 
 proflt-ed, Prft' 
 prophet, Prft' 
 prophetic, Prft'-K 
 property, Pr'-P 
 proscribe, Pro'-sK-B 
 proscription, Pro'-sK-Pshn 
 protractive, Pr'-Trv 
 public-sh-ed, P-B 
 publication, P-Bshn 
 publisher, P-B-SHr 
 punish-ed-ment, Pa 
 pure, P'-iJ 
 
 Q. 
 
 Quality-ify, Kw> 
 qualification, Kw-Kshn 
 quantity, Kwnt' 
 question, Kw^ 
 questionable, Kw°-Bl 
 questioner, Kw^-R 
 
 E. 
 
 Reclaim, ^-Kl 
 reclamation, iS-Klshn 
 recollect, S' 
 recollection, Rshn 
 recover-y, jS-K.v 
 refer, R-F 
 reference, R{ 
 reflect, /J-F-K-T 
 reflection, iJ-F-Kshn 
 reform, iS'-F 
 reformation, if-Fshn 
 refract, RP-Rt 
 refraction, Bf'-iJshn 
 regeneration, iJ-Jsha 
 regenerative, R-Jy 
 regular, R G 
 religion, Jn» 
 religious, Js' 
 relinquish, iJl'-NO- 
 reluctant, iSlt'-Nt 
 
ABBEEVIATIOlir. 
 
 95 
 
 remark, B'-M 
 remarkable, K'-M-Bl 
 remember, R'.ji, or M' 
 remembrance, E^-Ms, or Ms" 
 remonstrate, R'-Mus-Tt 
 reprehensible, i2--Prns 
 represent, JZ^-P 
 represented, B-P'.D 
 representation, JE-Pshn 
 representative, R-P 
 representatives, iJ-Ps 
 republio^ish, J2-P-B 
 republication, iB-P-Bshn 
 republican, ^-P-Bn 
 repugnant-ce, B-P-G 
 resemble, Rs-M 
 resemblance, Rs-Ms 
 reserve-ation, jRs-R 
 resignation, JBs-G 
 respective-ful, iJs-Pv 
 responsible-ity, iis'-Pns 
 restrictive, JJ^-sTrv 
 resurrection, iJs-ifehn 
 retractive, ^'-Trv 
 retrospective, iJtrs-Py 
 retire, Rt'-R 
 return, Rt-iJn 
 Rev., JJ-V 
 revelation, Lshn^ 
 revolution, ishn' 
 
 S. 
 
 Sanguine, sNGni 
 sanguinary, sNGn-fl' 
 satisfaction, sTshn" 
 satisfy-ied-actory, sT' 
 Savior, sV 
 
 self, o 
 selves, o 
 
 sentimentalism, sNt-Mnts-M 
 sentimentalist, sNt-Mtst 
 September, sPt-M 
 several, sV 
 shall, SHi 
 Shalt, SHt' 
 should, SH' 
 siguificance, sGns' 
 Bigniflcancy, sGn' 
 significant, sGnf 
 signification, gGshn' 
 signify, sG' 
 
 similar, sM^ 
 siugular-le, sNG* 
 society, ssT' 
 something, sM-NG 
 somewhat, sMt 
 speak, sPs 
 speakable, sP'-Bl 
 special, sP^ 
 
 spendthrift, sPd-THrft 
 spoke, bP 
 spoken, sPn 
 strength, sTr'-TH 
 strengthen, sTr^-THn 
 strong, sTr' 
 subject, sB 
 subjected, sB!D 
 subjection, sBshn 
 subjective, sBv 
 Bubordinate-d-ion, sBrd* 
 subscribe, sB'-sK 
 subscription, sB^-sKshn 
 suggest, sJ 
 suggestion, sJn 
 suggestive, sJv 
 supererogation-tory, sPt-R-Q 
 superficial-ly-ity, sPi^-F-SH 
 superscribe, sPr'-sK 
 superscription, sPr^-sKshn 
 supreme, sPr^ 
 surprise, sPrs' 
 surreptitious-ly, sR^-Pt 
 Swedenborg, sWd-B 
 Swedenborgian, sWd'-Bu 
 Swedenborgianism, sWd'-B-sM 
 sympathy, sM-TH^ 
 system, ssT^ 
 
 T. 
 
 Tabernacle, T'-Br 
 taciturnity, T-sTmt 
 temperance, T-Prns 
 temperate, T-Prt 
 testament, T-sMnt 
 testamentary, T-sMnt-iJ 
 thank-ed, TH'. 
 thankful, THf 
 thankfulness, TH': Fs 
 thankless, TH'-Xs 
 thanklessness, THi : Lb 
 thaUiksgiving, THs^-G 
 that, DHi 
 
 the, --.. or .._.- 
 
06 
 
 THE COMPLETE PHOlfOGBAPHEE. 
 
 them, Dm 
 thenceforth, DHns-F 
 thenceforward, DHns-F-Wrd 
 theology, TH'-J 
 theological, TH'-J-Kl 
 these, Z3 
 thing, NG3 
 think, TH» 
 time, M' 
 together, Gdhr* 
 took, T3 
 
 tranquillity, Trn' 
 tranquil-ly, Tr'-NG 
 transcendent-al, Trs-Nd-Nt 
 transcendentalism, Trs-Nd-Nts-M 
 transcribe, Trs'-K-B 
 transcript, Trs'-K-Pt 
 transcription, Trs'-Kshu 
 transfer, Trs-Fr 
 transference, Trs-Fs 
 transform, Trs'-F 
 transformation, Trs^-Fshn 
 transgress, Trs-Gs 
 transparent-cy, Trs-P 
 transubstantiation, Trs-B 
 truth, Tr2 
 
 U. 
 
 Unable, N-Bl' 
 unclaimed, N-Kl 
 nnder. If 
 
 undignified, N-D'-G 
 imdiscoverable, Nds-Kv 
 unfrequent, N-Frnt^ 
 uniform, Yn'-F 
 uniformity, Tn'-P-T 
 unimaginable, N-Jn'-B 
 unimaginatiye, N-Jv' 
 uniraportant-ce, N-M-Prti 
 universal, Vr-sL 
 universalism, Vr-sLs-M 
 universal-ist, Vr-sLst 
 universality, Vri-sLt 
 universe, Vrs' 
 university, Vrs-T 
 unmeasured, N-Z»Hrd 
 unpopular, N-Pi-P 
 unquestionable, N'-Kw-B 
 unquestioned, iH^-Kvr 
 unsatisfactory, N-sT' 
 unusual-ly, N-ZH^ 
 
 unwilling, N1"-NG 
 unwillingness, Nl'-Na 
 upstairs, Pstrs 
 usual-ly, ZH3 
 
 W. 
 
 Was, Z'. 
 wealth-y, Wl' 
 well, Z/« 
 were, B^ 
 what, T2 
 when, W2 
 
 whencesoever, Wss-V 
 whenever, Wv 
 whensoever, W-sV 
 where, IP 
 whereby, iS^-B 
 whereas, Es 
 whether, Wdhr 
 which, CH3 
 while, Wl" 
 whilst, Wist' 
 whither, Wdhr^ 
 whom, H' 
 why, Wi 
 will-ing, Ifi 
 wish, SH3 
 wished, SHt' 
 
 with, urn 
 
 within, DHn' 
 without, W 
 wonder, Dr' 
 world, iJld 
 worldly, Rli-L 
 worth, TH 
 would W 
 
 Tear, ¥= 
 yes, Ts 
 yet, Y 
 young, Y 
 younger, Yr 
 youngest, Yst 
 you-r, Y3 
 yours, Ys' 
 yourself, Ys' 
 yourselves, Ysa» 
 youth, TH3 
 youthful, THfa 
 youthfulnesB, TH':B^ 
 
AEBEEVIATIOlf. 97 
 
 ■"^ 
 
 REMARKS ON THE "WORD-SIGNS AND CONTRACTIONS. 
 § 292. The foregoing list of contractions is designed mainly for the 
 use of the reporter ; therefore the non-professional writer may adopt 
 only so many and such of these signs as suit his taste or convenience 
 It is recommended, however, that all who can spare the time should 
 familiarize themselves with the entire list, because it is always easier 
 to write long forms after committmg to memory shorter ones, than fcc 
 adopt abbreviated forms, having first formed the habit of using full 
 outlines. 
 
 SAME SIGN rOK PRESENT AND PAST TENSES. 
 
 § 293. When a, word-sign or contraction represents « verb in the 
 present tense, the past tense, if formed regularly by the addition of d 
 or ed, may be expressed by the same sign ;^ thus, .,^ recolled-ed, 
 /\ repreierUred. In such cases the context may generally be relied 
 upon to determine the time of the action ; if necessary, however, the 
 additional sound of the past tense may he expressed either by halving, 
 or by a disjoined im or dee; thus, j^ questioned, \| subjected. This rule 
 may also be extended to a few words that are written with uncon- 
 tracted outlines, but whose past-tense signs present unusual difBculties ; 
 thus, Pr-sWd persuade-d, Dt date-d. 
 
 THE PLURAL OF NOUNS. 
 
 § 294. When a noun is written with a word-sign or contraction, the 
 plural is formed, as in the ordinary way, by merely adding: tlie ess- 
 circle to the contracted outline ; thus, /\ represeniative, /\ represent- 
 atives, I defendant, \^ defendants. 
 
 THE. POSSESSIVE CASE OF NOUNS. 
 
 § 295. The possessive case of nouns, whether written with full or 
 contracted outlines, is formed by adding the ess-circle ; or, if the nom- 
 inative ends vrith the ess-circle, by enlarging it to sis; thus, ^_j, son's, 
 
 n Case's. 
 
 THIRD PERSON SINGULAR OF VEEbS. 
 
 § 296. The third person singular of regular verbs in the indicative 
 mood, present tense, that are written with word-signs or contractions, is 
 also formed by adding the ess-circle ; thus, come, » ccwnes. 
 
 SAME SIGN FOB ADJECTIVE AND ADTERB. 
 
 § 297. The same sign may be used for the adjective and adverb when 
 the latter is derived from the former by aflSxing ly ; thus, y g'sneral-ly. 
 When the ly is written, it should be disjoined ; thus, Prii perfaslly. 
 
 6 
 
98 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 PHRASEOGRAPHY. 
 
 § 298. The learner has now had presented to him all tie Bten()- 
 graphio material used in Phonography. He has also been made ac- 
 quainted with the fact, that in practice the signs of the vowels are 
 seldom expressed ; so that, in great measure, they may hereafter be 
 excluded from consideration, and his attention directed to the conso- 
 nants alone. Thus far, however, the consonant-signs have been used 
 to represent the consonant-sounds, both singly and in groups, as they 
 are found in separate words only ; and it yet remains, therefore, to ex- 
 tend their use to the representation of groups of consonants as they occur 
 in phrases, or collections of words. This mode of writing, by which 
 the consonants of sevgral words are joined or grouped in one charac- 
 ter, is called Phbaseogbapht. 
 
 TWO KINDS OF PHEASBS. 
 
 § 299. There are two ways of forming phrase-signs ; the simplest is to 
 merely join the phonographic outlines of two or more words together 
 without altering the form that each woijld have if written by itself, 
 and is exactly like joining words in wiiting ordinary longhand ; thus, 
 
 - ---„- m any case. The other mode of phrase-writing, and the 
 
 only one which requires extended explanation, is to group together, 
 by means of the stem-signs and their various modifications, the conso- 
 nants of several words, without regard to the form of each individ- 
 ually — a portion, and sometimes all of the words, as it were, losing 
 their identity of outline ; thus, i ly all thdr. 
 
 § 300. The f(511owing is a statement of the power of the different 
 consonant modifications, or attachments, when used in phrase-writing, 
 and in the precise order of their introduction on the preceding pages 
 of this work. 
 
 CIReiiES AND LOOPS. 
 
 'AS,' 'HAS,' 'IS,' 'niS,' OE 'us' ADDEH) BT THE ES3-CIKCLE. 
 
 § 301. As, has, is, or his may be added both initially and finally, 
 
 and us finally, by the eascirole ; thus, °) as so, — is in, who has or 
 
 is, -.[-- a is or has, ^ so h-as, ^ for us. 
 
 § 302. An ess-circle word-sign is prefixed to a word commencing with 
 the circle, or suffixed to one ending with it, by enlarging the <ircle 
 into sis ; thus, ^ has said, -g^- m ssen, (^ face us, —;:;■ gives us, '^ as 
 hii. -'A- tsos, OT hit it. 
 
PHRASEOGKAPHT. 99 
 
 "TO,' 'it,' OB 'the' added by changing the CmOLE TO A SMALL LOOP. 
 
 § 303. To, it, or the may be added to any of the «ss-circle word-signs, 
 either at the commencement or end of a phrase, or when standing 
 alone, and also at the end of most words ending with the circle, hy 
 changing it to the small loop ; thus, f as to what, "^ as to her, '^^ as 
 tlt£ man, ^ as it were, jj what is the, ^ hros the or to, ■■»• is the or to, ^ as 
 it is, -i- is it as, ^ raise the. 
 
 'there,' OB, 'THBIB' ADDED EY OHANOINO THE CIKCLB TO A LABOB LOOP. 
 
 § 304. Thire, or their may be added both initially and finally, in the 
 cases stated in the last section, by changing the circle to a large loop ; 
 
 thus, X, has there been, is there any, k what is there, ""^ because there, 
 
 "^^ becaiise there is, q^ tmless there, O as there, --a- is there. It is allow- 
 able for the reporter to sometimes represent there or ihdr in this manner, 
 even after words that end with the si-loop ; thus, '^^ almost, there, 
 f lest there. 
 
 § 305. When it is impossible or inconvenient to join a loop to an- 
 other outline in the ordinary way, it may be written with the detached 
 form, and then joined ; thus, '^'^^ T^"^ i^^ ""* *«8n, -^6^- is thert 
 soon, as there is. 
 
 THE HOOKS. 
 
 ' ALL,' OB ' will' ADDED BY THE EL-HOOK.' 
 
 § 306. All, or mil may be added by the eZ-hook ; thus, Jt" can aU 
 \ by all, \ but will, f whattaill, ..f...itimll, [ do all, Q they will, Q_/<w 
 all, ...(^ if all, Q.^ among ad. 
 
 'ABB,' 'OXTE,' OB ' Ob' ADDED BY THE ER-HOOK. 
 
 § 807. Are, our, or or may be added by the er-hook ; thus, ] whcU are, 
 "\ by ow, ..-?— which are, ■'' — on or or our, ,^_^ hnow our, C lliey are, 
 ^ far OUT, ,^_y among our. 
 
 'WE,' 'were,' 'would,' ob 'what' added BY THE WAY-HOOK. 
 
 § 808. We, were, would, or what may be added to straight stems by 
 the way-hook ; thus, ^- — can we, ^ were we, or where weie, \ what 
 would or we, \ at whM, or aught we. 
 
 'you,' 'YOUB,' or 'YEAb' ADDED BY THE YAY-HOOK. 
 
 § 309. Tou, your, or year may be added to straight stems by the 
 
100 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 yay-h-odk ; thus, 577. <"" you-r, ^ by your, '\ but yau^, '] wM yourf 
 or year. 
 
 'in' added by the IK-HOOK. 
 
 § 310. The proposition in may be written with the m-hook ; thus, 
 ;r-> in same. The outline of the word to which in is thus prefixed should 
 always be written in its proper position, instead of following that of in. 
 
 'HAVE,' 'or,' OR 'if' added bt ihe ep-hook. 
 § 311. Have, of, or if may be added by the cZ-hook; thus, ^ can 
 have, [ out of, \, jpart of, ^ what if, Q they have, ^_^ may have. The 
 e/'-hook on curves should be made a little wider, as well as longer, than 
 on straight stems. 
 
 § 312. And, an, own, one, or been, to a preceding auxiliary or"pronoun, 
 and than to other and comparatives, may be added by the m-hook ; thus, 
 -yT- you and, ■■■^^. if an, ^ her own, ^ for one, ^ have been, (, other 
 
 than, ,--^ more than. It is allowable to turn a small hook for n on the 
 inside of the ter-hook, or of the i)ee-hook on curves ; thus, /^ rather 
 than, () they have been. And, as the ssAMn-hook after the sto'-loop is 
 seldom used, it may, at the writer's option, be employed also as an 
 era-ho<2k ; thus, ^^a) faster than. The cre-hook after the fer-hook and 
 ufcr-loop may be used in writing the words bittern, western, southeastern, etc 
 
 ' THEBOB," THEIR,' OR ' OTHER' ADDED BY THE TER-HOOK, AND BY 
 LENQTHENINQ. 
 
 § 313. There, their, or other may be added to straight stems by the 
 fer-hook, and to curves by lengthening ; thus, ^ can there, ^ of 
 their, ^ shall there, '^" should there, -C -though there, -[^ if their, 
 
 ..f^. will there, from their, _'^'^_ on tlidr, ^ y no otiier, in 
 
 there, - , among their. 
 
 'the,' 'it,' or 'to' added by halvinq. 
 § 814. The, it, or la may be added by halving the last stem of the 
 preceding word ; thus, J at the or it, _'^_from the or it, ^ among the, 
 ^ able to, f said to. The use of the halving and looping principles for 
 dh, as well as for t and d, is in analogy with the practice of adding dkr 
 and ir, dr, by the ier-hook, or by lengthening, although there are 
 practical reasons for not making it of such general application. 
 
PHEASEOGEAPHT. 101 
 
 ' not' added by the en-hook AM) HAIVINO PEINOIPLB. 
 
 § 315. Not may be added by the CT-book and halving principla 
 combined ; thus, ~^ can not, J had not, j do not, --.-- did not, "f U mil 
 not. 
 
 COMBINATION OF JOREaOING PEINOIPLES. 
 
 § 316. The foregoing principles of phrase-writing ma.y be used in 
 combination with each other, as well as separately ; thus, ^^ can att 
 
 of, ^ can all of the, -> can alltlieir, "^"3 can all their own, "' out of the, 
 —h~ which mil have the, L do you mean to say, '~ (j can you think of any. 
 
 POSITION OF PHRASE-SIGNS, ETC. 
 
 § 317. As a general rule, the first word of a phrase-sign should be writ- 
 ten in the position it would occupy if written by itself, and the other 
 words then joined, one after another, without regard to position ; thus, 
 
 .Vi Tiave had, ''_ ^ as my own, ^ has not, --- is not. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 § 318. When the first word of the phrase belongs to the first posi- 
 tion, and is represented by a circle, loop, horizontal stem, or a half- 
 length perpendicular or inclined stem, if necessary to secure greater 
 legibility, the second word may be written in the position it would 
 occupy if standing alone, providing it does not thereby bring the first 
 word through, or below the line ; thus, I has had, J has done, ^ as 
 for, p . asif, ( as to that, ^ as to them, .ss.. as it would, f on those, 
 ■^^r^.. on this, 7 about those, -7-- "^iiui this. 
 
 POSITION OF THE SIGNS FOK 'MK.,' ' MES.,' AND 'MISS.' 
 
 § 319. The words Mr. , Mrs. , and Miss properly belong to the tliird 
 position, and should always be so writteir when standing alone ; but 
 when joined to a succeeding proper name, they may follow its posi- 
 tion ; thus, Mr-Jns2 Mr. Jones, Ms-S-Rf^ Mrs. Wright, Ms-Br^-D Misn 
 Brady. 
 
 WOEDS WRITTEN BT AN INITIAL AND FINAL MODIFICATION OF THE 
 
 PEEOEDINQ STEM. 
 
 § 320. In phrases, sometimes a word is best written by an initial 
 hook, and a final modification, on the stem of the preceding word; 
 thus, [, what was, J ai one. 
 
102 THE COMPLETE PHONOGKAPHEE. 
 
 CEKTAIN WORDS DISTINGUISHED. 
 
 § 321, It will be observed that sometimes two or three words ar« 
 written with the same sign, being distinguished, one from the other, 
 only by difference of position. Now, it is obvious that, in phrase- 
 writing, this mode of distinction can be preserved with such words 
 only when they commence phrases ; therefore, when the context can 
 not be relied upon to show which word was intended in case the sign 
 is thrown out of its proper position, the writer must make a distinc- 
 tion either by changing the form of one of the conflicting words, or by 
 vocalizing one of them. For instance, K and Knt may always be used 
 for can and can not, even when, in phrases, they are removed from the 
 first position ; but those outlines should be used for covld and could 
 not only when they stand alone, or begin a phrase — in ather cases 
 they should be expressed in full ; thus, write T' : Knt', or T-Kd-Nt for 
 it could not. Did and should are distinguished from do and shall re- 
 spectively, in a similar manner. Ree should never be used for are 
 except alone, or commencing a phrase ; in other positions er is used. 
 See, when thrown out of position, is vocalized to distinguish it from say. 
 If to is omitted before say, it should be vocalized, or else it might be 
 mistaken for so. The word ill should always be written in position 
 and vocalized to distinguish it from weU. Own and no should be 
 either written in position or vocalized, when necessary to distin- 
 guish them from know and any respectively. In phra-ses (except at 
 the cdmmencefiiont), change aud^art should be written in full that they 
 may not be confounded with charge and opportunity. Here-ar, when 
 standing alone, should be written with er ; but, in phrases, or com- 
 pound woMs, eittier er or ree may be used, according to convenience. 
 Bim is written on the line, and go in the first position, to avoid their 
 being mistaken, in fast writing, for me and come respectively • in phrases, 
 great care should be taken to make the distinction clear between the 
 hay and em, and the gay and kay. He is also written in the second 
 position to distinguish it from tiiho. When standing alone, or com- 
 mencing a phrase , else is vocalized to distinguish it from less ; in other 
 positions it may be distinguished by being written downward, less 
 being struck upward. Also vocalize least in phrases, to distinguish 
 it from last. Indeed should always be disjoined to avoid its being 
 mistaken for no doubt. 
 
 ' eveb' and ' have' distinguisued. 
 § 322. JEeer as a word-sign, whether standing alone or used in 
 phrases, should always be written with the stem V, to distinguish it 
 from /have, which, in phrases (except at the commencement), is written 
 
PHEASE06EAPHY. 103 
 
 with the «ce-hook ; thus, T do you, ever, do you, have. But ever as a 
 Bufflx may be written with the vce-hook. See § 285. 
 
 TICKS FOK 'I,' 'A, 'AS,' AND 'AND.' 
 
 § 323. The words 7, a, an, or and may be joined to the following ol 
 preceding word by a light tick, the position of which is governed by 
 that of the word to which it is so attached— as follows : 
 
 1. I, at the commencement of phrases — ^by a light tick inclined in 
 the direction of chay, and written either upward or downward, as is 
 
 most convenient ; thus, '\ / Jwpe, .:^.. 1 believe, K^ I suppose, , / 
 
 hnow, I- ^ I am, '^ / can not. This sign may be considered as an ab- 
 breviation of the sign of the diphthong i. See § 274. 
 
 2. A, an, or and, at the commencement of phrases — ^by a light tick 
 written in the direction o{pee ; thus, I and then, ~| and what, ^^~^ and 
 my, ."::>... and we, "1^ and as for. 
 
 3. In the middle, or at the end of phrases, a tick inclined in either 
 direction may be used for either of these words, except when an and 
 and are better written with the cn-hook ; thus, ""*<;,:i-.^ V ^ may, 
 ..^-^^^^^^^. in a moment, '^SPj worse and worse, in a. 
 
 HOOKS ON THE TICKS. 
 
 § 324. The small hooks, both initial and final, hiay be attached to 
 the tick word-signs, with their ordinaiy word-signification, except that 
 theera-hook, so used, stands toxTiot; thus, " Iwill, ' Ihave, f I will have, 
 '^■—^ IwiU have no, '^ Iwill not, "^ and will or aU, ^ and have, ^ and will 
 have, y and wUl not, ^ and are, ^ and are not, _'^_ and are of. 
 
 'I,' 'A,' ETC., WHEN STANDINO ALONE OK rOLLOWED BY COM, CON, ETC. 
 
 § 325. / should always be written with its tick-sign ; but a, an, 
 and and, standing alone, may be written with their dot-signs ; except 
 that the tick-signs are preferred before words that, for any purpose, are 
 written in proximity to them ; thus, j /contend, -^inij and concluded. 
 
 TICK FOB. 'THE.' 
 
 § 326. The is generally indicated by halving or by looping ; but 
 when it can not be so written, it may be expressed by a light horizon- 
 tal or perpendicular tick ; thus, ^-^ the most, ^ ^ enter the. 
 
 JOINING OF TICKS WITH CIKCLES, ETC. 
 
 § 327. The tick-signs may be joined to the circle word-signs, and to 
 
104 THE COMPLETE PHOTiTOGEAPHEE. 
 
 each other, as well as to the stem-signs ; thus, '^ as a-n, -^. is a-n^ 
 _°'_ or '" as I, ^ and a-n, "■ and the. 
 
 STENOTYPES OF THE TICKS. 
 
 § 828. The stenotypes of the tick-signs are as follows : a or a for a, 
 an, or and ; i or i for /—the direction of the accent showing the incli- 
 nation of the tick ; and 6 for ilie; thus; a-sPs'^ and suppose, Tfe'-a it is a, 
 i-M' / am, i-Bl^ / believe, i-sP' / speaJt, e-Mst^ the most, e-sT^ the suit, 
 Wdhv^-e wIi£i!ierthe,GIl^-i-M. which Imay, al andaU, kx and have, iv I have, 
 il / will, bi-k and a-n, a 6 and the. 
 
 ' -INO the' and ' -ISO A.' 
 
 § 329. In all cases where the final syllable 4ng would he expressed by 
 the dot, tlm may be added by changing the dot to a perpendicular or 
 horizontal tick, and a, by changing it to an inclined tick written in 
 the direction of P or CH ; thus, f7' letting the, ■^- putting the, ^j shutting 
 a, 'K, spreading a. The use of these ticks may also he extended to some 
 words where final ing alone is written with the stem NG, when it 
 makes a difficult or indistinct angle at its junction with the preceding 
 part of the outline ; thus, \ ^ paying, \ paying Die, \ paying a 
 
 EULES FOE PHEASE-WEITING. 
 § 830. Although no rules of universal application for the con- 
 struction of phrases can be given, the learner will find the following 
 directions of great use in teaching him general principles, so that he 
 can form proper phrase-signs himself as they are needed. 
 
 GENERAL KCLE. 
 
 § 831. Words that are naturally collected into a phrase or dause in 
 speaking, may generally be joined in a phrase-sign in writing ; thus, 
 ' as-well-as,' ' in-the first-place,' 'on-the-part-of-the.' 
 
 SPECIAL UTILES. 
 
 § 382. A noun or pronoun in the objective case may he joined to 
 the preceding verb or preposition by which it is governed ; thus, 
 'take-this,' 'save-them,' 'by-them,' ' for-liini,' 'to-liim.' If any 
 qualifying word or words intervene, they may also be ircluded in the 
 phrase; thus, ' at-the-time,' 'on-the-part,' ' for-my-sake,' ' to-my- 
 own-knowlcdge.' 
 
 § 333. A verb may be joined to its nominative ; thus, ' I-see,' ' he- 
 lives,' ' the-sun-shincs.' If the verb have any auxiliaries, they, 
 together with any intervening adverb or adverbs, may be joined to it, 
 
PHEASEOGEAPHY. 105 
 
 and the whole joined to the nominative; thus, 'I-may-be,' 'I-may 
 not-be,' 'it-can-not-be,' ' James-will-not-go,' 'I-may-again-return.' 
 
 § 334. A qualifying word may be joined to the word it qualiiies ; 
 thus, ' good»man,' ' a-great-many,' ' very-certain,' ' quite-likely,' 
 ' the-man,' ' a-man,' ' much-esteemed,' ' as-good-as,' ' absolutely 
 necessary.' 
 
 § 335. Two nouns, or a pronoun and a noun, coming together, the 
 first in the possessive case, and the other denoting the thing pos- 
 sessed, may be joined, and the whole joined to a preceding governing 
 or qualifying word ; thus, 'James' -book,' ' on-the-father's-side," 'on- 
 his-part,' 'on-theii'-side,' ' to-my-knowledge.' 
 
 § 336. A verb in the infinitive mood, with or without to, may .be 
 joined to its governing verb, noun, or adjective ; thus, ' ought-to-go,' 
 'I-desire-to-leave,' ' I-dare-say' (i-D-.B-S), ' I-need-do.' 
 
 § 337. A copulative conjunction may be joined to the word that 
 follows it, and also to the preceding word, if there be one in the same 
 clause; thus, 'and-then,' 'you-and-I' (Yn'-i), ' worse-and- worse.' 
 
 § 338. When the idiom of the language requires that one word 
 follow another, if in the same clause, they may be joined ; thus, 
 'other-than,' 'more-than,' ' suoh-as.' 
 
 § 339. Words should seldom be joined in phrases that are separated, 
 in speaking, by a distinct pause, either rhetorical or grammatical. 
 And, even when the phrase would be otherwise allowable, the writer 
 should avoid joining words whose outlines make difficult junctions, 
 and 'also the use of phrase-signs of inconvenient length, or signs 
 that extend to too great a distance above or below the line of writing. 
 
 OMISSION OF CONSONANTS IN PHRASE-WEITING. 
 
 § 340. Slightly sounded consonants may generally be omitted in 
 phrase-writing, the same as in writing single words (§ 286) ; thus, it is 
 safe to write than and and with the era-hook, because, in ordinary speech, 
 the other consonants of those words, dh and d, are often partially, and 
 sometimes wholly suppressed ; the speaker saying ' more'n' for ' more 
 than,' ' better'n' for ' better than,' ' you'n I' for ' you and I.' A loop 
 at the end of a word may be changed to an ess-circle, when necessary 
 to secure an easy junction with the succeeding word ; thus, '~\_ must 
 have. 
 
 OMISSION OP WOKDS. 
 
 § 341. The reporter may, without sacrifice of legibility, omit from 
 phrase-signs the outlines of any words of common occurrence, which, 
 
106 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 ja reading or transcribing, may readily be supplied by reference to the 
 construction or context. 
 
 ' have' omitied. 
 § 342. When have- occurs before dme in a phrase-sign, and it can 
 not easily be written with the c/-hook, it may be omitted; thus, 
 •'^■" must have done. 
 
 ' 01? OMITTED. 
 
 § 343. When of occurs betweon two words belonging to the same 
 clause, and it can not conveniently be written with the cf-hook, it may 
 be omitted, and then intimated by writing the adjacent words in 
 proximity ; thus, C loss of money ; and sometimes by joining 
 them ; thus, >v,_^ words of my text. 
 
 ' to' omitted. 
 
 § 344. At the commencement of a phrase, to may generally be 
 omitted, and then intimated by writing the next word, or the re- 
 mainder of the phrase-sign, entirely below" the line ; thus, T"' to receive, 
 j to do, 'N^' to be seen. When, however, the word that follows to 
 is composed entirely of horizontal or half-length perpendicular or 
 
 inclined stems, the stem T^ should be used ; thus, -I to tne. This 
 
 position below the line may be denominated the fourth consonant 
 POSITION, and numbered as such ; thus, "T" CH*. 
 
 § 345. To may also be occasionally omitted from th^ middle of a 
 phrase-sign, when, by so doing, the writer is able to secure an 
 easier or briefer outline ; thus, F said to have, ■■/- which are to ham, 
 "^ according to the. 
 
 ' FROM to' omitted. 
 
 § 346. From such phrases as 'from hour to hour,' 'from week to 
 week,' etc., from — to may be omitted and intimated by writing the 
 signs of the repeated word near each other, or, when more conve- 
 nient, by joining them ; thus, 1 1 from day to day, .'"TTT^ fi""* ^"''^ '" 
 time, R'-B/f om hour to hour. 
 
 ' and' omitted. 
 § 847. And may often be omitted from the middle of a phrase, and 
 the adjacent words joined, especially when they are the same word 
 repeated ; thus, Gn-Qn again and again. 
 
 repeated or similar words in phrases. 
 § 348. When a word of two or more syllables Is repeated, or is 
 followed by a differe.nt word having the same or a similar outline, and 
 
PHRA8E0GEAPHT. 
 
 107 
 
 with or without a common word intervening that the context will 
 readily supply if it be omitted, — write the first syllable or stem , 
 (whether simple or compound) of the first word, — omit the intervening 
 word if there be one, — and join to, or write near, such first stem, the 
 last word in full ; thus, Dr' Dr-Kr darker and darker, Brt'-Brtr brighter 
 and brighter, B-Btr better and better, Wd'-Wdr under and wider, M-M-N-TH 
 month after month, Y'-Y-H viva voce, N--V-ius nolens voUns, T? ;T'-T1 tittk- 
 
 PHEASE CONTRACTIONS. 
 § 349. The reporter often finds it convenient to use abbreviated 
 outlines for phrases as well as for words. The following list is mainly 
 composed of those phrase-contractions that are not formed in ac- 
 cordance with the foregoing rules. Some of these phrases would prop- 
 erly come under the head of " special phrase contractions" in the next 
 section, but for convenience of reference they are also inserted here. 
 
 A. 
 
 According to, Krd' 
 
 absolutely necessary, B'-sit-Nss-iJ 
 
 act of Congress, Kt'-Grs 
 
 act of Parliament, 'KV-Vi-L 
 
 acts of Congress, Kts' Gtrs 
 
 acts of Parliament, Kts'-Pr-i 
 
 anything else, N'-NG-Ls 
 
 anything less, N'-NG-is 
 
 as far as you, sFrs'-Y 
 
 as far as there is, sFrsdhrs' 
 
 as good as, sGds' 
 
 as great as, sGrts' 
 
 at all events, Tlv'-Nts 
 
 at any rate, T'-Nrt 
 
 at first, Tst' 
 
 at last, T'-Zst 
 
 at least, Tlst' 
 
 at length, Tlni 
 
 B. 
 
 Baptist Church, Bts'-CH-CH 
 British America, Brf-M-ii-K 
 by the bye, Bt' • B 
 by way of illustration, B'-W- 
 •istrshn 
 
 C. 
 Call for, Kl'-F 
 call forth, Klf > 
 Catholic Bishop, K-TH'-B 
 Constitution of the U. S., stTshn'- 
 
 Ys 
 county court, Knt'-K 
 
 Court of Appeals, Krt'-Pls 
 Court of Bankruptcv, Krt^-B-NG 
 Court of Chancery, Krt^-CHs-iJ 
 Court of Common Pleas, Krt'- 
 
 N-PIs 
 criminal jurisprudence, Kr^-Jrs-P 
 
 D. 
 
 Divine Being, Dv'-B 
 defendant's counsel, Ds--K 
 during the latter part of the, Drt^- 
 
 itr-Pvt 
 during the time, Drt^-M 
 
 E. 
 
 Eight or nine. T~i2-Nn 
 Eight or ten, T^-iS-Tn 
 et cetera, T-sTr 
 everlasting life, Y-Ls-Lf 
 
 F. 
 
 Five or seven, Fv"-22-sVn 
 five or six, Fv'-iS-sKs 
 for ever and ever, P^-V-V 
 for instance, F^-sTns 
 four or five, F^-iE-Fv 
 
 G. 
 
 Gentlemen of the Jury, Jnt'-J 
 Grand Jury, Grd'-Jr 
 Great Britain, Grt^-Brt 
 Great Britain and Ireland, Gii*- 
 Brt-iJlnd 
 
108 
 
 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEK. 
 
 H. 
 
 He has some, Hss'-M 
 
 Holy Ghost, H^-G 
 
 Uou. gentleman, Nr-Jnt' 
 
 Hon. gentlemen, Nr-Jnf 
 
 Hon. member, Nr'-M 
 
 Hon. senator, Nr'-sNtr 
 
 House of Eepresentatives, Hs'-iJ-Ps 
 
 I. 
 
 In conseqrience, N^-sKns 
 
 in effect, N»-F-K 
 
 In fact, N3-Ft 
 
 in reference, N'-i?f 
 
 in regard, N'-i?-Grd 
 
 in response, N'-iJ-sPns 
 
 in the first place, Nt'-Fs-Ps 
 
 in the last place, Nt^-Ls-Pls 
 
 in the first instance, Nt°-Fs-Tns 
 
 in the last instance, Nf-Ls-Tns 
 
 J. 
 
 Jesus Christ, Js^-K 
 Justice of the Peace, Js^-Ps 
 Justices of the Peace, Jss^-Ps 
 justification by faith, Js^-F-TH 
 
 L. 
 
 Ladies and gentlemen, i^-Ds-Jnt 
 last will and testament, is'-i-T- 
 
 sMnt 
 learned counsel, £rnd-K 
 learned friend, Zmd-Fnd 
 learned gentleman, Xrd-Jnt 
 legislative session, L-Jsshn 
 Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, is'- 
 
 V-Js-K 
 
 M. 
 
 Marine Court, M-.H^-Krt 
 Member of Congress, M'-Grs 
 Member of the Bar, M«-Br 
 Members of Congress, Ms-Grs 
 Members of the Bar, Ms-Br 
 Methodist Church, M-THds-CH- 
 
 CH 
 Methodist Epis. Church, M-THds- 
 
 Ps-CH-CH 
 
 N. 
 Now York, N-Y' 
 
 New York City, N-Y'-sT 
 
 New York State, N-Yi-sTt,or sTat 
 
 nine or ten, Nn'-iJ-Tn 
 
 no sir, Ns' 
 
 North America, Nr-M-iB^-K 
 
 North Carolina, Nr-Kr-i'-N 
 
 0. 
 
 Objected to, B^-T 
 objection sustained, B-ssTnd 
 Old and New Testament, i^-N-T 
 
 sMnt 
 Old Testament, i-T-sMnt 
 on her part, N'-R-P 
 on our part, Nr'-P 
 one or two, W-Nr-T 
 over and over again, Vr'-V-Gn 
 
 P. 
 
 Party of the first part, Pi-Fs-P 
 party of the second part, P' 
 
 sKnd-P 
 per annnm, P--5-N-M 
 personal estate, Prs^-Nls-Tt 
 plaintiff's counsel, Ps^ K 
 Presbyterian Church^ fin^j|^-CH 
 
 E. 
 
 Real estate, M'-sTt 
 right or wron^^gfa'- Jj^NG 
 Roman Catholic, R^}\^f^B^ 
 railroad statiqj^ySJ/iJ-Dstshn 
 religious WW^ship, J^-sW-jSff 
 
 S. 
 
 Savior of the world, sV^^iJld 
 Secr'y of the Ti-easury. sKrt'-Tr 
 Secr'y of State, sKrt--sTt 
 Secr'y of War, sKrt'-Wr 
 Senate and House of Represent 
 
 atives, sNt3-Hsi?-Ps 
 Senate of the United Stittea 
 
 sNf'-Ys 
 six or eight, sKs'-R-T 
 six or seven, sKs'-i» sVn 
 Southern States, sDH^-sTts 
 South America, sM-iJs-K 
 South Carolina, sKr-i'-N 
 Supremo Court, sPi-3 Krt 
 Superior Court, sP^-Krt 
 
PHEASEOGEAPHT. 
 
 109 
 
 T. 
 
 Temperance Society, T^-Prss-T 
 the other, DHdhr' 
 three or four, Tllr^-iJ P-K 
 two or three, Tr'-THr 
 
 tr. 
 
 United States, Ts^ 
 U. S. of America, Ts^-M-U-K 
 U. S. Senate, Tsa'-Nt . 
 U. S. Senator, Yss^-Ntr 
 
 T. 
 
 Very seldom, Vr^'-sLd-M 
 Vice-President, Vs'-Ps-Dnt 
 
 vice versa, Vs'-V-S 
 viva voce, V^-V-S 
 
 W. 
 
 Ways and Means, "Ws'-Mns 
 with reference, DH^-iJf 
 with respect, DH^-iJ-sPt 
 with regard, DH^-E-Grd 
 
 T. 
 
 Yes, sir, Tss^ 
 young man, T^-Mn 
 young women, T'-W-Mn 
 Your' Honor, Y^-Nr 
 
 SPECIAL PHRASE AND WORD CONTRACTIONS. 
 § 350. When a phrase or word, whose outline is of inconvenient 
 length, occurs frequently in a particular case or subject matter, the 
 reporter, after writing it once or twice in full, may oftentimes save 
 himself considerable labor by extemporizing an abbreviation for it. 
 Such contractions are generally best formed by omitting from the 
 outline all but the leading and most suggestive signs ; attention also 
 being given, in the selection, to ease and convenience of junction. 
 'ITius, for instance, in reporting legal proceedings, such outlines as 
 the following may be used : D-Bs ' defendant objects,' B-ssTnd 
 'objection sustained,' D-sPts 'defendant excepts,' P-sPts 'plaintiff 
 excepts,' is-£-T-sMnt 'last will and testament,' imd-K 'learned 
 counsel ;' in legislative or congressional reporting, Nr'-Jnt ' Honor- 
 able gentleman," Nr'-M 'Honorable member,' Nr'-sNtr 'Honorable 
 senator,' Nr-Jnt-N-Y 'Honorable gentleman from New York;' in 
 sermon reporting, i'-Js-K 'Lord Jesus Christ,' Tr-N-F 'eternal life,' 
 H-G ' Holy Ghost,' N-T^-sMnt ' New Testament,' etc. ; in reporting a 
 lecture on Chemistry, Ntr'-sD ' nitrous acid,' Kri-Bs-D ' carbonic 
 acid,' Ks-D'-Hdr 'oxide of hydrogen;' in a lecture on Anatomy, 
 sP'-Kl 'spinal column,' G"-NG-P-TH 'ganglion ophthalmicum,' etc. 
 Names of corporations and companies may also be abbreviated in the 
 eaiheway ; thus, i-Trs-K 'Life & Trust Co.,' sN-M-Ns-K 'Sun Mutual 
 Insurance Co.,' CH-Br-.Es 'Chamber of Commerce,' N-sNtr-.Sl 'N. Y. 
 Central Railroad.' These special contractions, though they may be per- 
 fectly legible in the particular subject for which they are made, should 
 not, of course, bo employed in general reporting. 
 
no 
 
 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 PUNCTUATION" AND OTHER MARKS. 
 
 § 351. The. following are the punctuation and other marks used in 
 Phonography : 
 
 Comma , 
 
 Semicolon ; 
 
 Colon : 
 
 Pekiod ^ o: 
 
 Exclamation / 
 
 Inteekooation ? 
 
 Doubt (?) 
 
 Hyphen „ 
 
 Parenthesis ( ) 
 
 Bbaokeis [ ] 
 
 -a 
 r 
 
 Applause . 
 Laughtee . 
 Dash. 
 
 Caret \ 
 
 Index ~S~~3^ 
 
 Paragraph (j? 
 
 Section iS 
 
 Asterisk .;j;. 
 
 Dagger f 
 
 Double dagger J' 
 
 GENERAL EEMARKS ON PUNCTUATTOlir. 
 
 THE PERIOD. 
 
 § 352. In rapid reporting the writer has no time to indicate the 
 minor pauses, but he should always mark the full stops. As to the 
 mode of doing this the practice of reporters is varied, some using the 
 small cross, or a modification of it like this ( >o ) ! others the long sign 
 given above, which is struck downward in the direction of ckay, while 
 many use no marks at all, but indicate the pauses by spaces in their 
 notes. If the latter mode be adopted, the space for a period should be 
 about three quarters of an inch, and for a colon or semicolon, about a 
 third or half an inch in length. In case, however, the reporter writes 
 rather openly, the spaces should be correspondingly increased. 
 
 EXCLAMATION AND INTERROGATION POINTS. 
 
 § 353. The marks of exclamation and interrogation should be 
 written as shown in the table above, with the phonographic point at 
 the bottom ; for, if made in the ordinary way, with the simple dot, 
 they might be mistaken for phonographic words. Both of these signs 
 should also be placed at tlie end of tlie clause or sentence which they 
 are intended to marlC It is recommended in most phonographic 
 works that the interrogation point be placed at the commencement 
 of the interrogation ; but, as it is frequently impossible to tell whether 
 
PUNOTPATION AND OTHER MAEK8. Ill 
 
 a speaker, when he commences a sentence, is going to ask a question 
 or make a simple affirmation, it is obviously impracticable in reporting 
 to follow this rule. 
 
 PARENTHESIS AND BRACKETS. 
 
 § 354. As the difference between the marks of parenthesis and the 
 brackets is not commonly understood, it is proper that their use 
 should here be explained. The marks of parenthesis serve to 
 indicate that an expression is inserted in the body of a sentence with 
 which it has no connection in sense or in construction, while 
 brackets are generally used to separate two subjects, or to inclose 
 an explanation, note, or observation standing by itself. Therefore, 
 the marks of parenthesis should be used to indicate a statement 
 given in the words of the speaker, but which has no connection in 
 sense or in construction with the adjoining matter ; and the brackets, 
 to inclose any explanation, note, or observation given in the words 
 of the reporter. 
 
 DASH. 
 
 § 355". The dash should be made wave-like, to avoid its being 
 mistaken for the stem hay. 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 § 356. Accent may be shown by writing a small cross close to the 
 vowel-sign of the accented syllable ; thus, "d arrows, ^' arose ; but 
 generally this mark is unnecessary, as the position of the word almost 
 always indicates its accented vowel. 
 
 EMPHASIS. 
 
 § 357. Emphasis is marked as in longhand, by drawing one, two, 
 or more lines underneath the emphatic word. A single line under a 
 single word should be made wave-like, to distinguish it from kay. 
 
 CAPITALS. 
 § 358. An initial capital may be marked by drawing two short 
 parallel lines under the first part of the word ; thus, 1^ Times news- 
 paper. The entire word may be marked for capitals by drawing the par- 
 allel lines under the whole of it. But as this mode of capitalizing oc- 
 cupies too much time to be of practical use to the reporter, he may, 
 with advantage, substitute a single line drawn under words to mart 
 both proper names and emphasis ; thus, Ae James. Such line should, 
 however, be made a little longer and heavier than a km/. 
 
112 THE COMrLETE PHONOGEAPIIEE. 
 
 INITIALS OF PKOPEE NAMES, ETC. 
 
 § 359. The initials of proper names are best written in longhand 
 If, however, phonographic letters are used instead, as will sometimes 
 be necessary in rapid reporting, signs should be selected to indicate 
 the common, and not the phonographic, initials. 
 
 CONSONANT INITIALS. 
 
 § 360. The letter B., as an initial, may be indicated by the phono- 
 gra])h lee, D. by dee, F. by ef, B. by hay, J. by jay, K. by kay, L. by 
 fce, M. by em, N. by m, F. by pee, R. by err or ree, 8. by ess, T. by tee, 
 V. by vee, W. hyway, T. by yay, and Z. by zee. The letters C, Q., and 
 X. should always be indicated in longhand. [See § 86.] 
 
 CAUTION. 
 
 § 861. The- phonograph gay, and not Jay, should be used for the 
 initial of such names as George, Germany, etc., as well as of Gerrit, 
 Gouvemeur, etc., for gay Indicates the true initial 0-., while jay would 
 indicate J. For a like reason pee, and not ef, should* be used for the 
 nitial of Philip, Philo, etc. 
 
 VOWEL INITIALS. 
 
 § 362. The letter A., as an initial, may be indicated by a heavy dot 
 on the line, E. by a heavy dot under the line, /. by the sign of the 
 diphthong i written above the line, 0. by the word- sign for owe, and 
 U. by the sign of the diphthong ew written on or below the line. The 
 vowel initials should be indicated according to the above directions 
 without regard to their sounds ; thus, A. should be represented by a 
 large dot written on the line, whether it be the initial of Abraham, 
 Arthur, Alfred, or Augustus. The vowel initials may also be indicated 
 by writing the signs of a, e, i, o, or Bw to the nominal consonant. 
 This mode, however, is hardly practicable in swift writing. 
 
 INITIALS OP TITLES. 
 
 § 363 The initials of titles are best vnitten with the longhand 
 letters; thus, LL.D., M.D., A.B., etc. 
 
 NUMBERS, ETC. 
 
 § 864. Numbers should generally be represented by the ordinary 
 Arabic characters. Though in some instances they are not quite so 
 brief as the words phonographically written, they are somewhat more 
 legible, and their distinctive character renders them conspicuous in a 
 
PUNCTUATION AND OTHEK MAEK8. 113 
 
 Iiage of notes. But one and ten are written test with Wn and Tn ; 
 but if the figure 1 is used it should bo written / one, to distin- 
 guish it from chay or jay. When several noughts occur, the num- 
 ber represented by them may be expressed in Phonography ; and, for 
 this purpose, the abbreviations IP hundred, THs' thousand, M? ndUkm, 
 may be used ; thus, 4H''i-THs = 400,000, SH^-M = 800,000,000. 
 
 § 365. When a speaker mentions a number of dollars or pounds, he 
 first utters the number and then the deuominsition ; therefore, the 
 reporter should write the word 'dollars' (for which Ds' is a good 
 abbreviation), or 'pounds' after the number, instead of going back 
 and placing before it the sign $ or £ ; thus, 421 Ds', instead of $421. 
 
 PHONOGRAPHIC HGUP-ES. 
 
 366. Numbers may, however, be expressed much more rapidly than 
 in the ordinary way by using the phonographic consonant-signs with 
 numerical values. The following assignment of them for that pur- 
 pose is believed to present unusual advantages in point of brevity 
 and legibility. 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 r 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 \ 
 
 ) 
 
 / 
 
 r 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 L 
 
 \ 
 
 ) 
 
 "^ 
 
 ti 
 
 J 
 
 (( 
 
 a 
 
 (C 
 
 o 
 
 (( 
 
 it 
 
 J 
 
 (( 
 
 it 
 
 <( 
 
 It 
 
 ( " " 
 
 / 1( (f 
 
 § 367. The circles, and the d, er, ef, and en hooks may also be 
 generally employed with numerical values. But the loops, and the 
 way, yay, shun, and ter hooks, if used at all, should be very carefully 
 written ; and, perhaps for general purposes, it is better to exclude 
 them entirely. 
 
 Examples : (^ 5, ^-^-^ 33, (. 87, // 64, / 47, \/ 94, 
 
 W^ 804, ;— 407, \_^ 908, r^ 509, _p 7,000, \ 95, >\ 94, 
 
 ^_ 75, ,_ 74, J 12, -^ 7,004. 
 
 § 368. Before the phonographic numerals can be used in . reporting, 
 they must be thoroughly committed to memory and familiarized, par- 
 ticularly the signs which represent the noughts ; the ess-circle standing 
 for one nought ; the large circle for two noughts ; the large circle with 
 a turned small circle for three noughts, and the stem ess, with an ini- 
 tial large circle, and a final large circle with a turned small circle, 
 for six noughts; thus, Ts = 10, Tss = 100, Tsss = 1,000, T-ssSsss = 
 1,000,000. 
 
114 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 FORMS MODIFIED BY MOTION". 
 
 § 369. We have already Been (§ 14) that the basis of the phono- 
 graphic consonant-signs is the segment of a circle extending ninety 
 degrees, and a straight line of equal length. These two characters — a 
 line of beauty and a line of speed — written in various directions, with 
 light and shaded stroke, and modified hy means of circles, loops, 
 hooks, etc., constitute the entire variety of phonographic word-forms. 
 Characters more simple or easily drawn can not be devised. But when 
 traced as accurately as may be with skillful pen, with the rapidity of 
 speech, the original geometrical figures appear modified, and filled with 
 life as well as meaning. Phonography written, or engraved as we gen- 
 erally see it, with an attempt at mathematical precision, in accordance 
 with the original geometrical design, appears dead, stiff, and unwieldy, 
 because it is unmodified by the spirit of motion. 
 
 § 370. The principal movement in writing being forward, all indi- 
 rect or side movements are more or less subordinated to it. So that 
 all perpendicular or partially backward strokes will be shorter than 
 those written forward horizontally or inclined ; and all words which 
 would naturally extend far above or below the line of writing will be 
 brought more into lineality by encroaching a little on the rules of po- 
 sition, and by making the phonographs smaller. 
 
 § 371. All horizontal curves, instead of being segments of a circle, 
 will be segments of an ellipse cut through its longest diameter* this 
 form being produced by the rapid forward motion which is of neces- 
 sity more retarded near the beginning and end of the stroke than 
 through the middle, while the upward and downward movements are 
 equal throughout, or, rather, retarded in the middle of the stroke con- 
 sequent upon the change of direction, upward or downward. 
 
 § 372. Inclined curves will be more or less irregular, curving most 
 near one end, according to the direction of the curve ; thus, ef and ish 
 are liable to be curved most near the beginning, and cl and er, near the 
 termination. 
 
 § 373. The modification of perpendicular curves is less apparent, 
 but those convex to the right will be curved most near the beginning, 
 and those convex to the left curved most at the lower end. 
 
 § 374. In the joining of simple signs the angftes of junction will be 
 more or less modified as the acceleration of speed demands — obtuse 
 angles being made more acute by changing the inclination of inclined 
 straight lines, or by modifying the curvature of curves ; thus, the 
 stem P, in the outlines K-P will be nearer perpendicular than when 
 standing alone, while in T-P it will be nearer horizontal ; and N befora 
 
ON PTCEPAEING COPT AND BEADING PROOF. 115 
 
 P will be more curved, especially at its termination, than when it oc- 
 curs before CH. 
 
 § 375. At points of junction of two characters where a hook or 
 circle occurs, the characters will display a sort of courtesy to each 
 other, bending a little now and then from the original geometrical 
 creed that they may form a graceful and neighborly union ; for ex- 
 ample, L before Br will be more curved than usual, while F before Br 
 ■will be considerably straighter. 
 
 § 376. Shaded curves rarely have the heaviest portion of the shade 
 precisely in the middle, but more or less toward one end, as the di- 
 rection of the pen most favors the execution of a shaded stroke ; thus, 
 the stems ZH, Z, NG, and W are shaded heaviest a little before the 
 middle, and DH, V, H, and T just after the middle. 
 
 § 877. And as, by the law of mechanics, increase of speed must be 
 attended with decrease of force, all strokes will be written as light as 
 is consistent with proper legibility ; and, short roads being sooner 
 traveled than long distances, the reporte.r will naturally adopt as small 
 a scale of penmanship as legibility will sanction. 
 
 § 378. The foregoing statement is not in conflict with the directions 
 contained in § 28, for the modiiioations caused by motion are solely the 
 effect of speed upon outlines, and they will appear even when simple 
 geometrical accuracy alone is aimed at by the writer. 
 
 ON PREPARIIirG COPY AND READING PROOF. 
 
 § 379. Although the superintending of printing does not come 
 within the strict duties of a reporter, yet when his reports are printed, 
 it not unfrequently happens that he is called upon to take charge of 
 and correct the proofs. In such case the following hints on the subject 
 will be of use. 
 
 PREPARATION OF COPT. 
 
 § 380. In preparing manuscript for the printer the first requisite is 
 to write it in a plain and legible hand. If proper names and foreign 
 or technical expressions occur, care should be taken that they be 
 correctly spelled and clearly written. The i's should be dotted, and 
 the t's crossed, which ift the haste of writing are too liable to be left 
 imperfect. J should be distinguished from /, particularly when they 
 are used as initials, by bringing the former below the line. Words or 
 sentences meant to be printed in CAPITALS should be maiked by 
 drawing three lines under them ; in small capitals, by two lines ; 
 and in Italics, by one. Should interlineations be made, or additions ia 
 
116 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 the margin, or on the opposite or a separate leaf, the place of insertion 
 should be marked with a caret, with a line, if possible, leading from 
 it to, and inclosing the matter to be inserted ; and if the additional 
 matter is designed as a note for the foot of the page, that fact should 
 also be stated ; putting such or any other direction within a circle, 
 that it may be readily noticed. No abbreviations of words or phrases 
 should be used. The punctuation should also be carefully attended 
 to. And, at the commencement of any sentence meant to begin a 
 new paragraph, but not distinctly exhibited as such, the mark (^) 
 appropriated for that purpose, should be placed ; for on no account 
 ought the paragraphing to be left to the compositor. 
 
 PEOOF-READING. 
 § 381. The following are the principal marks used in correcting 
 proof-sheets. When it is desired to change a word to capital, small 
 capital, or Italic letters, it should be underscored with three, two, or 
 one lines, as directed in the last section, and the words caps, am. caps, 
 or Ital., as the case may be, written in the margin directly opposite the 
 line in which the word occurs. If a word printed in Italics is to be 
 changed to Eoman letters, or vice versa, a line is drawn under it, and 
 the abbreviation Rom., or Ital., as the case may be, written in the 
 margin. Omitted words or letters are marked for insertion by being 
 written in the margin, and a caret placed in the text where the 
 omission occurs. But if the omission be too long for the side margin, 
 it may be written at the top or bottom of the page, or on a ^eet of 
 paper attached to the proof, and connected with the caret by a line. 
 Anything may be struck out from- the text by drawing a line through 
 it, and writing in the margin the character ^, appropriately called a 
 dde. If anything is to go in the place of the erased matter, it should 
 be written in the margin instead of the dde mark. Whon anything has 
 been erased, and it is afterward decided to retain it as it was before, 
 dots are written under it, and the word stet placed in the margin. When 
 there is not sufficient space between two words or letters, a caret is placed 
 beneath the place where they should be separated, and the sign +f writ- 
 ten in the margin. When there is too great a space between the letters 
 of a word, they should be connected by two curved lines, one above and 
 the other below, their concave sides being turned toward the space, and 
 the same signs made in the margin ; if two words are to be brought nearer 
 together, only the lower curve is used. When two lines are too near 
 together, a horizontal caret is placed at the end and between them, 
 and the term lead or leads written in the margin. If the lines are too 
 much separated, the correction is made in the same way, except that 
 dele lead or leads is written in the margin, using the peculiar sign 
 
ON PEEPAEING COPT AND BEADING PEOOF. 117 
 
 already given, for dele. Two letters or words are transposed by drawing 
 a curved line above the first and beneath the second, and writing the 
 abbreviation tr. or in, in the margin. If a misplaced word belongs to 
 a different line of the print, encircle it and draw a line to the place 
 where it should be inserted ; or if it is desired to transpose two words 
 that are not together, encircle each of them, and join them by a line. 
 When several words are to be transposed, indicate the order by placing 
 the figures 1, 2, 3, etc., over them, and draw a line under them. In 
 all these modes of transposition the letters tr. are, of course, placed 
 in the margin. A paragraph may be made where none appears in the 
 proof, by placing a caret in the text where the new paragraph is to 
 begin, and the sign ^ in the margin. If an improper break into 
 paragraphs has been made, it may Be remedied by drawing a line from 
 the end of the first paragraph to the beginning of the second, and 
 writing No ^, or No break, in the margin. When it is desired to indent 
 a line, as the first line of a paragraph, a caret is placed before it, and a 
 small square character made in the margin. The crotchet [ is placed 
 before a word, and a corresponding one made in the margin, to indi- 
 cate that it should be brought out to the end of a line. If, however, 
 it is also to commence a new paragraph, the marginal mark should be 
 ^. A word in the middle of a line is carried farther to the left, by 
 placing the sign l. before it, and also in the margin. The sign j is 
 placed after a word, and also in the margin, to carry the word farther 
 to the right. When a letter, word, or character is depressed below the 
 prope*>level, it is elevated by placing the sign i—< over it, and also in 
 the margin. A letter, word, or character that is raised above the 
 proper level, is brought into line by placing the sign i— ■ under it, and 
 also in the margin. When the ends of the lines of a page do not 
 range properly, a perpendicular line should be drawn near them. 
 Attention is called to defective letters by making a dash under them, 
 and a cross in the margin ; and to crooked letters or words, by means 
 of horizontal lines drawn above and below them, and corresponding 
 parallel lines in the margin. An inverted letter is marked by drawing 
 a dash under it, and placing the sign ^ in the margin. When a letter 
 is of an improper size, it is indicated by drawing a line under it, and 
 writing the letters w. f. (wrong font) in the margin. If a space or 
 quadrat sticks up so that it prints, it should be marked by placing a 
 short perpendicular stfoke in the margin, and underscoring both it and 
 the mark to be removed with a line curved like a phonographic en. - 
 When a line is irregularly spaced, — that is, if some of the words are 
 too close, and others too wide apart, the direction Space letter should ba 
 written in the margin. The printer's proof-reader calls attention to 
 obscurities of language, words illegi\de in the "copy" (manuscript), 
 
118 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 etc., by underscoring them and writing qu ? or qy ? or (?) in the margin, 
 along with his suggestion. A line like a double-length chay should bo 
 drawn ai'ier each marginal correction ; with the exception of the pe- 
 riod, which is placed within a circle, and the apostrophe, referenc* 
 marks, and superiors, which are written over the sign i/. 
 
 SPECIMEN OF A CORRECTED PROOF-SHEET. 
 
 THE CROTTNmO OF PETBAKCH. 
 
 ■/■ 
 
 □ ys^Notting can be conceiTcd more affecting or noble than ** ca^, 
 ^ that ceremony. The euperh* palaces and porticos by ^^a?n, 
 
 ■which had rolled the ivory chariots of Marius and fta4 Q 
 ae Caesar bad long mouldered into dust. The laureled •^^• 
 
 fasces, the golden eagles, the shouting Legions, the cap^i^^A - / 
 
 [ [ lives, and the pictui'ed cities were indeed •wanting to ^ JLs,// 
 
 his victorious procession. The sceptre had passed away « 
 
 9 from Kome. But she still jetained the mightier influence 
 
 i^» of an y^ipireN^tellectua]^ and was now to conter the X 
 
 a£e£, y ro ad or reward of an intellectual trijimph. To the man « / 
 
 jjO ^^^ extended the dominion of her ancient language ^x_^ ^Ca 
 
 ^o,^^had erected the trophies of philosophy and -^ 
 
 imagination in the L haunts of ignoranci^and fw^^ea&y, <i!^?yv<vw 
 
 •whose captives "were the be arts of admiring nations/ / 
 
 I I enchained by the influence of his j j —whose spoils 
 
 £^09n. were the treasures of ancient genius— the Eternal City V^/' -^y 
 
 ir^ ofl'ered tbe/glorioua^ an dj jusi^ tribute^f her gratitude. \ t^T 
 
 ©^ \ I Amid the ruined monumentB/6f ancient, and the in- ^ 
 
 e I fant eri/ctions of modern Hji^hQ who had restored the 
 
 pT brofceu link/betweepx<tetwo ages of human civilization ^ 
 
 was crowned >^Iih the wreath which v had deserved ^ _ 
 from the moderns who ow^fjto him their refinement, — ft-om ^^, 
 the nncf«its who owed to him their lame Kever was ax O 
 corMatlon so august witnessed by Westminster orKbeims, ^^a/i^ 
 X / S3 Macaulat. Q/ia/. I ^ 
 
ON PEEPAEING COPT AND BEADING PEOOF. 119 
 
 SPECIMEN ON OPPOSITE PAGE COEEECTED. 
 
 |§ 882. When the corrections indicated by the marks in the specimen 
 on the opposite page are made hy the printer, the result will be as 
 given below. The balance of this page was, in fact, set up from a 
 proof taken from the plate of the specimen. 
 
 THE CEOWNING OF PBTEAECH. 
 
 NoTHiNCr can Ije conceived more affecting or noble thaa 
 that ceremony. The superb palaces and porticos by 
 whicU had rolled the ivory chariots of Marius and 
 Caesar had long mouldered into dust. The laureled 
 fasces, the golden eagles, the shouting legions, the cap- 
 tives, and the pictured cities were indeed wanting to 
 his victorious procession. The sceptre had passed away 
 from Eome. But she still retained the mightier influence 
 of an intellectual empire, and was now to confer the 
 prouder reward of an intellectual triumph. To the man 
 who had extended the dominion of her ancient language 
 — who had erected the trophies of philosophy and 
 imagination in the haunts of ignorance and ferocity, 
 whose captives were the hearts of admiring nations, 
 enchained by the influence of his song— whose spoils 
 were the treasures of ancient genius, rescued from ob- 
 scurity and decay — the "Eternal City" offered the just 
 and glorious tribute of her gratitude. Amidst the ruined 
 monuments of ancient, and the infant erections of 
 modem art, he who had restored the broken link be- 
 tween the two "ages of human civilization was crowned 
 with the wreath which he had deserved from the mod- 
 ems who owed to him their reflnement, — from the 
 ancients who owed to him their fame. Never was a coro- 
 nation so august witnessed by Westminster or Eheims. 
 
120 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHER. 
 
 REPORTING. 
 
 GENERAL KEMAEKS. 
 
 § 383. The first great requisite of the professional reporter is speed 
 — the ability to follow a rapid speaker and catch and convey to paper 
 every word that he utters. The average rate of public speaking is about 
 120 words per minute. Some very deliberate speakers do not go be- 
 yoad 80 or 90 words per minute ; while others articulate 180, or more. 
 But there are very few, however slow may be their usual rate of ut- 
 terance, who do not occasionally speak at the rate of 140 or 150 words 
 per minute ; and no phonographer should consider himself competent 
 to report, with certainty, even a moderate speaker, until he can write 
 at this rate. 
 
 § 384. As to the length of time required to attain this speed, very 
 much will, of course, depend on the natural talent of the writer and 
 the amount of time he is willing to devote daily to the task. The 
 average amount of time necessary to qualify a tolerably expert writer 
 to follow a speaker at the rate of 140 to 150 words per minute, is from 
 ten to twelve months, by practicing an hour a day ; or six months, 
 with twp hours' daily practice. It will generally be foimd an easy task 
 to increase the rate of speed from 100 to 140 or 150 words ; but to go 
 beyond this, much labor will be required, and the progress will be less 
 perceptible. 
 
 METHOD OF PRACTICE. 
 
 § 385. When the learner has advanced to § 308, and is able to write 
 with considerable facility the outlines of the greater part of the com- 
 mon words of the language, he should commence to write from an- 
 other person's reading. Before doing this, however, the entire list of 
 word-signs, and a considerable number of the contractions, should be 
 thoroughly committed to memory, and the principles of Phraseography 
 carefully studied and mastered ; for it should be the aim of the writer 
 to attain as soon as possible the utmost practicable brevity and per- 
 fection in his outlii.es, so that he will afterward always use the best 
 forms, even in his most rapid reporting, at which time the reporter is apt 
 to lapse into any vices of style that he indulged himself in while learn- 
 ing. An hour's practice from dictation in this manner is more benefi- 
 cial than several hours' copying from a book. At first the reader 
 should proceed slowly, accommodating his speed to that of the writer. 
 Speeches, sermons, lectures, legislative debates, reports of testimony, 
 and the like, form excellent practice for tlie beginner, and accustom 
 him to the kind of phraseology he may expect when actually engaged 
 in reporting. When the services of a reader can not be obtained, the 
 
EEPOETING. 121 
 
 next best practice is to take notes of sermons, lectures, and trials. At 
 the outset he will be unable to keep up with the speaker ; many, in- 
 deed, in their first attempts, despair of ever being able to accomplish 
 the task. But a few trials will render the labor less irksome, and ma- 
 terially increase the speed of the writer. This method of practice is 
 not so good as from the dictation of a reader, because the learner, from 
 attempting, before he is qualified for it, to keep pace with the speaker, 
 is apt to acquire an illegible style of writing. His object, at first, 
 should not be to write as rapidly as possible, but only to take down so 
 much of what is said as can be readily deciphered afterward. 
 
 § 386. It should always be borne in mind that facility in reading is 
 as essential as rapidity in writing ; the latter, indeed, is worth noth- 
 ing without the fonner. In the reporter's early practice, all his 
 notes, whether for exercise or in actual reporting, should be read after 
 being taken, and all the errors carefully marked, that they, may be 
 avoided in future ; and, if necessary, the more obscure or uncommon 
 of the words may be vocalized, so as to render the report more easily 
 decipherable at any distance of time. 
 
 HOW 10 LEARN THK WOUD-SIGNS AND CONTKAOTIONS. 
 
 § 387. In order to impress on the mind the word-signs and con- 
 tractions, and the list of words at § 277, the reader may form sentences 
 including as many of them as he can, and write them until every 
 word is thoroughly familiar. The following will serve as examples in 
 this respect : If his counsel could come. He comes because I accuse him. It 
 is cool in you to call for that claim. It cost much money and caused great 
 trouble. God is our guide. I remember a remark he made in the room. 
 He is 3, partner in the business as well as a part-owner in the vessel. 
 
 MATERIALS USED IN WKITINQ PHONOGRAPHT. 
 
 § 388. Phonography should always be written on ruled paper, and 
 some recommend that it be ruled with double lines. Single-line paper, 
 however, is preferred by most efficient phonographers, and it certainly 
 has the advantage in point of economy. If double lines are preferred, 
 they should be about one eighth of an inch apart. 
 
 § 389. Reporting Covers, that is, stiff, leather-covered cases for hold- 
 ing the reporting paper, with an elastic band stitched to the back for 
 keeping the paper in place, will be found very useful to the general 
 reporter. The size of these covers should be about 8J by i\ inches ; 
 they open lengthwise, and notes should be taken only on the leaf that 
 is toward the writer. When the paper is filled up in one direction, ho 
 turns it around, commences at the other end, and follows the same 
 plan, viz., writing only on the leaf nearest him, until the book is filled. 
 
 6 
 
122 THE COMPLETE PHONOGBAPHER. 
 
 § 390. Most of the reporters in New York use books, made espe- 
 cially for their use, that are similar in shape and size to the Covers. 
 These books usually contain about one hundred leaves, or two hundred 
 pages, and are bound in stiff board covers, on which an index of the 
 cases reported in the book, with date of trial, etc., may be kept. 
 
 § 391. The reporter should always write on a table or desk when 
 one can be obtained, which is usually the case in the courts. The 
 newspaper reporter has, however, oftentimes to take notes while stand- 
 ing or sitting in the audience. With' a little practice a person may 
 write very steadily on his knees by placing under his reporting book 
 a three-eighth of an inch board, of mahogany or rosewood, made about 
 sixteen inches long and five broad. If this board be made in two 
 pieces, and joined in the middle by means of hinges that can not be 
 .'losed without pressing a spring, it may be carried in the pocket. 
 This portable writing-desk, as it may be called, gives muchsupport to 
 the middle of the arm, and enables the reporter to write better and 
 faster than on the knee alone. 
 
 § 392. The phonographer should, in his practice, accustom himself 
 to the occasional use of both pen and pencil. For practical reporting 
 there is nothing so effective as a gold pen, when a suitable one can 
 be obtained. As a general rule, a pencil should be used when notes 
 have to be taken upon the knee, or when standing, but pen and ink 
 when a table or desk is provided. A good, fine-pointed steel pen may 
 be used by the learner in writing his exercises, but is not very service- 
 able in reporting, as it is liable to corrode and suddenly fail at a time 
 when the writer can not stop to replace it with a new one. 
 
 LAW EEPOKTING. 
 § 393. It is an erroneous though common belief that the duties of a 
 reporter are simply to take down and furnish a transcript of all, and 
 exactly what he hears, and that the merit of a report consists in its 
 being an exact record of every word uttered by the speaker. The fact 
 is that the exact words of an address are very rarely preserved. Of the 
 great majority of even the better class of our public speakers, whether 
 at the bar, on the rostrum, or in the pulpit, few are able to speak ex- 
 temporaneously in such a manner that they would be willing to see a 
 verbatim report of their words in print. Their sentences must often 
 be remodeled, and occasionally the wording of entire speeches may be 
 said to be almost exclusively the work of the reporter. For this rea- 
 son facility of composition is a qualification of the greatest importance 
 to him. Good judgment is also absolutely indispensable — indeed, it 
 often happens that a poor stenographer, with judgment, makes a better 
 reporter than a good stenographer, who lacks in that respect. Now, thia 
 
EEPOETING. 123 
 
 is especially the case in law reporting, because in this, as in all other 
 legal matters, so much depends upon mere form. The professional 
 law reporter should be conversant with the ordinary legal forms and 
 expressions, particularly those that are met with in trials ; and, if he 
 happens to be himself a well-read lawyer, it will enable him to malie 
 all the better reports. 
 
 § 394. The proper reporting of objections, motions, and rulinga 
 requires more judgment and experience than any other part of the 
 duties of the la%v reporter. If counsel would always state in so many 
 words the grounds of their objections, little or no difSculty would be 
 experienced, but oftentimes a long argument is made, from the whole 
 of which the reporter is obliged to eliminate the gist of the objection, 
 and to put it in proper legal phraseology. It will not do to talie down 
 and write out just the words of the counsel, for this would frequently 
 render the report very voluminous, and at the same time subject the 
 party who orders it to much unnecessary expense. It would there- 
 fore seem that some knowledge of the rules of evidence is an almost 
 indispensable qualification of the law reporter. But in the absence 
 of more extended instruction in this respect, the following hints may 
 be found serviceable. 
 
 § 395. When a witness has been regularly sworn, he is first exam- 
 ined by the party who produces him. This is called the " direct exam- 
 ination," or the " examination in chief." After that the other party 
 is at liberty to cross-examine ; and then the party who first called him 
 may re-examine. This is called the "re-direct," and, according to 
 strict rule, it closes the examination of the witness. On the re-exam- 
 ination it is permitted to ask him any questions necessary to explain 
 matters elicited from him in the " cross-examination." But the re-ex- 
 amination is not to extend to any new matter unconnected with the 
 cross-examination, and which might have been inquired into on the 
 examination in chief. The strictness of this rule is, however, in the 
 discretion of the court, frequently relaxed. Further questions are 
 oftentimes allowed to be put by the opposite counsel, especially when, 
 on' the re-direct, any new matter has been drawn out. This is called 
 the "re-cross-examination." 
 
 § 396. The obligation of proving any fact lies upon the party who 
 substantially asserts the affirmative of the issue. The affirmative 
 of most cases naturally rests with the plaintiff, or party bringing the 
 action, and therefore it is that he proceeds first and gives evidence to 
 substantiate his claim. When the plaintiff has finished his evidence, 
 he rests, and then sometimes defendant's counsel moves to dismiss the 
 action on the ground that even if all the evidence adduced by the 
 plaintiff were admitted to be true, he would have no legal right" to 
 
124 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHi'K. 
 
 recover. If the motion is denied, wMch is generally the case when there 
 is no jury, as judges generally prefer to hear the whole of a case before 
 deciding any of its material points, the defendant's counsel excepts, and 
 proceeds to produce his proofs. But if the court grant the motion, 
 plaintiff takes an exception, and the trial ends there. Frequently the 
 motion to dismiss is only made ^ro/orma, to preserve, for the purposes 
 of an appeal, any rights that may be covered by it. In such case the 
 motion is denied without argument, an exception talien, and the trial 
 proceeds. Sometimes, before the plaintiff produces any evidence, de- 
 fendant's counsel moves to dismiss the complaint on the ground that 
 it does not state facts suiBcient to constitute a cause of action. This 
 objection, however, is generally taken by demurrer, and not on the 
 trial. 
 
 4 397. The order of proceeding in the trial of a cause is generally 
 the following: (1) The impannellng of "the jury; (2) the opening 
 remarks of plaintiff's counsel in which he states the nature of his 
 case, and in general what he expects to prove ; (3) the examination 
 of plaintiff's witnesses ; each of which defendant's counsel cross-exam- 
 ines, unless he waive the right ; (4) the opening remarlis of defend- 
 ant's counsel ; (5) the examination of defendant's witnesses; each of 
 which is cross-examined by plaintiff's counsel, unless he waive the 
 right ; (6) the rebutting testimony of plaintiff; (7) ditto of defendant ; 
 (8) the summing up or arguments of defendant's counsel ; (9) ditto of 
 plaintiff's counsel ; (10) the charge of the judge to the jury ; (11) the 
 verdict. In some courts trials are had without juries ; and sometimes, 
 even when the parties have a right to trial by jury, they waive it and 
 proceed before the judge alone. 
 
 § 398. In ordinary civil trials the reporter has generally nothing 
 to do with the impanneling of the jury ; but in criminal trials this is 
 a very important matter, and should be carefully reported. It is 
 always well to take notes of the opening remarks of counsel, for, 
 although they are seldom ever required to be written out, they 
 will sometimes throw light on obscure or doubtful portions of the 
 testimony, and enable the writer to ascertain whether he has cor- 
 rectly reported the language of the question or answer. Groat 
 care should be taken to report every word on the examination of wit- 
 nesses ; and in transcribing, thei r exact language, whether grammat- 
 ical or ungrammatical, should bo preserved ; and if any words are 
 mispronounced, that fact should also be indicated if possible. By this 
 means, on an appeal, the judges will be able to form a better judg- 
 ment of the weight that should be attached to the evidence of tho 
 respective witnesses in the court below, than if all were made, by means 
 of corrections, to speak with equal propriety. The language cf tho 
 
EErOETING. 125 
 
 questions of counsel, however, may be frequently improved when it 
 can be done without introducing any material alterations. It is not 
 usual to report the summing up of the counsel, unless they expressly 
 order it. The judge's charge, however, should be very carefully 
 taken, as oftentimes great interests may be hazarded by a very slight 
 error or change in its verbiage. 
 
 FORM OF LAW-REPOKTS. 
 
 § 399. A very important consideration in a report, especially of a 
 legal proceeding, is its form. It should be the aim of the stenog- 
 rapher to furnish the report of a trial in such shape that it may be 
 used, without essential alteration, as the " case" on appeal. It should 
 be written on paper that has a margin at the left of about an inch and 
 a half, usually marked by a red line running from the top to the bot- 
 tom of the sheet Paper ruled in this way, and which is commonly 
 called "legal-cap," may be procured at most stationers. It is gen 
 erally ruled on both sides, and if both are written on, it is done in this 
 wise : After finishing the first side, the sheet is turned over endwise, 
 and the second page is written from the bottom to the top of the 
 sheet. This is called by scriveners "backing" the paper. It is the 
 general practice of reporters to write on both sides of the paper, but 
 sometimes it is preferred that only one be used. As to this matter 
 the counsel may be consulted. The numbering of the pages should be 
 in the margin, at the lower end of each sheet, the figures on the first 
 side being placed at the bottom, and on the opposite side, at the 
 top of the written page. The paging is done in this way so that there 
 will be no danger of the numbers being covered up when the sheets 
 are put together. The fastening together of the manuscript is com- 
 monly done with red tape, or with small tin clasps made for the pur- 
 pose. If tape is used, three small holes, about two inches apart, 
 should first be punched in the top margin of the paper, and the tape 
 then drawn through by means of a long, blunt needle, which should 
 be first put down through the middle hole from the front of the man- 
 uscript, then up through one of the side holes, next down through 
 the other side hole, then up through the middle hole again, and the 
 ends tied across the tape that extends from one side hole to the 
 other. These minute directions have been given because so many 
 people have such a very slovenly manner of putting together legal 
 papers. If the trial of a case runs through several days, the paging 
 should be continued on consecutively, instead of commencing anew 
 every day. This will enable counsel to ascertain without trouble 
 whether any part of the manuscript is missing. 
 
 § 400. The proper legal-names by which the parties to an action are 
 
126 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEEr 
 
 designated, vary in different courts, and also according to the nature 
 of tiie proceeding. In ordinary courts for the trial of civil causes the 
 party bringing an action is called the Plaintiff, and the party against 
 whom it is brought, the Defendant. The appealing party in the New 
 York Court of Appeals is called the Appellant, and the other party the 
 Bespondeni. All prosecutions for crime are brought in the name of 
 Th£ People. When a proceeding is brought in private interest, but 
 which must nevertheless be brought in the name of The People, as, 
 for instance, in election cases, a mandamus, or certiorari, the moving 
 party is designated The People cm the relation of (or ex rel) So and So, giv- 
 ing the name of the party for whose benefit the proceeding is brought ; 
 and who is generally called the Relator. On a, proceeding for the 
 probate of a will, the party offering it is called the Proponent, and the 
 party opposing the probate, the Contestant. 
 
 § 401. The first page of a report is generally used as a title-page, on 
 which appears the name of the court ; the title of the suit ; the name 
 of the judge before whom it is tried, stating also that it was before 
 a. jury, if such be the fact ; the date of the trial ; the names of the 
 counsel and for whom they appear, and the index to the witnesses. 
 The title-page is also an appropriate place for the reporter to write or 
 stamp his business card. A new title-page should be made out for 
 each day's report. The back of this sheet may be written on, or not, 
 according to the taste or convenience of the writer. 
 
 § 402. At. the commencement of the examination of each witness 
 should be written in a plain, and rather larger hand than usual, his 
 full name, commencing it just outside of the margin line, and under- 
 scoring the whole with two lines. Then should be stated for which 
 party he was called — that the witness was duly sworn or affirmed, and 
 the name of the counsel conducting the direct examination. Each 
 question and answer should be preceded by the initials Q. or A. , writ- 
 ten in the margin near the line. These letters should not encroach 
 too much on the margin, as it is required by counsel for their notes 
 and references. The first line of a question or answer may be indented 
 a little, as at the commencement of a paragraph. A line should be left 
 blank between the direct and cross-examination, and the following 
 heading written on a line by itself : ' Cross-examination by Deft's (oj 
 Plff's) counsel' — or ' by Mr. So and So,' giving the counsel's name. 
 If, in the course of an examination by one counsel, a single question ia 
 interposed by the other counsel, or by the judge, the words By Plain- 
 tiff's Counsel (or Defendant's, as the case may be), or By ilie Court should 
 be written just after the initial ' Q.' without indentation, and in pa- 
 rentheses. Should it be followed by one or two more questions by 
 the same party, the words By the same may be inclosed in the paren- 
 
REPOETING. 
 
 127 
 
 theses. If, however, a considerable number of such questions occur, 
 the words By Plff's (or Deft's) Onunsd or By the Court should be written 
 on a separate line, and the questions then recorded in the ordinary 
 way. When the original examination is resumed by the counsel 
 who was thus interrupted, a similar formula may be used to indi- 
 cate it. 
 
 § 403. Remarks made by the counsel or by the Court, such as 
 objections, rulings, exceptions, motions, etc., should generally be 
 written in the third person, and the entire matter indented an inch or 
 more from the- margin line. If the indented matter does not form a 
 complete sentence of itself, it should be inclosed in brackets. When 
 the words of counsel are given in the first person, they should be pre- 
 ceded by the counsel's name, and then written in the same manner as 
 a question or answer, that is, without being indented. The name 
 need not be written in full, Sut merely Mr. So and So, writing the Mr. 
 just outside, and near the margin line. The words Plaintiff's (or De- 
 fendant's) Counsel are sometimes used instead. In either case they 
 should be underscored with a single line. Remarks by the judge 
 transcribed in the first person are written in the same way, but 
 should be preceded by the words The Court, imdersoored. 
 
 FORMS. 
 
 § 404. The following specimen forms will serve as guides to the 
 reporter in preparing reports. The perpendicular line at the left of 
 the page represents the margin line of legal-cap paper. 
 
 THE TITLE-PAGE — FORM 1. 
 
 Supreme Court, Circuit, Part 1. 
 
 Albert H. Johnson ) Before Hon. Geo. G. Barnard 
 
 ( and a ju^y. 
 James W. Wilson. ) 
 
 New York, January 5th, 1866. 
 - Appearances. 
 
 James T. Brady, Esq. 
 
 Wm. M. Evarts, Esq. 
 
 For Plaintiff, 
 For Defendaint, 
 
 Index. — • 
 
 Direct. Cross. 
 
 Thomas R. Jones, page 2, page 8. 
 
 Albert H. Johnson, " 12, " 15. 
 
128 
 
 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 THE TITLE-PAGE — rOKM 2. 
 
 New York Court of Appeals. 
 
 James W. Wilson, 
 Appellant, 
 vs. 
 
 Albert H. Johnson, 
 Eespondent. 
 
 Albany, ApriTlO, 1865. 
 - Index. 
 
 Argument of James T. Brady, Esq., page 2. 
 " " "Wm. M. Evarts, " " 53. 
 
 THE TITLE-PAGE — FORM 3. 
 
 Surrogate's Court, 
 County of New York. 
 
 In the matter of the probate 
 
 of a paper propounded as 
 
 the last will and testament 
 
 of 
 
 James N. Norton, 
 
 deceased. . 
 
 Before 
 
 Hon. Gideon J. 
 Tucker, 
 
 Surrogate 
 
 For Proponent, 
 For Contestant, 
 
 January 5th, 1866. 
 ■ Appearances. 
 
 A. W. Bradford, Esq. 
 
 A. A. Eedfield, Esq. 
 [Index same as in No. 1.] 
 
 THE TITLE-PAGE— FORM 4. 
 
 tr. S. District Court, 
 
 Southern Dist. of New York. 
 
 The United States 
 
 186 casks of Bottled 
 Beer, marked C. W. 
 B., Bunge, Burbage 
 & Co., Claimants. 
 
 [Remainder some as No. l.J 
 
 Before Judge Shipman and 
 a jury. 
 
EEPOETINQ. 
 
 129 
 
 THE TRIAL 
 
 [Commence on second or third page. ] 
 
 The jury being duly impanneled, Mr. Brady 
 stated the case [or ' opened'] for the plaintiff. 
 
 T homos R. Jones, called for plaintiff, being duly 
 
 sworn, testifies as follows : 
 
 Direct examination by Mr. Brady. 
 Q. Where do you reside ? 
 A. In New York. [etc. , to the end of direct ; then 
 
 leave a blank line, and proceed as follows :] 
 C ross-examination by Mr. Evarts. 
 Q. How long have you known the defendant, and 
 
 where did you first see him ? 
 A. I have known him about 15 years ; I first saw 
 
 him in Albany, in this State. 
 Q. (By Mr. Brady.) In what year did you first 
 
 see him ? 
 A. In the. year 1851, I think. 
 Q. (By the Court.) Have you known him ever s'nce ? 
 A. Most of the time. 
 Q. (By the same. ) Give us the exact time as near 
 
 as you can. 
 A. i knew him from 1851 to about 1858, and then 
 
 I did not see him until last year. 
 By ilr. Evaiis. 
 Q. Under what circumstances did you first get ac- 
 quainted with him ? [etc. , to the end of cross, 
 
 and then follows the] 
 
 Re- direct. 
 
 Q. State the circumstances a little more minutely, 
 [etc.] 
 
 b 405. When a party to the action is called as a witness, this form 
 of introduction should be used : 
 
 A Ihert K Johnson, plfi". (or ' one of the plffe'.), being 
 
 duly sworn, testifies as follows : 
 D irect examinaiion by Mr. Brady. 
 
 § 406. The following are proper forms for some of the more com- 
 mon objections to questions : 
 
 [Objected to on the ground that no founda- 
 tion has been laid for the question ; objection 
 sustained ; plff. excepts.] 
 
 [Objected to as irrelevant ; objection over- 
 ruled ; deft, excepts.] 
 
130 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 Sometimes it is necessary to state the objection more in detail ; thus : 
 
 Deft's counsel objects to the question aa 
 incompetent for the following reasons [state 
 reasons] : Objection overruled ; deft's coun- 
 sel excepts. [As this form contains both 
 verb and nominative, it should not be in- 
 closed in brackets.] 
 
 § 407. Sometimes the evidence produced on the trial consists 
 of written documents as well as oral testimony. The following 
 forms may be used when deeds or mortgages are ofifered : 
 
 Plff s counsel offers in evidence the mort- 
 gage in question, executed by defendant to 
 John M. Smith, to secure the sum of S10,000 ; 
 dated March 8th, 1800 ; recorded in the office 
 of the Register of the City and County of 
 New York, March 9th, 1860, in Liber 400 
 of Mortgages, page 10; marked "Exhibit 
 1" of this date. 
 
 Also an assignment of said mortgage by 
 John M. Smith to Plff, dated Nov. 10, 1861 ; 
 marked "Exhibit 2" of this date. 
 
 ON TAKING NOTES IN LAW REPORTING. 
 § 408. It should be the aim of the reporter, while taking notes of a 
 legal proceeding, to stenograph the matter in the same form that 
 he wishes it to appear in when transcribed. By so doing, especially 
 in reporting objections, rulings, etc., he will save himself much time 
 and trouble when he comes to the most laborious part of his task, the 
 making of the longhand transcript. 
 
 NAME OP WITNESS, ETO. 
 
 {) 409. At the commencement of each case its title should be fully 
 written out in longhand, and there also should appear, either in long- 
 hand or Phonography (according to the length of time the reporter 
 has to write it), the name of the court, the name of the judge, 
 whether or not there is a jury, the date of the trial, and the appear- 
 ances> At the head of the examination of each witness his name 
 should be written in longhand in full, and followed by a phono- 
 graphic pee or dee, to indicate whether he was called by Plaintiff or 
 Defendant, then the outline of the word "sworn'' or " affirmed," and 
 the name of the examining counsel, which may also be written pho- 
 nographically. 
 
 QtJESTION ANB ANSWER DISTINGUISHED. 
 
 § 410. In notes of testimony it is the practice of most reporters to 
 distinguish the question from the answer by commencing each line 
 
EEPOETIH-G. 131 
 
 of the question at the left of the page, and indenting each line of the 
 answer about one third the width of the page ; thus, 
 Where do you reside 
 
 I reside in New York city 
 Where were you on the night of the 28th of December when this 
 affair occurred 
 
 I was at my house in 26th Street until about 
 8 o'clock, and then I went to the opera 
 
 Although this mode of writing questions and answers (especially 
 when they are short, only occupying a portion of a line) takes up 
 more paper than any other, yet this is more than counterbalanced 
 by the increased distinctness that is given to the notes, and the 
 greater ease and convenience with which the reporter is enabled to 
 refer to particular portions of the testimony, when, as is often the 
 case, he is called upon to do so by the counsel or the court. The most 
 convenient material to take notes of testimony on, is paper made into 
 books, according to the directions at sections 389 and 390. But if or- 
 dinary legal or foolscap be used instead, it should be divided into two 
 columns by ruling a line, or by folding it so as to make an indentation, 
 through the middle of the sheets from top to bottom. The paper 
 should then be filled column by column, beginning always with the 
 one at the left of the page ; and, if the reporter chooses, he may write 
 on both sides as he goes along, sheet by sheet. If this is done, the 
 paper should be turned over endwise as in transcribing, and, in case a 
 pen is used, while he is writing the first column on the back, the sheet 
 should be placed so that it will project half its width to the right of 
 the paper on which it rests, to avoid blotting the last column of the 
 first side. When notes are taken in this way, each case should be 
 folded by itself, indorsed with the title of the case, date, etc., and 
 filed away. 
 
 PASSAOES MARKED EOK COEBEOnON. 
 
 § 411. When the reporter takes down a question or answer that he 
 wishes to read over before commencing to transcribe it, in order to 
 alter its arrangement or correct an error^ he should mark it at the time 
 by drawing near it a perpendicular line at the left of the page. 
 
 CASES CITED. 
 
 § 412. When cases are cited by counsel, and extracts read from 
 them, the reporter need not attempt to write them at length. After 
 writing the title of the case, and the name and volume of the Keport 
 where it is to be found, it will be sufficient to give the commencing 
 and concluding words of each period, with a long dash between. This 
 
132 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 will enable the reporter when transcribing to ascertain exactly what 
 portions of the case were read, and what omitted. 
 
 HINTS ON TKANSORIBING. 
 
 § 413. Ordinarily the reporter transcribes his own notes into long> 
 hand. This is the most wearying part of his duties, as it often takes 
 seven or eight hours to write out what was taken in shorth.and in one 
 hour. An experienced reporter should be able to render his notes 
 of testimony into legible longhand at the rate of sixteen to twenty 
 folios (of one hundred words each) an hour, and notes of argument, 
 speeches, etc. , at the rate of ten to sixteen folios. 
 
 § 414. When great expedition is required, notes may be transcribed 
 by dictating to two rapid longhand copyists from different parts of the 
 report at the same time. In this case one of the writers may com- 
 mence with the beginning of the report, and the other at the middle, 
 deviating, however, a little to one side or the other, when by so doing 
 he is enabled to start with a new witness, or at the beginning of a 
 cross-examination. The reader should sit between the copyists, and 
 dictate a few words, first to one and then to the other, keeping one 
 of the places in his note-book with the index finger of his right hand, 
 and the other place with the index finger of his left hand. By turn- 
 ing the head a little, as each sentence is dictated, toward the writer 
 for whom it is intended, all danger of confusion will be avoided. This 
 also may be done by calling each by name every time he is addressed. 
 A little ingenuity and practice will enable the reader to keep both 
 writers constantly employed. In this manner of transcribing, from 
 thirty to forty folios may be written out per hour ; and, if the copyists 
 are careful, the manuscript need not afterward be read over, or com- 
 pared with the notes. 
 
 § 415. Another mode of expediting this part of the work is to dic- 
 tate the matter to other phonographers, who then proceed to tran- 
 scribe their notes. For this purpose advanced learners of Phonography 
 are generally employed, as they are willing to do the work for the 
 Bake of the practice it gives them, for a compensation that reporters 
 can afford to give. Manuscript prepared in this way, however, should 
 always be carefully re-read, as errors will occasionally occur. 
 
 § 416. There is another mode of transcribing, by which a report can 
 be gotten out very nearly, or quite, as fast as the original notes were 
 taken ; but it can not be used except in preparing matter for the 
 printer, and it is perhaps well not to resort to it even for that, except 
 where a great amount of work has to be done in an unusually limited 
 space of time. The plan is as follows : Having secured the services 
 of five or six rapid longhand writers, they are seated about a round 
 
EEPOETING. 133 
 
 table, each having before him a pile of slips of paper, previously num- 
 bered — those before the first copyist being marked 1 A, 2 A, 3 A , etc. ; 
 those before the second, 1 B, 2 B, 3 B, etc., and so on. The reporter 
 then commences by dictating a sentence, or line to number one, then 
 a like amount to number two, and so on around the circle, until ha 
 comes to number one again, and then continues right on without 
 break. The reader should walk around the table and dictate to each 
 in a low tone of voice, so that the other writers will not be confused. 
 A large round table with a hole in the middle in which the reader 
 might sit on a revolving stool would be very convenient for this pur- 
 pose. As each writer finishes the sentence given him, he sticks the 
 slip face downward on a paper-file standing before him, and then is 
 ready to write the next dictation. When the files are full, a boy 
 replaces them with empty ones, and then proceeds to gum the slips 
 together in the following order : 1 A, 1 B, 1 C, 1 D, 1 E ; 2 A, 2 B, 
 2 C, 2 D, 2 E ; 3 A, 3 B, etc. This copy will, of course, be service- 
 able only for the printer. 
 
 NEWSPAPER REPORTING. 
 
 § 417. The qualifications necessary in a reporter on the daily press 
 arc varied, and a knowledge of stenography is not absolutely neces- 
 sary to render him generally successful. His business is mainly to get 
 news and put it in a shape which will be readable and interesting ; and 
 to this end he should possess good judgment, a quick, intuitive mind, 
 ready at all times to-perceive what would be of interest to the public, 
 and to jot down the salient points, and have the requisite ability to pre- 
 pare them properly for the press. But, although for this the knowledge 
 of shorthand would be very important, as it would enable him to take 
 down the language of parties from whom he gets statements of facts, 
 instead of being obliged to rely in great measure on his memory, yet 
 it can not be said to be an indispensable requisite to the furnishing 
 of good reports. 
 
 § 418. A newspaper reporter, however, who would be equal to any- 
 thing that may be required of him, must also be a good stenogra- 
 pher, as verbatim reports of speeches, sermons, debates, conventions, 
 etc., are so often required, especially by our metropolitan press. 
 
 § 419. Political meetings in the city of New York are usually held 
 in the evening, and generally the reports of them must appear in the 
 next morning's paper. For this reason, if a tolerably full report is 
 required, a corps of three or four reporters will be needed to get it out 
 before the paper goes to press. To accomplish this successfully, each 
 reporter should take notes for from twenty to forty-five minutes, ac- 
 cording to the probable length of the meeting, and then go directly 
 
134 THE COMPLETE rHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 to the office of the paper and begin to transcribe. Sometimes each on« 
 takes first a short turn of five or ten minutes, and then afterward a 
 long turn of fifteen to thirty minutes, so that he may be transcribing 
 while his co-reporters are taking notes of the speeches. If the speak- 
 ing continues to a late hour, the reporter whose turn comes last is gen- 
 erally required to finish up the meeting with a longhand sketch, which 
 is best given in the third person. The report of a political meeting 
 ■will be very much more effective and interesting if it have a proper 
 introduction. In this may be included a description of the decorations 
 of the hall, a statement of the number and character of the persons 
 present, and, if any eminent persons are among them, their names. In 
 newspaper reporting much more latitude is allowed for the judgment 
 of the reporter than in reporting law proceedings. It is his duty to 
 correct grammatical errors. Improve the construction, to sometimes 
 omit objectionable passages, and frequently to almost rewrite entire 
 speeches. The form of introduction to a speech used at the present 
 time by the New York journals is similar to the following : 
 
 The Chairman then introduced the Hon. Thomas Jefferson, who 
 spoke as follows : 
 
 SPEECH OP HON. THOMAS JEFFEMON. 
 
 Then follows the speech. If the speaker was received with applause, 
 that fact should, of course, be stated in the introduction. The in 
 terruptions by the audience during the delivery of a speech should 
 be carefully noted, and written in brackets in their proper places. The 
 following will serve as illustrations : [Applause] [Great cheering. ] 
 [A voice, "That's so."] The Resolutions, Lists of Vice-Presidents, 
 and sometimes entire speeches, may be obtained in manuscript, and the 
 reporter thus relieved from much labor. With these few hints, the 
 reporter will probably find no difficulty in giving satisfaction in thia 
 branch of his profession. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 § 420. The material from which a system of stenography mi-it ba 
 constructed, is necessarily so limited that it is hardly practicable to 
 furnish one complete and consistent representation for all the sounds 
 heard in the various languages of the world. Nevertheless, for the 
 use of the student of languages and Phonetics, it is thought ad- 
 visable to give signs for a few of the more common foreign sounds, 
 both consonant and vowel, as well as for those vowel-sounds in *he 
 English language that are not represented with exactness by the ordi- 
 nary twelve-vowel scale. [See §§ 45-47.] 
 
 EXTENDED VOWEL-SCALE. 
 
 Long 
 
 SIMPLE VOWELS. 
 
 3 4 6 6 
 
 S 
 
 all air ale ear eat all no food 
 
 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 
 
 Short 'i "i j i "i . 'i -i ■: A j 
 
 at ask met it on lost up whole cur foot 
 
 COMPOSITE VOWELS. 
 
 Long : jj Fr.eft; Ger. long o J Fr. 1. «; Ger. 1. ti 
 
 Examples : queue ; Gothe vft ; iibel 
 
 Shokt : J i Fr. CM ; Ger. sh. o ; Eng. e bef . r J Fr. sh. m ; Ger. sh . ii 
 
 Examples : jeune ; bociie ; her hwtte ; ItJcbe. 
 
 composite towels rOLLOWED BT 1. 
 
 Long : 
 
 Examples : ceil 
 
 long and i 
 
 Short : 
 Example.1 ■ 
 
 short and i 
 
 ': long ii and i 
 Im't 
 
 ' short ii and i 
 \ui 
 
136 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 DOUBLE VOWELS. 
 
 § i21. On a previous page there lias already been presented a 
 double-vowel scheme, in which the short, close vowel i is the basic 
 element of each group. It was also intimated (§ 241) that a similar 
 scale of double vowels might be constructed, in which the basic sound 
 would be the other short, close vowel do, but that it would be of little 
 practical value in writing English, as most of the sounds are seldom 
 if ever heard in our language 8ome of them, however, are of very 
 frequent occurrence in several foreign languages, and, therefore, it is 
 proper that signs should here be given them. The most convenient, 
 unappropriated sign for double vowels is a small crescent-shaped char- 
 acter, which, being turned in four different directions, and made both 
 shaded and light for long and short vowels, and wiitten to the conso- 
 nant-stem in .three positions, will give twenty-four distinct signs. 
 And if this scheme were constructed precisely on the same plan as the 
 otter, these signs would be used to represent the following twenty- 
 four double sounds : ah-oo, a-oo, a-oo, e-So, e-oo, z-oo, aw-oo, 6-55, 
 0-00, u-oo, 00-00, 00-00 ; oo-ah, oo-d, oo-u, oo-e, oo-e, oo-i, o6-aw, oo-o, 
 00-0, oo-u, 00-00, 00-00 Now, of the first twelve of these sounds, only 
 three, namely, S-6o, i-oo, and o-oo, are ever used ; and as those have 
 already been provided with double signs in the other scale, we may 
 exclude the whole twelve from any further representation. This, 
 then, will give us twenty-four characters for the twelve remaining 
 double-sounds — two signs for each, as shown in the following scaJe : 
 
 oo-ah, "■ o| 00- a. 
 
 \ SS-aw, 
 
 DOT-TOWELS. 
 
 od-e, "i "; oo^a, 
 
 DASH-VOWELS. 
 
 00-00, '; : 00-3, a; ci So-u, 
 
 § 422. These signs may sometimes be used with a semi-cousonautal 
 value to represent the frequent English combination of v> with a suc- 
 ceeding vowel. Simple initial w may be written also with this char- 
 acter, made uniformly light, and joined to the next stem ; thus, 
 J wash. And, by always using the sign with its opening upward 
 or downward, when a dot-vowel intervenes, and opening to the right 
 or left when it is a dash-vowel, the outlines would need no actual vocal- 
 ization to be perfectly legible ; thus, ""^ waft, mnter, \_wove. 
 
 This sign for w should, however, be sparingly used, it being generally 
 better to employ the stem ivay, except when it forms an indistinct 
 
APPENDIX. 137 
 
 angle, or difficult junction, with the stem that foUowis it, as, for in- 
 stance, in the outlines W-F, W-Ft, W-V, W-Vd, W-CH, W-CHt, W-J, 
 W-Jd, W-SH, W-Td, "W-Dd, etc. This brief sign for initial w may also 
 be used, when necessary, to distinguish between different words that 
 
 contain the same consonants ; thus, ^' awake, ^ wake, , woke. 
 
 The stenotype of this brief consonant sign is a small w, the top of 
 which may be turned either upward or downward, to the right or to 
 the left, to indicate the direction of the opening of the sign ; thus, 
 vrK wake, ^ K woke, ^ V wove. 
 
 NASAL VOWELS. 
 
 § 423. The nasal vowels heard in the French and one or two other 
 European languages, may be written by placing the nasalized vowel 
 to the stem en or em canceled with a short tick, written between the 
 ordinary vowel-positions ; thus, ''— ^ an, en, '~—^ in, ^^ on, ^J^- «"■ 
 The m-hook canceled in a similar manner may be used for the same 
 purpose ; thus, '^ bon, '"^'X^ enfant. > 
 
 SIGNS FOE FOREIGN CONSONANT-SOUNDS. 
 
 EKBATHED SOUNDS. 
 
 § 424. We have seen (§ 9) that certain of the sonant consonant- 
 sounds have no breathed mates in English, and, therefore, no signs 
 have been provided for them in the ordinary alphabet. If, however, 
 these sounds should be met with in writing foreign words, the writer 
 may use the signs of the sonants with a small semicircle struck 
 through them; thus /^, which represents the Welsh U, as in the 
 word f: Llan. 
 
 ABRUPTS CHANGED XO CONTINUANTS. 
 
 § 425. Several of the sounds of consonants that in English are always 
 abrupts, in certain foreign languages partially lose that character and 
 become continuants. Such sounds may be represented in Phonography 
 by the signs of the abrupts with a short waved line written through 
 them ; thus, X represents the sound of Greek (p, or Latin ph ; and 
 its mate X. the sound of 6 in Spanish and w in German. The 
 ssounds of German ch and g, as in Dach and tag, are represente 1 by 
 _j_ A, _i_ g. 
 
PHONOGEAPHIC "WEITING EXEECISES. 139 
 
 PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 
 
 § 426. The figures inclosed in brackets in these writing exercises 
 refer to the preceding sections of this work. Sometimes several 
 numbers are included in the same bracket, to all of which sections the 
 learner should refer before proceeding to write the signs or words that 
 follow. 
 
 EXERCISE I.— [20-62.] 
 
 § 427. [20] Kay, gay, en, ing, em, hay; [21] tee, dee, chay, jay, 
 pee, bee, zhee, ess, zee, ith, dhee, ef, vee, er, yay, way ; [22] ish, 
 lee, ree. 
 
 WOKM OF ONE STE5I. 
 
 § 428. [31-44] Ache, Coe, gay, eight, toe, ode, day, doe, age, ape, 
 pay, bay, show, they, foe, no, aim, hay, hoe, way ; [54, 61, 62, 
 71] eke, oak, kay, Co., echo, coo, cow, cue, egg, ago, guy, at, ate, 
 eat, it, ought, oat, out, tea, too, two, to, tie, toy, eighty, add, aid, 
 awed, odd, owed, dey. Dee, daw, dough, die, Dow, due, eddy, ado, 
 adieu, etch, each, itch, chaw, chew, edge, jay, jaw, Joe, joy, Jew, 
 ope, up, pa, pea, paw, Poe, pie, pew, Opie, bah, be, beau, by, boy, 
 bow, obey, abbey, ash, shah, she, show, shoe, shy, oath, thaw, thigh, 
 thew, Otho, they, thee, thy, thou, if, off, oaf. Fay, fee, few, eve, of, 
 vie, vow, view, avow, Ann, e'en, in, on, nay, knee, gnaw, nigh, 
 new, Anna, Annie, annoy, anew, am, ma, may, me, maw, mow, my, 
 mow, mew, are, air, ear, ore, arrow, era, Erie, airy, array, haw, who, 
 high, how, hew, ahoy, yea, ye, yaw, you, we, Waugh, woe, woo ; 
 [58] eyed, ice, icy, eyes, ivy, ire ; [22, 39] ale, ell, eel, ill, all, lay, lee, 
 law, low, isle, oil, owl, lie, lieu, oily, allay, ally, Eli, alloy, allow, ray, 
 raw, roe, rue, rye. 
 
 § 429. [61, 62] Write the horizontal stems kay, gay, en, ing, em, 
 hay, in the three consonant positions, and then write in the same posi- 
 tions the perpendicular and inclined stems tee, dee, chay, jay, pee, bee, 
 ish, zhee, ess, zee, ith, dhee, ef, vee, lee, er, ree, yay, way. 
 
 EXERCISE II.— [64-68.] 
 
 JOINING OE C0NS0NANI-STEM3. 
 
 § 430. Join the following stems that are connected by hyphens : 
 [64] kay-kay, gay-gay, tee-tee, dee-dee, chay-chay, jay-jay, pec-pee, 
 bee-bee, ree-ree ; [65] ish-ish, ess-ess, zee-zee, ith-ith, dhee-dhee, ef-ef. 
 
140 THE COMPLETE PHONOaEAPHEE. 
 
 vee-vee, ing-ing, enen, em-em, lee-lee, er-er, hay-hay, yay-yay, way- 
 way ; [66] ef-en, ef-ing, vee-en, vee-ing, ith-ef, ith-vee, dhee-ef, dhee- 
 vee, lee-em, lee-hay, en-shee, hay-ess ; [67] kay-gay, gay-kay, tee- 
 dee, dee-tee, chay-jay, jay-chay, pee-bee, bee-pee, vee-kay, ef-gay, 
 dee-vee, gay-way, vee-gay, hay-zee, dhee-ing, yay-ing, bee-ing ; [68] 
 pee-lng, pee-en, en-ree, em-pee, ef-kay, ith-en, dee-ef, tee-ef, lee-er, 
 lee-ess, lee-ish, lee-shee, em-ess. 
 
 EXERCISE in.— [63-72.] 
 
 WORDS OF TWO STEMS. 
 
 § 431. [63, 70, 72] Caulk, cake, coke, cook, cuckoo, cog, keg, 
 catch, couch, ketch, coach, cage, kedge, cap, copy, occupy, cape, 
 cope, cup, coupee, keep, kip, coop, cab, cob, cub, cubby, cube, Cuba, 
 kith, aching, calm, comma, comb. Gawk, gag, gog, gig, gewgaw, 
 gouge, gage, gang, gong, game, gum, gummy. Tack, attack, attic, 
 talk, take, tuck, tick, took, tag, tug, outgo, attach, touch, touchy, 
 teach, towage, tap, top, type, tape, tip, tabby, taboo, tub, tube, teeth, 
 tooth, tithe, teethe, tongue, Tyng, Tom, atom, tame, tome, teem, tomb. 
 Dock, dike, decoy, deck, duck, decay, duke, dog, dug, dig, Dutch, ducky, 
 ditch, dodge, adage. Doge, deep, dip, dupe, depot, dab, daub, dub, 
 debut, death, doth, Edith, dang, dong, ding, aiding, dam, dime, dame, 
 dome, dumb, dummy, deem, dim, doom. Chalk, chalky, chock, check, 
 choke, chuck, cheek, chick, chap, chop, chappy, choppy, cheap, chip, 
 chub, chubby, etching, chime, chum. Jack, jocky, jocco, Jake, joke, 
 jag, jaggy, jog, jig, gip, job, jibe. Job, edging, jam, jem, Jim, Jimmy, 
 Jamie. Pack, pock, pike, pica, opaque, peck, epoch, epic, poke. Puck, 
 peak, pick, puke, peg, pug, pig, patch, pouch, poach, peach, pitch, 
 pitchy, podge, page, apogee, pap, papa, pop, poppy, puppy, pup, pope, 
 pip, peep, pipe, path, apathy, pith, pithy, pang, aping, palm, palmy. 
 Back, aback, balk, balky, bake, beck, buck, book, bag, bog, boggy, beg, 
 bug, buggy, big, batch, botch, botchy, beach, beachy, bitch, bijou, bob, 
 babe, baby, bibb, booby,' bath, both, bathe. Booth, bang, bung, balm, 
 balmy, bomb, boom. Ethic, thick, thatch, thong, thumb, theme. 
 Folk, fag, fog, foggy, iig, fetch. Fitch, fadge, fudge, effigy, fop, fip, 
 fob, Phebe, fib, faith, fang, fame, foam, fume. Vague, vogue, evoke, 
 vouch, avouch, vetch, vim. Nack, knock, neck, nook, nag, nog, 
 notch, nitch, inch, enjoy, nap, neap, nip, nab, knob, knobby, nub, 
 nib, 'neath. name, enemy, numb. Macli, Mackey, mock, Mike, mica, 
 make, Mecca, Mocha, muck, mucky, Mag, mug, muggy, match, much, 
 magi, image, map, mop, mob, moth, mothy, mouth, raith, mouthe, 
 aiming, mamma, maim, mum, mummy, Mauraee. Hack, hawk, hock, 
 hook, hag, hog, hatch, hitch, hedge, hang, hung, ham, hum. Yolk, 
 yam. Walk, awoke, awake, week, wick, wag, wig, wipe, weep, web. 
 
PHOITOGEAPHIC WEITING EXEECISES. lil 
 
 EXERCISE IV.— [63-72.] 
 
 WOBDS OF THBEE STEMS. 
 
 § 432. [63, 70, 72] Calking, kicking, Cooknoy, cooking, Keokuk, 
 kink, Congo, keeping, coping, cabbage, cubic, comic, combing, acad- 
 emy, canopy, candy, Canada, coinage, catching, caging, kedging ; 
 gaging, gaming, gumming, Gotham, gothic, guaging, gouging, gush- 
 ing, gashing ; talking, attacking, taking, ticking, typify, tiptoe, topic, 
 topping, tobacco, tomato, Timothy, tamely, to-morrow, Tammany, 
 teaming, toothache, teething, tithing, tonic, tunic, teaching, touch- 
 ing, attaching, tank ; docking, ducking, donkey, dinging, deputy, 
 depth, debauch, daybook, daubing, dubbing, dabbing, defile, domino, 
 damage, damning, dimming, deeming, Danube, denied, denude, ditch- 
 ing ; Choctaw, chalking, checking, choking, chunk, chink, chapping, 
 chopping, chiming, chimney ; Jacob, jaclidaw, joking, jogging, junk, 
 jobbing, jibing, Jamaica, jamming, Geneva, junta, junto, jaunty, 
 judging ; packing, package, poking, picking, pigmy, pagoda, peg- 
 ging, pink, peeping, popping, apothem, Panama, panic, punic, patch- 
 ing, pitching, paging, pushing ; becalm, bookish, backache, balking, 
 baking, backing, bucking, bugaboo, bigamy, Bogota, baggage, bag- 
 ging, begging, bank, bunk, banging, Bombay, bamboo, botany, be- 
 daub, bathing, benumb, bonnet, Bennett, bounty, beneath,, botching, 
 budging ; thatching ; fagot, foppish, fobbing, fifty, fifth, famish, 
 foaming, fuming, fatigue, fathom, farm, affinity, fetching ; evict, 
 vacate, evoked, evoking, vivify, venom, vanity, avenge, voyaging ; 
 income, uncouth, encage, uncage, incog, knocking, nicking, enigma, 
 unpack, napping, nabob, nabbing, infamy, unfair, unveil, invoke, 
 nymph [N-M-F^], unmake, naming, numbing, entomb, anatomy, 
 Nineveh, ninety, inanity, anchovy, notching, gnashing ; mocking, 
 making, magpie, monk, monkey, mink, embalm, embody, mammoth, 
 mimic, maiming, mutiny, Medina, Madonna, mouthing, amenity, 
 emanate, month, munch, manage, matching, magic, mashing ; hack- 
 ing, hackney, hooking, hoggish, haggish, hugging, hatching, hitch- 
 ing, hedging, hashing, hushing, hanging, humming ; yoking ; walk- 
 ing, waking. 
 
 LESSON v.— [63-78.] 
 
 WORDS OF FOUR STEMS. 
 
 § 433, Cockroach, copybook, catchpenny, cogency ; tiptop, Tippeca 
 noe, outmarch, Teutonic, toothpick ; decoct, dingdong, damaging, dem- 
 agogue ; Putnam, pitchpipe, Poughkeepsie, Piccadilly ; becalming, 
 banking, abominate, bona-fide ; ship-like, 8hip»vreok, ship-shape, shib- 
 
142 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 boleth, Shenandoah ; vivifying, avenging, victim, victory ; nickniime, 
 nicknack, uncaging, uncooked, unpacldng, infect, navigate, antimony, 
 nutmeg, entombing, Anno Domini ; matchlock, Mac Adam, embalm- 
 ing, embodying, memento, mimicking, monotony, Aminadab, man- 
 aging, munching. 
 
 WORDS PKONOUNOED ALIKE, AND HENCE WBITTEN THE SAME. 
 
 §434. [78] Ale, ail; aught, ought; all, awl; ode, owed; day, 
 dey ; doe, dough; toe, tow ; ought, aught ; be, bee ; isle, aisle ; roe, 
 row ; dam, damn ; yoke, yolk ; week, weak ; way, weigh ; hay, hey ! 
 high, hie ; peak, pique ; bay, bey ; bow, beau ; berth, birth ; bow, 
 bough ; key, quay ; sea, see ; lea, lee ; lo ! low ; lie, lye ; mue, mew ; 
 nay, neigh ; no, know ; o ! oh ! owe ; I, eye ; ay, aye ; hue, hew, 
 Hugh ; so, sow, sew ; ewe, you, yew ; by, buy, bye ; ore, oar, o'er; 
 air, ere, eyie, e'er, heir. 
 
 EXERCISE VI.— [95-105.] 
 
 WOBDS OE ONE STEM, WITH HSITIAL ESS-OmOLE. 
 
 § 435. [95, 98, 105] Sack, sock, sky, skow. Psyche, sake, soke, suck, 
 seek, sick, skew. Sag, soggy. Sat, sought, sot, sty, sight, stay, sate, 
 stow, seat, sit, city, settee^^ soot, suit, stew. Sad, sawed, sod, side, 
 sowed, sewed, soda, said, seed, seedy, sued. Such. Sage, sedge, siege. 
 Sap, sop, spy, soap, sup, sip, soup, spew. Sob, sub. South, Seth, 
 sooth. Scythe, soothe. Safe, sofa. Salve, Savoy, save, sieve. Sang, 
 song, sung, sing. Sawn, sign, sown, snow, son, sun, sunny, seen, sin, 
 soon. Sam, psalm, same, sum, some, seem. Sway. 
 
 WOKDS OF ONE STEM, WITH FINAL ESS-CIRCLE. 
 
 § 436. Cass, ax, cause, ox, coys, cows, case, aches, oaks, keys, kiss, 
 ekes, coos, accuse. Gas, gauze, goss, guise, gaze, guess, eggs, goes, 
 geese, goose. Toss, ties, toys, toes, oats, Otis, tease, eats, its. Adz, 
 dies, dice, days, aids, does, odes, dues, deuce, adduce. Chaws, choice, 
 chose, chess, etches, cheese, choose, chews. Jaws, joys, ages, edges, 
 a3gis, juice, Jews. Ashes, shies, chaise, shows, shoes. Thaws, thighs. 
 Thoso, thus, this. Office, fosse, phase, face, efface, fuss, fuzz, fees, 
 phiz, fuse, effuse. Vice, vies, voice, vows, avoWs, vase, eaves, views. 
 Gnaws, nice, annoys, ounce, nose, knows, niece, knees, inns, noose, 
 news. Mass, alms, moss, mice, mouse, maize, mace, amaze, mess, 
 aims, muss. Miss, amiss, moose, muse, amuse. Hi"s, house, haze, 
 hoes, hiss. Yes, use, ewes, yews. Wise, ways, woes, Weisse. 
 
 WORDS OF ONE STEM, WITH INITIAL AKD FINAL ESS-CIKOLES. 
 
 6 487. Sacks, skies, sex, six, seeks. Sets, stays, seats, cities. Soda, 
 
PHONOGEAPHIC WETTING EXEECISES. 143 
 
 Reeds, seduce. Sages, sedges. Spies, spice, spouse, space, suppose. 
 Suffice, suffuse, sneeze, siuty. 
 
 EXERCISE VII.— [95-105.] 
 
 WOKDS OF TWO STEMS, THE PIRST WITH AN INITIAL ESS-CIECLB. 
 
 § 438. Scape, skip, scope, scoop, scab, scabby, scheme, skim, scum, 
 scathe, skinny, Scotch, sketch, seeking, soaking ; sigma, Saginaw, 
 sagging ; seating, set-to, sitting, suiting ; Sodom, siding ; sachem ; 
 spotty, speedy, speech, spike, spoke, speck, supping ; subdue, sab- 
 bath, sobbing ; seething, soothing ; safety, sphere ; Savannah, sav- 
 age, civic, saving ; sank, sink, sunk, singing ; snap, snip, snipe, snub, 
 Sunday, snath, snatch, singe, snowshoe, sneak, snake, scenic, Seneca, 
 snag, snug, sinning, signing ; Sambo, simoom, Smith, smooth, smudge, 
 smash, smoke, smoky, smack, seeming, summing ; swap, sweep, swoop, 
 swam, swim, swing, swung, swab, swig. 
 
 WOKDS OF TUKEE STEMS, THE FIRST WITH AN INITIAL ESS-CIKCLE. 
 
 § 439. Skipping, scooping, scheming, skimming, scathing, sketch- 
 ing, skunk ; satanic ; spiking, spunk, spunky, spank ; subpoena, sub- 
 duing ; suffocate ; seventy, seventh ; sinking ; snappish, snapping, 
 sunshiny, saaking, sneaking, synagogue ; somebody, symphony, semi- 
 vowel, smoothing, smacking, smoldng ; swinging, swigging, swim- 
 ming, swamp, swampy. 
 
 WORDS OF TWO STEMS, THE LAST WITH A FINAL ESS-CIROLE. 
 
 § 440. Copse, coppice, Caiphas, Cadiz, coyness, cautious, coax ; god- 
 dess, gayness, Agnes, agonize ; topaz, typhus, Thomas, Thames, Tu- 
 nis, tax, tongs ; depose, debase, deface, edifice, diffuse, device, devise, 
 advice, advise, demise, deduce, duds, Adonis, Dennis, duchess, Dix, 
 docks, decks ; chops, Chinese, checks ; jackass, jocose, Jabez, James, 
 genius, Junius, Janus, Jonas ; pappous papoose, pumice, pathos, apex ; 
 box, ibex, Bacchus, bodice, abduce ; ethics ; fox, follis, focus, fix, 
 affix, finis, fides, famous, Phoebus ; vex, Venice, Venus ; anxious ; 
 onyx, annex, uncase, encase, incase, notice, induce, Andes, Natchez, 
 infuse, invoice, novice, annoyance, newness, announce ; makes, mix, 
 emboss, ominous, menace, minus, Minos ; hacks. Hicks, hags, hogs, 
 hugs, hums, highways ; yokes, yams, Toung's ; awakes. 
 
 WORDS OF THREE STEMS, THE LAST WITH A FINAL ESS-OIKOLB. 
 
 § 441. Calmness, covetous, cactus ; gumminess, Ganges ; timepiece, 
 tameness, tjdings, touchiness, techiness ; deputize, dimness, dumbness, 
 admix, dog-days ; cheapness, Choctaws ; Japanese, jaundice ; pickaxe, 
 pitcliiness ; book-case, bonnets, bounteous ; shabbiness, shagginess ; 
 
144 THE COMPLETE PHONOGKAPHEE. 
 
 thickness ; factious, foggiiicss, fungus, affects ; venomous ; inkinesB ; 
 iiif.'imous, invidious, numbness, incubus, noxious ; Memphis, mighti- 
 ness, mutinous, muddiness, madness, moodiness, mouthpiece, omni- 
 bus, meekness, minx ; hanks, hunks ; yankees. 
 
 EXEECISE VIII.— [108, 109.] 
 woEns or two stems, 'with siediai ess circles. 
 § 442. [108, 109] Cask, Cossack, cassock, excite, exit, oxyde, accedn, 
 exude, oxen, cousin, causing. Gasp, gossip, gazette, gusset, gusty, 
 Augusta, gassing, gazing, guessing. Task, tusk, phthisic. Otsego, 
 tacit, outset, tasty, testy, outside, Tuesday, tossing, teasing. Desk, 
 duslc, disk, audacity, dusty, deceit, disobey, disavow, deceive, dowsing, 
 dosing, dozing, educing, adducing, Addison, design, dozen, disown, 
 dizen, dismay. Atchison, chasten, chosen, choosing. Joseph, Jason. 
 Paucity, opposite, opacity, pasty, upset, episode, passage, passeth, 
 pacify, passive, passing, pausing, poising, pacing, posing, opposing, 
 appeasing. Bask, Biscay, besought, besot, beset, bestow, obesity, 
 beside, busied, beseech, besiege, abusive, basing, abasing, buzzing, 
 abusing, bison, basin, boatswain [pronounced bOs'n], bassoon, besom, 
 bosom. Physic, faucet, offset, facet, fusty, facade, effusive, facing, 
 effacing, fusing, fasten, pliasma. Vasty, vista, visit, visage, evasive. 
 Nosegay, nicety, nasty, honesty, unsought, insight, unseat, inside, 
 unsaid, ensued, unsafe, unsing, unsung, Anson, ensign, insane, 
 unsown, unseen. Mask, mosque, Moscow, musk, musky, music, 
 musty, misty, message, massive, missive, massing, amassing, amazing, 
 missing, musing, amusing, mason. Hasty, hasp, hissing. Whisk, 
 wasp, wisp, Wesson. 
 
 WOEDS OP THREE STEMS, WITH ESS-CIROLE BETWEEN THE FIKST AND SECOND. 
 
 § 443. Custom, accustom, costume, custody, ecstasy, caustic, exotic, 
 acoustic, exciting, exceeding, acceding, exuding, Cazenovia, cozening ; 
 gossiping, gasping ; tacitly, tastily, tasting ; despatch, dispatch, de- 
 ceiving, dismal, distich, deciding, dissolve, dislodge, disrobe, de- 
 cency, designing, disowning, duskish ; chastity, Chesapeake ; Pacific, 
 pacifying, pastime, apostasy, poisoning ; bismuth, besotting, beset- 
 ting, absolve, Absalom, absentee, beseeching, besieging, basking ; 
 fastening, physicking, fizgig ; vicinity, vicinage ; unsteady, inciting, 
 insanity ; masonic, misjudge, Muscovy, masking ; husking, Hosking. 
 
 WOEDS OF THEKE STEMS, WITH ESS-CniOLB BETWEEN THE SECOND AND LAST. 
 
 § 444. Capacity, keepsake, coaxing, caucusing ; gamesome, agon- 
 izing ; tenacity, tocsin, taxing; deposit, deposing, debasing, deficit, 
 diffuBiDg, doomsday, damson, damask, deducing, dynasty, density; 
 
PHONOGRAPHIC ■WEITING EXEECISES. 145 
 
 gypsum, jocosity, Jackson ; papism, puppyism, pensive, pencil ; te- 
 dizen, buxom, bcickside, boxing ; thickset ; offensive, fancied, fencing, 
 fixing, affixing, foxing ; vivacity, venison, evincing, vouchsafe, vixen, 
 vexing ; knapsack, unbo?om, unfasten, infusing, enviously, animosity, 
 unmask, namesake, enticing, noticing, undeceive, undecide, inducing, 
 nonsuit, announcing, encasing, uncasing, incasing, annexing ; Madi- 
 son, imbecile, embossing, immensity, amnesty, monsoon, Munson, 
 mincing, majesty, maxim, moccasin, Mexico, mixing ; love-sick, lax- 
 ity ; reposing, rapacity. 
 
 WOKDS OP TWO STEMS, WITH MEDIAL AND FINAL ESS-OIECLES. 
 
 § 445. Excuse, oxydize. Exodus, expose ; Augustus, gasps ; poison- 
 ous ; besides, absence, baseness, business, obeisance ; despise, dispose, 
 disabuse, dismiss, discuss, disguise ; isosceles ; incense, niceness, nui- 
 sance ; chastise, choiceness ; Josephus, justice. 
 
 wouds of two stems, with initial and medial ess-ciecles. 
 § 446. Saxon, Saxony, sixty, succeed, sixth ; sagacity ; satisfy ; se- 
 ducer, seducing ; spasm, specify, spicing, spousing, supposing ; sub- 
 side ; soothsaying ; sophism, sufficing, suffusing, Sing-Sing, singsong ; 
 sunset, sneezing ; Samson ; solicit, slicing. 
 
 WOEDS OF TWO STEMS, WITH INITIAL AND FINAL ESS-CIEOLES. 
 
 ^ 447. Scarce, sickness, sketches ; sagacious ; sadness ; sageness ; 
 sparse, spacious ; sauciness ; safeness, suffix ; swings. 
 
 EXEECISE IX.— [112-119.] 
 § 448. [112] Cease, sauce, says, cess, siss, saucy, sissy, size, sighs, 
 seize ; [113] ask, askew, Osage, asp, espy, ossify, Asaph, eye-salve, 
 assume ; [114] Czar, zany, oozing, Isaac; [115] gassy, Gussie, goosy, 
 Tasso, Odyssey, Odessa, Jessie, juicy, posse, abbacy, fussy, foci, massy, 
 Macy, mossy, say, see, saw, so, sew, sow, papacy, intimacy, ecstasy, 
 spicy, apostasy, gipsy, tipsy ; cozy, daisy, dizzy, -dozy, Josie, pisa, posy, 
 busy, boozy, fuzee, fuzzy, Vesey, mazy, muzzy, noisy, uneasy. 
 
 WOEDS CONTAINING THE LARGE CIKCLE. 
 
 § 449. [118, 119] Season, sausage, society, excessive, exist, exhaust, 
 desist, decisive, possessed, possessive, possessing, abacist, Mississippi, 
 necessary, necessity, successive ; cases, kisses, causes, axes, access, 
 axis, excess, accuses, gases, gazes, guesses, Agassiz, teases, tosses, 
 daisies, doses, dozes, deuces, adduces, educes, choses, cheeses, chooses, 
 sauces, ceases, thesis, theses, fasces, faces, phases, offices, effaces, 
 Ephesus, fuses, vaaea, vices, voices, masses, maces, mazes, messea, 
 
 7 
 
146 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 misses, mosses, Moses, musses, muses, amuses, nieces, noses, iioosng, 
 success, sexes, senses, census, suffices, supposes, spaces, spices. Cap- 
 size, colossus, taxes, Texas, devises, devices, apothesis, AncMses, em- 
 phasis, emphasize. 
 
 EXERCISE X.— [122-127.] 
 
 WOEHS OF ONE STEM, WITH THE INITIAl ST-LOOP. 
 
 § 450. [122, 125] stack, stake, stick, stalk, stock, stoke, stuck, 
 stocky, stucco, stag, state, stout, statue, staid, steed, stead, stowed, 
 stud, stood, steady, stitch, stage, step, steep, stop, stoop, stab, stub, 
 stubby, stithy, staff, stiff, stuff, stave, stove, Steve, sting, stung, 
 steam, stem. 
 
 WORDS or OKE STEM, WITH FINAL ST-LOOP. 
 
 § 451. Cast, cased, kissed, cost, coast, accost, accused, gassed, gazed, 
 guest, ghost, gust, aghast, august, August, teased, test, tossed, toast, 
 dosed, dozed, dust, educed, adduced, chased, chest, choused, jest, 
 gist, just, joist, joust, past, paced, posed, pest, paused, post, poised, 
 appeased, opposed, based, beast, best, boast, bust, buzzed, boost, 
 abased, abused, assessed, assist, assized, zest, fast, faced, feast, fist, 
 foist, fused, effaced, effused, vast, vest, avast, nest, noosed, honest, 
 noised, mast, massed, mist, missed, most, must, moist, mused, 
 amazed, amassed, hissed, housed, hoist, yesist, used, waste, waist, 
 west, wist, Wust. 
 
 WORDS OE TWO STEMS, THE LAST WITH A FINAL ST-LOOP. 
 
 § 452. Copyist, chemist ; egotist, agonized ; outpost, utmost, text, 
 taxed, outcast ; deposed, debased, defaced, diffused, divest, advised, 
 devised, demised, detest, deduced, adjust, digest ; papist, upmost, pi- 
 anist ; abduced, boxed ; espoused, thickest ; fenced, fixed, affixed, 
 foxed ; vexed, evinced ; unopposed, unappeased, unbiased, infest, en- 
 ticed, noticed, induced, announced, unchaste, unjust, incased, encased, 
 uncased, annexed ; embossed, amethyst, minced, menaced, mixed. 
 
 WORDS OF ONE STEM, WITH INITIAL ESS-CmOLE AND FINAL ST-LOOP. 
 
 § 458. Sea-coast ; spiced, spaced, supposed ; sawdust, seduced ; sug- 
 gest ; sophist, sufficed, suffused ; psalmist, southeast ; sneezed. 
 
 WORDS ENDING WITH THE STER-LOOP. 
 
 § 454. [123, 125] Castor, coaster, taster, tester, toaster, duster, 
 Chester, jester, juster pastor, pester, poster, boaster, faster, foster, 
 vastet, visitor, master, muster, waster; teamster, dabster, lobster, 
 
PHONOGEAPHIO WEITING EXERCISES. 147 
 
 gamester, bolster, Munster, monster, tapster ; songster, sophister, sin 
 ister; taskmaster, postmaster [pess-mester], paymaster, minister. 
 
 WOKDa ENDING WITH THE lAUGB CIEOLB OB LOOP, WITH AN ESS-CIKCLE ADDED. 
 
 § 455. [127] Excesses, accesses, successes, recesses, abscesses, pos 
 Besses ; casts, costs, coasts, accosts, ghosts, gusts, tests, toasts, chests, 
 jests, posts, beasts, boasts, busts, assists, fasts, feasts, foists, vests, 
 nests, masts, mists, hoists, wastes ; castors, tasters, testers, toasters, 
 dusters, Chester's, jesters, pastor's, pesters, posters, visitors, master's, 
 musters. 
 
 EXERCISE XI.— [129-134.] 
 
 § 456. [129, I.] She, shy, issue, sash [II., III.], Ashby, Ashautee 
 oceanic, Oceanica, cash, gash, gush, tush, dash,* dish. Josh, pish, push, 
 apish, bush, fish, gnash, Nash, mash, mesh, mush, hash, hush. [ISO] 
 Tissue, pasha, bushy, fishy. [131] In the following words, when the 
 sign for sh is to be written upward, it is italicised. Shake, shock, 
 shook, shag, shaggy, shoddy, sheep, ship, shabby, sAeath, sAeathe, 
 sAeaf, sAave, sAeave, sAove, Shawnee, shiny, sham, shame, Shem ; Chi- 
 cago, shocking, shaking, shank, shopping, shaping, sAaving, «Aoving, 
 shaming, shamming, sAeathing ; shyness. 
 
 ■ § 457. [132] Alum, elm, Alamo, Alma, alike, elk, Olney, Illinois, 
 Elihu, keel, kill, gall, goal, gull, guile, ghoul, tale, tell, till, tall, toll, 
 "tool, dale, deal, dill, dell, doll, Odel, dole, dull, chill, jail, jill, jole, 
 agile, pal, pale, pell, peal, peel, pill, Paul, pole, poll, pull, appall, 
 opal, bale, bail, Beale, Beall, bill, Boole, bull, bile, boil, fail, feel, fell, 
 fill, fall, foal, fool, file, foil, fowl, foul, afoul, vale, vail, veil, veal, 
 vile, Neal, anneal, Nile, nell, knoll, male, mail, meal, mall, mill, 
 mole, mile, mule. [133] La, lay, Lee, lea, law, low, loo, lieu, ale, 
 eel, ill, all, isle, oil, owl, aisle, Eli, allow, alloy, alley ; sail, sale, seal, 
 sell, cell, sill, Saul, sole, soul, sol, soil, slay, slaw, slow, sly, slough, 
 .slew, sallow, Syall, silly, Sylla, Selah, sully; lass, lace, less, lease, 
 lees, laws, loss, lose, loose, lies, lice, louse ; ails, ells, eels, ills, aisles, 
 alas, Alice, alleys, allies, allays, Ellis ; saucily [sis-Zre] , Sicily. 
 
 § 458. [133 — n., IV.] Lack, lackey alack, lock, like, alike, lake, 
 elk, luck, lucky, Lucca, leak, leaky, lick, Luke, look, lag, log, logy, 
 lug, leg, league, latch, leech, lodge, Elijah, ledge, allege, elegy, liege, 
 lap. Alp, lop, elope, leap, lip, loop, alibi, lobby, Elba, elbow, lobe, 
 lash, lath, lathy, lithe, loath, Lethe, lathe, loathe, although, laugh, 
 alpha, life, elf, loaf, luff, leaf, leafy, aloof, lava, Alva, live, alive, 
 olive, lave, levy, love, leave, levee, Levi, live, Livy, ailing, lung, 
 Oolong, lamb, llama, lime, lame, loam, loamy, loom, Lehigh, alway, 
 always, lea-way. Commence the words lamp, lump, lumpy, limp, 
 limbo, etc., with the downward I. 
 
148 THE COMPLETE PIION'OGEAPHEE. 
 
 § 459. [133, III.] Callow, galley, gaily, gully, tally, tallow, outlay, 
 outlaw, outllo, dally, dolly, oddly, daily, Daly, delay, diLy, duly, 
 Chili, chilly, July, jolly, jelly, Julie, Polly, Apollo, Paley, uplay, 
 pulley, ballet, belie, >iy-law, Bailey, belay, bellow, belly, below, 
 billow, bully, Beulah, shallow, Shlloh, shily. Shelly, shoaly, Shee- 
 lah, shilly, shally, Othello, follow, felly, fellow, valley, volley, 
 villa, Nelly, Molly, Milo, Emily, mellow, mealy, Lilah, lowly, lily, 
 rally, Eolla, Ealeigh, Riley, ruly, hallow, hollow, holly, halo, hilly, 
 wallow, waylay, willow, woolly. 
 
 § 460. [134] Caleb, caliph, calash, colic, calico, colleague, gal- 
 lop, Galena, Gallic, galling, outleap, tulip, outlive, italic, toiling, 
 delve, dilemma, deluge, chilling, jalap, paling, pulp, pelf, pillage, 
 apology, polish, Polish, Pollock, epilogue, peeling, appealing, ap- 
 palling, piling, polling, pulling, bulb, bailiff, Bellevue, Baalam, belch, 
 bilge, bulge, bilk, abolish, bulk, bulky, shallop, Shelby, Philip, film, 
 filth, filthy, filch, vilify, vellum, mollify, Malta, milch, mileage, 
 milk, milky, Moloch, Amalek, Malacca, Malaga, lullaby, lilac, Hal- 
 leck, hillock, hulk. 
 
 EXERCISE Xn.— [135-137.] 
 
 §461. [135,1.] Arm, army, Aram, aroma, Eric, ark, arc, ergo, argue, 
 orb, Oreb, herb, Arab, Araby, Irish, airing, are, air, airy, ear, era, Erie, 
 or, ire, Ira, awry, array, err, oar, arrow. Iris, arise, erase, arose, Aries, 
 arouse, arrest. 
 
 § 462. [135, II.] Corps, cur, gear, gore, tar, tour, tower, tire, at- 
 tire, tare, tear, tore, dare, door, adore, char, chair, chore, jar, ajar, 
 giaour, gyre, par, pare, pear, pair, peer, pier, pyre, pore, purr, poor, 
 bar, bare, bear, beer, bier, bore, boar, boor. Burr, sheer, fair, fare, 
 fear, veer, liar, lower, leer, lore, sire, sour, soar, sore, sir, sewer, star, 
 store, stir, steer, Caesar. 
 
 § 463. [135, III.] Ram, ream, rim, rhyme, Aram, Rome, rum, 
 room, roomy, rheum. 
 
 § 464 [136, I.] Back, rock, rake, wreck, rook, wreak, rick, rag, 
 rogue, rap, rape, reap, rip, ripe, rob, rib, rope, robe, rub, rash, rush, 
 rouge, wrong, wrung, ring, rang, race, raise, riccj rise, rose, rouse, ruse, 
 ruby, rupee, ruddy. 
 
 § 465. [136, II.] Carry, curry, Carey, Cora, Geary, Gerry, gory, 
 tarry, tory, terra, tyro, Darrow, dowry, dairy, Derry, chary, cherry, 
 choery, Jerry, sherry, tJ(orough, fairy, ferry, fury, farrow, furiow, 
 ivory, vary, narrow, marry, marrow, miry, morrow, merry, Mary, 
 Murray, emery, Leaiy, Laura, Lyra, Lewiy, Rarey, raree, Aurora, 
 harrow, hurry. Yarrow, wary, weary, wiry, sorrow, sorry, Sarah, 
 starry, story, Oioero. 
 
PHONOGEAJHIC WEITING EXEECISE8. 149 
 
 § 466. [136, m.] "Wreath, writhe, reach, rich, Bichie, wretch, roach, 
 arch, archy, rage, ridge, urge. 
 
 § 467. [137] Carp, curb, Caribhee, tardy, torch, outrage, Turk, tur- 
 key, dirty, dearth, dirge, doric, dirk, dirge, cherub, Cherokee, chair- 
 ing, Jerusha, Jericho [135, III., Jeremy, joram, Jeremiah] ; porch, 
 perch, parch, peerage, purge, perish, parish, Persia, pork, park, barb, 
 birth, barony, birch, barge, bearish, barouche, Burke, bark, barrack, 
 thorny, forage, fork, farrago, verify, verity, Verona, virago. Murphy, 
 Martha, mirth, merino, March, merge, emerge, marsh, marshy, 
 mark, murky, America, Horeb, harrowing, horrify, Hervey, Harvey, 
 harangue, Europe, Europa, York, Torick, worrying. Write Lyric, lark, 
 luring, alluring, with the downward r. 
 
 EXERCISE XIII.— [139-155.] 
 
 EL A1«D EB HOOKS. 
 
 § 468. [140, 141, 144] Write the signs indicated by the names kel, 
 ker, gel, ger, tel, ter, del, der, chel, cher, jel, jer, pel, per, bel, ber, rel, 
 rer, ish'l, ish'r, shel, sher, zhel, zher, sel, ser, zel, zer, thel, ther, dhel, 
 dher, fel, fer, vel, ver, ing'l, ing'r, nel, ner, mel, mer, lei, ler, el'l, 
 el'r, erl, er'r, hel, her, yel, yer, wel, wer ; [145] kel, lee-kay ; tel, 
 lee-tee ; der, ree-dee ; fel, lee-ef. 
 
 WORDS OF ONE SIEM, WITH AN EL OK EK HOOK. 
 
 § 469. [147, 148, 151] Claw, cloy, clue, cry, acre, ochre, crow, 
 crew ; glow, ogle, glee, glue, gray, grow, augur, eager ; tray, tree, 
 Troy, try, utter, outer ; idle, idol, draw, dry, dray, odor ; play, plea, 
 ply, apple, plough, pray, pry, prow ; blow, blew, blue, able, bray, 
 brew, brow ; shrew, usher, Asher ; azure ; throw, through, threw, 
 ether, author ; either ; fly, flay, flee, flew, flue, awful, offal, fry, fray, 
 free, fro, offer, Ophir ; evil, oval, every ; honor, inner, owner ; Emir ; 
 oral, error; [149] feclat, ugly, agree, outre, idly, apply, ably, Ezra, 
 affray, overawe, inlay, unlay, only, orally, early, hourly. 
 
 A SIMPUi STEM rOLLOWED BY AN EL-HOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 470. [152] Cackle, cockle, coggle, couple, cobble, cable, cosily, cavil, 
 camel, kingly, kennel ; goggle, giggle, gobble, gabble, gable, gavel, 
 gunwale ; tackle, tickle, toggle, tattle, title, tittle, total, totally, 
 topple, table, tipple, tunnel, toughly ; ducal, dapple, deploy, deeply, 
 audible, audibly, dabble, double, doubly, devil ; chuckle, chapel, 
 cheaply, chiefly, channel ; joggle, juggle ; pickle, petal, paddle, ped- 
 dle, puddle, poodle, papal, pupil, pebble, pebbly, pithily, panel, penal, 
 pommel, pummel ; buckle, boggle, bugle, battle, beetle, bottle, bea- 
 dle, Bible, bauble, babble, Babel, bubble, busily, baffle, buffalo, bevel ; 
 
150 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 shackle, shuttle, shuffle, shovel ; thickly, ethical, ethically, thor 
 oughly; fickle, faddle, fiddle, fuddle, fable, feeble, feebly, affable, 
 affably, final, finally, fennel, funnel ; vocal, vigil, venal, venally, 
 vainly, evenly ; uncle, ankle, inkle, angle ; knuckle, Nichol, noddle, 
 nibble, Niblo, noble, enable, novel, anvil, animal ; meekly, muckle, 
 model, medal, meddle, muddle, Mitchel, maple, imply, employ, muz 
 zle, muffle, mainly ; likely, legal, legally, libel, label, lazily, lawful, 
 lively, level, lovely, Longley. lonely ; arable, ireful, arrival, auroral, 
 oracle ; regal, wriggle ; Hackley, haggle, higgle, hopple, huddle ; 
 weakly, weekly, waggle, wiggle, wevil. 
 
 A SIMPLE STEM FOILOWED BY AN EE-HOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 471. Cookery, cougar, copper, caper, keeper, cooper, coffer, calmer ; 
 giver, gainer, gunner, gunnery, gallery ; tawdry, teacher, taper, toper, 
 Tapper, Tabor, tougher, tanner, tenor; ditcher, dodger, dapper, dip- 
 per, Deborah, defray, diver, Dover, dinner, donor ; chowder, chaffer ; 
 Jeffrey, Jethro ; pucker, pauper, piper, paper, pepper, popery, pusher, 
 puffer, paver, pinery, penury ; backer, bakery, bicker, Aboukir, beggar, 
 beggary, betray, battery, buttery, Beecher, butcher, butchery, badger, 
 banner, Abner ; shaker, sugar, shaver, shiver ; Oscar, astray ; thievery ; 
 figure, fibre, foppery, fibber; vicar, vigor, voucher, voyager, viper, 
 vapor, vainer ; anchor, anger, angry ; knocker, Niger, negro, injure, 
 injuiry, neighbor, knavery enamor, nailer, nearer [rer] ; mocker, mock- 
 ery, maker, meagre, major, amber, umber, imbrue, mover, manner, 
 manor, minor, meaner ; lacquer, locker, liquor, lucre, lugger, ultra, 
 ladder, lodger, labor, leper, lubber, leisure, loafer, laugher, lever, 
 liver, livery, Oliver, lunar, lamer ; arbor, armor, archer, archery, 
 erasure ; rogttery, rigor, richer, reaper, robber, rubber, razor, ringer, 
 wringer, wronger, rhymer, roamer, rumor, railer, reeler, rarer [ree-rer\ : 
 Hecker, heifer, hanger, Henry, hammer, horror [er] ; euchre, yoker ', 
 walker, weaker, wicker, watery, wager, wafer, waver, winner. 
 
 IMPEKFEOT HOOKS BETWEEN STEMS. 
 
 § 472. [153] Caudle, cuddle, cudgel, riddle, richly, ripple, Elpley, 
 rebel, rabble ; talker, taker, Tucker, outcry, tiger, tugger, dagger, 
 digger, checker, chopper, cheaper, joker, jigger, jobber, jabber; causa- 
 ble, accusable, gospel, peaceful, peacefully, passively, passover, feasible, 
 visible, visibly, risible, registry. 
 
 § 473. [154] Bushel, facial, official, officially, apishly, rasher, rashly, 
 dasher, initial, initially, piiSher, fissure, fisher, fishery. 
 
 § 474. [155] Curl, curly, pearl, pearly, moral, morally, beryl. Bur- 
 ril, barrel, furl, merely, barely, clearly, Merrill, mural, Tyrol, laurel, 
 gnarl, coial, corally, carle, girl. 
 
PHONOGEAPHIO WEITING EXEECISES. 151 
 
 EXEECISE XIV.— [156-169.] 
 
 SPECIAL VOOAliZATIOIT. 
 
 § 475. [156] Call, coal, cool, core, corps, cure, coursf, coaiae, corse, 
 cur, curse, curst, college, courage, colonel, calomel, colony, colonize, 
 colonist, calumny, collect, correct ; gargle, garner, gurgle, gulf ; tell, 
 till, torpor, terminate ; durst, dear ; cheer, cheerful, charger, Charles, 
 charm, charming, churl, church ; George, germ, germinate, journey, 
 journal, jerli ; appear, portray, partial, partially, parsimony, parsi- 
 monious, parable, paraphrase, purple, persevere, person, engineer, 
 pioneer ; hurst, barber, barbarous ; shawl, shell, share, sure, surest, 
 surety, surer, sureness, sharp, sharper, sharpest, shark ; assail ; Thurs- 
 day, thirst, thirsty ; there, their, theirs ; fill, full, fullest, fullness, 
 follow, fulfill, falsity, falseness, falsifier, philosophy, philosophic, phi- 
 losopher, felicity, figure, forge, forger, forgery, furthest ; very, veri- 
 est, every, vulgar, verb, verbose, verbosity, verbal, averse ; nail, 
 knoll, nullify, nullity, near; nearest, nearness. Nelson, nor, enormous, 
 Normandy, normal, north, anarchy, nerve, nervous, nurse, nour- 
 ish, incur ; mere, more, murmur, marvel, marvelous, mercury ; lurch, 
 lurk, learner, lull ; oral ; real, rail, release, rule, ,recur, recourse ; 
 hall, hail, hale, heel, hell, hill ; yawl, yell, Yale ; wile, waU, well, 
 weal, war, wore, wire, wear, work. 
 
 CIKCLES AND LOOPS PREFIXED TO EL AND EK HOOK SIGNS. 
 
 § 476. [158-162] Cycle, suckle, sickle, sickly, settle, subtle, saddle, 
 sidle, satchel, sagely, supple, supply, sable, Sothel, safely, civil, civilly, 
 small, smile, smell, school ; seeker, sicker, sucker, succor, screw, 
 Seager, straw, stray, strow, strew, satyr, setter, suitor, sadder, cider, 
 solder, cedar, suture, sager, spray, spree, spry, sprew, sapper, supper, 
 sipper, saber, sober. Gibber, seether, soother, safer, cipher, suffer, sal- 
 ver, savor, savory, sever, signer, saner, sinner, sooner, singer ; sus- 
 pire, sister ; stalker, Stocker, stoker, sticker, stagger, stouter, stater, 
 stutter, stitcher, stager, stopper, stupor, stooper, stabber, Stnber, 
 state-room. 
 
 EL AND EB HOOKS AITEK THE ESS-CIRCLE IN THE MIDDLE OF WORDS. 
 
 Is 477. [158] Phthisical, disciple, display, disable, adducible, de- 
 ceiver, destroy, tasker, descry, disagree, passable, possible, peaceable, 
 peacefully, paschal, poisoner, fusible, visible, vestry, vesper, mastery, 
 massacre, masker, useful. [163] Extra, express, extreme, pastry, be- 
 sieger, rostrum. 
 
152 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHKE. 
 
 ■WORDS CONTAINING THE WAT- HOOK. 
 
 § 478. [165, 1G6] Quack, quake, quick, quota, quip, quash, quoth, 
 .^ualm, quail, quell, quill, queer, quarry, query ; quiz, quest, twist, 
 questor, querist ; qualmish, quench, quickly ; quibble, quackery, 
 quaker, quarrel, quaver, quiver, quicker, quiddle ; Quixote, quixotic. 
 Squab, squabby, squall, squally, square, squire, squash, squaw, squeak, 
 squeal, squib, squabble, squalor, squeeze ; bequest, inquest, request, 
 require, inquire, esquire. 
 
 WOHDS COMMENCiNQ WITH THE DI-HOOK. 
 
 § 479. [168, 169] Unscrew, inscribe, unscrupulous, unstrung, in- 
 separable, insuperable, irisatiable, unsociable, uncivil, unsafely, un- 
 ceremonious, unseemly, enslave, insoluble, unsalable. 
 
 EXERCISE XV.— [170-179.] 
 
 WORDS ENDING WITH THE EF-HOOK. 
 
 <; 480. [170, 172] Cough, calf, cave, cove, cuff, Gough, tough, 
 doff, (leaf, duff, ^aff, chafe, chief, Jeff., Jove, pave, puff, buff, beef, 
 rife, arrive, rave, rough, rove, reef, roof ; riffraff ; skiff, scuff, set-off, 
 surf, serf ; cliff, clove, cleave, bluff ; crave, grave, gruff, grieve, 
 greeve, groove, drive, drove, prove, brave, brief, relieve, relief, strife, 
 strove ; starve. 
 
 WORDS OF ONE STEM, ENDING WITH THE EN-HOOK. 
 
 § 481. [176, 178] Can [noun], con, kine, coin, cane, ken, cone, keen, 
 kin, akin, coon ; gone, gown, gain, again, gun ; tan, ton, tine, town, 
 attain, ten, tone, atone, tun, tune; Dan; dawn, don, down, dine, 
 deign, den, Doane, done. Dean, Eden, din ; chine, chain, chin ; John, 
 join, Jane, gin, June ; pan, pawn, upon, pine, opine, pain, pen, pun, 
 open, oppugn; ban, bane, Ben, ebon, bone, bun, bean, been, boon ; 
 shine, ashen, shone, shown, shun, ocean, sheen, shin; assign ; thane, 
 thin, Ethan; tlian, thine, then ; fan, fawn, often, fine, feign, fen. fun; 
 van, Vaughan, Avon, vine, oven, even ; uon. anon, nine, noun, known, 
 none, noon ; man, mine, main, men, amen, moan, omen, moon ; 
 Allen, lawn, line, loin, lane, Ellen, loan, alone, loon ; iron, Aaron, ar- 
 raign ; urn. earn ; ran, Rhine, rain, wren, roan, run ; hen, hone, Hun ; 
 yawn, yon ; wan, wine, wane, wen, one, won, wean, win. 
 
 WODDS OF TWO STEMS, THE LAST ENDING WITH THE BN-HOOK. 
 
 § 482. Cocoon, kitchen, capon, cabin, coffin, canon, Canaan, ca- 
 nine, acumen, colon, Cologne, Koran, Cahoou ; gammon ; taken, to- 
 
PHONOGEAPHIC WEITING EXEECISES. 153 
 
 ken, tighten, outdone, Tappan, ottoman, talon, turn, outrun, tureen ; 
 dea(3on, detain, deaden, dudgeon, deepen, dobbin, domain, demon, de- 
 mean, de laine, oMclcen, Chiapin, cheapen ; jejune, Japan ; Pekin, pa- 
 gan, patten, Patchen, pigeon, pippin, pennon ; bygone, bacon, beckon, 
 heaoon, baton, batten, Baden, button, Bowdoin [pronounced Bod'n], 
 obtain, beaten, bitten, bidden ; beachen ; bobbin, baboon, Buffon, buf- 
 foon, benign, bowman, bemoan, balloon, barn, born, borne, Auburn, 
 bourne, Byron, baron, barren ; shaken, shapen, Sharon ; aspen ; thick- 
 en, thorn, Thome ; fatten, phseton, famine, foeman, felon, feline, 
 foreign ; villain, violin ; noggin, anodyne, enchain, unchain, enjoin, 
 unjoin, Nathan, uneven, unknown, unman ; matin, mutton, madden, 
 maiden, imagine, machine, muffin, mammon, Milan, Milon, malign, 
 marine ; liken, leggin, lagoon, Leyden, Aladdin, laden, leaden, olden, 
 lichen, legion, leaven, eleven, linen, Lyman, laymen, lemon, Elgin ; 
 Oregon, Arragon, Urban, Roman, remain ; reckon, raccoon, regain, 
 rattan, retain, routine, redown, ordain, redden, origin, rejoin, region, 
 rapine, ripen, repine, robin, Reuben, reassign, orphan, refine, roughen, 
 raven, ravine, riven, renown; yeoman, yeomen ; waken, awaken, weak- 
 en, wagon, widen, wooden, weapon, women. 
 
 EXERCISE XVI.— [176-178.] 
 
 WORDS or THKEE STEJIS, THE LAST ENDINQ WITH THE EN-HOOK. 
 
 § 483. Ichneumon, octagon, coachman, Camden, camphine, came- 
 leon ; guillotine ; topman, tinman, automaton, Tarrytowu, terrapin, 
 turban ; Donegan, dungeon, demijohn, dolphin ; Chapman ; Jacobin, 
 Jonathan ; popgun, puncheon, pumpkin, paladin, Puritan, pardon, 
 paragon, penman ; backbone, Abingdon, Babylon, bushman, bumpkin, 
 Bolton, bulletin, Bourbon, baritone, Bergen, bargain ; shopman ; es- 
 cutcheon ; feminine ; Vatican ; Neptune, napkin, unbutton, unbid- 
 den, inborn, unborn, unbegun, environ ; nem. con., unshaken ; Mich- 
 igan, Maiden, marrow-bone, morphine, Marathon, margin, Morgan, 
 monotone, maintain, mundane ; low-born, Lebanon, leviathan, lin- 
 den, London ; Alcoran, Alleghanian ; Armenian, Arcadian ; regimen, 
 re-obtain, Rubicon, re-ordain ; Horioon ; Wakeman. 
 
 WOKDS OF ONE STEM, COMMENOINO WITH A CIKCLB AND ENDINa WITH THB 
 EN-HOOK. 
 
 § 484. Scan, skein, skin ; satin. Stein, Satan, Sutton, stain, stone, 
 stun; sadden, Sidon, sudden, sedian; span, spawn, spine, Spain, spun, 
 spin, spoon, supine ; Sabine ; soften, syphon ; savan, seven ; salmon, 
 Simon, summon, seaman ; slain, saline, Solon, sullen saloon ; se- 
 rene, Syrian, syren ; swan, swine, swain, swoon. Sustain [sis]. 
 
154 THE COMPLETE PIIONOGEAPHEK. 
 
 WORDS OP TWO STEMS, THE FIRST COMMENCING WITH A CIRC;iE, AND THE 
 LAST ENDING WITH THE EN-HOOK. 
 
 § 485 Spoken, spavin, subjoin, sunlcen, sunshine, semitone, smit 
 ten, Solomon, sultan, sloven, sylvan, slacken, silken silicon, seimon 
 surgeon. 
 
 WORDS OF TWO STEMS, WITH MEDIAL CIKOLE AND FINAL EN-HOOK. 
 
 § 486. Keystone, oxygen ; Gascon, Augustine ; Tuscan ; destine, 
 disdain, disjoin, discern ; Jocelyn, jessamine, Josephine ; piston ; Bos- 
 ton, abstain, buskin ; festoon, fustian ; Vesuvlan ; Nazarene ; muslin, 
 Amazonian ; Lisbon ; ursuline ; Euskin ; Haskin ; Weston. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH KEL OR KER SIGNS ENDING WITH THE EN-HOOK. 
 
 § 487. Clan, clown, clean ; glen, glean ; outline ; plan, plain ; 
 blown ; flown. Crown, Akron, crane, crone ; grain, grown, green, 
 grin ; train ; drawn, drown, drain, drone ; chum ; prawn, apron, 
 prune ; bran, brawn, brine, brown, brain ; shrine ; throne ; frown. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH SKEL .OR SKER SIGNS ENDING WITH THE EN-HOOK. 
 
 § 488. Spleen ; screen, strain, strown, strewn, Cedron, sojourn, sprain, 
 southern, saffron, sovereign. Cistern [sis]. 
 
 WORDS WRITFEN WITH A KEL OR KER SIGN, FOLLOWED BY AN EN-HOOK STEM. 
 
 § 489, Cloven, craven ; glutton, gladden, griffin ; triton, trodden, 
 trapan, trepan. Tribune ; dragon, dragoon, Dryden, drayman ; chair- 
 man ; German, juryman ; plowman, platoon, plebeian, pertain, oppor- 
 tune ; blacken, broken, brogan, Brighton, brighten, Britain, Briton, 
 Aberdeen, Brahmin, Breyman, Bremen ; flagon, African ; overdone, 
 overrun ; Norman, Norton ; Mormon ; Herman ; welkin. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH A SIMPLE STEM, FOLLOWED BT A KEL OR KER SIGN 
 ENDING WITH THE EN-HOOK. 
 
 § 490. Kedron, goblin ; outgrown, tavern, decline, Dublin, doubloon, 
 dethrone, chaplain, chaffern ; javelin ; chagrin ; embrown ; unblown, 
 enthrone, enshrine, incline, unclean, uncrown ; recline. 
 
 EXERCISE XVII. - [179-187 .] 
 
 WORDS ENDING WITH STEM-SIGNS INSTEAD OF HOOKS. 
 
 § 491. [179] Coffee, defy, chaffy, puffy, deify, edify, bevy, typify, 
 turfy, gravy ; Ooonee, coney, canoe ; Guinea, Guiana, guano ; tawny, 
 Taney, tiny; Dinah, deny, downy, Dana; China, Cheeney; .Sgina, 
 Oenoa, Jennie, jenny, Jonah, Juno ; Pawnee, penny, pony, puny, 
 
PHONOGEAPHIC WEITING EXERCISES. 155 
 
 Pinney ; bonny, ebony bony, Binney ; shiny ; assignee ; zany ; Fanny, 
 fenny, funny, finny, viny, avenue, veiny, venue ; ninny; manna, 
 money, minnow, Mooney ; Lion, Leon, Lena, luna ; Olney, Illinois, 
 Ulna, Ilion ; Amo, irony, arena ; rhino, Eanney, rainy, renew, Roo- 
 ney ; Hannah, * honey ; Tenni; winnow. Yillainy, mutiny, felony 
 • alimony, ferny, thorny. Skinny, spiny, simony, stony. Briny, cranny, 
 brawny, crony. 
 
 WORDS OF ONE STEM ENDING WITH THE SHUN-HOOK. 
 
 5 492. [180, 182] Caution, action, auction, occasion, cu.shion ; 
 Titian, tuition ; edition, addition ; passion, option, potion ; fashion, 
 fusion, effusion ; evasion, ovation, vision ; unction ; nation, notion ; 
 motion, emotion, mission, emission, omission ; elation, lotion, elision, 
 illusion, elusion, allusion ; erasion, oration, erosion ; ration, Eus- 
 sian ; Hessian. 
 
 WOKDS OP TWO STEMS, THE LAST ENDINO WITH THE SHUN-HOOK. 
 
 § 493. Occupation, caption, coalition, corrosion ; gumption, ignition ; 
 tension, attention, attenuation, tertian ; education, diction, adoption, 
 diffusion, devotion, devision, donation, Domitian, admission, dila- 
 tion, dilution, delusion, adoration, ejection, agitation, Egyptian, junc- 
 tion, gentian ; potation, petition, optician, pension, pollution, por- 
 tion ; obtusion, abolition, abortion, aberration ; ascension, associa- 
 tion ; faction, affection, fiction, function, Phceniciau ; vacation, vocation, 
 avocation, eviction, Venetian, volition, volution, variation ; Inaction, 
 enaction, annexion, negation ; imitation, mutation, mediation, magi- 
 cian, ambition, immersion, mansion, mention, monition, munition, 
 ammunition ; location, election, legation, allegation, libation, eleva- 
 tion, alienation ; eruption, irruption, erection, irrigation, arrogation ; 
 remission, reaction, rogation, rotation, irritation, refashion, revision. 
 
 WORDS OE THREE STEMS, THE LAST ENDINU WITH THE SHUN-HOOK. 
 
 § 494. Cachination, coagulation, cogitation, capitation, cumula- 
 tion ; tactician, temptation ; decoction, dictation, detention, detona- 
 tion, dejection, adaptation, deputation, damnation, diminution ; pop- 
 ulation, partition, perdition ; abjection, abnegation, abomination, 
 obtention ;• assignation, ossification, aspiration ; affectation, fumiga- 
 tion ; vegetation, variegation ; incubation, undulation, infatuation, 
 infection, invitation, navigation, inundation, nomination ; machina- 
 tion, meclianician, imagination, imbibation, manumission ; limitation, 
 locomotion, elimination, elongation ; eructation, rumination ; ordina- 
 tion, rejection, repetition, repudiation, reapportion, refutation, revo- 
 cation. 
 
156 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE, 
 
 WORDS OP TWO STEMS, THE PIBST EKDING WITH THE E8S-C BOLE, AND THB 
 LAST WITH THB SHUN-HOOK. 
 
 § 495. Exaction, execution, excitation, oxydation, exudation, ex 
 piation, exception ; attestation ; discussion, dissection, dispassioji, 
 dissipation, deception, dissension, decimation, dismission, desolation, ■ 
 dissolution, desertion ; gestation; absolution, bisection ; assassination, 
 fascination, visitation, vacillation, vastation ;inception, insertion, in- 
 sinuation ; elucidation, laceration, ulceration ; recitation, reception, 
 resolution ; hesitation. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH KEL OB KER SIGNS ENDING WITH THE SHUN-HOOK. 
 
 § 496. Collision, appellation, oblation, ablution, afflation ; creation, 
 accretion, aggression, Grecian, iteration, attrition, duration, derision, 
 operation, oppression, Prussian, apparition, abrasion, freshen, frui- 
 tion, version, aversion. 
 
 WORDS OP ONE STEM WRITTEN WITH INITIAL CIRCLE AND FINAL SHUN-HOOK. 
 
 § 497. Section, suction, citation, situation, suffusion, sanction ; se- 
 clusion, secretion, saturation, separation, suppression ; suspicion. 
 
 WORDS ENDING WITH THE ISHUN-HOOK. 
 
 § 498 [187] Causation, accession, accusation, excision ; decision ; 
 position, opposition, possession, apposition ; abscission ; cessation ; 
 physician ; recession. Proposition, preposition, pulsation, sensation, 
 acquisition, inquisition, perquisition, disquisition, deposition, reposi- 
 tion, imposition, supposition, disposition, indisposition, transposition, 
 exposition, succession, procession. 
 
 EXERCISE XVin.— [188-200.] 
 
 WORDS ENDING WITH THE TKR-HOOK. 
 
 § 499. [188] Actor, cater, gather, gether, gutter, tatter, tetter, tit- 
 ter, tutor, t'other, daughter, doubter, debtor, chatter, patter, potter, 
 pother, pewter, batter, better, bitter, butter, writer, rather ; scatter, 
 sector, spatter, sputter, sceptre, spitter, starter ; clatter, clutter, glit- 
 ter, idolater, platter, bladder, relator, relator ; creator. Trotter, char- 
 ter, prater, pretor, barter, breather, brother ; strutter, Streetcr. 
 
 ESS-OIROLE ADDED TO FINAL HOOKS. 
 
 § 500. [192] Calves, coughs, caves, gaffs, dives, panes, pufis, bufEs, 
 beeves, rives, arrives, roves, raves, reeves, roofs ; shines, shuns, shins, 
 assigns, thins, thanes, Athens, thence, fans, fawns, fines, fence, of- 
 fence, fins, vines, veins, ovens, evince, nouns, nuns, mans, mines. 
 
PITONOGEAPHIO WEITING EXEECISES. 157 
 
 moans, immense, mince, lance, lines, loins, lanes, lens, loans ;eana, 
 loons, earns, arraigns, hence, hens, yawns, wines, once, wins ; ai.tions, 
 auctions, cautions, occasions, cushions, additions, editions, passions, 
 patience, potions, fasHoLi, fusions, eflfusious, nations, notions, mo- 
 tions, emotions, missions, omissions, emissi'ons, lotions, allusions, illu- 
 sions, erasions, orations, rations, Hessians ; actors, caters, gathers, 
 daughters, chatters, writers, sputters, glitters, charters, barters. Oo 
 cupatibns, captions, petitions, opticians, portions. 
 
 CIRCLES AND LOOPS ADDED TO THE STRAIGHT EN-HOOK SIGNS. 
 
 § 501. [193] Cans, cons, canes, kens, cones, coons ; gowns, gains, 
 guns ; tans, tines, towns, attains, tense, tens, tones, atones, tons, 
 tunes ; dance, dines, downs, dawns, dons, Danes, deigns, dense, dens, 
 dunce, duns, deans, dins ; chance, chains, chins ; joins ; pans, pawns, 
 pines, pounce, pains, pence, pens, opens, puns ; bans, bounce, bones, 
 buns, beans, bins, boons ; rounce, rains, runs, rinse. Kansas, tenses, 
 dances, dunces, chances, pounces, bounces. Canst, against, danced, 
 chanced, pounced, bounced, rounced, rinsed. Canister, punster. 
 
 WORDS IN WHICH THE ESS-CIROLE MAT BE USED FOR ENS. 
 
 § 502. [196] Transpose, transpire, transfuse, transfer, transfix, trans- 
 verse, transmutation, transmission, transalpine, Transylvania, translu- 
 cid, translation, transaction, transgress, Pennsylvania, chancel, chan- 
 cellor, chancery, council. In the following words the ens may be fully 
 expressed : dancing, prancing, trouncing. 
 
 WORDS IN WHICH THE ESS-CIRCLE IS JOINED TO ISHDN. 
 
 § 503. [198] Accessions, accusations, decisions, positions, posses- 
 sions, abscissions, physicians ; transitions. 
 
 WORDS IN WHICH THE FINAL HOOKS ARE USED MEDIALLY. 
 
 § 504. [199] Cover ; toughen ; divine, Devine, advance, defame , 
 chafing ; river ; Canary, conic ; gainsay ; tanning, attaining, toning, 
 tinning, tuning, attuning ; Downing, dawning, dining, deigning, 
 dinning ; paunch, punch, pinch, punish, pawning, pining, pain- 
 ing, penning, opening, punning, oppugning ; shining, shunning, 
 shinning ; assigning ; thinning ; fanning, fawning, fining, feigning, 
 finish ; vanish, evening ; Monroe, manure ; earning, ironing ; run 
 ning, raining ; yawning ; waning, winning. Occupancy, cabin-boy, 
 cadenza ; tokening, tightened, tightening, toughening, turnkey, 
 turning ; detaining, deadening, deepening, darning, adorning ; cheap- 
 ening ; japanning ; piquancy, paganish, potency, poppinjay, opulency ; 
 beckoning, battening, buttoning, obtaining, bemoaning ; thickening ; 
 
158 , THE COMPLETE PHOKOGEA PHEE. 
 
 vacancy ; envenom ; maligning ; laconic, likening, leavening ; reck 
 oning, recoining, reddening, rejoining, repining, ripening, refining, 
 rougliening, ravening ; awakening. Trench, training ; drowning, 
 draining, drainage, dronish, drench ; planet, planning, plenty, plaining, 
 plunge ; Blanche blanch, blench, branch, brownish, braining ; frenzy, 
 frowning, furnish ; aclionary, cautionary, auctioneer, cautioning, oc- 
 casional, occasionally, occasioning ; additional, additionally ; optional ; 
 fashioning ; visionary ; national, nationally, notional ; emotional, mis- 
 sionary, motioning ; rational, rationally ; provisional, professional, 
 progression^l, irrational, fractional, traditional, preventional. Pro- 
 cessional, positional, " prepositional. Catering, caterer ; gathering, 
 gatherer, pattering, battering, sputterer ; rhetoric. 
 
 EXERCISE XIX,— [201-210.] 
 
 WOEDS OF ONE STKM WKITTEN DOtTBLE-LENGTH. 
 
 § 505. [201-210] Shatter, shutter, shooter, shudder ; Astor, oyster, 
 Esther, Easter ; theatre ; thither ; fatter, fighter, after, father, fod- 
 der, fetter, feather, feature, future, fitter ; voter ; entire, anther, 
 nitre, neither, nether, nature ; matter, mitre, mutter, mother ; latter, 
 lighter, altar, loiter, later, letter, leader, leather, Luther ; Arthur, 
 order, orator ; hatter, hater, hitter, hither ; water, wider, waiter, 
 wetter, wither. 
 
 WOBDS OF TWO STEMS, THE FIEST WRITTEN DOUBLE-LENGTH. 
 
 § 506. Easter-day, fathered, feathered, federal, futurity, natural, 
 entirely, motherly, material, latterly, altering, loitering, orderly, 
 hitherto, watering, withering. 
 
 WORDS OP TWO STEMS, THE LAST W KITTEN DOUBLE-LENGTH. 
 
 § 507. Catheter ; tender, tempter, tartar, tincture ; diameter, di- 
 luter ; chanter ; janitor, gender, jointure, juncture ; panther, punc- 
 ture ; bolter, falter, filter, thunder ; innovator, invader ; monitor, 
 miniature ; laughter, ill-nature ; rafter. 
 
 WORDS 01? ONE DOUBLE-LENGTH STEM, WITH INITIAL ESS-CIRCLES. 
 
 § 508. Softer, sifter, saunter, centre, senator, sunder, smatter, smoth- 
 er, Sumter, soimeter, smoother, psalter, soldier, saluter, Sartor, sweeter. 
 
 WORDS OV ONE DOUBLE-LENGTH STEM, WPTH AN INITIAL EL OR ER HOOK. 
 
 § 509. Shoulder, shorter, assaulter, assorter, asserter ; flatter, flut- 
 ter, flitter, fritter ; verdure ; narrator ; moulder, martyr ; larder , 
 halter, holder ; Walter, wilder, welter. 
 
PHONOGEAPHIC WEITtNG EXEECISES. , 159 
 
 WORDS EHDINQ WITH DOUBLE-LISNQTH STEMS, HAVING FINAL HOOK, OIKCLE, 
 OK LOOP. 
 
 § 510. [208] Founder, thunder, asunder, wonder, yonder, hinder, 
 Blender, flounder, iuveutor ; [209] matters, oysters, mothers, cylinders, 
 assenters, wanders. 
 
 EXERCISE XX.— [212-220] 
 
 WORDS OF ONE SIMPLE STEM WRITTEN HALP-LEKOTB. 
 
 § 511. [212-218] Act, cat, caught, cot, cawed, cod. Kite, coit, 
 cowed, Kate, Cade, ached, coat, code, cut, cud, keyed, eked, kit, kid, 
 coot, cooed, cute ; gad, got, God, gout, gate, get, egged, goat, goad, 
 gut, good ; tat, taught, Todd, tight, tide, toyed, tote, towed, tut, 
 teat, tit, toot ; dad, dot, Dodd, died, doit, doubt, date, debt, dead, 
 dote, deed, did, dewed ; chat, Choate, cheat, chit, itched, chewed ; jot, 
 aged, jet, jut ; pat, apt, pot, pout, pate, aped, pet, peat, pit, put ; bat, 
 abbot, bought, bot, bite, about, bate, abate, bet, abet, boat, obit, beat, 
 beet, bit, boot, Bute ; shad, shot, shod, shied, shout, shade, shed, 
 shoat, showed, shut, sheet, shoot ; iced, oust, east ; eased, oozed ; 
 thought, thawed ; fat, aft, fought, oft, fight, fate, fade, fed, feet, feed, 
 fit, foot, food, afoot, feud ; vat, vied, vowed, void, vote, viewed ; gnat, 
 aunt, naught, gnawed, not, knot, nod, night, knout, neighed, net, 
 end, note, node, nut, neat, need, nit ; mat, mad, might, Mott, mate, 
 made, aimed, met, mote, mode, mud, meat, mead, mit, mid, moot, 
 mood, mute, mewed ; lad, light, lot, loud, lout, late, laid, ailed, led, 
 load, old, leet, lit, lead, lid, lute; art, aired, erred, arrayed; rat, rot, 
 right, rout, write, wrought, rate, rote, wrote, rut, writ, root ; hat, hot, 
 hight, Hoyt, hate, hut, heat, heed, hit, hid, hoot, hood, hewed ; 
 yacht; wight, wide, wait, weight, wade, weighed, wet, wed, weed, 
 wit, wood. 
 
 WORDS OF TWO STEMS, THE SECOND WRITTEN HALF-LENGTH. 
 
 § 512. [220] Kited, cadet, catched, couched, caged, capped, copied, 
 occupied, caput, kept, coped, cupped, cooped, Cupid, cubit, Ichabod, 
 cashed, Connaught, aconite, calmed, camped, comet, coiled, combed ; 
 guided, goaded, gouged, guaged, gashed, gushed, ignite, gamut, 
 gamed, gummed, go-ahead ; tacked, tact, attacked, tagged, talked, 
 tucked, tugged, ticket, ticked, attached, 'touched, two-edged, tap- 
 ped, topped, Thibet, tepid, tipped, tippet, outbid, toothed, tithed, 
 teethed, timed, tamed, teamed, timid ; docked, dockel., dyked, 
 decked, duct, ducat, educate, edict, dogged, digged, ditched, dodged, 
 digit, adapt, adopt, dabbed, daubed, adept, debate, dubbed, dipped, 
 depute, duped, dashed, dished, dammed, damned, admit, deemed, 
 
ICO THE COMPLETE PnONOGEAPHER. 
 
 doomed, deliglit, dilate, dealt, dolt, adult, dilute, dulled, doled, 
 dart, adored, dirt ; chalked, checked, choked, chatted, cheated, 
 chided, chapped chopped, chipped, chimed, champed ; jacket, jock- 
 eyed, joked, eject, jagged, jogged, jotted, agitate, jutted, jaded. 
 Egypt, gibbet, jobbed, gibed, giant, agent, jammed ; packed, 
 packet, pecked, poked, piqued, picked, Pict, appetite, patted, 
 potted, padded, pated, petted, petit, pitted, pitied, putid, patched, 
 poached, pitched, paged, upshot, pushed, epithet, pivot; hacked, 
 balked, baked, bucked, bucket, beaked, booked, bagged, bog- 
 ged, be^t, begged, beget, bigot, batted, betide, bitted, bodied, 
 bated, baited, abated, abetted, ebb-tide, bedded, boded, budded, 
 beaded, bedewed, botched, beached, budged, budget, abashed, bow- 
 shot, bethought, bathed, buffet, befit, banged, bunged, beamed, 
 boomed, behead ; shocked, shucked, shotted, shouted, shadowed, 
 shaded, shopped, shaped, shipped, sheathed, shaft, shift, shaved, 
 shoved, sheaved, shammed, Ashmead, shamed, ashamed ; asked, oust- 
 ed, estate, astute, escheat, espied, ice-boat, associate, assumed ; thicket, 
 thatched, theft ; fatted, fated, fetid, fitted, footed, faded, fetched, 
 fidget, fobbed, fibbed, officiate, fanged, famed, fumed ; avoided, 
 evaded, voted, vetoed, vapid, vitiate, vivid ; enact, uncaught, knock- 
 ed, naked, uncut, nicked, untaught, untied, knotted, noted, netted, 
 nodded, endowed, unaided, ended, needed, indeed, undid, endued, 
 notched, enjoyed, unapt, nipped, nabbed, nibbed, gnashed, initiate, 
 nauseate, unthawed, unfit, invite, unavowed, invade, envied, unau- 
 noyed, innate, unknit, unmade, inmate, unweighed '; ingot ; mocked, 
 maggot, matted, mated, emptied, meted, imitate, emitted, omitted, 
 mooted, matched, imaged, mapped, mopped, moped, mobbed, imbued, 
 mashed, emaciate, methought, method, mouthed, Moffatt, moved, 
 maimed ; lighted, allotted, alighted, elated, lauded, elided, laded, 
 leaded, loaded, latched, latohet, lodged, alleged, lapped, lappet, eloped, 
 looped, elbowed, lathed, Joathed, laughed, loft, aloft, elevate, left, 
 leafed, lift, laved, levied, loved, leaved, lived, longed, linnet, alien- 
 ate, alamode, lamed, limit, lolled, lulled ; erect, arrogate, argued, or- 
 bit, Orient, armed, rammed, rhymed, remote, roamed, remit, rimmed, 
 Ararat ; react, racked, racket, rocked, rocket, raked, wrecked, ragged, 
 rugged, air-tight, righted, rotted, routed, rated, rotate, rooted, arched, 
 wretched, reached, rigid, urged, rapped, wrapped, rapid, repaid, re- 
 peat, reaped, ripped, repute, rabbet, robbed, rabid, rebate, rebut, 
 robed, rubbed, ribbed, rushed, earthed, wreathed, writhed, refit, re- 
 fute, rivet, reviewed, wronged, ruuuet, renewed, roiled ; hacked, 
 Ilaokett, hawked, hooked, hated, heated, hooted, headed, hatched, 
 bitched, liedged, hashed, hushed, hummed, hemmed ; yoked ; walked, 
 waked, awaked, wicket, wicked. 
 
PHONOGEAPHIO "WEITING ■EXEEOISES. 161 
 
 EXERCISE XXI.— [212- -220.] 
 
 W0ED3 or TWO STEMS, THE EIEST WKITTEN HALF-LENGTH. 
 
 § 513. [220] Cottage, codify, octave, octavo, active, acting, c( uting, 
 cutting, cotton, kidney, academy, actual, actually, cattle, kettle, 
 acutely, actuary ; gadding, guiding, getting, gotten, godly, goodly ; 
 idiotic, detach, dotage, detail, auditor, auditory, editor, detour; 
 Chatham, chiding ; jading, edge-tools ; optic, paddoclc, poetic, po- 
 tato, pottage, potash, pettish, epitaph, epitome, aptly ,^atly ; be- 
 take, bedeck, betook, beautify, bottom, bedim, badly, bodily ; ascetic, 
 acidity, asoetify, ousting, esteem ; azotic ; footboy, fattish, fetich [sh], 
 fatal, fatally, fitly, futile, fatting, fighting, feeding, fitting, footing ; 
 avidity, avoiding, evading, voting, vital, vitally, victual ; antic, an- 
 tique, untidy, entity, night-dew, notify, native, Anthony, knot- 
 ting, knighting, omitting, noting, netting, nutting, knitting ; mat- 
 tock, emetic, midday, modish, amative, motive, modify, madam, 
 medium, motley, metal, medley ; lighten, lighting, letting, lightly, 
 lately, little, lottery ; erratic, oratory, oratorio, retire, rotary ; 
 retake, retouch, ratjfy, rotten, written, retina, retinue, rotting, 
 writing, routing, rating, rooting ; headache ; waiting, wedding, wet- 
 ting, wettish. 
 
 WORDS OF THREE STEMS, THE LAST WRITTEN HALF-LENGTH. 
 
 § 514. [220] Coacted, cockpit, cock-fight, cocoanut, coagulate, cogi- 
 tate, cajoled, copyright, cabbaged, coveted, accumulate, corroded ; 
 goblet, gifted, gimlet, gilded, ignited ; ticketed, typified, tongue-tied, 
 tenant, tomtit, tumult, Talbot, tilted, torjiid, turbot, tarbid ; docketed, 
 dictate, addicted, deject, depict, adapted, adopted, deputed, debated, 
 debited, deathbed, denoted, demi-god, admitted, damaged, admired, 
 demerit, demurred, delighted, dilated, diluted, deluded, deluged, 
 delved, darted, derided, dirtied, derogate ; checkmate, chanted ; 
 jackboot, Jacobite, jointed, jolly-boat, jolted, jilted ; pocketed, pick- 
 eted, populate, punctuate, piloted, pulpit, polluted, pillaged, pirated, 
 paraded, uprooted, perched, parachute, parapet, purified, pervade, per- 
 ished ; backbite, becalmed, bigoted, Bagdad, bedaubed, object, buffet- 
 ed, befitted, obviated, abnegate, benighted, bonneted, bayoneted, 
 balloted, belched, barked, barbed, berated, bearded, boarded, bar- 
 onet, barefoot : shipmate, shifted ; escapade, escaped, escalade, as- 
 pect, aspired, associated, assimilate ; affected, effected, fatigued, offi- 
 ciated, fathomed, fainted, finitude, founded, offended, funded, folded, 
 filched, forded, afforded, ferry-boat, forebode, forethought, forfeit, 
 forefoot, fervid, farmed ; evacuated, vacated, vegetate, vitiated, vivi 
 
162 THE COMPLETE PHOITOGEAPHEE. 
 
 ficd, vaunted, vented, vaulted, -valved, evolved, vilified, velvet, va 
 riegate, verified ; enacted, anecdote, uncaged, engaged, inoculate, 
 unpacked, neap-tide, unpitied, unpolite, unappalled, Newport, un- 
 baked, unbegot, unabated, unabetted, unshocked, unsheathed, unfitted, 
 unfaded, unfelt, unfold, enfold, invited, innovated, invaded, unavoided, 
 inviolate, invalid, unveiled, novitiate, unenvied, anointed, unen- 
 dowed, unenjoyed, unmoved, animated, Nimrod, unmatched, un- 
 asked, unarmed ; machinate, magnate, magnet, embodied, imbedded, 
 embalmed, ambulate, emaciated, mandate, minded, emanated, mended, 
 amended, managed, eminent, imminent, mimicked, malted, melted, 
 moulded, mildewed ; market, marked, merited, marched, merged ; 
 elected, located, alphabet, lifeboat, ill-fated, lifted, elevated, alleviated, 
 lavished, elongate, long-boat, landed, launched, alienated, alarmed; 
 erected, eructate, arrogated, irrigated, armpit, rhomboid, removed, 
 remitted, remedied, armlet, rummaged ; reacted, recheated, rechecked, 
 reject, repeated, reputed, repelled, repealed, report, repaired, rebated, 
 rebutted, refitted, refuted, roughshod, ravaged, revived, ravished, re- 
 viled, rented, renovate, rounded, ranged, wrenched, rarefied ; hack- 
 nied. Huguenot, hinged, haunted, hunted, hinted, handed, Hamlet, 
 halibut, horrified, horded, hornet ; warded, awarded, worded. 
 
 W0ED3 OF THREE STEMS, THE FIRST WRITTEN HALF-LENGTH. 
 
 § 515. [220] Caoutchouc, catfish, actively, cat-nap, catnip, kidnap, 
 academic, catalogue ; godlike, goodfellow ; tutelage, tutelar ; detach- 
 ing, detailing, pedagogue, pettifog, Potomac, epidemic, petrify, pu- 
 trefy; bedecking, bedtime, bootjack, bedimming, bedlam, butler, 
 bedroom ; obduracy ; esteeming, austerity, ostrich ; footpath, fetlock, 
 fattening ; nightcap, notebook, notifying, nativity, nettling, indict- 
 ing, undoubting ; madcap, modicum, midship, modifying, modeling, 
 meddling, middling, Matilda ; literati, lightning, lightening ; artil- 
 lery ; retaking, ruta-baga, retouching, ratifier, ratifying, rattling, re- 
 tailing, rotunda ; headlong ; woodchuok, Woodbury, wedding-day, 
 wedlock. 
 
 EXERCISE XXn.— [212-220.] 
 
 WORDS OP THREE STEMS, THE SECOND WRITTEN HALF-LENGTH. 
 
 § 516. [220] Captive, capital, capitally, cupidity, coveting, col- 
 lating I igniting ; talkative, ticketing, tepidity, timidity, timidly, 
 iterative, iterating ; addicting, dictum, dactyl, ductile, doggedly, 
 adoptive, delighting, dilating, diluting. Doolittle, dilatory, darting, 
 dirting ; ejecting, genitive, gentle, gently, jolting, jilting ; pocketing, 
 picketing, pomatum, piloting, pelting, polluting, palatal, politely, 
 palliative, appellative, portico, portage, partiup;, pirating, uproot'ug ; 
 
PHONOGEAPHIC ■WEITIlir& EXKECISES. 163 
 
 begotten, 'begetting, buffeting, befitting, obviating, ablative, ballot- 
 ing, bolting, belting, billeting, belittle, abortive ; shifting, shemitio, 
 Chantilly ; associating, asafoetida, asthmatic, oscillating ; officiating, 
 fiftieth, fanatic, phonetic, fumatory, affiliating, furtive, fortuity ; van 
 tage, vintage, vitiating, vividly. Vandal, vaulting, violating ; inactive, 
 enactive, enacting, inaptly, nauseating, initiating, initiatory, infatu 
 ate, unfading, unfitting, infidel, inviting, invading ; emaciating, emu- 
 lative, emulating, melting, mortal, mortally, myrtle ; elliptic, lift- 
 ing, elevating, alleviating, lunatic, alienating ; archetype, erecting, 
 erefctly, arrogating, eruptive, remotely, aromatic, rheumatic, ornately, 
 oriental, ornating ; reacting, racketing, rectify, reactive, ruggedly, 
 rapidity, rapidly, refitting, refuting ; hecatomb ; wickedly. 
 
 WOKDS OF FOnK STEMS, THE LAST WEITTEN HALF-LENGTH. 
 
 § 517. [220] Coagulated ; tabulated, talented, turpitude, torch- 
 light ; decocted, decapitate, dejected, depopulate, depicted, demerited, 
 demanded, demented, dominant, admonished, diminished, dilapidate, 
 delineated, deranged, derogated ; checkmated ; pickpocket, poet-lau- 
 reate, populated, uplifted, purport ; abnegated, Benedict, abominated, 
 balconied, barbecued ; shipwrecked ; fomented, effeminated, fumi- 
 gated, fire-bucket ; variegated ; unattempted, intimated, inducted, in- 
 durated, enchanted, injected, unpolluted, unpurified, unbeloved, un- 
 bolted, unbarbed, unbearded, unfatigued, unfathomed, enfiladed, in- 
 furiated, unfounded, unoffended, inviolated, invalidate, invented, 
 unavenged, navigated, uuembalmed, uuembodied, unmerited, New 
 Market, vinmarked, nnentombed, unengaged ; manifold, milkmaid, 
 manipulate ; Lockport, litigated, eliminated, lamented ; remanded, re- 
 minded, ruminated, remnant ; reported. 
 
 WORDS OF FOUR STEMS, THE FIRST WRITTEN HALF-LENGTH. 
 
 § 518. [220] Kidnapping ; didactic, dedicatory ; opodeldoc, petri- 
 fying, paternity ; bed-wrench ; photologic ; unadjudged, indignity ; 
 metallurgy. 
 
 WORDS OF FOUR STEMS, THE THIRD WRITTEN HALF-LENGTH. 
 
 § 519. [220] Cock-fighting, cumulative, accumulative, accumulating, 
 coagulating ; tabulating, torpidity, turbidity, turgidity ; depicting, 
 dogmatic, daguerreotype, delineating, demeriting ; populating, epi- 
 leptic ; abruptly, barricading, abnegating ; factotum ; variegating ; 
 inductive, undulating, unpolitely, injecting ; ambulating, market- 
 ing, market-day ; alphabetic ; rejecting, arithmetic, repeatedly, re- 
 putedly, reporting. 
 
164 THE COMPLETE PHONOGBAPHEE. 
 
 WOBDS WKTirrEN WITH TWO HALF-LENGTH STEMS. 
 
 § 520. [220] Cottaged, cutlet ; godhead ; dedicate, deduct, detect, 
 detached, deadlight, deadhead ; adjudicate, agitated ; petticoat. Paw- 
 tucket ; abdicate, abduct, bedecked, beatitude, beautified, bottomed, 
 bedimmed, obdurate, bedrid ; estated, ascetified, astound, estimate, 
 esteemed ; footpad, affidavit ; evident, victualed ; intact, unattacked, 
 antedate, antidote, nightshade, notified, intimate, intent, intend, in- 
 tonate, entailed, untold, nettled ; medicate, meditate, mediated, mod- 
 ified, midnight, modulate, moderate ;• ultimate, latitude, lightfoot, 
 lightened, literate ; eradicate, retort, retard, retired ; reattacked, re- 
 touched, ratified ; hot-head, hotbed ; woodcut. 
 
 WORDS OP THREE STEMS, THE FIKST TWO WRITTEN HALF-LENGTH. 
 
 § 521. [220] Titillating ; dedicating, detecting ; abdicating, obdu- 
 rating, obdurately ; astounding ; evidently ; indicative, indicatory, 
 indicating, individual, intending, intently, intimately ; medicating, 
 mitigative, mitigating, mutilating, modulating, moderating ; ulti- 
 matum, ultimately ; retaliating, retaliative, retaliatory. 
 
 WORDS or THREE STEMS, THE LAST TWO WRITTEN HALF-LEKO IH. « 
 
 § 522. [220] Cogitated, capitulate ; gelatinate ; packet-boat, por- 
 tent, portend ; abjudicate, obliterate ; inaptitude, unindebted, inun- 
 dated, Nantucket ; >martinet ; legitimate ; rectitude, rectified, re- 
 pudiated. 
 
 WORDS OP THREE STEMS, THE FIRST AND LAST WRITTEN HALF-LEXGTH. 
 
 § 523. [220] Kidnapped ; dedicated, detected, dead-lift j petrified, 
 putrefied ; abdicated, abducted, obdurated, bedlamite ; estimated, as- 
 tounded, astonished ; indicated, imadapted, unadopted, intended, un- 
 tinged, undefiled, indelicate ; medicated, mitigated, modulated, mu- 
 tilated ; eradicated, retorted, retarded ; retaliated. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIIt.— [212-220.] 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH A HALF-LENGTH STEM WITH AN INITIAL ESS-CIRCLE. 
 
 § 524. Sacked, scat, scout, Scott, skate, sect, soaked, sucked, scud ; 
 sagged ; cited, sighted, sated, seated, suited ; sodded, sided, sedate, 
 ceded ; spat, sapped, spout, spot, spite, spade, sped, spued, spit, sipped ; 
 sobbed ; satiate ; seized, sized ; seethed, soothed ; soft, sift ; salved, 
 saved, civet ; signed, sand, sound, snout, sonnet, saint, sent, scent, 
 snowed, sunned, sinned, synod ; smite, emote, smut, summit, summed, 
 seemed ; slat, salt, slight, slide, soiled, slate, Celt, slut, slayed, sled, 
 
PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 165 
 
 Bold, sleet, slit, sealed ; sort, soured, sired, sword, surd, seared ; sweat, 
 sweet, swad, swayed, Swede. 
 
 WOKDS WRITTEN WITH A HALF-IENGTH STEM WITH A riNAL ESS-CIBCLB. 
 
 §525. [218] Acts, cats, cots, coats, coots; gads, gates, gets, goats, 
 goods ; tights, tides ; dots, doubts, dates, debts, deeds ; chats, chits ; 
 jots, juts ; pats, pots, pates, pits, puts ; bats, bites, bates, boats, 
 beats, boots ; shads, shouts, shoots ; ousts, assets ; thoughts ; fights, 
 fates, fades, feeds, fits, feuds ; voids, avoids, evades, votes ; gnats, 
 nights, nods, nets, ends, notes, nodes ; mats, mates, meats, moods ; 
 lads, lights, lots, lets, lauds, loads, leads ; arts ; rats, rates, roots, 
 writs ; hats, bights, hates, heads, heeds, hits, hoots ; yachts ; Watts, 
 .■waits, wades, wets, weds, weeds, wits, woods. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH A HAlr-LENGTH STEM WITH INITIAL AND FINAli 
 
 ESS-CIECLE. 
 
 § 526. [218] Scouts, skates, sects, scuds, spats, spots, spouts, spites, 
 spades, speeds, spits, satiates, sifts, sands, sounds, snouts, sonnets, saints, 
 scents, smites, smuts, summits, slats, salts, slights, slides, slates, sleds, 
 sleets, sorts, swords, surds, sweats, sweets, Swedes. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH A HAIT-IBNGTH STEM WITH INITIAL SI-LOOP. 
 
 § 527. Stacked, stalked, stocked, staked ; statute, stated ; studded, 
 studied ; stitched ; stopped, stepped, steeped, stooped ; stabbed, stub- 
 bed ; stuffed ; staved, stoved ; stemmed, steamed ; stalled, styled, 
 stilt, steeled, stilled ; start, starred, stared, stored, stirred, steered. 
 
 WORDS OE TWO STEMS, THE FIRST HALF-LENGTH, AND THE SECOND WITH 
 FINAL ESS- CIRCLE. 
 
 § 528. [220] Acuteness, Cadmus, cutlass ; godless, goodness ; tit- 
 mouse ; judicious ; Patmos, optimus, epitomize ; thoughtless ; foot- 
 pace, fatness, fitness ; intense, neatness, endless, needless, meat-ax, 
 madhouse ; lightness, lateness ; artless, retires, Artemus ; artifice 
 writings ; headless, heedless ; utilize ; wattles, wideness, weightiness, 
 •wetness, witness, wittiness. 
 
 WORDS OF TWO STEMS, THE SECOND HALF-LENGTH, AND THE FIRST WITH 
 INITIAL ESS-CIRCLE. 
 
 § 529. [220] Scouted, skated, scotched, sketched, scaped, skipped,*' 
 scooped, scathed, succumbed, schemed, skimmed ; Cygnet ; spiked, 
 spatted, spotted, spited, spouted, spaded, speeded ; subdued, submit j 
 satiated ; sifted ; snaked, sneaked, snagged, sainted, sanded, sounded, 
 snatched, singed, snappedj snipped, snubbed, snuffed, sniffed ; smack- 
 
166 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 ed, smoked, smutted, smashed, smoothea , Blighted, salted, solitude, 
 slated, saluted, slouched, slapped, slopped, sloped, slept, slipped, 
 solved, slammed ; circuit, surrogate ; sorted, surtout, sordid, searched, 
 surged, surfeit, surveyed, serenade ; swept, swabbed, swathed, swashed. 
 
 W0BD3 OF TWO STEMS, WITH MEDIAI ESS-CIROLB, AND SECOND STEM 
 HALF-LENGTH. 
 
 § 530. [220] Casket, cascade, execute, accosted, excited, coasted, 
 exceeded, accept, except, accent, cozened, castled, excelled ; exact, 
 gazetted, gasped, exiled, exalt, exult, gaslight, exhort, exert ; tasked, 
 tusked, tasted, tested, attested, testate, toasted, tasseled ; dissect, 
 dusted, decided, despite, despot, dissipate, dispute, disobeyed, diseased, 
 disavowed, deceived, designed, descend, disowned, decent, dismayed, 
 decimate, desolate, dissolute, desired, desert, disarrayed, dissuade ; 
 chastened, chestnut, chiseled ; jested, jostled ; apostate, pasted, posted, 
 pacified, poisoned, peasant ; basked, basket, bisect, biscuit, besotted, 
 basted, boasted, bestowed, Jiestud, beseeched, besieged, absent, abscind, 
 obsolete, absurd ; assassinate, assisted ; thousand ; fasted, foisted, 
 feasted, fisted, phosphate, fascinate, fastened, pheasant ; vested, vis- 
 ited, vacillate, viscerate, eviscerate ; insect, incited, unsated, instead, 
 unseated, unsuited, insipid, insatiate, unsift, unsaved, unsigned, un- 
 sound, unsent, innocent, insinuate, nestled, insert ; Muscat, musket, 
 misguide, mistaught, misdate, misdeed, messmate, macerate ; lasted, 
 lassitude, elicited, elucidate, lisped, lessened, listened, loosened, lace- 
 rate, ulcerate ; arrested, resumed ; rescued, risked, recited, restate, 
 rested, rusted, receipted, receded, rasped, respite, rosebud, received, re- 
 signed, resound, resent, recent, rescind, reasoned, resolute, result, 
 wrestled, resort ; husked, hoisted, hasted, hesitate, housemaid ; 
 wasted, wizard. 
 
 WOKDS OF TWO STEMS, THE FIEST HALF-LENGTH WITH INITIAL ESS-OIRCLB. 
 
 § 531. [220] Scottish, succotash, skittish, scouting, skating, scud- 
 ding ; speedily, spittle ; satiating ; sifting, softly ; Santiago, cenotaph, 
 Santa F^, sounding, sending, soundly, saintly ; sometime, symptom, 
 cemetery ; salting,.slighting, saluting, sultana, slightly, psaltery, sol- 
 itary, salutary ; sorting ; sweating, sweetly. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIV.— [212-220.] 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH ONE HALF-LENGin EL-UOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 532. Clad, clawed, clot, clod, Clyde, clout, cloud, clewed ; glad, 
 glide, glade, gloat, glowed, glut, ogled, glued ; addled, idled ; plat, 
 plaid, applaud, plot, plod, plight, plied, applied, ploughed, plate, 
 played, plead ; blot, blight, blade, bled, bloat blood, bleat bleed ; 
 
PHONOGEAPHIO ■WEiriNG EXERCISES. 167 
 
 assault, assailed ; flat, flawed, flight, flout, flayed, fled, float, ijowed, 
 flood, fleet, flit, flute ; unlade, unload, inlaid, inlet ; malt, mailed, 
 melt, omelet ; relied, relate, ruled ; halt, hailed, held, hold, heeled ; 
 yelled, yield ; wild, wailed, wield, wilt. 
 
 WOKDS WRITTEN WITH ONE HAIE-ISNGTH ER-HOOE SIGN. 
 
 § 533. Acrid, cried, crout, crowd, crate, Croat, crowed, Crete, creed, 
 crude ; augured, great, grate, grade, greet, grit, greed ; trot, trod, 
 trite, tried, trout, trait, trade, tret, tread, uttered, treat, treed ; dried, 
 drought, adroit, dread ; Pratt, operate, pride, proud, prate, preyed, 
 prude ; brat, brad, brought, broad, abroad, bright, bride, braid, bred, 
 breed, brit, brute, bruit, brewed ; shroud, shred, ushered, shrewd ; as- 
 sort, assert ; threat, thread, throat ; fraught, fraud, fright, fried, af- 
 fright, offered, freight, frayed, afraid, fret, effort, freed, fruit ; overt ; 
 honored, inwrought, unwrought, unread, inroad, enroot, unroot ; lord ; 
 hard, heard, herd ; yard ; ward, word. 
 
 WOEDS WKIITEN WITH ONE HALF-LENGTH EF-HOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 534. Coughed, caved, cuffed ; Taft ; doffed, dived ; chaffed, chafed, 
 achieved ; puffed ; abaft ; raft, reft, reefed, rift, roofed, raved, roved. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH ONE HALF-LENGTH EN-HOOK SIGW. 
 
 § 535. Cant, canned, conned, kind, count, account, coined, Kent ; 
 gaunt, gained, Ghent; tanned, taunt, tined, taint, attaint, attained, 
 tent, attend, toned, atoned, tint, tinned, tuned, attuned ; daunt, 
 dawned, donned, dined, deigned, dent, don't, dunned, dint, dinned ; 
 chant, chained; jaunt, joint, joined, gent; pant, pawned, pond, pint, 
 pined, pound, point, appoint, paint, pained, pent, penned, etppend, 
 opened, pinned, oppugned ; baud, bond, bind, bound, abound, bent, 
 bend, boned ; shan't, shined, shunned, shinned ; assigned, ascent, 
 ascend ; thinned ; fanned, fawned, font, fond, find, found, faint, feign- 
 ed, fend, offend, fund, fiend ; vaunt, avaunt, vent, event, vend ; 'noint, 
 anoint ; manned, mind, mount, amount, mound, meant, mend, 
 amend, moaned ; land, lined, island, lent, lend, loaned, leaned, lint, 
 Lind ; arrant, ironed, around, arraigned, errant, errand, earned ; rant, 
 rand, rind, round, rained, reigned, rent, rend, runt ; hand, haunt, 
 hind, hound, hunt, honed, hint ; yawned ; want, wand, wind, wound, 
 waned, went, wend, won't, weaned, wind. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH ONE HALF-LENGTH SHUN-HOOK SIGN. 
 
 §536, Cautioned, auctioned, occasioned, cushioned; patient; fashr 
 toned, efficient, ancient ; motioned. 
 
168 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEK. 
 
 ■WOBDS WRITTEN WITH ONE HALF-LENGTH TEK-HOOK SIGK. 
 
 §537. Catered, accoutred; gathered; tattered, tottered, tittered, 
 tiitored ; chattered ; pattered, pottered, pewterod ; battered, bettered, 
 buttered, bothered. 
 
 EXEKCISE XXT.— [212-220.] 
 
 ■W0ED3 OF TWO STEMS, THE FIUST A HALF-LENGTH EL OB ER HOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 538. Clouting, clouding, crowding, crudely ; gladly, gliding, grat- 
 ify, gratuity, greatly, grating, grading, greeting ; adroitly, Adriatic ; 
 partake, partook, prodigy, prudish, operative, proudly ; brutish, 
 breadth, brutify, Bradley, broadly, brightly ; shrouding, shredding, 
 shrewdly ; assorting, asserting, ascertain, assaulting ; threading ; flat- 
 tish, floating, flooding, flitting, fluting, flatly , fleetly, flotilla, fretting ; 
 virtual ; enlighten, analytic ; enrooting, unrooting ; lordly ; relating, 
 overtly, relative; hardly. 
 
 WORDS OF TWO STEMS, THE SECOND A HALF-LENGTH EL-HOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 539. [220] Cackled, coddled, cudgeled, couplet, coupled, cob- 
 bled, caviled, kenneled ; goggled, gobbled ; tackled, tickled, tattled, 
 titled, toppled, tippled, tablet, twofold, tunneled ; dawdled, dad- 
 died, dappled, dabbled, deployed, doublet', doubled, deviled, Donald ; 
 chocolate, chuckled, chaplet ; ejaculate, joggled, juggled ; pickled, 
 paddled, peddled, peopled, piebald, puzzled, panneled, penult ; shack- 
 led, shipload, Slieflield, shuffled, shoveled ; thick-laid ; fiddled, fabled; 
 angled, unclad, knuckled, unclewed, include, unapplied, enabled, 
 nibbled, enameled ; muddled, implied, employed, muzzled, muffled, 
 moonlight ; Leopold, libeled, labeled, Eliphalet, leveled ; Arnold ; 
 wriggled, riddled, replied, rippled, replete, ribald ; haggled, higgled, 
 huddled, hatcheled, hobbled ; waggled, wiggled, waddled. 
 
 WORDS OF TWO STEMS, THE SECOND A HALF-LENGTH EK-HOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 540. [220] Co-operate, cupboard, cashiered, covert, collared, 
 colored ; Egbert ; autocrat, tapered, itinerate ; decried, decorate, 
 decreed, dickeied, degrade, Detroit, deterred, dotard, depart, de- 
 port, defraud, deferred, defrayed, advert, divert ; checkered ; 
 jeopard, generate ; patriot, putrid, powdered, papered, peppered, 
 upbraid ; beggared, begird, betrayed, obtrude, butchered, abjured, 
 bannered ; sugared, shivered ; escort, astride, aspirate ; figured, fa- 
 vored ; evaporate, vibrate, venerate ; anchorite, anchored, angered ; 
 incurred, ingrate, niggard, untried, untrod, entreat, intrude, undried, 
 injured, unbraid, inbred, inebriate, insured, unthread, unoffered, in- 
 ferred, iuveit, uuhoaored, enamored ; migrate, emigrate, immigrate, 
 
PHONOGEAPHIO WEITING EXEECISES. 169 
 
 mitered, Madrid, imbrute, imbrued ; lacquered, liquored, elaborate, 
 Albert, leopard, liberate, ill-bred, labored, low-bred, Alfred, Leverett ; 
 orchard ; recurred, regard, regret, retreat, retread, Richard, Eupert, 
 Eobert, reynard, rumored ; haggard, hatred, hybrid, hovered, ham- 
 mered ; watered, wagered, withered, wavered 
 
 •WORDS OF THKEE STEM3, THE FIKST A HALF-LENGTH EL OK EB HOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 541. [220] Cartridge, cartilage, courtship, cradling ; gladdening, 
 gratifying ; treadmill ; prototype, predatoiy ; birdlime, bread-room ; 
 ascertaining ; threatening ; flattening, frightening, fertility ; en- 
 lightening. 
 
 W0KD3 OF THREE STEMS, THE SECOND A HAIF-LENGTH EL OR ER HOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 542. [220] Co-operative, correlative ; degrading ; generative, gen- 
 erating ; patriotic, paralytic ; venerating ; unthreading, unfertile ; mi- 
 grating, migratorj', emigrating, major-domo, impliedly ; lucrative, 
 elaborately ; recording, recreating, recruiting, recreative, regarding, 
 regretting. 
 
 WORDS OF THREE STEMS, THE THIRD A ECALF-LENGTH EL-HOOE SIGN. 
 
 . § 543. [220] Camblet ; tumbled ; dimpled, dial-plate ; jumbled ; 
 panoplied, pimpled, pamphlet ; assembled ; fumbled ; uncoupled, un- 
 buckled, unshackled, enfeebled, unfurled, inveigled, unemployed, 
 unhumbled ; embattled, manacled, mantled, mumbled ; life-blood,* 
 remodeled, rumpled ; repeopled. 
 
 WORDS OF THREE STEMS, THE THIRD A HALF-LENGTH ER-HOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 544. [220] Cuthbert, cumbered ; degenerate, democrat ; pack- 
 thread, punctured, penetrate, pampered, Pomfret ; bombard, bela- 
 bored, beleaguered ; ash-colored, shipboard ; faltered, filtered, filtrate, 
 fingered, foundered ; uncolored, uubetrayed, imfettered, unfavored, 
 invigorate, inveterate, unanchored, uninjured, uumannered, manoeu- 
 vered, meandered, Milford ; lectured, lucubrate, lapboard, ill-favored, 
 Lingard, Lombard, lumbered ; arbitrate, rampart, remunerate ; recu- 
 perate, revigorate, regenerate. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVI.— [212-220.] 
 
 WORDS OF TWO STEMS, THE FIRST A HALF-LENGTH EN-HOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 545. [220] Kentucky, countess, counting, accounting, canting, 
 canter, counter, candor, condor, countiy ; attentive, taunting, taint- 
 ing, attainting, tending, tinting ; daunting, denting, identity, identify ; 
 chanting ; jaunting, jointing ; Pontiac, appendage, pent-up, pontiff, 
 panting, pointing, appointing, pounding, painting, pending, append- 
 
 8 
 
170 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 ing, pander, ponder, pointer, appointer, painter ; bandage, bondage, 
 binding, bounding, abounding, bending, Benton, banter, binder, 
 bender, boundary ; assenting ; autiientio ; fiendish, phantasy, finding, 
 founding, fainting, fending, offending, funding, fountain, Fontenoy, 
 phantom, fondly, faintly, finder, founder, fender, offender, foundry : 
 vaunting, vending, vender ; Montague, maintop, minding, mount- 
 ing, amounting, mending, amending, mountain, meantime, mender, 
 Monterey ; landing, lending, lender, laundry ; ranting, rounding, 
 renting, rending, random, rental, ranter, rounder, render ; haunting, 
 hunting, hinting, haunter, hunter, hinter; yonder; winding, wend 
 ing, wounding. 
 
 WOKDS or TWO STEMS, THE LAST A HALr-lENGTH EN-HOOK SWX. 
 
 § 546. [220] Cogent, occupant, cabined, coffined, corned, current, 
 careened ; gammoned, augment, gallant ; tokened, outbound, talent, 
 torrent, tyrant, turned, iterant ; depend, deepened, demand, adamant, 
 diamond, demeaned, darned, adorned; jocund, japanned, gerund; 
 peccant, piquant, patent, potent, pedant, pageant, payment, opulent, 
 appellant, Poland, upland, parent, apparent ; beckoned, beaconed, 
 battened, buttoned, obtained, obtend, obedient, beau-monde, be- 
 moaned, burnt, burned ; ascant, Iceland ; foment ; vehement, vio- 
 lent ; unkind, enchtot, enchained, unchained, unjoint, enjoined, un- 
 opened, unpinned, unbind, unboimd, unbent, iinbeud, xinshunned, 
 unassigned, unfound, unfeigned, infant, invent, unmanned, unearned, 
 nurned, nnweaned ;' maddened, imagined, ambient, moment, emol- 
 lient, maligned ; likened, elegant, legend, elephant, Oliphant, Levant, 
 leavened, lenient, lament, aliment, element, ailment ; arrogant, Or- 
 mond, remind, remount, Raymond, remend; recant, recoined, re- 
 count, reckoned, regained, retained, ardent, redound, rejoined, ur- 
 gent, regent, ripened, reappoint, repent, rebound, riband, refined, re- 
 found, refund, renowned ; Hammond, highland, Holland, Howland ; 
 wakened, awakened, weakened, warrant. 
 
 WORDS OF THREE STEMS, THE FIRST A HALF-LENGTH EN-HOOK SIGN. 
 
 §547. [220] Cantoning, kindlier, kindling; gondolier; attentively, 
 tendency ; identifying ; Pentateuch, pointingly, pendency, panto- 
 mime, Pindaric, panderer ; bandaging, bountiful, bountifully, aban- 
 doning, banterer, bantering ; vauutingly ; Montevideo, Montezuma, 
 mountaineer ; landlady. 
 
 WORDS OF THREE STEMS, THE SECOND A HAIF-LKNUTH F.N-IIOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 548. [220] Cogently, currently ; augmenting, gallanting, gallantly, 
 gallantry ; Atlantic, outlandish ; decanter, depending, demanding ; 
 
PHONOGEAPHIO -WRITING EXEECISES. 171 
 
 jocundity, jocundly, gigantic ; piquantly, patenting, potently, pe- 
 dantic, pedantry, opulently, parental, parentally ; obtending, obe- 
 diently ; Icelandic ; fomenting, fomenter. Philander ; vebemently, 
 violently, valiantly, Valentine, volunteer, voluntary ; encounter, en- 
 chanting, unbinding, unbending, unauthentic, infantine, unoffend- 
 ing, infantile, inventive, inventing, inventory ; momentum, momently, 
 momentary ; elephantine, lamenting, alimentary, elementary ; arro- 
 gantly, remanding, reminding ; recanting, recounting, retentive, ro- 
 tundity, redounding, reappointing, repenting, rebounding, refinding._ 
 refunding ; highlander, Hollander. 
 
 WOEDS OF THREE STEMS, THE LAST A HALr-lENGTH EN-HOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 549. [220] Gourmand ; tegument, attachment, tangent, tamarind ; 
 document ; judgment, pigment, pardoned ; big-boned, bail-bond, belly- 
 band, Belmont, burdened, bareboned ; shipment, chaperoned; esculent, 
 aspirant ; Falkland, feculent, fumigant ; vagabond, vigUant ; uncur- 
 rent, endowment, unadorned, enjoyment, unapparent, unobtained, 
 unbuttoned, unbemoaned, unburnt, New Zealand, environed, unim- 
 agined, New Holland, unweakened ; maintained, omniscient, militant ; 
 ligament, lodgment, Lapland, elopement, lambent, allurement ; argu- 
 ment ; Kockland, redolent, Ehode Island, arch-fiend, regiment, repe- 
 tend, repayment, repellant, rubicund, reobtained, re-foment, re-illu- 
 mined, reordained, harpooned. 
 
 EXERCISE XXYII.— [212-220.] 
 
 WOKDS WBITTEN WITH HAIE-LENGTH SKEL OK SKER SIGNS. 
 
 § 550. Suckled, sickled, seclude; settled i-saddled, sidled; supplied, 
 split ; sabled. Sacred, succored, secrete, secret ; stride, straight, 
 strayed, strode, strut ; soldered ; sprat, sprout, sprite, separate, spread; 
 sabered, sobered ; ciphered, suffered ; savored, severed ; summered, 
 simmered ; sward. , 
 
 WOBDS WBITTEN WITH HAM-LENGTH EL OB EB HOOK SIGNS WITH FINAL 
 ESS-CIBOLE. 
 
 § 551. Clots, clouts, clouds ; glides, glades, gloats, gluts ; plats, 
 plaids, applauds, plots, plods, plights, plates, pleads ; blots, blights, 
 blades, bloats, bleats, bleeds ; assaults ; iiats, flights, flouts, floats, 
 floods, fleets, flits, flutes ; unloads ; melts ; relates ; halts, holds ; 
 yields; wilds, wields, wilts. Crowds, crates, creeds; grates, grades, 
 greets, grits ; trots, trods, traits, trades, treads ; droughts, dreads ; 
 operates, prides, prates ; brats, brads, brides, braids, breeds, brutes ; 
 riirouds., shreds ; assorts, asserts : threats, threads, throats ; frauds, 
 
172 THE COMI'LETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 frights, affrights, freights, frets, efforts, fruits; inroads, unroots) 
 lords ; herds ; yards ; wards, words. 
 
 ■WOKnS WE.ITTEN WITH A nALF-LBNGTH EF OK EN-HOOK SIGN WITH BSITIAt 
 ESS-CmOLB. 
 
 § 652. Scoffed, skiffed. Scant, scanned, second, skinned, sickened; 
 stand, stained, stent, stoned, stunt, stunned, stint ; saddened ; span- 
 ned, spawned, sapient, spent, spend ; softened ; cement, summoned ; 
 slant, silent, salient ; surround. 
 
 WORDS WEITTBN WITH A HALF-LBNGTH EF OB EN HOOK SIGN WITH FINAI, 
 ESS-CIROIE. 
 
 § 553. Taft's ; rafts, rifts. Cants, kinds, counts, accounts ; taunts, 
 taints, attaints, tents, tends, attends, tints ; daunts, dents ; chants ; 
 jaunts, joints, gents ; pants, ponds, pints, pounds, points, appoints, 
 paints, appends ; hands, bonds, binds, bounds, abounds, bends ; as- 
 cents,- ascends ; fonts, finds, founts, faints, fends, offends, fiends ; 
 vaunts, vents, events, vends ; anoints ; minds, mounts, amounts, 
 mounds, mends, amends ; lands, lends ; rants, rents ; hands, haunts, 
 hounds, hints ; wants, wands, winds, wounds, wends, winds. 
 
 WOKDS WRITTEN WITH A HALF-LENGTH EN-HOOK SIGN WITH DOTIAL AJiD 
 FINAL ESS-CIRCtE. 
 
 § 554. Seconds ; stands, stents, stunts, stints ; spends ; savants ; 
 cements ; slants ; surrounds. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH A HALI^LENGTH SHUN OR TEE HOOK SIGN WITH 
 ANT INITIAL MODIFICATION. 
 
 §555. Sufficient, sanctioned. Scattered; spattered, sputtered. Clat- 
 tered, cluttered ; glittered ; tortured. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH A HALF-LENGTH EL OK ER HOOK SIGN ENDING WITH 
 THE EF OR EN HOOK. 
 
 § 556. Cleft, bluffed ; craft, craved, graft, graved, grieved, ag- 
 grieved, grooved, draft, derived, drift, adrift, proved, approved, 
 braved. Cleaned, crowned ; gland, gleaned, grant, grand, grind, 
 ground, aground, groaned, grunt, grinned ; trained, Trent, truant ; 
 drowned, drained ; plant, planned, pliant, plaint, planed, print, 
 pruned; bland, blonde, blind, blent, blend, blunt, brant, brand, 
 brained, brunt ; shrined ; throned ; flaunt, flint, front, affront, 
 frowned, friend. 
 
PHONOGEAPHIC WEITING EXEECI8ES. 173 
 
 TVOBDS WEITTEN WITH A HAU-IENGTH SKEL OK SEEK. SIGN, ENDING WITH 
 THE EP OK EN hook;. 
 
 § 557. Strived. Splint, suppliant. Screened ; strained ; sojourned ; 
 sprained. 
 
 WORDS WKITTEN WITH A HALF-LENGTH EL OR EK HOOK, ENDING WITH THH 
 EF OR EN HOOK AND ESS-CIRCLE. 
 
 § 558. Clefts ; crafts, grafts, drafts, drifts ; glands, grants, grinds, 
 grounds, grunts, truants, plants, prints, blondes, blinds, blends, blunts, 
 brands, flaunts, flints, fronts, affronts, friends. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH TWO STEMS, THE SECOND A HALF-LENGTH SKEL OB 
 SKER SIGN. 
 
 § 559. Exclude, execrate, custard, exploit, explode ; descried, des- 
 ecrate, discreet, distraught, dastard, desiderate, displayed, disabled, 
 deciphered, dissevered, dishonored ; gestured ; pastured, postured, 
 pestered ; bastard, bestride, bestrode,, bestirred, bestrewed, bowsprit ; 
 fostered, festered ; unsupplied, unsplit ; massacred, mastered, mus- 
 tard, misapplied ; illustrate. 
 
 WORDS OF TWO STEMS, THE EIRST A HALF-LENGTH EL OR ER HOOK SIGN 
 WITH THE EF OR EN HOOK. 
 
 § 560. [220] Grafting ; drafting, drifting. Clinton ; granting, 
 grinding, grunting, grandam, grandly, grander, grantor, grinder ; 
 plaintive, plaintiff, plenteous, planter, planting, plantain, plunder, 
 printing, printer ; blandish, blinding, blending, blunting, blindly, 
 bluntly, brandish, branding ; flaunting, frantic, fronting, affronting, 
 frontal, friendly, frontier. 
 
 WORDS OF TWO STEMS, THE SECOND A HALF-LENGTH EL OR EK HOOK SIGN 
 WITH THE EP OR EN HOOK. 
 
 § 561. [220] Deprived, depraved, engraved, unproved, unapproved, 
 improved, retrieved, reprieved, reproved. Caverned ; ignorant ; tea- 
 plant ; declined, dethroned ; befriend ; chagrined ; vagrant ; England ; 
 inclined, uncrowned, untrained, nnpliant, enshrined, enthroned ; im- 
 plant, emigrant, immigrant, imprint, embrowned ; ill-trained ; re- 
 clined, re-grant, replant, repiint, refrained ; hydrant. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVIII.— [212-220.] 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS WORDS COMMENCING WITH A HALF-LENGTH SIMPLE STEM. 
 
 § 562. Cottager, October, category ; Godfrey, good- humor, guttural ; 
 doubtable, dutiable, dutiful, doubtfully, editorial ; judicial, judicially, 
 
174 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHER. 
 
 judiciary ; optical, poetical, poetically, pedigree, pitiable, pitiful, pet- 
 tishly, Potiphar ; abatable, beatable, beautiful, beautifully ; thought- 
 ful, thoughtfully ; fitful, fitfully ; evitable, vitriol ; nautical, inaudi- 
 ble, inaudibly, integer, notable, notably, needful, needfully, antler ; 
 medical, medically, mediocre, imitable, mutable, metaphor, mutineer, 
 maidenly ; laudable, laudably ; artful, artfully, ordinary ; article, 
 radical, radically, ridicule, rightful, rightfully ; hateful, hatefully. 
 Catiline, cotillion ; Pitman ; abdomen ; footman ; madman, Made- 
 line, medallion ; return, retaken. Photograph. Academist ; opti- 
 mist, epitomist, epitomized ; footpost, fatalist ; untaxed. Judiciously, 
 optimism, epitomizing ; thoughtlessly ; fatalism, feudalism ; videli- 
 cet, evidencing ; intensity, intensive, intensely, endlessly, needlessly ; 
 mettlesome ; artlessly ; heedlessly. Photography. Activeness ; godli- 
 ness, goodliness ; pettishness ; ofttimes ; antiqueneis, indecorous, in- 
 digenous, antipodes ; Matamoras, modishness, midships ; littleness ; 
 rottenness. Academical, academically, kidnapper ; judicatory ; bat- 
 tledore, abdominal, butterfly ; sheet-anchor ; estimable, estjmably ; 
 antipodal, entangle ; metrical, metrically, madrigal, modifiable ; ora- 
 torical, oratorically, eradicable ; artificial. Titulation, detection, ded- 
 ication ; abdication, abduction ; estimation ; indication, intention, 
 intonation ; mitigation, medication, meditation, modulation, modera- 
 tion, ultimation ; eradication, redemption; retention, retaliation. 
 
 MISOEILANBODS WOIIDS ENDISG WITH A HALP-LENGTH SIMPLE STEM. 
 
 § 563. [220] Clothed, clouted, clotted, clouded, clutched, clapped, 
 clipped, yclept, clubbed, clashed, climate, acclimate, climbed, claimed ; 
 glided, glutted ; plucked, plagued, plugged, pledged, plaudit, playmate, 
 plummet, plumed; blacked, blocked, blockade, obligate, blotted, bloat- 
 ed, bloodied, blotched, bleached, obliged, blushed, beloved, blamed, 
 bloomed; fledged, flapped, flopped, flipped, " fly-bite, flea-bite, flashed, 
 fleshed, flushed, fluent, affluent, efQuent, flamed ; unlocked, inlooked, 
 ■ unlioked, unlocked, unlighted, unloaded, unlatched ; related. Credit, 
 accredit, crotchet, crouched, crept, crabbed, crashed, crushed, cravat, 
 crammed, crawled ; grated, graduate, grudged, griped, groped, grouped, 
 grabbed, grubbed, granite, grimed, growled ; tract, attract, tricked, 
 trudged, trapped, tripod, trepid, tripped, attribute, tribute, trimmed, 
 trailed, trilled ; dragged, drugged, drudged, dropped, draped, dripped, 
 drooped, drubbed, dry-shod, drummed, dreamed, drawled, drilled ; apri- 
 cot, pricked, priyged, prated, approached, preached, appreciate, private, 
 provide ; abrogate, brigade, braided, broached, broached, brooched, 
 bridged, Bridget, brushed, breathed, brevet, abbreviate, broiled ; 
 sliriekod, shi-ugged, shrouded, shrift, shrived ; assorted ; threaded, 
 throbbed, thrashed, threshed, thrift, thrived, thiummed, thralled, 
 
PUONOGEAPHIO -WEITrnG EXEECISES. 175 
 
 thrilled ; thereabout ; freighted, fretted, freshet, framed ; overdid, 
 . averaged, overjoyed, overpaid, overbid, overshot, overshoot, overlaid, 
 overload ; unrigged, enriched, enraged, enwrapped, unwrapped, nour- 
 ished, enwreathed, unwreathed, enervate, nerved, unrivet, enrolled, 
 unrolled, unrenewed. Crosscut, clasped, classified, closeted, crisped, 
 crucified, christened, crescent ; grasped ; trusted ; pleasant, prosecute, 
 precept, preceded, proceeded, perceived, present, presumed, prisoned ; 
 blasted, blazoned, blossomed, brisket, breasted, Bristed, bracelet ; 
 thirsted ; flasket, frosted, frisket ; enlisted, unloosened, unreceived. 
 Cataract, cabriolet ; declaimed, declared, decrepit, degraded, de- 
 plored, duplicate, depredate, deprecate, defrauded, derelict ;, Jugger- 
 naut, jeoparded, generated ; upbraided ; beclouded, begirded, be- 
 grimed, betrothed ; fabricate ; evaporated, vibrated, venerated ; un- 
 clouded, included, uncrowded, incorrupt, encroached, ingratiate, indi- 
 rect, unbraided, unbreached ; embarked, imprecate, implicate, im- 
 plored, embroiled ; lubricate, elaborated, liberated ; recruited, regard- 
 ed, regretted, reclaimed, reproached. Coincided, canceled, counseled; 
 garrisoned ; Italicized, tinseled ; detested, digested, deposited, divest- 
 ed, devastate ; backslide, obfuscate ; far-sighted, felicitate ; vaccinate, 
 evanescent, Vincent ; unexcited, untasted, unpacifled, undecided, un- 
 deceived, indecent, undismayed, undesigned, unassisted, nonsuited ; 
 ambuscade, emancipate ; life-estate, luxuriate ; recusant, ransacked, 
 reinstate. Deponent ; patented, potentate, unfinished, envenomed • 
 reappointed, repented, rebounded. Acclimated, clinched, clenched, 
 craunched, cringed, corrected ; grafted, aggregated, granted, ground- 
 ed ; truncate, trinket, attracted, trenched, attributed ; preoccupied, 
 propitiate, approbated, profited, provided, pervaded, ' promoted, per- 
 mitted ; brickbat, abrogated ; flirted, flinched, fluctuate ; overshad- 
 owed ; unredeemed, unremitted, enervated, unlimited. Scapegoat ; 
 spoliated, sported, sponged ; submitted, subjugate ; suffocated ; ce- 
 mented ; selected, slanted ; surfeited, survived. Stockaded ; stagnate ; 
 stipulate, stupefied ; _stunted, stinted, staunched ; stimulate ; stilted ; 
 Btar-light ; started, starched. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIX.— [212-220.] 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS WORDS WITH MEDIAL HALP-LBNGTH SIMPLE STEMS. 
 
 § 564. Skeptic ; saturating ; seductive ; spoliating, sportive, sport- 
 ing, supporting, suppurating, spirting ; smelting, simulating ; sordidly. 
 Cogitable ; ignitable ; adaptable, debatable, dubitable, idiomatical, 
 admittable ; particle, piratical, pictorial, Portugal, pathetical, port- 
 able, part-owner ; Baltimore ; esthetical ; fanatical, phonetical ; veg- 
 etable, veritable,- vertical, vintager ; unpitjful, unpoetical, inevitable, 
 unavoidable, unthoughtful, unartful ; emphatical, methodical, Morti- 
 
176 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 mer ; elliptical, limitable ; remediable ; reputable, refutable, redoabt- 
 able. .Ecliptic, chromatic; aggravating; attracting, attiibutive ; 
 dramatic, directing, directly ; appreciating, profiting, providing, pri- 
 vately, primitive ; obligating, abrogating, abbreviating ; thriftily ; 
 afiSuently, fluently, flirting ; verbatim ; energetic. Doggedness, dirti- 
 ness ; geodetics, gelatinous ; politeness, uprightness ; shiftless ; astute- 
 ness ; vividness, vortex, vertex ; nakedness, unfitness ; mortalize; liv- 
 iilness, limitless ; erectness, aeronautics ; raggeduess, ruggedness. 
 Executing, ecstatic, occipital, accenting, cosmetic ; exacting, exactly, 
 executive, exerting ; dissecting, decidedly, despotic, deceptive, decent- 
 ly, dissenting, desolately, dissolutely, desolating, deserting ; puissantly ; 
 bisecting, besottedly, absenting, abscinding, absolutely, absurdity ; as- 
 sassinating ; thousandth ; fascinating ; unstately, insipidity, insipidly, 
 unsoundly, innocently ,. incentive, uncertain, inserting; misguiding, 
 masoretio ; lacerating ; resounding, resenting, resciuding, resulting, 
 resolutely. 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS WOEDS COMMENOLNO WITH A HALF-LENGTH EL OB EE 
 HOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 565. Critical, critically, credible, credibly ; gladiator, grateful, 
 gratefully ; Druidical, dreadful, dreadfully ; political, politically 
 protocol, prodigal, prodigally ; bread-tree, brutishly ; fraudful, fright- 
 ful, frightfully, fretful, fretfully, fruitful, fruitfully, fruit-tree ; ver- 
 tebrse ; analytical, analytically, enlightener. Coldness, accordance, 
 orudenesB ; gladness, greatness ; bloodless, brutalize ; shortness, shrewd- 
 ness ; ascertains ; flatness, fleetness, fruitless ; inertness ; hai-dness, 
 heartless. 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS WOBDS ENDING WITH A HALP-LENGTH EL OR KR HOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 566. Cradled, curdled, crippled, Crawford, cornered ; agglomerate, 
 gargled, gurgled, Gertrude, grappled ; trickled, tripled, troubled, 
 treasured, trifled, traveled ; draggled, drabbled, dribblet, dribbled ; 
 placard, pilfered, preclude, preterit, portra.ved, protrude, Pritcliard, 
 perjured, appropriate ; blackguard, blubbered, bvoggart, bi-oidered ; 
 shriveled ; Ethelbert, throttled, threshold ; flattered, flavored, flan- 
 neled; everglade, verhorate ; unlettered, unlabored, unlevelod, unrav- 
 eled, unrivaled, unriddled ; murdered, murmured. Scabbard, scaffold ; 
 stickled, stifled, stabled ; snarled ; slaughtered, slobbered, celebrate, 
 slivered, slivered ; circulate, circlet, sour-crout ; swaggered. 
 
 MISOELLANEOCS WORDS ENDING WITH A IIALT-LENGTII EN-HOOK SIGN. 
 
 § 567. Extant, extent, extend, accident, Occident, expand, expound, 
 expend, casement, excellent ; examined ; descant, discount, destined, 
 
PHONOGEAPHIC WEITING EXEECISES. 1'77 
 
 distend, distant, disdained, disjoint, disjoined, despond, disappoint, 
 disband, dismount, discerned ; abscond, abstained, basement, abase- 
 ment ; assistant, assessment ; effacement ; visitant ; unscanned, un- 
 sliinued, unstained, instant, unsaddened, incident, unspent, in- 
 cipient ; miscount, amazement, amusement ; Rosamond ; resident, 
 respond, recipient, resonant, Rosalind ; husband. Claimant, Clem 
 ent ; agreement ; trapanned, trepanned, torment, Tremont ; dra- 
 gooned ; applicant, pertained, pretend, prudent, profound, pro- 
 faned, purloined, prurient ; blackened, brigand, brightened, brilliant - 
 flippant, Fremont ; Vermont ; unleavened, unreckoned, unrefined 
 harkened. 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS WORDS WRITTEN WITH TWO HALF-LENGTH STEMS. 
 
 § 568. Cultivate, credited, accredited, curtained, curtailed ; glu- 
 tinate, agglutinate, gratitude, gratified ; trident, triturate ; chartered ; 
 product, protect, predicate, predict ; bloodshot, bloodshed, blood-red, 
 blood-root ; ascertained ; threatened ; flat-foot, fleet-foot, flattened, for- 
 tified ; frightened ; verdant ; enlightened, inertitude ; hardened. Cat- 
 amount ; Jutland ; pediment. Piedmont, petulant, upturned ; abdi- 
 cant, abatement, abetment, butment, abutment ; indigent, ointment, 
 knight-errant ; mitigant, allotment, lieutenant ; returned, rudiment ; 
 redolent, hide-bound, head-band, headland ; woodland. Bloodwort, 
 blight-haired, trade-wind, assortment, sentiment, photographed, ste- 
 reotyped. 
 
 EXERCISE XXX.— [212-220.] 
 
 WORDS IN WHICH T OR D IS WRITTEN WITH THE STEM-SIGN INSTEAD OF 
 BY HALVING. 
 
 § 569. [221] Coact, caulked, cocked, caked, coquette, kicked, cook- 
 ed, cockatoo, cockade, gagged, judged, popped, poppet, piped, puppet, 
 peeped, pipped, bobbed ; lacked, locked, liked, locket, looked, lagged, 
 logged, lugged, legged ; cracked, correct, cricket, charged, propped, 
 probed. [223] Catgut, Categat, octagon, catacomb, catechise, catechu- 
 men. [234] Carried, corrode, curried, gullied, Gilead ; tallied, tarried, 
 torrid , tirade, outride ; dallied, Adelaide, deride, Jared, pallid, pillowed, 
 parried, parade, borrowed, buried, burrowed, charade, ferried, fur- 
 rowed, mellowed, married, moneyed, honeyed. 
 
 WORDS IN THE PAST TENSE WRITTEN WITH A FULL-LENGTH AND A HALF- 
 LENGTH SIGN, THE PRESENT TENSE BEING WRITTEN WITH A SINGLE HALF- 
 LENGTH SIGN. 
 
 § 570. [224] Actod, coated, guided, goaded, chatted, cheated, jot- 
 ted, jutted, patted, potted, pated, petted, pitted, pitied, shouted, 
 
 8* 
 
178 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 shadowed, fatted, fitted, voted, noted, matted, allotted, lighted, 
 righted, rotted, rated, rooted, hated, heated ; skated, spotted, spited, 
 spouted, speeded, spitted ; clotted, clouded, glutted, platted, plighted, 
 plotted, applauded, pleaded, blotted, bloated, bloodied, assaulted, 
 flatted, flouted, floated, flitted, flooded, fluted ; grated, greeted, 
 graded, prated, prided, bruited, braided, brooded, shrouded, asserted, 
 threaded, fretted, enrooted, unrooted, lorded ; secluded ; sprouted, 
 separated ; tainted, attainted, tinted, attended, daunted, dented, 
 pointed, appointed, painted, pounded, bonded, assented, ascended , 
 planted, printed, blinded, blended, blunted, branded. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH TINAL TED OB DED DISJOINED. 
 
 § 571. [225] Dotted, doubted, dated, doted, deeded, treated, 
 dreaded. 
 
 WOKDS WRITTEN WITH EINAL HALF-LENGTH ESS STRUCK UPWARD. 
 
 § 572. [226] Fashionist, factionist, vislonist, elocutionist, canon- 
 ist, opinionist. 
 
 MEDIAL TOWELS AITER HAXE-LENGTH STEMS. 
 
 § 573. [227] Anticipate, anticipated, anticipation, intestate, antece- 
 dent, antispasmodic ; active, octave, betake, betook, bedeck, bedim, 
 antique, esteem, retake. 
 
 WORDS IN WHICH A TEE OR DEE STEM MUST BE USED, BEINQ FOIXOWED BT 
 A TOWEL. 
 
 § 574. [228] Quito, caddy ; gouty, gaudy, giddy, goody ; toto, tat- 
 too, tutti, toddy, tidy, to-day, Teddy, toady, outdo ; data, doughty, 
 oddity, Doty, ditty, ditto, duty, daddy, dowdy, Dido ; chatty, Chitty ; 
 jetty, jutty, Judea, Judah ; patty, petty, pity, Paddy, Pedee ; bateau, 
 Betty, booty, beauty, bawdy, Biddy, bedew ; chateau, shoe-tie, shadow, 
 shoddy, shady ; fatty, fady ; veto, vide; natty, naughty, knotty, aunty, 
 untie, unto, into,- annuity, noddy, endow, Oneida, needy, niddy, undue ; 
 matty, amity, motto, mighty, meaty, mida, meadow, May-day, muddy, 
 moody ; Lottie, alto, Alida, lady, Lodi ; aorta, rowdy, ready, Ehoda, 
 ruddy, reedy ; Hattie, haughty, Hayti, Haidfee, heady. Notice, entice 
 bodice, abduce, deduce, reduce. 
 
 WORDS WIIITTEN WITH A FINAL HALF-LENQTH, THOUGH ENDING WITH A 
 VOWEL. 
 
 § 575. [229] Cavity, causality, captivity, casualty, actuality, activ 
 ity, carnality, credibility, corruptibility, acclivity, quantity, cruelty, 
 signality, gravity, totality, stability, tangibility, disability, durabU- 
 
PHONOGEAPHIO WRITING EXEECI8ES. 179 
 
 ity, debility, divisibility, depravity, declivity, disloyalty, charity, 
 jocularity, penalty, puberty, possibility, plausibility, specialty, par- 
 tiality, plurality, prodigality, superficiality, personality, spirituality, 
 probability, proximity, superiority {sep reri], proclivity, susceptibility, 
 brutality, brevity, barbarity, authority [thref], faculty, frugality, fa 
 tality, fidelity, facility, futility, frailty, faulty, vocality, venality, vi- 
 tality, vulgarity, severalty, inability, nobility, sensibility, individ- 
 uality, neutrality, infidelity, sincerity, insincerity, morality, immoral- 
 ■ ity, materiality, immateriality, mortality, immortality, mutuality, 
 mutability, locality, legality, illegality, liberality, illiberality, late- 
 rality, legibility, illegibility, loyalty, liberty, sterility, regality, re- 
 ality [reU], rationality, irrationality, regularity, hospitality, utility, 
 uherty. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH FINAL HALF-LENGTH EL AND ER STEMS. 
 
 § 576. [235] In this exercise the letters that are to be written with 
 upstroke stems are italicized. Coiled, culled, keeled, killed, coKate, 
 carat, can-ot ; galled, gulled, guHet ; toiled, tolled, tilt, tilled, toiZet, 
 tart, tired, attired, tarred, turret ; doled, dulled, dealt, diZate, diZute, 
 dart, dirt, adored ; chilled, charred, chariot ; jolt, jilt, JuZiet, jarred, 
 jeered ; appalled, piled, pelt, paled, polled, pealed, appealed, pulled, 
 paZZet, paZate, PiZate, piZot, poZite, peZZet, appeZZate, epauZette, poZZute, 
 puZZet, apart, pirate, upright, uproot, port, peered, pared, poured; 
 bald, boiled, bailed, bolt, baZZot, bnZZet, bard, board, beard ; filed, 
 foiled, failed, felt, felled, fold, field, filled, fooled, fulled, foZiate, fiZZet, 
 afSZiate, fired, fort, ferret; vault, availed, vailed, vioZate, vioZet, veered ; 
 mould, mulled, maZZet, maZZeate, amuZet, emuZate, muZZet, mart, 
 marred, mired, merit, moored ; HaZZett 
 
 EXEECISE XXXr.— [236-246.] 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE DOUBLE-VOWEL SIGNS. 
 
 § 577. [240] Hurrahing, naivete ; payee, wheyish, weighing, say- 
 ing, paying, baying, obeying, neighing, laying, allaying, arraying, 
 clayey, laity, gayety, grayish ; being, seeing, feeing, deify, deity, 
 deist, keying, ^aineid, albeit, agreeing ; hygeist ; lago, Guiana ; Hiero, 
 opiate, apiary, aviary, palliate, foliage, ferriage, variate, deviate, cre- 
 ate ; hygiene, alliene, minutise ; area, cassia, acacia, alluvia, alias, pi- 
 azza, mania, filial, mammalia, malaria, menial, maniac, ethereal, la- 
 bial, lineal, elegiac, Paphia, Pa via, Miami, Ethiopia, Ian the, Lybia, 
 Eiiah, Livia, Olivia, Arabia, Ophelia, Amelia, Delia, Adelia, dahlia, 
 Gallia, Peoria, Iberia, Assyria, Celia, .aSolian, Lydia, Iliad, India, Be< 
 lial, Boreas, Hibernia, Liberia ; Dieppe, weightier, easier, Vienna, 
 Henrietta, Harriet, Abdiel, barrier, carrier, biennial, farrier, Daniel, 
 
180 THE COMPLETE PHONOGRAPHEE, 
 
 collier, currier, courier, audience ; bullying, ferrying, valleying, va 
 rying, tallying, dallying, lobbying, marrying, envying ; awing, saw- 
 ing, pawing, thawing, chawing, jawing, cawing, lawing, drawing j 
 owing, doughy, going, showy, Hoey, mowing, lowing, knowing, 
 ehowish, showing, echoing, towing, billowy, flowy, yellowish, snowy, 
 snowing, growing, Bowie-knife, orthoepy, heroic ; doing, wooing, 
 liOuis, shoeing, cooing, looing, shrewish, rueing, Louisa, tattooing; 
 Bedouins ; carryall ; iota, olio, Ionia, Ethiopia, cameo, bagnio, Bor- 
 neo, tapioca, folio, nuncio ; idiom, onion, union, idiot, Baliol, ideol- 
 ogy, Theodosia, Theodore, Albion, Gibeon, Gideon ; various, opium ; 
 alluvium, omnium, encomium, Fabius, tedious, dubious, Thaddens, 
 Lucius, Orpheus, radius, erroneous, Julius, curious. [243] Fabii, 
 Genii, Honeoye. [244] Eying, buying, vying, dying, lying, allying, 
 sighing, defying, frying, drying, crying ; boyish, toyish, toying, an- 
 noying, joying, coyish, moiety, enjoying ; bowing, vowing, avowing, 
 allowing, cow-itch ; dewy, hewing, viewing, newish, chewing, gluey, 
 annuity, vacuity, arguing. 
 
 § 578. [245] Theology, belayer, te-deum, Bilboa, Judea, .Sgean, peon, 
 Boaz, poesy, chaos. iEneas, cocoa, theory, idea, weigher, wooer, Noah, 
 Owen, poem, towage, ideal, Joel, Osceola, mayor, doer, assayer; diet, 
 Naiad, riot showery, Bowery, nigher ; Uriah, Ahaziah, diem, fuel, vial, 
 viol, vowel, avowal, towel, jewel, buyer, fewer, bower, avower. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXn.— [247-276.] 
 
 WOEDS WRITTEN WITH- THE DOT AND TICK SIGNS. 
 
 § 579. [247] Hap, happy, hop, hope, heap, hip, hoop, whoop, hoopoe; 
 hob, hub ; half, huff, hoof ; have, halve, hive, hove, heave. Hopped, 
 hoped, heaped, hipped, hooped ; hubbed ; haft, hufted, hoofed ; halved, 
 hived, heaved. Hapless, haply, habitance, habitant, habitation, ha- 
 bituate, habited, habitual, habitually, habituated, happen, happened, 
 happiness, half-and-half, half-breed. Perhaps, Alhambra, Ingraham, 
 Graham, Abraham, upheave, behoof, behave, behoove, unhitch, un- 
 hinge, Jehovah, topheavy, tomahawk. 
 
 § 680. The dot sign for A may also sometimes be used initially beforo 
 other consonh,nis than those already specified, when the word has been 
 abbreviated by omitting the stem hay from the commencement of its 
 outline, and it is afterward thought best to insert an /i-sign ; as in the 
 words,— health, human, humbug, hedged, etc. The tick-sign for A 
 [248] need never be used except to distinguish between such words as 
 White and Wight, whit and wit, whet and wei, whine and wine, and not 
 even then if it would bo obvious from the context which word was 
 intended. 
 
PHOHOGEAPHIC WEITING EXERCISES. 181 
 
 WORDS ENDINO IN -LT. 
 
 § 581. [2G5] Amicably, laudably, peaceably, agreeably, affably, po 
 litlcally, likely, lamely, namely, comely, calmly, obscenely, finely, 
 lovely, rarely, barely, purely,' ragingly, drudgingly, grudgingly, long- 
 ingly, touohingly, lazily, laughingly, kingly, charmingly, wooingly, 
 pleasingly, pressingly, doubtingly, lovingly, flowingly, knowingly, 
 Longley, strongly, wrongly, boyishly; badly, madly, wickedly, sa- 
 credly, assuredly, coldly, friendly, godly, hardly, thirdly, lordly, 
 shrewdly, nicely, freely, basely, wisely, closely, lately, remotely, 
 absolutely, mutely, daily, gayly, Kelly, wily, jelly, folly, jolly, bully. 
 
 WOnnS ENDING IN -BY. 
 
 § 582. [266] Plenary, seminary, sundry, tawdry, robbery, bribery, 
 powdery, drudgery, surgery, treachery, archery, witchery, butchery, 
 fishery, mockery, crockery, cookery, gallery, slippery, coppery, fop- 
 pery, watery, mystery, vestry. 
 
 WOKDS ENDING IN -TURE. 
 
 § 583. [269] Creature, fracture, lecture, picture, structure, culture, 
 capture, rapture, departure ; feature, mature, premature, immature, 
 natui'e, ill-nature, curvature, cincture, tincture, vincture, juncture, 
 furniture, voiture, vulture, adventure, jointure, overture, nurture, 
 future ; pasture, repasture, gesture, vesture, moisture, posture, im- 
 posture, texture, fixture, mixture. 
 
 NEGATIVE AND OIHEK WOKDS THAT ARE DISTINGUISHED BY DOUBLING THB 
 FIESI CONSONANT-SIGN. 
 
 § 584. [276] Liberal, illiberal, liberally, illiberally, limitable, illimit- 
 able, limitably, inimitably, literate, illiterate, licit, illicit, legibly, illeg- 
 ibly, legitimate, illegitimate, legitimacy, illegitimacy, logical, illogical, 
 legal, illegal, legality [i'-Glt] , illegality ; movable, immovable, immov- 
 ably, memorial, immemorial, mutable, immutable, mature, immature, 
 maturity, immaturity, maturely, immaturely, material [Mtr-t'], im- 
 material, modest [Mdsf], immodest, moderate, immoderate, mortal, 
 immortal, mortality, immortality, moral, immoral, morality, immo- 
 rality, maculate, immaculate ; navigable, unnavigable, nerve, un- 
 nerve, nerved, unneryed, numerable, innumerable, necessary, unnec- 
 essary, natural, unnatural, noxious, innoxious ; reparable, irreparable, 
 repressible, irrepressible, reprehensible, lrreprehensi]ple, reproachable, 
 irreproachable, refutable, irrefutable, reverent, irreverent, revocable, 
 irrevocable, removable [E'-M-V-Bl], irremovable [Er^-M-T-Bl] , reme- 
 diable, irremediable, redeemable [Rd^-M-Bl] , irredeemable [Erd^M-Bl], 
 
182 THE COMPLETE PHONOGKAPHEE. 
 
 respective, irrespective, resistible, irresistible, resolute, irresolute, res- 
 olution, irresolution, relevant [Rl'-Yni], irrelevant [R^-i-Vnt], rela- 
 tive, irrelative, national, irrational, regularity, irregularity; innate^ 
 inuerve, ennoble, emmantle. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXni.— [284.] 
 
 WORDS CONTAININO THE PREFIXES ' CON, COM,' ETC. 
 
 §585. [284] Concomitant, concoct, concootioE., concave, concrete, 
 concur, concussion, congratulate, congregate, congregation, Congress, 
 contact, contagion, contain, contemn, contend, content, contention, 
 contest, contraband, condemn, congestion, confident, conscious, com- 
 merce, commercial pE^-SHl] ; complain, complex, cumbrance, cogno- 
 men, cognate, cognition ; incompatible, incompetent, encompassed, 
 incomplete, imoompromising, incomprehensive, encumbered, incum- 
 brance, incumbent, uncombined, unconfined, unconvinced, incontest- 
 able, uncontrolled,uncon tented, unconditional, inconstant, unconscious, 
 incongruous, irrecognizable, irreconcilable, recognition, recognize, re- 
 combine, recommend, recommit, recommission, recompense, recom- 
 pose, reconcile, reconciled, reconciliation, recondite, reconsider, recon- 
 sideration, reconstruct, reconvey, decompose, decomposition, decom- 
 pound, discomfit, discomfiture [Ds" ! Ptr] , discomfort, discommode, 
 discompose, disconcert, discontent, discontinue, discontinuation, un- 
 reconcilable, incognito, circumambient, circumference, circumflex, 
 circumjacent, circumlocution, circumnavigate, circumscribe, circum- 
 spect, circumvent, circumvolve. 
 
 WORDS COMMENCING WITS THE PREFIX ' FOR-E.' 
 
 § 586. [284] Forbade, forbear, forbearance, forbid, forever, forebode, 
 foreclose, forefather, foreground, forehead, forejudge, foreknown, fore- 
 part, foretaste, forethought, forewarn, forfeit, forfeiture [F'-Ftr], 
 forsake, forsooth, forward. 
 
 WORDS COMMENCING WITH THE PREFIX 'MAGNA,' ETC. 
 
 § 587. [284] Magna Charta, taagnanimity, magnanimous, magnani- 
 mously, magnesia, magnesian, magnesium [M:ZH3-M], magnetic, 
 magnetician, magnetism, magnetize, Magnificat, magnificence, mag- 
 nificent, magnify, magnitude. 
 
 WORDS COMMENCING WITH THE PREFIX ' SELF. 
 
 § 588. [284] Self-abasement, self-approving, self-assumed, self- 
 pleasing, self-praise, self-love, self-evident, self-important, self-de- 
 pendent, self-determined, self-deceived, self-destruction, self-esteem, 
 
PHONOGEAPHIC WEITING KXEECISES. 183 
 
 self-interest, self-knowledge, selfish, selfishly ; self-same, self-sufB sieut • 
 self-command, self-confident, self-couvicted, self-conceit, self-conscious 
 
 WORDS COMMENCING WITH THE PREFIX 'WITH.' 
 
 § 589. [284] Withal [DHl^], withdraw, withdrawal, withdrawn, 
 withdrawing, withhold, withheld, withholder, within [DHn^], with- 
 stand, withstood. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIV.— [285.] 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE SUFFIX ' BLE' OR ' ELY.' 
 
 § 590. [285] Demandable, compouudable, pardonable, fashionable, 
 unfashionable, actionable, lamentable, accountable, unaccountable, 
 surmountable, vincible, invincible, irascible, defensible, indefensible, 
 reprehensible, sensible, insensible, responsible ; flexibly, sensibly, 
 insensibly, forcibly. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE SUFFIX ' BLENESS.' 
 
 § 591. [285] Applicableness, amicableness, despicableuess, service- 
 ableness, agreeableness, ealableness, movableness, affableuess, teach- 
 ableness, sociableness, justifiableness, pliableness, amiableness, varia- 
 bleness, reasonableness, seasonableness, capableness, culpableuess, 
 considerableness, durableuess, profitableness, suitableness, acceptable- 
 ness, allowableness, invincibleness, forcibleness, credibleness, terrible- 
 ness, sensibleness, plausibleness, corruptibleness. 
 
 WORDS WBITTEN WITH THE SUFFIX 'EVER.' 
 
 § 592. [285] Whenever, whoever, soever, wherever, whatever, 
 however, whichever. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE SUFFIX ' FUL.' 
 
 § 593. [285] Gleeful, vengeful, revengeful, wakeful, shameful, 
 blameful, careful, ireful, wrongful, wishful, wrathful, faithful, miith- 
 ful, slothful, mouthful, youthful, thankful, skillful, wonderful, cheer- 
 ful, powerful, lawful, sorrowful, joyful. 
 
 WORDS ■WRITTEN WITH THE SUFFIX ' FUtNESS.' 
 
 § 594. [285] Dreadfulness, gladfulness, heedfulness, needfulness, 
 mindfulness, peacefulness, gracefulness, wakefulness, dolefulness, 
 hopefulness, carefulness, usefulness, hatefulness, gratefulness, spite- 
 fulness, wastefulness, bashfulness, faithfulness, pitifulness, plentiful- 
 noss, bountifulness, dutifulness, xmthankfulness, harmfulness, man- 
 fulness, painfuluess, sinfulness, fearfuluess, cheerfulness, powerfulness, 
 
1S4 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 doubtfulness, fretfulness, delightfulness, frightfulness, deceitfulness, 
 fruitfulness, artfulness, hurtfulness, joyfulness. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE SUFTIX ' LE9SNES3. ' 
 
 § 595. [285] Heedlessness, needlessness, endlessness, boundlessness, 
 groundlessness, regardlessness, blamelessness, shamelessness, careless- 
 ness, matchlessness, wortblessness, recklessness, thankfulness, barm 
 lessness, fearlessness, thoughtlessness, guiltlessness, dauntlessuess. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE SOTFIX ' INQ.' 
 
 § 596. [285] Patting, pouting, petting, pitting, putting, batting, 
 biting, bating, betting, beating, chatting, cheating, jotting, jetting, 
 jutting, shouting, shutting, meeting, letting, trotting, trading, tread- 
 ing, treating, dreading, plotting, plighting, applauding, plating 
 pleading, blotting, bloating, bleating, bleeding, building, braiding, 
 boarding, breeding, brooding, shrouding ; chanting, jointing ; adapt 
 ing, outbidding, debating, admitting, limiting, gibbeting, adopting, 
 debiting ; spotting, spiting, spouting, spading, spitting, speeding 
 smiting, smutting, sliding. Beatings, meetings, pleadings, bleatings 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE SUFFIX ' MENTAL-ITY.' 
 
 § 597. [285.] Fundamental, ligameutal, ornamental, sacramental, 
 elemental, supplemental, rudimental, regimental, complimental, ar- 
 gumental, detrimental, monumental, instrumental. Instrumentality. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE SUFFIX ' OLOQT.' 
 
 § 598. [285] Theology, phraseology, osteology, archaiology, orni- 
 thology, anthology, mythology, physiology, philology, chronology, 
 zoology, astrology, nosology, tautology, cryptology, doxology, ich- 
 thyology. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE SUFFIXES ' SELF* ATID ' SELVES. ' 
 
 § 599. [285] Himself, herself, ourself, itself, thyself, myself. Our- 
 selves, themselves. 
 
 WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE SUFFIX ' SHIP.' 
 
 § 600. [285] Friendship, hardship, wardship, stewardship, lordship, 
 kingship, clerkship, guardianship, horsemanship, worlonanship, town- 
 Ship, scholarship, partnership, copartnership, courtship, fellowship, 
 ladyship. 
 
 WORDS WRIITEN WITH THE SUFFIX ' SOEVER. ' 
 
 § 601. [285] Wheresoever, whichsoever, whomsoever, whensoever, 
 whatsoever howsoever 
 
PHONOGEAPHIC WEITING EXEECISE8. 185 
 
 EXERCISE XXXV.— [286.] 
 
 WOEDS TKOM WHICH A K-SIGN MAY BE OMITTED. 
 
 § 602. [286] Clanked, flanked, planked, ranked, crankud, inked, 
 linked, clinked, interlinked, winked, slunked, sanctify, sanctity, sanc- 
 tion, distinction, extinction, unction, function, junction, subjunctiou, 
 injunction, conjunction, disjunction, compunction, anxiety. 
 
 WOKDS FROM WHICH A T-SIGN MAT BE OMITTED. 
 
 § 603. [286] Priestly, priest-like, postmaster, postmark,, postdate, 
 postpaid, post-office, postpone, pasteboard, breast-plate, breast-pin, 
 breast-bone, breastwork, boastful, beastly, firstborn, mistrustful, testa 
 ment, testimony, tasteful, tasteless, text-book, trustful, trustless 
 dustpan, dustman, restless, untasteful. 
 
 WOKDS FEOM WHICH A P-SIQN MAT BE OMITTED. 
 
 § 604. [286] Tompkins, pumpkin, bumpkin, humped, pumped, 
 vamped, damped, dumped, thumped, limpt, lumped, ramped, romped, 
 champed, jumped, camped, swamped; slumped, stamped, stumped, 
 clamped, trumped, crimped, cramped, scrimped. Bmption, pre- 
 emption, exemption, resumption, presumption, consumption, assump- 
 tion, redemption ; prompter, tempter, Sumpter. Imps, hemps, humps, 
 pimps, pomps, pumps, bumps, vamps, mumps, damps, dumps, thumps, 
 lamps, limps, lumps, ramps, romps, champs, chumps, jumps, camps, 
 swamps, slumps, scamps, stamps, stumps, plumps, clamps, clumps, 
 glimpse, primps, tramps, trumps, shrimps, crimps, cramps, crumps, 
 scrimps ; glimpsed. 
 
 WORDS FROM WHICH AN S-SIGN MAT BE OMITTED. 
 
 § 605. [286] Misspell, misspelt, misspelled, misspelling, misstate, 
 misstatement, misstated, misstating, miscitation. Misshape, misshapen. 
 
 WOKDS FROM WHICH A K OR G SIGN MAT EE OMITTED. 
 
 § 606. [287] Fact, detract, contract, protract, abstract, subtract, 
 object, reject, project, respect, inspect, aspect, prospect, suspect, expect. 
 Fraction, subtraction, detraction, contraction, attraction, affection, 
 infection, rejection, injection, projection, interjection, inspection, pre- 
 diction, production, friction, introduction, obstruction, destruction, 
 instruction, construction'. Exact, exaction, execution, exactness, ex- 
 aggeration, examine, exception, exhibit, exist, existence, expand, ex- 
 pect, expense, experience, explain, extend, extension, extraction, 
 extreme. Dramatic, emblematic, phlegmatic, dogmatic, prismatiCj 
 
186 THE COMPLETE PHONOGBAPHEB. 
 
 arithmetic, ecclesiastic. Write tlie following words with full out- 
 lines : "Vacation, vocation, indication, vindication, judication, iuvoca.- 
 tiuu. 
 
 WORDS FROM WHICH A K OK O SIGN MAT BE OMITTED. 
 
 § 607. [287] Ankle, rankle, crankle, crinkle, sprinkle, wrinkle^ 
 tinkle, twinkle, uncle ; angle, dangle, fangle, jangle, triangle, mangle, 
 spangle, strangle, wrangle, tangle, entangle, shingle, jingle, mingle, 
 tingle, bungle. Anchor, banker, canker, hanker, spanker, thinker 
 drinker, tinker ; finger, linger, conger, monger. 
 
 WORDS PROM WHICH A P OR B SIGN MAT BE OMITTED. 
 
 § 608. [287] Baptist, baptism, chapter, Scripture, sculpture, ascrip 
 tion, subscription, inscription, conscription, superscription. 
 
 WORDS FROM WHICH AN N-SIGN MAT BE OMITTED. 
 
 § 609. [287] Manger, ranger, stranger, challenger, passenger, mes- 
 Benger, scavenger, harbinger, infringer, spunger, plunger, lounger. 
 
 WORDS FROM WHICH AN M-SIGN MAT BE OMITTED. 
 
 § 610. [287] Scamper, hamper, pamper, tamper, temper, distem- 
 per, thumper ; chamber, dismember, limber, lumber, temperance, 
 temperament. 
 
 WORDS THAT MAT BE ABBREVIATED BT OMITTIKQ FINAL STLLAB1E3. 
 
 § 611. [288] Substantial, credential, providential, prudential, dif- 
 ferential, reverential, essential, unessential, penitential, potential ; 
 substantially, providentially, prudentially, reverentially, essentially ; 
 substantiate ; detention, distention, invention, intervention, repre- 
 hension, comprehension, apprehension, declension, suspension, exten- 
 sion ; geographical, orthographical, cosmographical, typographical, 
 autographical, hieroglyphical ; geographically, typographically. 
 
 WOKDS THAT MAT BE ABBREVIATED BT OMITTiNO HOOKS. 
 
 § 612. [289] Attainment, atonement, assignment, adjournment, so- 
 journment, spendthrift, identical, husbandman, landlord. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVI.— [298-305.] 
 
 PHRASE-SIGNS FORMED BT JOINING THE CIRCLE WORD-SIGNS TO OTimR WORDS. 
 
 § 613. [801, 818] As can, as come, as go, as out, as what, as two, 
 as had, as each, as by? as shall, as slow, as she, as should, as that, as 
 thy, as they, as for, as if, as few, as of, as have, ns ever, as long, as 
 among, as on, as nigh, as from, as my, as all, as well, as are, as her. 
 
PnONOGEil.PHI0 WEITING EXEECISES. 187 
 
 as here, as our [siJ'], as were, as how, as high, as he, as you, as your, 
 as when, as we, as would; has come, has had, has each, has which, 
 has she, has ever, has long, has among, has on, has no, has my, has 
 all, has her, has here, has our, lias he, has your. Can his, at his, at 
 as, what has, what is, had as, had his, charge as, change his, which 
 is, each has, each is, pay us, by as, by his, show us, show as, she is, she 
 has, that is, that has, for us, for his, if his, have us, long as, among 
 us, on his, in as, in his, from his, all his, well as, are as, here is, how 
 is, he is, who has, beyond us, why is, without us, when is, beyond us. 
 Seek us, sought us, suit us, said as, sued us, such as, such is, safe as, 
 save us, sing us, sign his, same as, seem as. As gray, as eager, as dry, 
 as able, as either, as free, as evil, as every, as only, as early ; try us, 
 dry as, pray us, through us, either is, awful as, offer us, only as, early 
 as. Has caught, has got, is put, has about, has bought, has thought, 
 as oft, his foot, has avowed, has not, has made, as loud, as wide, as 
 wet, his wit ; act as, got us, get us, gobd as, taught us, cheat us, put 
 us, about as, beat his, showed us, thought his, fought us, note his, 
 need us, made his, met us, let us, arrayed as, write us, wide as. Is 
 sick, has sat, has sought, his suit, has said, has sued, has such, has 
 sung, has sown, is seen, is soon, as some ; cause his, cause us, accuse 
 us, goes as, eats his, choose his, shows us, tliis is, avows his, knows 
 us, amaze his, amuse us, use his, wise as ; as his, has his, as has, has 
 as, is as, is his, his is, his has. 
 
 PHRASE-SIGNS FORMED BY OHANGINO THE SMALL CIRCLE TO A LOOP. 
 
 § 614. [303, 318] As it ought, as to what, as to it, as it had, as the 
 day, is it due, as to each, as to which, has to obey, has to be, is to be. 
 as it sliall, has to fhow, as it should, as it was, as to these, as to that, 
 as to them, is the thing, has to own,, is it in, as it may, as to her, as to 
 our, as it were, as to how, as to him, as to you, as to why, as to when, 
 as it would ; give us the, what is it, what is the, owed us the, show us 
 the, allow us the, where is it ; cause the, because the, accuse the, goes the, 
 aids the, does the, does it, shows the, thinks the, thinks it, avows the, 
 views it, knows the, amaze the, use it, woos the ; as the, has the, aa 
 it, has it, as to, is the, is it, is to, as it is, as it has, has it as, is it as. 
 
 PHRASE-SIGNS FORMED BY CHANGING THE SMALL CIROLE TO A LARGE LOOP. 
 
 § 615. [304, 318] As there can, as there could, as there ought, as 
 there had,,' as there shall, as there should, has therefore, has there 
 ever, as their view, is there any, as there may, as their all ; cause 
 their, because there, because there is, guess there, goes there, what is 
 there, it is their, does there, choose their, shows their, thinks there; 
 thus there, avows their, views their, long as their, knows there, amaza 
 
188 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 there, amuse there, how is their, he is there, who has their, yes there, 
 use their ; as their, has there, is there ; cast their, cost their, most 
 there, must there, lest there. [305] Has there not, is there not, is 
 such, is there seen, is their side, is there soon. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVn.— [306-312.] 
 
 PHBASE-SIQNS rORMRD BY ADDING THE EL-HOOK TO W0ED3. 
 
 § 616. [306] Can all, could all, at all, ought all, it will, had all, do 
 all, did all, each will, which will, by all, but. will, be all, shall all, 
 show all, should all, she will, saw all, so will, see all, was all, these 
 will, thank all, worth all, think all, that will, they will, though all, 
 with all, for all, few will, if all, of all, ever will, long will, among all, 
 on all, know all, in all, from all, may all, all will, will all, or all, 
 here will, our all, where will, how will, he will, who will, beyond all, 
 you will, why will, when will, we will. 
 
 PHRASE SIGNS FORMED BY ADDING THE ER-HOOK TO WORDS. 
 
 § 617. [307] Can our, could our, at or, at our, to our, two or, which 
 are, by our, but our, be our, shall our, show our, should our, saw our, 
 so our, see our, was our, these are, think our, that are, that our, they 
 are, though our, with our, for our, if our, of our, have our, ever are, 
 along our, among our, on our, on or, know our, in our, in or, from 
 our, may our, all our, all are, will our, here are, where are, how are, 
 he or, who are, beyond our, yet are, you are, you or, why are, with- 
 out our, when are, we are, would our. 
 
 PHRASE-SIGNS FORMED BY ADDING THE WAY-HOOK TO WORDS. 
 
 § 618. [308] Can we, came we, could we, at what, ought we, what 
 were, what would, what we, it would, had we, do we, did we, each 
 would, which we, but we, but would. 
 
 PHRASE-SIGNS FORMED BY ADDING THE YAY-HOOK TO WORDS. 
 
 § 619. [309] Can you, came you, could you, gave you, give your, 
 at your, ought you, what you, what year, to you, had you, do you, 
 did you, which year, which you, by your, but you, be your. 
 
 PHRASE-SIGNS FORMED BY ADDING THE IN-HOOK TO WORDS. 
 
 § 620. [310] In some, in session, in surmounting, in sailing, in seal- 
 ing, in slavery, in his looks, in his casual, in his usual. 
 
 PHRASE-SIGNS FORMED BY ADDING THE EF-HOOK TO WORDS. 
 
 § 621. [81 1] Can have, come of, could have, out of, what if, to have, 
 
PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 1S9 
 
 do have, did have, charge of, change of, each of, which of, age of, part 
 of, hope of, but if, are of, where have ; shall have, should have, sn 
 if, was of, think of, that have, they have, know of, any of, may have, 
 all of, how have, who have, you have, why have, when have, we 
 have, would have. 
 
 PHKASE-SIGNS rOKMBD BY ADDING THE EN-HOOK TO WORDS. 
 
 § 622. [312] Go and, at an, out and, what an, to an, by an, but an, 
 should an, was an, for an, if an, have an, of an, on an, in an, from 
 an, here and, how an, he an, when an, you an, her own, our own 
 [iSn'], ever own, their own, have been, we been, you been, other 
 than, more than ; they have been, may have been, we have been, you 
 have been, shall have been, should have been, better than ; rather 
 than, juster than, faster than, vaster than, moister than. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVIII. -[313-315.] 
 
 PHEASE-SIGNS F0B.MED ET ADDING THE TBK-HOOK TO STRAIGHT STEMS, AKD 
 BY LENGTHENING CDKVES. 
 
 § 623. [313] Can there, could there, come there, go there, gave 
 their, give their, at their, out there, ought there, what there, what 
 other, to there, it there, charge their, change their, which there, 
 each other, up there, by their, by other, but there, but other, be 
 there, or there, were there ; shall there, show their, should there, saw 
 their, so there, see their, was there, these other, thank their, worth 
 their, think there, that there, though there, them there, with' their, 
 for there, if there, have their, of their, ever there, along there, among 
 other, among their, thing there, on their, no other, in their, any 
 other, from their, may there, me there, all other, all their, well there, 
 will there, are there, her there, here there, how their, him there, 
 who there, beyond their, yet there, you there, without there, why 
 there, when there, would there, we there. 
 
 PHRASE-SIGNS FORMED BY HALVING THE STEMS OP WORDS. 
 
 § 624. [314] Can the, can it, could the, could it, go to, gave it, gave 
 the, give it, give the, at the, at it, ought to, what the, to the, to it, 
 had the, had it, had to, do it, did the, which the, past the, up to, by 
 the, by it, hut the, but it, he it, shall the, shall it, show the, should 
 the, should it, saw the, saw it, see it, was the, was it, think the, think> 
 it, that the, that it, though it, with the, for the, for it, if the. have 
 the, have it, of the, of it, ever to, along the, among the, thing to, on 
 the, on it, in the, in it, from the, all the, will the, are the, are to, 
 were the, how the, how it, him the, beyond the, yet the, yet it, you 
 
190 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 the, why the, without the, without it, when the, would the, would it ; 
 sought the, said to, spoke to, able to ; back the, check the, become 
 the, leave it, cling to, ring the, talk to. 
 
 § 625. [315] Can not, could not, ought not, had not, do not, did 
 not, by not, hut not, be not, shall not, should not, was not, think 
 not, that not, them not, with not, for not, if not, have not, of not, on 
 not, know not, in not, from not, may not, me not, all not, will not, 
 are not, or not, were not, how not, him not, yet not, you not, why 
 not, when not, would not ; it will not, but wUl not, but are not, 
 which will not, can we not, could we n,ot. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIX.— [316-348.] 
 
 PHRASE-SIGNS FORMED BY COMBINING I0B.EG0INO PRINCIPLES. 
 
 § 626. [316] Can all of, can all of the, could all of the, at all their, 
 what will their, it is not, at some other, out of the, out of it, for all 
 there is, of all their own, should all there is, on all other occasions, 
 among all the, among all the circumstances, under all the circumstan- 
 ces, for all the, of our own, if there is anything, did you mean to say, 
 have you not, they have not seen, have you been, has ever been. 
 
 § 627. [320] What was, it was, at one, where was, at least. 
 
 PHRASES IN WHICH THE TICK-SIGNS ARE USED. 
 
 § 628. [323] I can, I could, I take, I took, I had, I do, I did, I 
 hope, I shall, I should, I saw, I see, I was, I thank, I think, I long, I 
 own, I know, I knew, I am, I may, I allow, I lay, I hear, I recollect, 
 I would ; I can not, I could not, I had not, I do not, I did not ; I 
 suppose, I sought, I said, I saved, I seem, I soon, I believe. A man, 
 a most, a safe, a sale ; an apple, an appearance ; and my, and may, 
 and then, and though, and why. When I was, for I must, on a 
 most, should I go, when I, shall I, on a, from a, to a, did I. [324] I 
 will, I will have, I will have all their, I will have nothing, I will not, 
 I will not go, I will not say, I have, and all I have, and are of no use. 
 [325] I conclude, I contend, a complete, and connected, and com- 
 pare, and conceived, and consulted. [326] The man, the most, the 
 cold, get the, meet the, enter the, flatter the, whether the. [327] 
 And as, and as a, and as I, and as I have, and as they, and as the, as 
 a man, as I have, and I, and a, and the. [329] Paying the, paying a, 
 shouting the, shouting a, shutting the, shutting a, letting the, letting a. 
 
 'J 
 
 PHRASES FROM WHIOH CONSONANTS AND WORDS ARE OMITTED. 
 
 § 629. [340] In accordance with the principle laid down at this sec- 
 tion, the writer in the following phrases may express had and would by 
 balving : It had, it would, had had, hut had, they had, they would, 
 
KEY TO A PORTION OF THE. BEADING LESSONS. 191 
 
 have had, he hail, he would, we had, we would. In the following 
 phrases the loop of the first word is changed to a small circle : Cost 
 them, cost you, past them, assist me, first year, next year, last year, 
 last time, next day, first day. [342] Must have done. [343] Ahsenca 
 of mind, arrest of judgment, loss of money, most of your, last of them, 
 importance of that. [344] To risk, to resign, to do, to assume, ta 
 look, to learn, to leave, to join, to oblige. [345] Ought to have, saia 
 to have, which are to have, they are to have. [346] From day to 
 day, from place to place, from week to week, from hour to hour, 
 from time to time. [347] Again and again, such and such, through 
 and through, yeas and nays, more and more. [348] Better and bet- 
 ter, blacker and blacker, deeper and deeper, further and further, 
 greater and greater, longer and longer, quicker and quicker, shorter 
 and shorter, stronger and stronger, straighter and straighter. 
 
 KEY TO A POETION OF THE READING 
 
 LESSONS. 
 
 EEADING EXEllCISE XV. 
 
 § 630. [317] H-as, as ever, as for, as long, as though, has been, has 
 done, has often, has gone, has he, has never, has not ; h-is, is in, is ever, 
 is generally, is great, is good, is he, is not, his opinion, is influenced ; so 
 as, all his, but his, which is, ever is, that is, about his, against us, 
 among us, at his, let us, made us, as long as, as many as, as good as, 
 as great as. [302] As h-is, is as, has said, as soon as, as is my, is as 
 great, is as good as, is as if, is as true, his soul, face us, gives us, gives 
 us his, it is as, places us. [303] As to what, has it done, has it been, 
 has it gone, has it found, what is it, where is it, when is it, as it is, is 
 it as. [304] Has there never, has there been, has there ever, what is 
 there, place their, embrace their, unless there, unless there is ; lest 
 there, most there, manifest their, test their. [305] Has there not, as 
 there is not, as there is nothing, as there is soon, as it has beea. 
 [318] As was, as it was, as fast as, as to that, as to them, as would, as 
 it would, as it happens, as it appears, as large, as you, as to your, as it 
 used, has to be. 
 
 § 631. [306] What will, at all, but all, for all, if all, when will, 
 from all, in all, we will, so will, why will, you will, as for all, as we 
 will, as you will, as they will. [307] What are, at our, which are, by 
 our, but our, shall our, should our, so are, was our, these are, they 
 are, when are, you are, we are, among our, in our,. on or. [308] Can 
 we, could we, do we, ought we, it would, which we, are we, were we. 
 
192 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 [309] By your, at your, what you-r, do you, did you, are you, were 
 you. [310] In some, in sleep, in surmountiag, in soliciting. [311] 
 Can have, could have, out of, what if, to have, do have, did have, 
 which have, shall have, should have, they have, may have, would 
 have, back of, top of. [312] If an, you and, her own, our own, their 
 own, for one, at one, but one, have been, having been, other than, 
 more than, further than, older than, rather than, better than, they 
 have been, faster than, moister than, lest their own. [313] Can there, 
 could there, ought their, what there, to their, had there, did there, 
 by their, be there, are there, where there, shall there, should there, 
 have their, ever there, was there, though there, with their, on their, 
 know their or no other, in their err any other, along there, among 
 their or other, from there, may there, or their or other, lay their, will 
 there, how their, him there, who there, would their, beyond their, yet 
 there, you there. [314] Can it or the, could it or the, give the, at the 
 or ought it or to, what the, to the or it would, had the or it, did it, 
 which the or it, by the, be it, half the, for the or it, if it, saw the, was 
 the, that the, show it, should the, have the, have its, along the, 
 among the, on the, in the, from the, may it, all the, will the, or the, 
 how the, would it or we would, back of the or it, top of the or it. 
 [3 15] Can not, could not, ought not, had not, do not, did not, by not,* 
 be not, are not, were not, shall not, should not, was not, have not, 
 may not, you not, are not, why not, would not or we not. [316] Can 
 all of, can all of the, can all their, at all of, at all of the, at all their, 
 at all their own, out of, out of the, at our, at our own, part of, part 
 of the, were you there, should all their, of all the or it, of all its, 
 of all their, of our, of our own, among all his, among all the, among 
 all their, among all others, while there is, while it is, while the, 
 can you explain, where were you, under all the circumstances, on the 
 part of the, on the side of the, day of the date, for the sake of the, as 
 is usual-ly, as soon as it is, as near as I can remember, all the time, 
 between you and, city of New York, State of New York, did you go 
 there, did you ever, do you remember, do you recollect, do you believe, 
 did you have anything to say, for several years, granddaughter, son-in 
 law, father-in-laiv, daughter-in-law, mother-in-law, had you seen, had 
 there been, on the subject, on or about, on or before, since you have been, 
 should have been, there may have been, were you present, where do 
 you reside, were you in the habit. [323] I hope, I believe, I speak, I 
 spent, I am not, I can not, I could not, I am, I ftay, I may not, I 
 allow, I demand, I fear, I think, an advantage, an only, and such, 
 and do you, and thus, and must, and which are. [324] I will say, 1 
 will speak, I have never, I will have nothing, I will not say, I will not 
 go, and all those, and will then, and are you, and are of no use. [825]| 
 
KEY TO A POETION OF THE BEADING LESSONS. 193 
 
 I complain, I consume, I combined, I compounded, I conducted, and 
 connected, and consulted, and considered. [326] The most, the man, 
 the suit, the satisfaction, the last, the blow, whether the, enter the. 
 [327] As a mah, is a most, as I believe, as I have been, and is, and is 
 a, and is the. [340] Must know, must be, most all their, best of my 
 recollection, best of your recollection, first time, it must have been, it 
 is sustained. [342] Must have done, could have done, can have done, 
 should have done, can not have done. [343] Many of my, all of them, 
 most of my. [344] To receive, to leave, to do, to raise, to draw, to pay. 
 [345] Said to have, ought to have, had to have, which are to have. 
 [346] From day to day, from week to week, from generation to gen- 
 eration, from time to time, from year to year, from hour to hour. 
 [347] Again and agpin, more and more; such and such, east and west, 
 less and less, through and through. [348] Further and further, 
 brighter and brighter, darker and darker, longer and longer, quicker 
 and quicker, better and lietter, lighter and lighter, straighter and 
 straighter, blacker and blacker, shorter and shorter. 
 
 MEN ALWAYS FIT FOE FREEDOM. 
 oTheue is only one cure for the evils which newly-acquired freedom 
 produces, — and that cure is freedom ! When a prisoner leaves his 
 cell, he can not bear the light of day ; he is unable to discriminate 
 colors, or recognize faces ; but the remedy is not to remand him into 
 his dungeon, but to accustom him to the rays of the sun . The blaze 
 of truth and liberty may at first dazzle and bewilder nations which 
 have become half blind in the house of bondage ; but let them gaze 
 on, and they will soon be able to bear it. In a few years men learn to 
 reason ; the extreme violence of opinion subsides ; hostile theories 
 correct each other ; the scattered elements of truth cease to conflict, 
 and begin to coalesce ; and, at length, a system of justice and order is 
 educed out of the chaos. Many politicians of our time are in the 
 habit of laying it down as a self-evident proposition, that no people 
 ought to be free till they are fit to use their freedom. The maxim is 
 worthy of the fool in the old story, who resolved not to go into the 
 water till he had learned to swim. If men are to wait for liberty till 
 they become wise and good in slavery, they may, indeed, wait for- 
 ever. — Macavlay. 
 
 » 
 
 FIDELITY TO THE CONSTITUTION. 
 If an honest, and, I may truly affirm, a laborious zeal for the public 
 service, has given me any weight in your esteem, let me exhort and 
 conjure you never to suffer an invasion of your political constitution, 
 
 9 
 
194 THE COMPLKTE PHONOGEAPHEK. 
 
 however minute the instance may appear, to pass by, without a deter 
 mined, persevering resistance. One precedent creates another. They 
 soon accumulate, and constitute law. What yesterday was fact, to- 
 day is doctrine. Examples are supposed to justify the most dangerous 
 measures ; and, where they do not suit exactly, the defect is supplied 
 by analogy. Be assured, that the laws which protect us in our civil 
 rights grow out of the constitution, and that they must fall or flourish 
 with it. — Junius. 
 
 THE HOTJSE-FLY AND THE DOG. 
 
 I believe we can nowhere find a better type of a perfectly free crea- 
 ture than in the common house-fly. Nor free only, but brave ; and 
 irreverent to a degree which I think no human republican could by 
 any philosophy raise himself to. There is no courtesy in him ; he 
 does not care whether it is king or clown he teases ; and in every step 
 of his swift mechanical march, and in every pause of his resolute ob- 
 seivation, there is one and the same expression of perfect egotism, 
 perfect independence and self-confidence, and conviction of the world's 
 having been made for flies. Strike at him with your hand. To him 
 the mechanical fact and external aspect of the matter is, what to you 
 it would be, if an acre of red clay, ten feet thick, tore itself up from' 
 the ground in one massive field, hovered over you in the air for a 
 second, and then came crashing down with an aim ! That is the ex- 
 ternal aspect of it ; the inner aspect to this fly's mind, is of a quite 
 natural and unimportant occurrence — one of the momentary condi- 
 tions of his active life. He steps out of the way of your hand, and 
 alights on the back of it. Ton can not terrify him, nor govsni 
 him, nor persuade him, nor coiivince him. He has his own positive 
 opinion on all matters — not an unwise one usually for his own ends, 
 , and will ask no advice of yours. He has no work to do— no tyran- 
 nical instinct to obey. The earth-worm has his digging and di- 
 gesting ; the bee her gathering and building ; the spider her cunning 
 network ; the ant her treasury and accounts. All those are but 
 comparatively slaves, or people of vulgar business. But your fly, 
 .free in the air, free in the chamber — a black incarnation of ca- 
 price—wandering, investigating, flitting-, flirting, feasting at his will, 
 with rich variety of choice in feast, from the heaped sweets in the 
 grocer's window to those of the butcher's back yard, and from the 
 galled place on your cab-horse's back to the brown spot in the 
 road, from which, as the hoof disturbs him, he rises with an angry 
 republican buzz— what freedom is like his ? For captivity, again, per- 
 haps your poor watoh-dog is as sorrowful a type as you will easily 
 
KEY TO A PORTION OF THE BEADING LESSONS. 195 
 
 find. Mine certainly is. The day is lovely, but I toust write this, and 
 can not go out with him. He is chained in the yard, because I do 
 not like dogs in rooms, and the gardener does not like dogs in gar- 
 dens. He has no books — nothing but his own weary thoughts for 
 company, and a group of those free flies, whom he snaps at with sullen 
 ill-success. Such dim hope that he may have that I may yet take him 
 out with me, will be, hour by hour, disappointed, or worse, darkened 
 at once into a leaden despair by an authoritative " No" — too well un- 
 derstood. His fidelity only seals his fate ; (if he would not watch for 
 lue, he would be sent away, and go hunting with some happier mas- 
 ter ; but he watches, and is wise and faithful, and miserable), and his 
 high animal intellect only gives him the wistful power of wonder, and 
 sorrow, and desire, and affection, which embitter his captivity. Yet 
 of the two, would we rather be watch-dog or fly? — "John Buskm," 
 in the AH Journal. 
 
 CHEMISTKY— OKGANIO COMPOUNDS. 
 
 Whatever may be the power producing chemical change, it acts in 
 conformity with some fixed laws, and in all its transmutations an 
 obedience to a most harmonious system is apparent. It is curious to 
 observe the remarkable character of many of these natural transmu- 
 tations of matter, but we must content ourselves with a few examples 
 only. For instance : — Sugar, oxalic acid, and citric acid are very un- 
 like each other, yet they are composed of the same elements ; the first 
 is used as a general' condiment, the second ig a destructive poison, and 
 the third a grateful and healthful acid : sugar is readily converted 
 into oxalic acid, and in the process of ripening fruits nature herself 
 converts citric acid into sugar. Again, starch, sugar, and gum would 
 scarcely be regarded as alike, yet their only difference is in the mode 
 in which carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen combine. They are com- 
 posed of the same principles in the following proportions . 
 
 Carbon. 
 
 Starch 12 
 
 Sugar 12 
 
 Gum 12 
 
 These isomeric groups certainly indicate some law of affinity which 
 science has not yet discovered. Similar and even yet more remarkabli 
 instances might be adduced of the same elements producing com- 
 pounds very unlike each other ; but the above have been selected 
 from their well-known characters. Indeed, we may state with truth 
 that all the varieties of the vegetable world — their woody fiber— thcii 
 
 m. Hydrogen. 
 
 Oxygen. 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
196 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHBE. 
 
 acid or alkaline juices— the various exudations of plants — their flow- 
 ers, fruit, and seeds, and the numerous products which, hy art, they 
 are made to yield for the uses of man, are, all of them, compounds of 
 these three elements, differing only in the proportions in which they 
 are combined with nitrogen, or in some peculiar change of state In one 
 or other of the elementary principles. The chemist is now enabled by 
 simple processes, from the refuse of manufactories, to produce fruit 
 essences which are equal in flavor to the natural production ; and 
 from benzoic acid, which is obtained in great abundance from the 
 houses in which cows are liept, the most delicate essences are pro- 
 duced, which are given to the world as the distillations of a thousand 
 flowers. By the impulse given to organic chemistry by Liebig, our 
 knowledge of the almost infinite variety of substances, in physical 
 character exceedingly dissimilar, which result from the combination 
 of oxygen, hydrogen, and carbon, in vaiying proportions, has been 
 largely increased. And the science is now in that state which almost 
 causes a regret that any new organic compounds should be discovered, 
 until some industrious mind has undertaken the task of reducing to a 
 good general classification the immense mass of valuable matter which 
 has been accumulated, but which, for all practical purposes, remains 
 nearly useless and unintelligible. — Bunt's PoOry of Science. 
 
 MAN AND MACHINERT. 
 For the spirit of the livliig creature was in the wheels.— Ezskiki. 1. 20. 
 
 Whatever may have been the significance of the sublime vision from 
 which I have extracted those words, I do not think that their essential 
 meaning is perverted when I apply them to the subject which comes 
 before us this evening. I am not aware of any sentence that ex- 
 presses more concisely the relation which I would indicate between 
 Man and Machinery; between those great agents of humaji achieve- 
 ment and the living intelligence which worlis in them and by them. 
 And though a Divine Spirit moved in those flashing splendors which 
 burned before the eyes of the prophet, is it not also a divine spirit that 
 mingles in every great manifestation of humanity, and that move^ 
 even in the action of man, the worker, toiling among innumerable 
 wheels 1 , 
 
 Perhaps if we were called upon to name some one feature of the 
 present age which distinguishes it from all other ages, and endows it 
 with a special wonder and glory, we should call it the Age of Ma- 
 chinery. We trust our age is unfolding something better than 
 material triumphs. The results of past thought and past endeavor 
 
KEY TO A POETION OF Tlrt; BEADING LESSONS. 197 
 
 are pouring througli it in expanding currents of knowledge, liberty, 
 and brotherhood. But the great agents in this diffusion of ideas and 
 principles are those vehicles of iron, and those messengers of light- 
 ning, which compress the huge globe into a neighborhood, and bring 
 all its interests within the system of a daily newspaper. Like the 
 generations which have preceded us, we enter into the labors of others, 
 and inherit the fruits of th^ir effort. But these powerful instruments, 
 condensing time and space, endow a single half century with the possi- 
 bilities of a cycle. If we take the period comprehending the American 
 and the French revolutions as a dividing line, and look both sides the 
 chasm, we shall discover the difference of a thousand years. Remark- 
 able for brilliant achievements in every department of physics, ours 
 well deserves to be called the Age of Science, also. But it is still more 
 remarkable for the application of the most majestic and subtile con- 
 stituents of the universe to the most familiar uses ; the wild forces of 
 matter have been caught and harnessed. Go into any factory, and 
 see what fine workmen we have made of the great elements around 
 us ! See how magnificent nature has humbled itself, and works in 
 shirt-sleeves ! Without food, without sweat, without weariness, it 
 toils all day at the loom, and shouts lustily in the sounding wheels. 
 How diligently the iron fingers pick and sort, and the muscles of steel 
 retain their faithful gripe, and enormous energies run to and fro with 
 an obedient click ; while forces that tear the arteries of the earth and 
 heave volcanoes, spin the fabric of an infant's robe, and weave the 
 flowers in a lady's brocade ! 
 
 I think, then, we may appropriately call it — The Age of Machinery. 
 It Is not a peculiarity of the city, but, rather, seeks room to stretch 
 itself out ; and so you may perceive its smoky signals hovering over a 
 thousand valleys, and the echo of its mighty pulses throbbing among 
 the loneliest hills. Nevertheless, it is sufficiently developed here to 
 illustrate the Conditions of Humanity in the City, and this fact, to- 
 gether with the general interest of the subject, is my warrant for 
 taking it up in the present discourse: And my remarks must neces- 
 sarily be of a general cast, as I have no room for the statistics, and 
 details, and various discussions that grow out of the theme. 
 
 And the key-note of all that I shall say at the present time is really 
 in the text itself — •' ' For the spirit of the living creature was in the 
 wheels." 
 
 In the first place, these words suggest the relations of Use and Sdp 
 between Man and Machinery. Upon surveying these numerous and 
 complicated instruments, the thought that most readily occurs, per- 
 haps, is that of the necessity of machinery. The very first step that 
 man takes, out of the condition of infant weakness and animal rude- 
 
198 THE COMPLETE PHONOGKAPHEE. 
 
 ness, must be accomplished by the aid of some implement. He aloue, 
 of all beings upon the face of the earth, is obliged to iitvent, and is ca 
 pable of endless invention. The necessity for this springs out, and is 
 a prophecy of, his destiny. The moment he was seen fashioning the 
 first tool, however imperfect, that moment it was indicated the differ- 
 ence between himself and the brute, and the control he was destined 
 to gain over the world about him. To fulfill this destiny, he con- 
 fronts nature with naked hands ; and yet, there is the earth to plow, 
 the harvest to reap, the torrent to bridge, the ocean to cross ; there 
 are all the results to achieve which constitute the difference between 
 the primitive man and the civilization of the nineteenth century. 
 The Machine, then — the agent which links the gratification lo the 
 ■want — is born of necessity. But we must make a distinction between 
 those instruments which are positively essential and those, for. in- 
 stance, which merely answer the demands of luxury or indolence. 
 
 And this brings up the question of the comparative uses of Machinery 
 — the foremost place being assigned to those implements which are 
 absolutely indispensable to man's existence upon the earth. But be- 
 tween this absolute degree, and that of frivolous invention, there are 
 countless grades of utility. And the question of usefulness must be 
 decided according to the standard of utility which we apply. If bare 
 subsistence is assumed to be the end of man upon the earth, most of 
 our modem inventions are useless. We can travel without a locomo- 
 tive, and procure a meal without a cooking-range. The moment we 
 rise above the grossest conception of human existence, the test of use- 
 fulness becomes enlarged, and we can make a safe decision upon 
 whatever increases man's comfort, adds to his ability, or inspires his 
 culture. In this way new things becorM indispensable. That which 
 was not necessary d priori, is necessary now, in a fresh st-age of devel- 
 opment, and in connection with circumstances that have sprung up 
 and formed around it. That which was not necessary to man the 
 savage, living on roots and raw fish, is necessary to man the civilized, 
 with new possibilities opening before him, and new faculties imfolded 
 within him. The printing-press was not absolutely necessary to Nim- 
 rod or JuliuBC8esar,butisitnot absolutely necessary now? Stiikeitout 
 of existence to-day, and what would be the condition of the world to- 
 morrow 1 You would have to tear away with it all that has grown 
 up around it and become assimilated to it — the textures of the world's 
 growth for three hundred years. Paul moved the old world with- 
 out a telegraph, and Columbus found a new one without a steam- 
 ship. But see how essential these agents are to the present condition 
 of civilization ! How many derangements among the wheels of busi- 
 ness, and the plans of affection, if merely a snow-drift blocks the 
 
KEY TO A POETION OF THE BEADING LESSONS. 199 
 
 cars, or a thunder-storm snaps tlie wires ! Our estimates of necessity, 
 and, therefore,- of utility, must he formed according to present con- 
 ditions, and the legitimate demand that rises out of them ; these 
 conditions themselves heing the necessary developments of society and 
 of the individual. 
 
 But some of these, you may say, are the demands of luxury, of in- 
 dolent ease, of man setting nature to work and lapsing in self-in- 
 dulgence. To some degree this result may grow out of the present 
 state of things ; as some portion of evil will follow in the sweep of an 
 immense good. But what is the precise sentence to he passed upon 
 this prevalent luxiiry ? Of course, admitting the evil — ^whioh is ap- 
 parent^— I maintain that there is a great deal of good in it ; that it is 
 inextricably associated with much real refinement andprogress. Men 
 are accustomed to speak of the simplicity and purity of past times, 
 and to compare, with a sigh, the good old era of the stage-coach and 
 the spinning-wheel with these days of whizzing machinery, Aladdin 
 palaces, and California gold. But the core of logic that lies within 
 this rind of sentiment forces a conclusion that I can by no means ad- 
 mit, . the conclusion that the world is going backward. I never knew 
 of an epoch that was not thought by some then living to be the worst 
 that ever was, and which did not seem to stand in humiliating con- 
 trast with some blessed period gone by. But the golden age of Chris- 
 tiai^ty is in the future, not in the past. Those old ages are like the 
 landscape that shows best in purple distance, all verdant and smooth, 
 and bathed in mellow light. But could we go back and touch the 
 reality, we should find many a swamp of disease, and rough and 
 grimy paths of rock and mire. Those were good old times, it may be 
 thought, when baron and peasant feasted together. But the one 
 could not read, and made his mark with a sword-pommel ; and the 
 other was not held so dear as a favorite dog. Pure and simple times 
 were those of our grandfathers,— it may be. Possibly nut so pure as 
 we may think, however, and with a simplicity ingrained with some 
 bigotry and a good deal of conceit. The fact is, we are bad enough, 
 imperfect, not because we are growing worse, but because we are yet 
 far from the best. I think, however, with Lord Bacon, that these are 
 "the old times." The world is older now than it ever was, and it 
 contains the best life and fruition of the past. And this special condi- 
 tion of luxury is a growth out of the past, and is the necessary con- 
 comitant of much that is good. Opening new channels for industry, 
 it furnishes occupation for thousands ; while in many of its phases it 
 indicates a refined culture and a sphere elevated above the impera- 
 tive wants of existence. It is no proof of the disadvantages of 
 machinery, therefore, to say that it ministers to something bcsidi« 
 
200 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEB. 
 
 absolute bodily need, and delivers roan from a slow and exhausting 
 drudgery. So far as it helps us to control nature, and increases the 
 facilities of human intercourse, and diffuses general comfort and ele- 
 gance, and affords a respite from incessant physical toil, so far it is an 
 agent and a sign of progress. 
 
 But, it may be said again, that it is the agent of a selfish and ex- 
 clusive power, em-iching a few and injuring many. And it can not he 
 denied that gtave problems grow out of the relations between ma- 
 chinery and the laboring classes. Every little while some invention ia 
 thrust forward which takes a portion of labor out of the hands of flesh 
 and transfers it to hands of iron. It is not enough to say that man- 
 kind in general is benefited by these inanimate agents, which do the 
 work of the world so much more rapidly and powerfully. This may 
 answer as an argument against a monopoly of any one kind of me- 
 chanical force. It may be a reason for using cars instead of steam- 
 boats, and balloons rather than railroads. The general good must be 
 advanced, whatever the damage to private interests. But the present 
 case brings up the question whether machinery is a general good at all ; 
 whether the effect of its introduction into almost every department of 
 labor will not be felt in the destitution of millions. And upon this point 
 I observe, that, like all other great revolutions, the immediate effect 
 may be such as has been suggested. But the final result will be beu- 
 fioial, and such a result may be traced out even now. For instajjce, 
 this clogging of old departments of labor will precipitate men upon 
 fresh ones, and upon those that have been too much neglected. It 
 will tend to introduce woman to branches of industry perfectly suited 
 to her, but which have been too exclusively occupied by the other 
 sex, and to turn the attention of robust men to those great fields of 
 productive toil which are as yet but little improved. It may drive 
 them from the dependence, the crowded competition, the unwhole- 
 some life of the city, into the broad fields and open air and the sov- 
 ereignty of the soil. And if this immense intrusion of machinery has 
 only this result, of equalizing the balance against production, we shall 
 have one solution of the problem. And there will be another solu- 
 tion, if this phalanx of mechanism shall lift the mass of men above 
 the occasions of coarse material drudgery into other activities, which 
 doubtless will be thrown open, and shall allow more leisure for spirit- 
 ual culture. But in this, and all other great questions affecting 
 human welfare, I throw myself back, finally, upon the tokens of 
 Providential Design. The world moves forward, not backward ; and 
 the great developments of time are for good, not evil. By machinery, 
 man proceeds with his dominion over nature. He assimilates it to 
 himself ; it becomes, so to speak, a part of himself. Every great in 
 
KEY TO A POKTION OF THE BEADING LES80K8. 201 
 
 rention 1b the enlargement of his own personality. Iron and fire 
 become blood and muscle, and gravitation flows in the current of his 
 will. His pulses beat in the steamship, throbbing through the deep, 
 while the fibers of his heart and hraln inclose the earth in an electric 
 network of thought and sympathy. That which we give to help man, 
 will not hinder nor hurt him. "For the spirit of the living creature 
 is in the wheels." — Cliapinfi 
 
 FRAGMENT OF THE REPORT OF A TRIAL. 
 
 •Supreme Court, Circuit, Part 1. 
 
 Augustus Whitlock 
 
 vs. 
 The U. S. Patent 
 Baking Company. 
 
 • Before Judge Peckham and a jury. 
 
 New York, Feb. 15th, 1864 
 
 Appearances 
 
 For Plaintiff, 
 
 Bogardus & Brown, Esqs. 
 
 For Defendant, 
 
 Benjamin Butler, Esq. 
 
 
 
 
 direct, cross. 
 
 William W. Bdnnett, 
 
 2 — 
 
 Mr. Brown opens for Plff. 
 
 William W. Bannell, called for Plff., sworn. 
 
 Direct examination by Mr. Brown : 
 
 Q. Where do you live ? 
 
 A. I reside a,t Waterbury, Connecticut. 
 
 Q. Do you know the U. S. Patent Baking Co. ? 
 
 A. I do know them. 
 
 Q. You had some connection with the formation of the Company ? 
 
 A. I did ; I was a stockholder in the Company when it was formed. 
 
 * The above is an extract from one of a series of highly interesting lectures hy 
 the Eev. E. H. Chapin, which have heen published by Eobert M. De Witt, 13 
 Frankfort Street, tmder the title of " Humanity in the City." 
 
 9* 
 
202 THE COMPLETE PHONOGEAPHEE. 
 
 Q. In the latter part of 1861 did you know the Elizabethport Barrel 
 Manufacturing Co. ? 
 
 A. I did. 
 
 Q. Do you know Mr. Whitlock, the Plff. 1 
 
 A. I do. 
 
 Q. What was his connection with the Company ? 
 
 A. He was the Company. 
 
 Q. In the latter part of November, 1861, what negotiations wera 
 had, if any, with reference to furnishing boxes to put bakers' mate- 
 rials in ? 
 
 A. I agreed with some contractors for the U. S. Patent Baking Co. 
 to furnish them the number of boxes I could make my arrange- 
 ments for. 
 
 Q. The Company was not incorporated ? 
 
 A. No; the Elizabethport Barrel Co. was not. I made an agree 
 ment with some contractors for the Patent Baking Co. to furnish 
 them with boxes, and after a number of conversations they finally 
 agreed upon a price, which was to be dependent upon the price they 
 received from the United States Government at that time. 
 
 Q. State more fully the preliminaries in reference to the contract. 
 
 A. The first agreement was that they were to turn over the govern- 
 ment contract for the boxes to the Barrel Manufacturing Co. Finally 
 it was agreed that they should allow one cent profit on each box, and 
 an allowance for strapping them, which they could do cheaper than I. 
 The final order was given to me by N. T. Spear ; he came to my 
 house and wanted me to commence delivering them immediately. 
 That was at Elizabethport, where I was resi(5ing at the time. That 
 price was 28| cents from the data he gave me. He gave me the order 
 personally. I then had charge of the business for Whitlock. 
 
^y^O HO OR AP>/;^ 
 
 EXERCISE I. p-(^62. 
 
 ^^7,8 I l//\\_^^ ) ) ( ( ^v_^9_ _ 
 
 ^^r r ^"^ ^16/ 1-^/ !-> ^20 ^_^ ^^_ 
 
 -I \ / \ ^ / \ •) X -^. \ )• ^ ■) -( r )- (• (- ^ 
 ^ ^ f^ \ "^- ->' -I I- \ -^ )- -J. r^ ^ 
 
 .^.S:C~^.^ V"."^ I I // \\ -^-^ ) ) ( ( ^^ 
 
 r -N /- r ^- .||, ^/ .^\ ^_^. ). ), ^ .( ^^ ^. .:^,./ ^ .,^ . 
 
 EXERCISE 11.^63-^68 [^24] 
 
 10 
 
2oe 
 
 -^ 
 
 )_-)l_-l C_1-v^^|l un 1^.^-y V. 
 
 \-^ ^ ^ — -- -^_ s- • -— 
 
 ^e. _ s^ I 1. \ / ^/ ^65 ^_ 
 
 ) _^ J __ ^ ^66 ^ ^ ^ ^ < 
 
 — ^-^ L. \^r^ n ^ O r^ ^ %2A\ / 
 A'? ^~y ^ /^ C- v^^A- 
 
 EXERCISE 111.^71-^90 |^54] 
 
 
 \\ <- 
 
 X l-X 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^0 -- J 
 
 ^ I- -I / >-^ O. )- X •) 
 
 r \, ^ -I ..^ ,^ :^".\ x 
 
 /- 
 
 < (- X. C- 
 
 V ^- .1 
 
 ^\.^'^^^c ^-..^-^^.c^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ •.^.. '^ -^ ^. ^- '^^ "• 
 
 ^ ^' X X. 
 
a07 
 
 ^p0,7l,7i 
 
 ^ss.^> 
 
 I 17 /7 /^ -y <^ ...O. 
 
 -:>> 
 ^^i^ 
 
 
 l;- -u 
 
 Zl 
 
 -z. 
 
 U^ 
 
 54. 
 
 ^ \ ^ \ ^ c 
 
 
 •^ -^ 
 
 r (^ 1 c A J" 
 
 ,^, .*^ L ^ '^ .:.'^.:'^...^. ■*^. ^57 -r s^.X ^' ^58 
 
 ^77 X ^ .^ < < > /I 
 
 ^>f 
 
 /I 
 
 U.- 
 
 S87 
 
 688,89 
 
 NT" 1^ Zl ^go /\^ /\ ^ 
 
I'O.S 
 
 ' 
 
 EXERCISE 17.(^98-^112. 
 
 
 ^98^ ^__r/\L/\.^^.J^)DC 
 
 ^c ^r-^"^ f- '^ r ^ ^ ^ ^"^ 
 
 
 ^103 -^ ^ L L L L / \^\^\, J_^ i^ y\ 
 
 > 
 
 J- -^^y^XrN ^y> ^r ^-^ 
 
 y 
 
 — — s^xs^-^ 
 
 
 ^^105,110,112 ,';^;."'~, .^ ^^ ^^"~ '"''" f' 'f f f '' 
 
 •f.f 
 
 ryS.y^\^\■^\t^i^'-^'^^ 
 
 -.'^^ -Cr r .r:..^.n. . "ff-T-r^ 
 
 "f-f 
 
 'f'^^K-Cv.C^^V^'-^-^-^V^"^^ 
 
 ^;^.-r _f. jL ^..^r ^ .^'^. .^_ .^^^r 
 
 
 -^--^^-^-^-.-..L-riVL-/V. 
 
 /. 
 
 S..X .vS V. ^..Ix ^" <^- ^ v^ ^ ^ '^^ ^ 
 
 .-VTi 
 
 
 7-^ 
 
 t.t>^l''-.-l^^^X>°^'j>V ^^^ 
 
 (-— » 
 
 ^.^^ -v^^^X^^/*^'^-- 
 
 ^ 
 
 "^" ^ ""- Co ^-^.^-^^^^-^^'^ 
 
 V 
 
 ■^x'" ■\,>^ ^■-■'^^■^■^ ^'^' ■'^■^ 
 
 
.E .C "^ VX ^^ 
 
 <i_ij> /(~b , 
 
 1 p. <i^_^ 
 
 .. '^ •/ p k, -5 '^ 
 
 <^- 
 
 ^^ 
 
 1 1 
 
 JO. ^-^ 5 
 
 EXERCISE V. (^108-(^I37. 
 
 ^108 
 
 T" 
 
 L- 
 
 ^113 ^ ^ '\ 2_> ^ii4,^,^.i_Vi:^. ^i'5 -O -<) ~n> 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^IIB,IIE 
 
 £ b 
 
 ^. ^. 
 
 \3 ^ 
 
 Kx> 
 
 ^ 
 
 c). 
 
 
 
 ■05 
 
 ^ ^^ 
 
 cTS <j_^ 
 
 (125 
 
 I- "^ N» X .'^ ^ ,^ ■^. ^ 4l2r 
 
 <-e> <<=3 
 
 So ^ X ^i,,'^ .^ ^ "^ i^ ^ X. Vs 
 
 O ^ ^130. ^. 1^' ^:^ ^131 ^ ^J-- ^ ^ 
 
 _^ A ^132 ..^ ^. C ■C> C -r / / > V^ 
 
^ r- ^ ^ ^ a^^- ^--^ -^ 
 rv .rv- .r\ r\ ^ r\- ^~v_ ->, ^ ^ ^ v 
 
 ^ -^ //■ ^137 \T~ 'y^~... *^^-/~ 
 
 EXERCISE VI. (^138-^168. 
 
 ^1} 147, 148 ^^^_ ^^ .._ ^_\'\ \ \. V^ 
 
 ^ c^^. -^^ ^ T..J 1- T ^ r r 1. -s \ X "^ -x 
 
 ^151 _ ^ f .1 'V^. CL "^ -^ ^ "^ D. ^'^2 ^^ 
 
 ^ u ^ < < < ^ -^ -^ ,^ 
 
 \y \X X^ ^..^- -^ _X' •— / -— _^^, ^^. 
 
^^158,162 
 
 Z' \ S^ 5L_ sj^ iL f ji 
 
 I'll 
 
 X 
 
 leo, 162 X "X <\_X X Q ^ 
 
 -/ 
 
 / '^ 
 
 
 164 
 
 V 
 
 \ 
 
 ■V 
 
 .6,8 ^ ^;-^ U ^ ^ -,^ \ ^ 
 
 EXERCISE VII. (^170-^179. 
 
 ^^iro,i73 
 
 t-' t /• ^ / ^ \; X. 
 
 X 
 
 ^^176,178 .T' ^.-r, _^ -r, '' J .''. . J.- J J '' •I '' •' 
 
 J- J- J J. ■/•/ ^V/ "^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ \> ^^' 
 
 c c (T r ^ r- c-^^- ^ ^ <^ y^ ^ ^ ^. 
 r. r^ -^-^ ^-^ ^ _^ i- I- ;-- i S. "^ '^, 
 
 _ -- _ „ „. 3- X, "^ "^ "^ '^ '^. -'^ c- 
 
212 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c.,r 
 
 ^-'^ 
 
 -^ ^ J- .^ >^ 
 
 ^ -y -^ ^ 
 
 ■r .(^ ^- 
 
 l.i i 
 
 -1 
 
 ^.J:-^.^.,c. 
 
 
 
 
 15179 
 
 -- " 
 
 ^ _^ X 
 
 v.^'C ^ 
 
 , 
 
 ,^ \ 
 
 v^. . 
 
 -i ^ 
 
 -^. / ^. J' t_ 
 
 j.-u>^- 
 
 X 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 EXERCISE VIII. 
 
 ^180-^199. 
 
 
 
 (ii}l8C,li?2 — 
 
 = ^ ^ \) 
 
 '^ /? ^ ^ A. 
 
 >-^ 
 
 v_3 ^-;> 
 
 ■'-ri 
 
 . ^ - ^ L. 
 
 .1 L.- ^ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 (^ 
 
 r- .r- 
 
 ":3 
 
 ->i- ^ ^ X. 
 
 V^"^ -C'^- 
 
 r^ .~) 
 
 - ^ 
 
 ^ -. 
 
 t 
 
 ^ 'Xl Ni '^L:. ^ .^ °Xi ^187 
 
 r^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ i 
 
 ■V - 
 
 \ -^ > W ^ . 
 
 -je. r-~J^ 
 
 
 
 i?g 
 
 --- 
 
 ^ - '^ J. ''■ J 
 
 .y^ ^ ^ 
 
 ,/^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -= ^ 
 ■^ 
 
 •^ c__^ . - ^'>I9I 
 
 ^^ ^ 
 
 
 
 1)192 
 
 — 
 
 ^ ^ t- I- X 
 
 ^ X /; ^ 
 
 ^■J 
 
 C 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 ni- 
 
 
 (:? ^ p. :p. 
 
 ^ 
 
 '^ 
 
 ^ ~^' 
 
 ^ 
 
 tJ" el" c/- -^ i- ^ ^ 
 
 
 
 ()I93 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ i- ^ ^' ^ 
 
 '■ \ \ ^ c/- 
 
 1> 
 
 {197, 
 
 193 "^' 
 
 I A 
 
 \ ^ \ ^ 
 
 ^ I 
 
 
 
 ^199 
 
 , '4; 
 
 1 
 
 ■f^-r 
 
 > 
 
 3^' 
 

 EXERCISE 
 
 IX. (^202-^211. 
 
 '"■ 
 
 p04 
 
 '^ ,"-". ^~^ . 
 
 ^~" ._. _. ^^ .^ 
 
 ^^ ^ 
 
 ,^ > ^ 
 
 _, ^^20, Jjy) ( ( LL"^ 
 
 r 
 
 ~^-jj ) ){{ ^^^ r '^ jj)) 
 
 ( ( 
 
 ^^^ r^ 
 
 . (izo6 ' r f~ 
 
 
 ^20? 
 
 J J. ^ •)'),._ 
 
 ).)(>^e^ 
 
 ^. 
 
 ^ 
 
 -i-' ^^ ^_ ,, ^■. :■■ 
 
 ^ ^ '^'^^ 
 
 ■rr 
 
 r r 
 
 = ^ --- ^ 
 
 ^ 3 ^•^■ 
 
 
 J 
 
 V. ^<:l L. 
 
 ■^■■Ut^- ^ ^ 
 
 ^. 
 
 1 
 
 ^.^rr^_ 
 
 ^208 ^^' C "\/--r. ( 
 
 Cr 
 
 -"-r^ §209 '""* 
 
 ^- ^- ^ 
 
 
 ^210 
 
 "" ^ .- 
 
 _^ ^ ^x.^ 
 
 I . 
 
 
 EXERCISE 
 
 X. ^2l2-(^236. 
 
 
 «2I2 
 
 -«*8.^ - ^ ^ ^ 
 
 ' ' — : — S — i — 5. 
 
 " 7~ 7~ 
 
 — 
 
 _ 1" 1- '■ 1' 
 
 
 /-/ 
 
 / ^.,5 
 
 
 ^^ ^^-- vvv^ 
 
 J- J' 
 
 ^'j.j. 
 
 
 
 .v_- <-' 
 
 r-^ /— ' 
 
 ■^ " ^. w. -5 
 
 ■^ ^ -^ ,-J ,_. „ ^-^ 
 
 (T ^ 
 
214 
 C 
 
 r- ^ -^ -> 
 
 
 ,^ ^- <iu 
 
 'V '°> 
 
 \- V V 
 
 
 .c .c ., 
 
 r i^ 
 
 -r r- ^ ,,^. 'V^ -. ^_ 
 
 f <. <: 's: 
 
 5- E- ^ ^ ^ r T- ^. r r ^. r < ■< ^ 
 
 •P ,^" 
 
 \. 
 
 r r 
 
 -^ "S 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 
 Cj 
 
 I- X 
 
 '1 < °\ 
 
 
 J- J- J- J- J- > , , ., ■' J- f- . -P- 3- 3- 
 
 i' r r 
 
 r J- J' 
 
 ^ -^ '^ Z^' S ^ ^ V ^, ^,°^ "^ ^ ^ '^ ^ V ^ V -^ '^ 
 
 ^' <■ ^ ^ ^ ^, -'' ■^" J. ^ "^ ^ ^ . ^ v:. Vi -V. 
 
 ^ .^, , ^ ^ "^ ^ ^ "" 
 
 ,>V' 
 
a p 
 
 
 c- \\ ^. -^. 
 
 ^. ^. '^- 
 
 
 ^ vi '^ o 
 
 \s 
 
 ^ 
 
 J" J. (/• S. i, is ^ ' 
 
 V J. "5. 
 
 (220 ;<■ / ^- -n. r^^ V -^ -1> t. v^ -^. 
 
 ^' ^ ^" ^ < 
 
 
 
 -H' 
 
 ^- -^^' 
 
 ^ ..f<^ r^ r^' 
 
 ^7 ^ rr^ ^. ^ -^ ^- 
 
 /^ /-< /^ /> 
 
 
 •o. 
 
 •o 
 
 -V ^ ^ 1 ^ ^. 
 
2K 
 
 
 -J J ^^^ .^ ^ ^\ 
 
 ^,„^, ^n ^ '^ — 1 ^^ 
 
 6224 
 
 ^225 I-,. I, 1^ ''■ .\ 1-,. ^1 ^■ 
 
 1 
 
 /7 <n- /. /I- ^ ^ 
 
 ll. ll 'I- 
 
 ^- ^- n. \ \ 
 
 ;S22S ^ 
 
 1*228 '■. ~— ]_ ^ 
 
 ^229 V ^ ^ -■ ^ ^_ 
 
 ^232 < ^ . /I ,,.,j^ ^^ ^ ^ ^ XC. W 
 
 ^234 /^ ■C\ ^.^ ^ \A ^ 
 
 ^235 ^■^-^-=r-^<-.'' '^^^ Vr>^V^ 
 
 EXERCISE' XI. ^236-^246. 
 
 ^^240,2+6 > V_ \^-. 'T--- v^-' '■ ^— 
 
 V 
 
 P^ 
 
 .('X ■"'"H 
 
 - V ^- r^ -^^ ^^ 
 
> 
 
 l^ 
 
 
 
 ^■ 
 
 
 .y \ ^^ ^ 
 
 iviA 
 
 .r\ 
 
 -]' ^ 
 
 •^L^ V---, 
 
 \- 
 
 '^^^ j: 
 
 ^^43,244^24-6 / . ^ --^ 
 
 P« - -^ ^ ^ C>- ^ ^, ^ ^ >- y /^ 
 
 EXERCISE XII. ^247-^270. 
 ^247. '^^ X ■^. ^|. . -\ "^ '^ '\- V V -X 
 
 '\ 'V '\ '\ . . 
 
 ^ "^ X XT. ^ .L. ^".^ 
 
 "X 
 
 ^- > 
 
 -^.. -^. 
 
 n^. 
 
 ^248 "^^ '^' .S^ '^. "> 
 
 ■^. c v.. 
 
 
218 
 
 V 
 
 \r 
 
 •^' ,^ ^266 ^. \..} 
 C^. \ n. '^- r^' V- 
 
 
 J- 
 
 .^267 
 
 \_ ^269 ^ .vJ r * A. ^> 
 
 k, ^ \^/^ ^^ U. V^ ^"^ i ^> ^> 
 
 rn r^ t V . ^ ^ "^' ~^' '^ "^ "^ "^ 
 
 EXERCISE Xin. <^27l_^284 
 
 ^276 ^^^ ^^v r^ r^ n cn '^ ^ 
 ^ a^ (^ ^ -^ ^ -^ 
 
 ^-^ 
 
 \ ^ 
 
 
 (J284, (t.) 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 '~:i- 
 
 X 
 
219 
 
 ^ Xr /^ •^^ i\ H i.\> L u u U 
 
 i^ ^- . .^. „,. r ^ ..^ ^ 1; 
 
 -<L 
 
 V . (2.) 
 
 y~. 
 
 
 J- 
 
 ■^^- °r 
 
 \^ ^. .^. .^ 
 
 3 
 
 (5.) V V )- c 
 
 u 
 
 ^- V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 EXERCISE XIV. {^ 
 
 285 
 
 -(,S289. 
 
 \52 
 
 85, (1.) .^- -X^ X i^ 
 
 K 
 
 L,-^ "-^ 
 
 yv_^ ^ 
 
 . -^. (2^ ,N». 
 
 \K 
 
 ^V ^^^/-No 
 
 ^\, 
 
 ^K 
 
 .N ^N. "^"^ - («■) 
 
 L 
 
 / "^ "^ -^ ^- 
 
 (S 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ A X.,^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ./ ^ (0 -^ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ ^V. "^^ |,-^^^ 
 
 'S 
 
 ^r _/- ^-r y^ 
 
 J'r 
 
 . (7^ 
 
 .. ^- ^- • V ^- -^ 
 
 ^. 
 
 ^-. v~^ X .. 
 
 "\: 
 
 \ ^■ 
 
 ^ V ^., ^. ^. 
 
 V 
 
 X (8.) ^^ ^/^ 
 
 ■^-- 
 
 -, r^ 
 
 K^ ^^ T?. ^^ 
 
 v 
 
 ■ ■(»■)> n 
 
-^■^ L ' 
 
 €) 
 
 (19 G -^ . (12) .^ -y '^ ^j --^ v^ 
 
 ^^ ^ ^ ■_ ^^ '^^•'^~-(2■3-^^■ 
 ^ ^V- \ tt > v.x.^-\>L\' 
 (s.J ^ — • . U U U -^^ /. V. x^, Na ^ . ^■ 
 V ^_^ "^ -j^ ^. A^ ^v^ vs .^ _^- ^_^ 
 
 -^.,— A^ ^. (4.J 7 ^. ^ ^. -.■ 
 
 ^(289 b ^ 3;^ ^ ^- ^ ^^;l I J. 
 
 EXERCISE XV. ,^5298-^340. 
 pi [^317] °, ^ ^ ^ C \ I, .^., ^ 
 
 o Q ■ P" fi a— "a — (f~^ I-' "^ ^ M— i^ 
 
 ,r^ 
 
 r" 
 
 \o 
 

 
 
 
 
 i:\ 
 
 / ^ ^^ 
 
 ^ ^ k^ ^ "^ 
 
 fi— ■ 
 
 O" 
 
 T "^ 
 
 ^S02 O ^ P 
 
 Q_5 cr^ 
 
 ^ ^ C| 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 — o -p 
 
 1 V> 1,5303 P 
 
 1 \ •-' 
 
 ^ \ f 
 
 ^ 
 
 1? 
 
 . ^304 
 
 ^^^ \ CL 
 
 b \. -^ 
 
 <^ C^ (^ 
 
 'P 
 
 ^~^ k- 
 
 ^305 ^ (T 
 
 o-^_ ^ ^ 
 
 [^318] ^ 
 
 3 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 r r r \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^306 r ^ 
 
 \ ^ ^ '^ 
 
 ^^ ^'^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 r ^ 
 
 G^ ^ e 007 i 1 ; "^ 
 
 N ^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ) f^ 
 
 r °^ ^ ^ 
 
 ^-^ (}308 "^ 
 
 ^. r 
 
 r 
 
 r /" 
 
 ^309 "^ ' 
 
 1 1 q ^ 
 
 ^ ^310 
 
 .-^ 
 
 
 ru ^^'" " 
 
 
 L I / 
 
 c^ 
 
 cJ 
 
 (. ^ 
 
 ^^ ^ 
 
 \S3I2 ^ (- ^ -^ C 
 
 v^ 
 
 J ' 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 ^ ^ ^ n^ \ G ^ 
 
 > 'ife j^r? 
 
 
 
 
 (}3I3 ~^ 
 
 J J J J 
 
 J ^ ^ 
 
 Z'/, 
 
 ^J 
 
 ^v^^ 
 
 ( ^^ - 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 — 
 
 ^- 
 
 ^^ 
 
 rr- 
 
 
 "^^rr 
 
 ^ 
 
 )I4 
 
 - - 
 
 '',',. 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 I- i^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ ^ '" •- 
 
 
 ^ ^ .5315 
 
 -' 
 
 J J 
 
^ u i ^ 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 •^ <i 
 
 ^S3^3 '\ -^ J!^ ■^ 
 
 -u 
 
 
 434-0 
 
 "A 
 
 N— 1 C ^ ^32S .^ ^^ 
 
 ^34-2 ^ _ ^ ; T |J34S 
 
 4344- „ 634-5 L >- " / 
 
 E I t 
 
 ^346 
 \i347 
 
 
 / 
 
 ^348 ^S V- 
 
 -\^J^-i 
 
i:i'3 
 
 ai enc^way^ S\\ for G/reeSflui. 
 
 
 /,x ^^ ,_/f —. ^1 ^ ^ t 
 
 ^ v^^ ^'^^ ^ ^>; \_r ( ^ ^, 
 
 
 
 [ ^'^ 
 
 ^ '{^^ , C— , 5 ■ 5 '^' ^^ ■< JHoeaulif. 
 
 
 (Jioe liy k [lie lOonshiuL. 
 
 ^ ""' ' -v^ '-^' ^^ ^ V.' 
 
 °-^ ^- ^ ^.^^- ^-^ i r ^~^^_ 
 
2Ji 
 
 \ 
 
 ( 
 
 c 
 
 J; /t 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 Gifie arouse -IIy quo [fie JJ( 
 
 
 a- 
 
 c 
 
 -.'J- 
 
 
 i_ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 t ^ 
 
 v.-^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 1_ u 
 
 
 
 
 ^ , - .' 'LI 
 

 ■^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 V 
 
 I 
 
 ' \- 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 ^ ' 
 
 v 
 
 ~^ 
 
 3 
 
 ^. \v 
 
 ^^, ~^ \t 
 
 -x 
 
 ^ 
 
 'L. 
 
 ^ 
 
 <--<.- 
 
 ^., 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 C 
 
 X. 
 
 V 
 
 
 (L 
 
1 ^ Jv^^ 1 "^ 
 
 3 (^. ' 
 
 
 
 / -^ 
 
 Y 
 
 "V 
 
 L ,^ 
 
 
 T^uski-. 
 
 fry — 
 
 X 
 
 r 
 
 . / 
 
 V « 
 
 \ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 <U 
 
 f 
 
 )^ , 
 
 
 A 1^^ 
 
 
 ^S -1 
 
 ~"^IU 
 
 r 
 
 W 
 
 %> ' 
 
 X 
 
 ^.. 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -/\ 
 
 V ^ - 
 

 
 
 
 2-'7 
 
 
 
 ^. 
 
 ^. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ....12 , .. 
 
 10 „ 
 
 10 
 
 ^ 
 
 - . 
 
 .._12. ... 
 
 11 — 
 
 11 
 
 
 -^.__-.,..- 
 
 -.--12 -.. 
 
 11 — 
 
 11 
 
 ) ^^ 
 
 - -X 
 
 ^ _ . 
 
 ^^ ^ / ^ " 
 
 ' i- ^ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 r _^-X - 
 
 -^ " \ 
 
 t - ^ ^ 
 
 
 
 
 ~i 
 
 ^/. 
 
 \ -, C^ 
 
 
 /, ^( , ^) 
 
 3 4 , 
 
 ! ^ 
 
 ^■\7 ^ 
 
 f^ ( ^-^ , ^ ^ ^ 
 
 / f..^ 
 
 .■^^ 
 
 ^ ^- 'X 
 
 - ■ — - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ --X 
 
 -^^ 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ ^ ^ ^ 
 
 3 
 
 -^>' 
 
 t. 
 
 " i. ^ 
 
 ,-/ ^ '^- 
 
 vJT, 
 
 ^,- 
 
 
 
 '= '^ '^^ 
 
"-( 
 
 
 
 
 .J 
 
 L 
 
 ) 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 I / 
 
 
 ( 
 
 ^ - ^^ ^ ^ 
 
 acninery. 
 
 — \ i zo . 
 
 L. ( 
 
 <L. _ 
 
 k^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^"^-^ 
 
 v^ ^-v 
 
 r^ 
 
 x... 
 
 ^ 
 
^1 X "X^ ^ ^' 
 
 "Z^n 
 
 'V. 
 
 
 v^ . 
 
 v^ /, ^^ ^ 
 
 
 ;j ""-^ 
 
 ^ - ^ ^ - . ) ^ -^ 
 ^ ^ ( 
 
 /^^ o. 
 
 ■^ 
 
 • '^ -I 
 
 ~~l /• 
 
 ^ 
 
 ..^. ^ /I 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 ^^ c- ^ ^ 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^", ^ 
 
i 
 
 
 ^ c ^ 
 
 V 
 
 u 
 
 1^ 
 
 / 
 
 ( I 
 
 ) 
 
 
 ' ' ^-^ .^^' 
 
 \. ^ ^ 
 
 r 
 
 
 \ 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^. 
 
 <u. 
 
 r^ 
 
 ( 
 
 ) 
 
 7 ^\ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 A 
 
 "< 
 
 
 (^ Ir- ^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ; C ^ ^ .. / 
 
 
 / 
 
 1 n ' * 
 
 
/ \^ U f " /( ' \ ^ \- 
 
 I 
 
 ~\ / — t 
 
 -^ 
 
 f - ^ . ^ 
 
 A 
 
 
 r 
 
 -f\. 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 / 
 
 U> ( 
 
 -v^ 
 
 
 /? ^^'^ V^' 
 
 
 \ 
 
 } 
 
 
 U ^ ^ ^ i«^. 
 
 "^ 
 
 ~\ 
 
 "TV^ 
 
 \^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^-^^ -^ ( 
 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 ^b ^ ^- ^ ^ 
 
 v.). 
 
 
 U/ 
 
 '^ 
 
232 
 
 1^ ^ (^ 
 
 ^<Z_^ U 1^ 9 
 
 \^(L r "^ ^ °^' -^ — ^ - \ ^ '^ - - ^ 
 
 T - 
 
 
 .\ 
 
 "^ M^ ' K ( 
 
 n 
 
 \ 
 
 -^^^ 
 
 c r 
 
 
 n x/o 
 
 ^-2- 
 
 ^ 
 
 L 
 
 i- 
 
 U 
 
 
 X, ^^ ^9 
 
 , c rj / ^ .-^ ( 
 
 \ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 \ 
 
 ^- ( ^ ( f v^ S ^ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 n 
 
233 
 
 
 M -1 ^^'^^^^ "^ " t'^- 
 
L',-i4 
 
 r 
 
 N ^ -^ • ^ 
 
 ■— 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^1 
 
 'V r ^. ^ 
 
 h 
 
 1^ 
 
 u 
 
 1 ( 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 ><_ 
 
 \ ^ <^ ^ ^ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 r:? '^ =^ 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 ^ U-^ ^ 
 
 v^ 
 
 Q- 
 
 \ 
 
 
 -7. ^ V^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 •^ 
 
 l^ 
 
 ^ « 
 
 V-o 
 
 -/\ 
 
 k 
 
 '\ 
 
 A 
 
 1- / - 
 
 r^ 
 
 -^ " 
 
 dki 
 

 23S 
 
 -V- ^ ~> / \. / \^-. ; V 
 
 ^/i/^4 
 
 ^y^^^^^^i^ "^^/rj ^ 
 
 ^ '^ 
 
 /z^ y 
 
 
 ^ &/. f^.^^M^A^. \ 
 
 V.^ 
 
 ^ \ ^ \ 
 
 ' 
 
 ^^^ A..^ ^\^ ^ 
 
 ^-\ 
 
 /TV 
 
 
 -^ 'X~ 
 
 
 1„ r ^ v__ ^ 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 r --^ , '-^ " - 
 
 
 1 ' -^-_.' 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 - 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 . 
 
 
 o ■ ■ 
 
 
\_o 
 
 ^ 
 
 61 I --^ / 
 
 (^ 
 
 ( ^ y^ ^ 
 
 ^v^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 >^ 
 
 V- 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 r" 
 
 "^ 
 
 V 
 
 
 / ( 
 
 __ 1 
 
 i ^^^- 
 
 u^ 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 \ 
 
 --u^ ^^ 
 
 -^ 1-* 
 
 f ( 
 
 
 \ ^/ vc^ 
 
 ( 
 
 x ) 
 
 Xi% 
 
 «- " — — , . 
 
 ■^_-, 
 
 N 
 
 %L. 
 
 f ' v.. ^ ^— 
 
 
LESSONS 
 
 IN 
 
 PHONOGEAPHY: 
 
 A COMPLETE GUIDE 
 
 TO A 
 
 Practical laowlelp of tlie Art of PloiiopaBlif. 
 
 BY JAMES E. MUNSON, 
 
 AUTHOR OF THE COSEPLETK FHOKOGHAFHSB, ETC. 
 
 PREFATORY. 
 
 The following Lessons in Phonography are substantially in ac- 
 cordance with the plan adopted by the author in his classes at the 
 Mercantile Library in the city of Kew York. They have been 
 prepared for the especial use of those who have no teacher ; and 
 if they are faithfully and implicitly followed, they will surely lead 
 to a thorough knowledge of the art of Phonography. They will 
 also prove a very valuable assistant to the teacher of Phonography, 
 as they will relieve him almost entirely from all labor, except the 
 mere revision and correction of the written exercises of his pupils. 
 In length they are adapted to a course where the class ifleets twice 
 a week. Where daily lessons are given, each lesson, when prac- 
 ticable, may be divided into two. The writing exercises may 
 sometimes be found a little fuller than can conveniently be used 
 in class ; but they can be easily abridged. Lesson XVIII. may be 
 distributed among adjoining lessons when the teacher wishes to 
 reduce the number for use in a course of twenty lessons. 
 
 On the last page will be found a key to a few of the first words 
 of the Engraved Reading Exercises of the Complete Phonographer. 
 
 Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1868, by Oaklbt & Mason, in 
 the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District of New York. 
 
2 LB880N8 IN PHONOGEAPHT. 
 
 All the reference marks in figures, whether in brackets or not, 
 unless otherwise expressed, are to the sections of The Complete 
 Phonographer. Where two numbers are given with the word 
 " to" between, both the numbers are included. 
 
 The price of The Complete Phonographer is |3 ; and learners 
 will find it to their advantage to order it through their nearest 
 bookseller. But in case that is inconvenient, it may be obtained 
 by mail, post-paid, on receipt of price, from the publishers, Oakley 
 & Mason, 31 MuiTay Street, New York. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 The first thing for the learner of Phonography to do, is to 
 thoroughly commit to memory the consonant-signs in the Table on 
 page 18; so that when he sees a phonograph he may instantly know 
 its name and power, and when he hears' its name or power, he can 
 instantly write the proper phonographic sign. 
 
 The best way to do this is to learn to give the names of the signs 
 when all of the Table is covered except the column of Phonographs ; 
 and then to write the signs when the Phonographs are covered. 
 
 It is better in the first lesson, however, to only memorize the first 
 sixteen phonographs. The Lesson then will be : 
 
 Memorize first sixteen Phonographs in Table on page 18. 
 
 Learn §§ 19 to 33. Eead §§ 35 to 30. Learn §§ 31 to 37. 
 
 Memorize the two second-place long vowels (dot and dash) in 
 Vowel Scale on page 37, taking care not to confound the sounds of 
 the phonographic vowel-signs with the names of the letters of the 
 ordinary alphabet. 
 
 Learn §§ 41 to 43. 
 
 Eead all words on page 205, Imes 5, 6, and 7, in which the first 
 sixteen consonant-signs and the two given vowels are used [48]. 
 
 Write the following words phonographically, letting the con- 
 sonant stems rest on the line : 
 
 Ache [41], oak, gay, ate {or eight), oat, toe (pr tow), aid, ode {or 
 owed), day {or dey), doe {or dough), age, jay, Joe, ape, pay, Poe, 
 Abe, bay {or bey), bow {or beau), show, ace, say, so {or sew), oath, 
 they, though, oaf, foe.' 
 
LESSONS IN PHONOGRAPHY. 6 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 Memoeize remainder of consonant-signs in Table. 
 
 Write phonographically the following -words : 
 
 N'ly {or neigh), no (or know), aim, may, mow (to cut grass), ail 
 (see § 23 a), lay, low, air (use stem Er, and see § 46, 1.), oar, ray (use 
 stem Ree, and see § 23 b), hay, hoe, yea, way {or weigh), woe. 
 
 Read remaining words in lines 5, 6, and 7, on page 305. 
 
 Learn §§ 59 to 63. 
 
 Write § 439. 
 
 Review §§ 31 to 87. 
 
 Memorize remainder of vowel-signs on page 27. 
 
 Learn §§ 38 to 40. Read §§ 44 to 47. 
 
 Read first four lines of Exercise III., page 206. 
 
 Write the following words phonographically, observing to place 
 the consonant stem in each case in the first, second, or third position 
 [§§ 61, 62], according as the vowel-sign of the word is of the fiff'st, 
 second, or third place [§ 36] : 
 
 Caw, Ooe, key, coo, gay, egg, at, ought {or aught), ate, toe, too, 
 eat, add, daw, aid, doe, Dee, etch, each, age, jaw, pa, paw, ape, ope, 
 pay, bah, bay, be, ash, shah, show, she, shoe, saw, ace, say, see, ease, 
 oath, thee, fee, eve, on, no, know, am, aim, may, me, all, law, ale, 
 low, eel, lee, oar, ear, raw, row, rue [oo], hay, hoe, who, yea, you, 
 way, woe, woo. 
 
 Read the last two lines on page 206. 
 
 In writing the following words containing two vowel-sounds, 
 place the consonant stem in the position indicated by the accented 
 vowel : 
 
 Echo, eighty, ado, eddy, Opie, abbey, Anna, Annie, arrow [Er], 
 era, Erie, airy, array, allay, ally, Eli, essay, easy, assay, Emma, obey, 
 ashy, away. 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 Read §§ 48 to 50. Learn § 54. 
 
 Memorize the Table of Diphthongs, page 81. 
 
 Learn §§ 56 to 58. 
 
 Read, on page 207, lines 13, 14, and first five words on line 15. 
 
 Write the following words : 
 
 Cow [54], cue, guy, tie, toy, out, die, eyed, due, chew, joy, jew, 
 pie, pew, by, boy, bow, shy, sigh, ice, soy, sow, sue, eyes, thew, thy, 
 thou, fie, few, vie, vow, view, nigh, my, mow, mew, lie, isle, oU, 
 owl, lieu, ire, hour, rye, row, high, how; adieu, avow, annoy, anew, 
 ahoy, ioy, ivy, oily, alloy, allow. 
 
4 LESSONS IN PHONOGEAPHT. 
 
 Learn §§ 63 to 69 and 34. 
 
 Eead Exercise II., pages 305 and 306, pronouncing the names of 
 the phonographs in each combination. 
 Write phonographically § 430, pages 139 and 140. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 Learn §§ 70 to 73. 
 
 Eead page 307, omitting last two lines, and parts heretofore read. 
 
 Eead §§ 74 to 94. 
 
 Eead last two lines on page 307. 
 
 Write the following words : 
 
 Cap [6-3, 70], coop, cake, cook, cog, catch, cab, cube, comb, calm, 
 gawk, gog, gage, game, tack, take, took, touch, top, tame, dike, deep, 
 death, dime, chalk, cheek, chub, jack, joke, job, jam, pack, epoch, 
 peg, pipe, pang, palm, back, buck, book, bag, big, batch, bob, babe, 
 bath, both, thick, thumb, fop, vogue, vouch, vim, nack, nag, name. 
 Mack, make, match, much, mouth, mouthe, maim, hack, hatch, 
 hum, yam, walk, awake, wag, wipe, web. 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 Learn §§ 95, 98, 103 to 110. Eead §§ 96, 97, 99 to 103. 
 
 Eead page 308 and first seven lines of page 309. 
 
 Write the following words : 
 
 Sack [llOJ, skow, sake, sat, sight, stay, suit, city, sad, side, said, 
 seed, such, sage, soap, south, soothe, safe, save, sang, sing, sign, 
 snow, sun, sunny, same, sway ; cause, case, gaze, ties, its, days, 
 chose, choose, joys, ages, ashes, shoes, thaws, thus, face, voice, 
 views, nice, niece, news, mouse, aims. Miss, house, yes, use, wise ; 
 sacks, sages, space, since. 
 
 Scape, scope, seeking, seating, supping, safety, subdue, savage, 
 sank, snap. Smith, smoke, swim ; coyness, Thomas, deduce, docks, 
 checks, pathos, box, famous, notice, hacks, yams. 
 
 Cask [103], tasty, deceit ; excite, accede, gasp, task, desk, passage, 
 bask; causing, gazing, teasing, deceive, chosen, Joseph, passive, 
 besom, fusty, visage, insight, mask, hasp, wisp ; facing, evasive, 
 unsung ; phasma, massive, massing, mason, hissing. Wesson ; nicely. 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 Learn §§ 111 to 137. 
 Eead, on page 309, lines 8 to 14. 
 , Write the following words : 
 Chaos [111] pious, science; cease [113], sauc^, says, saucy; ask 
 
LESSONS IN PHONOGEAPHT. 5 
 
 [113],'asp, assume; zany [114], Czar, Isaac; gassy [115], posse, fussy, 
 say, spicy, daisy, Vesey, noisy; exhaust, possessed; cases [118], 
 causes, gazes, teases, doses, dozes, chooses, faces,' vases, masses, 
 nooses, senses, spices; season [130], society, season. 
 
 Stock [123, 135], stake, state, staid, stood, step, stab, staff, stave, 
 stung, stem ; cast, coast, gust, tossed, dust, chest, just, post, posed, 
 boast, bust, assist, zest, fast, vest, nest, mast, most, hissed, used, 
 waste. 
 
 Castor [123, 125], toaster, duster, Chester, juster, pastor, boaster, 
 faster, roaster, muster, waster ; excesses [137], recesses, costs, gusts, 
 chests, castors, toasters, posters, musters. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 LBAEN§§128.tol37. 
 
 Eead last three lines on page 309 and first six on page 310. 
 
 Write the following words : 
 
 Ash [139], she, Ashby, cash, push, gnash, mush ; tissue [130], 
 bushy ; shake [131], shoddy, sheep, shame. 
 
 Elm [133], alike, elk, Illinois, keel, goal, tall, toll, dell, peal, bale, 
 bile, boil, fail, vale, nell, meal, mule. 
 
 Lay [133], law, ale, sale, cell, soul, sly, sallow, lace, loss, lies, eels, 
 alas ; lack, like, log, latch, lodge, lap, leap, lobe, lash, loathe, laugh, 
 live, olive, lung, lamb, loom, alway; galley, tally, delay, below, 
 shallow, fellow, Nelly, mellow, rally, hollow, waylay, willow ; 
 deluge, pulp, bulb, filch. 
 
 Arm [185], ark, orb, air, era, or, Ira, arrow; tar, door, par, poor, 
 beer, sheer, fair, lore, soar, store ; ream, rhyme, Aram. 
 
 Eack [136], rag, rap, ripe, rib, rash, rouge, wrong, ring, race, 
 rouse, ruby ; carry, tory, cherry, perry, marrow, hurry, weary, sorry, 
 story ; wreath, reach, arch, urge ; curb [137], tardy, cherub. 
 
 LESSON VIII. 
 
 Leakn §§ 139 to 164 
 
 Eead Exercise VI., page 310, down to middle of line 5, on page 
 211. 
 
 Write § 468, and the following words : 
 
 Claw [140, 141, 147], clay, clue, glow, gray, tray, Troy, dry, dray, 
 odor, play,. pry, blow, brow, shrew, usher, throw, either, flay, fray, 
 evil, owner, error, only. 
 
 Cackle [153], cable, galsle, tackle, tunnel, deploy, devil, chapel, 
 channel, juggle, papal, buckle, bevel ; copper, gainer, teacher 
 
6 LESSONS IN PHONOGEAPHT. 
 
 dinner, poker, betray, figure, voucher, negro, major, locker, archer, 
 robber, Henry, yoker, walker, winner. 
 
 Caudle [153]', ripple, talker, chopper, jobber, peacefully, registry; 
 bushel [154], oflScial, officially. 
 
 Call [156], coarse, care, tell, dear, charm, appear, barber, full, 
 near, nor, real, hail, yell, wail, war, wire. 
 
 Cycle [158, 163], settle, sagely, supply, safely, seeker, stray, spray, 
 sober, suffer, sooner, stoker, stager, display, vestry [163], extra, 
 pastry, rostrum. 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 Lbaen §§ 165 to 179. 
 
 Read from middle of Ime 5, page 211, to end of Exercise VII. 
 
 Write the following words : 
 
 Quake [165], quick, quoth, quail, quest, twist, quench, quaker, 
 squab, bequest, require, esquire. 
 
 Unscrew [168], inscribe, unstrung, unsociable, unseemly, enslave, 
 insoluble. 
 
 Cough [170], cave, tough, deaf, chafe, pave, puflf, beef, rave, scoff, 
 surf, bluff, grave, drove, prove, strive, starve. 
 
 Cane [176], gown, tan, dine, chain, gin, June, pan, bone, shun, 
 assign [113], thin, than, fan, vein, noun, man, line, arraign, ran, 
 hen, yon, wane ; cabin, demon, pigeon, undone ; scan, stain, span, 
 soften, swain; clan, crown, frown, spleen, strown. 
 
 Cough, coffee [179], chaff, chaffy, tine, tiny, pen, penny, ftm, 
 funny, money, briny, crony, China. 
 
 LESSON X. 
 
 Leaen §§ 180 to 300. 
 
 Read Exercise VIII., page 213. 
 
 "Write the following words : 
 
 Caution [180; 183], action, edition, option, fashion, nation, motion, 
 lotion, erasion, ration ; caption, admission, mansion. 
 
 Causation [187], decision, position, physician, sensation, deposi- 
 tion, succession. 
 
 Actor [188], cater, totter, patter, daughter, batter, scatter, platter, 
 spider, gather. 
 
 Caves [193], coughs, paves, raves, shines, fines, fans, nouns, lens, 
 actions, fashions, actors, gathers. 
 
 Canes [193], gains, towns, dines, dance, chains, joins, runs ; 
 dances, pounces ; danced, pounced ; punster. 
 , Transpose [196], transaction, Pennsylvania, chancery. 
 
 Accessions [198], positions, possession, physicians, transitions 
 
LESSONS IN PHONOGEAPHY. 7 
 
 Advance [199], dining, punish, fanning, assigning [113], running, 
 waning, yawning, feigning. 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 
 Lbaun §§ 301 to 311. 
 
 Read Exercise IX., page 313. In reading the unvocalized stems, 
 give the name and position. 
 
 Write all the double-length curved stems in the three positions 
 [304, 305, 306] ; and the following words: 
 
 Shatter [301, 307], shutter, shudder, oyster [113], Easter, theatre, 
 thither, fatter, father, feature, voter, nature, mother, latter, Luther, 
 orator, water, waiter ; Easter-day, motherly, invader ; softer, smother ; 
 flatter, holder, martyr. 
 
 Lender [308], slender, fender, asunder, flounder, mender, tor- 
 mentor, thunder. 
 
 Matters [809], mothers, slanders, thunders, tormentors, cylinders. 
 
 "Write the following repeated straight stems in the three positions 
 [311] : Pee-Pee, Bee-Bee, Tee-Tee, Dee-Dee, Chay-Chay, Jay-Jay, 
 Kee-Ree. 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 Lbarn §§ 313 to 318. 
 
 Read Exercise X., page 313, down to and includiug three lines on 
 page 315. 
 
 "Write the following words : 
 
 Act [313, 318], caught, ached, got, gout, taught, tight, doubt, date, 
 deed, chat, jade, pat, apt, pate, pout, bat, bate, shout, iced [58, 113], 
 east, oozed, fat, void, vote, ant, not, made, lot, art, rat, hat, yacht, 
 wight, wait, wade, wood. 
 
 LESSOlSr XIII. 
 
 Leabn §§ 319 to 335. 
 
 Read, commencing with line 4, page 315, to end of Exercise X. 
 
 Write the Jbllowing words : 
 
 Catched [330], copied, calmed, gamed, tact, talked, docket, 
 chalked, jammed, poked, shamed, thicket, maimed, lodged, argued, 
 racked, hacked, yoked, awaked; cottage, active, native, waiting; 
 sacked, sided, speed, saved, smote, salt; acts [318], gets, doubts, 
 bites, thoughts, lights, arts, rats, hates, woods; clad, glad, piled, 
 blade, flight, float ; cried, grade, treat, fright, word ; coughed, 
 chafed ; kind, count, gained, taint, dent, faint, thinned, mend, hand, 
 wend; caution* d, fashioned ; coact [321], cooked, locked, cracked ; 
 octagon [333], catacomb ; acted [334], guided, fated, shouted ; 
 
8 LESSONS IN PH0N06EAPHT. 
 
 dotted [235], dated, waited; fashionist [326], elocutionist; giddy 
 [338], tidy, duty, pity, meadow; cavity [339], gravity, cruelty, 
 stability; carried [234], tallied, torrid, borrowed, married; gulled, 
 gullet [335], toiled, toilet, pilot, mart. 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 Learn §§ 386 to 346. 
 
 Read Exercise XL, pages 216 and 217. 
 
 Write the following words : 
 
 Hurrahing [340] ; weighing, saying, laity, grayish ; seeing, deist ; 
 hygeist ; lago ; apiary, foliage ; hygiene, minutise ; cassia, alias, 
 piazza, Pavia, Arabia ; Dieppe, Henrietta, audience ; envying, vary- 
 ing ; pawing, sawing, thawing ; showy, growing, snowj' ; wooing, 
 Louis, cooing, rueing; carryall; olio, cameo, folio; idiom, union, 
 idiot; opium, various, Fabius, curious; Eabii [248], Genii; Hone- 
 oye ; eying [344], vying, sighing, drying ; boyish, toying, coyish, 
 moiety; bowing, vowing, avowing; dewy, viewing, vacuity; the- 
 ology [345], Judea, Boaz, chaos, theory, Owen, poem, mayor, riot, 
 diem, fuel, vial, avowal, jewel. 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 Leabn §§ 247 to 249, and 580. Read §§ 250 to 264. Learn 
 §§ 265 to 370. 
 
 Read Exercise XH., pages 217 and 218. 
 
 Write the following words : 
 
 Hope [347], hip, whoop, hub, half, have, heave, heaped, haft, 
 halved, hapless, habitation ; perhaps, Alhambra, Abraham, behave. 
 
 Laudably [365], agreeably, likely, calmly, lazily, lovingly, kingly, 
 strongly, boyishly, madly, badly, nicely, jelly. 
 
 Plenary [366], sundry, robbery, sm-gery, archery, mockery, 
 slippery, watery. 
 
 Creature [269], lecture, culture, rapture, feature, nature, juncture, 
 adventure, moisture, texture. 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 Read §§ 371 to 374, 
 
 Learn §§ 375, 376, 283 to 284. 
 
 Read Exercise XIII., pages 318 and 319. 
 
 Write the following words : 
 
 Liberal [276], illiberal, limitable, illimitable, legibly, illegibly, 
 legal, illegal, mutable, immutable, modest, immodest, navigable, un- 
 navigable, nerve, unnerve, reparable, irreparable, rational, inationaL 
 
LESSONS IN PHONOGKAPHT. 9 
 
 Concoct [384], concur, contend, complain, cumbrance; incom- 
 petent, encumbered, unconflned, recognize, reconsider, decompose, 
 discompose, circumspect. 
 
 Forbade, foreclose, former, forfei* forward. 
 
 Magnanimity, magnesia, magnetic, magnetism, magnificent, mag- 
 nitude. 
 
 Self-abasement, self-love, self-esteem, seMsh ; self-same, self-com- 
 mand, self-conceit. 
 
 Withal, withdraw, withhold, withstand, withstood, within. 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 
 Lbaen §§ 385 to 389. 
 
 Read Exercise XIV., pages 319 and 330. __ 
 
 Write the following words : 
 
 Demandable [285], fashionable, defensible, sensible, forcibly. 
 
 Amicableness, teachableness, suitableness, plausibleness, agree- 
 ableness. 
 
 Whoever, soever, however, whichever [CHfi]. 
 
 Gleeful, shameful, careful, wrongful, joyful. The stem Ef is also 
 sometimes used for " ful," as in wonderful, handful. 
 
 Dreadfulness, peacefulness, carefulness, painfulness, usefulness. 
 
 Heedlessness, carelessness, thoughtlessness, fearlessness. 
 
 Patting, betting, trotting, meeting, chanting ; meetings, pleadings. 
 
 Fundamental, regimental, instrumental, instrumentality. 
 
 Theology, phraseology, doxology. 
 
 Itself, myself 
 
 Friendship, hardship, lordship, worship. 
 
 Howsoever, whosoever, whichsoever [CH'-sV]. 
 
 Clanked, ranked, function ; post-master, postpone, testimony, 
 trustful ; vamped, limpt, cramped, presumption, prompter, pumps, 
 clamps, glimpsed ; misstate, misshape ; fact [387], reject, inspect, 
 exist; dramatic; tangle, strangle ; subscription; ranger, messenger ; 
 tamper, temperance; substantial [388], invention, geographical; 
 assignment [389], identical. 
 
 LESSON XVIII. 
 Read §§ 378 to 380. 
 
 Learn at § 381 the signs for the following words : 
 
 Can, come, could, go, gave, give-n, at, what, took, had, do, did, 
 
 charge, change, which, large, advantage, part, opportunity, object, 
 
 but, Je, shall, should, was, these, thank, worth, think, that, them, 
 
 with, form, for, if, have, ever, along, long, among, thing, own, any, 
 
10 LESSONS IN PH0N06EAPHY. 
 
 from, well, will, her, here, our, are, were, where, he, him, who-m, 
 beyond, yet, you, why, without, when, would, as, has, is, his, an, 
 and, a, the, awe, owe, eye. 
 Learn §§ 293 to 397. 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 Lbarn §§ 298 to 306, and 318. 
 
 Bead Exercise XV., page 330, down to and mcluding three phrases 
 on line 8, page 331 ; using the key on page 191 when necessary. 
 
 Write the following phrases : 
 
 As can [301, 318], as what, as had, as shall, as that, as have, as 
 long, as well ; has come, has had, has ever, has long, has our ; can 
 his, at as, what has, had as, which is, show us, she is, from his, 
 among us, such as, same as ; as only, as able ; through us, either is, 
 only as ; has about, has thought, has not, about as, let us. 
 
 Is sick [303], has sought, has said, as such, is soon; cause us, use 
 his ; as his, has his, as has, has as, is as, is his. 
 
 As it ought [303], as it had, as to which, as it should, has to be, 
 as it may ; give us the, show us the, thinks the ; as the, has the, as 
 it, as to, is It, as it is, is it as. 
 
 As there can [304], as there ought, because there is, unless there is, 
 as there, as there Is. 
 
 Can all [306], at all, it will, each will, which wiU, that will, them 
 all, if all, among all, on all, in all, he will. 
 
 LESSON XX. 
 
 Lbaen '§§ 807 to 314. 
 
 Bead, commencing on page 221, at fourth phrase, line 8, down to 
 within five phrases of bottom of page. 
 
 Write the following phrases : 
 
 Can our [307], could our, at or, at our, to our, two or, shall oui" 
 should our, these are, in or, on or, all our, who are, we are. 
 
 Can we [308], could we, ought we, but we, do we. 
 
 Can you [167, 309], were you, could you, do you, had you, did 
 you, by your. 
 
 In some [310], in slavery, in his usual, in surmounting. 
 
 Can have [311], could have, out of, what if, change of, part of, 
 shall have [175], they have. 
 
 At an [312], by an, of an, in an, you and, her own, our own, have 
 been, you have been, other than, more than, rather than, faster than. 
 
 Can there [313], at their, shall there, should there, on theu", among 
 their, may their, all other, would there. 
 
LESSONS m PHONOGEAPHT. 11 
 
 Can the [314], could it, at the, ought to, by the, with the, that the, 
 all the, on the, in the, would it, had to. 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 Leakn §§ 315 to 348. 
 
 Read, commencing with last five phrases on page 231 to bottom 
 of page 333. 
 
 Write the following phrases : 
 
 Can not [315], could nat, had not, do not, did not, shall not 
 should not, may not, would not, can we not. 
 
 Can all of [316], can all of the, as soon as, as long as, as long as 
 there is, what will there, among all the circumstances, do you mean 
 to say, on all other occasions, if there is anything. 
 
 What was [330], it was, where was, at one. 
 
 I can [333], I had, I shall, I am, I know, I do not; a man, a safe, 
 and my, and then ; when I was, for I must, shall I ; I will [334], 1 
 will have, I have, I will not say; I conclude [335], I contend, and 
 connected ; the man [336], the most, get the, meet the, whether the; 
 and as [337], and as I have, and I ; paying the [339], paying a. 
 
 Must have [340], you and I, it had [639], it would, had had, cost 
 them, next year, next day; must have done [343] ; loss of money 
 [343], last of them ; to resign [344], to do, to assume ; ought to have 
 [345], which are to have; from day to day [346], from hour to 
 hour ; again and again [347] ; better and better [348], deeper and 
 deejier, shorter and shorter. 
 
 CONCLUDING REMARKS. 
 
 The learner has now passed over all the rules of Phonography. 
 He has yet to commit to memory the list of words at § 377, the re- 
 mainder of the word-signs, § 381, and the contractions, §§ 391 and 350. 
 This work may be divided into small daily tasks of say a page or a 
 column, and thus be made comparatively light. The learner should 
 now go on with the reading lessons at page 233, using the key at 
 page 193 as little as possible. At this point, if the assistance of a 
 teacher can be had to correct a few exercises, it will be found a 
 valuable aid. For that purpose the learner may cut a slip from a 
 newspaper, write it on alternate lines in phonography as well as he 
 can, and send it to the teacher. The lessons should not be too long 
 — not over a page of foolscap in length. The teacher's corrections 
 should be on the blank line below the outlines corrected; and 
 references to the sections of the 0. P. containing the violated rules 
 should also be given. If a teacher can not be had, a good substi- 
 
12 LESSONS IN PHONOGBAPHT. 
 
 tute is to be found in the following plan : Write a page of the key 
 and then compare it with the engraved outlines. Write and re- 
 write each page until no mistakes are made, and then proceed to 
 the next. No attempt to write fast should be made until the 
 learner can write correctly. When he has read all the Exercises in 
 the 0. P., good reading matter may be obtained in Munson's Phono- 
 graphic Magazine, which is printed entirely in phonography. 
 
 KEY TO A PORTION OF THE READING EXERCISES 
 OF THE COMPLETE PHONOGRAPHER. 
 
 [Page 205, lines 5, 6, and 7], (5) Ache, oak, aid, ate, egg, age, no 
 (or know), Abe, gay, doe {or dough), go, jay, day, Joe, lay, row, ray, 
 low, oar, (6) ode {or owed), bay, etch, beau {or bow), may, edge, ape, 
 ace, up, show, pay, say, mow, ayes, oath, ail {or ale), so {or sew), 
 they, though, aim, (7) hay, foe, yea, Poe, way, woe, oat, toe, ebb, Coe, 
 Zoe, kay, low, hoe. 
 
 [Exercise III., page 306], (1) Pa, bah, ma, caw, may, pay, day, 
 ra}"-, key, me, lea, she, am, aught, (3) odd, or, ache, oak, aid, eve, 
 ease, eke, ooze, paw, toe, eight {or ate), each, say, ash, law, show, 
 so, up, ace, (3) lay, ebb, eel, oat, ill, oaf, shaw, ape, pay, coo., gnaw, 
 row, though, be, they, eat, it, at, (4) to, too {or two), chaw, fee, saw, 
 raw, foe, hay, you, who, we, jaw, way, woo, ye, yea. 
 
 (5) Echo, eighty, eddy, ado, Esau, essay, easy, assay, Anna, Annie, 
 any, Emma, Amy, arrow, obey, Opie, (6) ashy, alley, EUa, allay, Erie, 
 away, abbey, aha ! 
 
 (7) Calm, palm, balm, par, far, laugh, patch, back, bake, beck, 
 (8) peg, beg, death, cage, ledge, lathe, coach, lodge, ledge, latch, neck, 
 balk, peach, pitch, pack, (9) peak, peck, king, fob, fib, fop, fip, bog, 
 bug, big, dam, dumb, dim, (10) mum, muck, book, cake, kick, cook, 
 lake, lick, lock, luck, (11) tar, tore, tear, chalk, check, cheek, jam, 
 jem, batch, beech, took, tick, cap, cup, map, (12) mob, tame, tomb, 
 bang, dodge, tooth, teeth, ring, rung, walk, wake, week, wing. 
 
 (13) Copy, aching, awake, oakum, tabby, autumn, atom, touchy, 
 attack, attic, adage, aiding, chalky, (14) chubby, etching, jockey, 
 jaggy, palmy, apathy, pitchy, epic, balmy , balky, boggy, buggy, 
 aback, foggy, (15) evoke, mummy, mucky, enemy, envy, navy, 
 inky. 
 
 OAKLEY & MASON, PUBLISHERS, 
 
 21 MunRAY Stkeet, New York. 
 
A NEW AND SIMPLIFIED CLASSIFICATION AND 
 AERANGEMENT OP THE 
 
 CONSONANT-SIGNS OF PHONOGEAPHY, 
 
 WITH A NEW AND COMPREHENSIVE RULE FOR VO 
 CALIZATION, AFFORDING INCREASED FACILITY IN 
 LEARNING THE ART. 
 
 By JAMES E. MUNSON, 
 
 Official Stenographer to the Surrogate's Court of New York, and Author of the 
 "Complete Plionographer." 
 
 The diflFerent kinds of consonant-signs used in Phonography 
 may be classified under four distinct heads, and arranged in tlie 
 following order : 
 
 L— SIMPLE STEMS. 
 
 Under this head are comprised all the simple, alphabetic 
 stems. 
 
 Examples: \ P, \ B, _ K, _ G, ^^ F, l^ V, ) S, ) Z, 
 ^-, M, ,^ N, etc. 
 
 II.— HOOKED STEMS. 
 
 Under this head belong all the signs that have hooks, whether 
 the hooks be initial or final. 
 
 Rule I. The power of any hook, whether initial or final, takes 
 effect after the power of the stem to which it belongs. 
 
 Examples: V PI, '\ Pr, cu_ Kw, ■:r~ Ky, _^Kf, \ Pn,i^ Pn, 
 
 J Kshn, Vo Fshn, -^ Ktr, etc. 
 
 Rule II. The power of any initial hook takes effect before that 
 of any final hook on the same stem. 
 
 Examples : ,_^ Grf, (^ Fin, <^ Ewtr, "'^ Kltr, etc. 
 
 HI— MODIFIED STEMS. 
 Under this head belong the Lengthening and Halving principles. 
 Rule. The power of any modification takes effect after the 
 power of the stem that is modified, or of any of its hooks. 
 
 Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1867, by James E. Munson, in 
 the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern 
 District of New York. 
 
JJ NEW CLASSIFICATION OF PHONOGEAPHT 
 
 Examples : , _, Ntr, Q^ Fltr, ^~^ Mntr, _ Gt, ^ Kit, 
 
 ^ Krt, c_ Kwt, s, Pft, ^ Pnt, \) Pslint, ^ Ptrd, -s, Pint, -s, Pmt, etc. 
 
 RULE FOB VOCALIZING. 
 
 A vowel-sign placed hefore a stem is read before tlie stem, and 
 consequently before any of its books and modifications. A vowel- 
 sign placed after a stem, is rea,d after tbe stem and any initial 
 hook, and before any final hook, and consequently before any modi- 
 fication. 
 
 Examples : ■] aid,, _^_ acTie, -] odor, ^ oval, ^ aetor, ^^j__^ under, 
 ^ anoient; \ bay, ,-^ Tiay, \ play, X pray, [• deaf, -^ cane, 
 ^^ min, i^ motion, -td cater, .^,. prove, (^ letter, ^-Y-^moiJier, 
 ^,___^ mender, |. date, _ get, ^ prate, s, blend, -_fr, approved, etc. 
 
 IV.— CIECLES AND LOOPS. 
 
 Although the Circles and Loops are generally joined to a stem, 
 they are indbpbndbnt signs, and are not to be considered as 
 forming any part of the stems to which they are joined. Thus, in 
 
 J the circle may be said to belong either to the D or to the K ; 
 
 and in ^ (the outline for Tumestly) the loop may, with equal pro- 
 priety, be said to belong to the N or to the L. Hence the following 
 rules : 
 
 KuLE I. When a circle or loop is joined initially to a stem, its 
 power takes effect before anything else — that is, before the power 
 of the stem, and of all its hooks and modifications, and of all its 
 vowel-signs. 
 
 Examples : \ sP, _ sK, \ sPl, (J_ sFl, g~. sMr, ^ sKw, 
 ■\ sPr, 0\ ssPr, -^, stPr, (^ sitr, _ sKt, _ stKt, \ sPnd, 
 -■J- seat, \ saUe, °\ saber, J' session, ^ psalter, /^ slender, 
 p settled, o^ sobered, etc. 
 
 Rule II. When a circle or loop is joined finaUy to a stem, its 
 power takes effect after everything else — that is, after the power of 
 the stem, and of all its hooks and modifications, and of all its 
 vowel-signs. 
 
 Examples : „ Ks, l^ Vs, _o Kss, (^ Fss, _^ Est, _^ Kstr, 
 
 C Tws, _s Kft, _s Kshns, l^) Fshns, "= Kti-s, U Vns, \ Pns, 
 j Dnss, -<= Gnst, \ Pnstr, ^—^ Mti's, ^"^ Mnti's, _^ Kts, 
 r^ Mdst, 1, Brfts, _„ Knts, -^^ Binds, ^ Bmds, -.1- Uaa, 
 
LENGTHENING PEINOIPLE OF PHONOGEAPHT. 3 
 
 ^^ course, X burst, ["' twice, —s ernes, ^ fashions, ■^^^ matters, 
 ■'^-' cyliTiders, y no^s, ^ Wends, '^ brands, etc. 
 
 Note. — The In-hook, as in Xj^ unstrung, ,p^ enslave, is read 
 before the circle, because it is written before it, and Is an independ- 
 ent abbreviation or substitute for a preceding consonant-stem 
 (N) ; and the Ishun-hook, as in --k^: physician, is read after a circle 
 or loop, because it is written after it, and is an independent abbre- 
 viation, or substitute for sucqeding consonant-stems (SH and N). 
 
 REASONS FOR ALLOWING THE POWER OF THE 
 LENGTHENING PRINCIPLE TO TAKE EFFECT AF- 
 TER,INSTEAD OF BEFORE, FINAL HOOKS* 
 
 Examples : 1^-—^ tormentor, /^ slender, ^ — .^ summon fheir. 
 
 I. It harmonizes with the analogous principle of allowing the 
 power of the Halving Principle to take effect after the power of 
 final hooks ; and, while it does not materially change the practice 
 of writing Phonography, it renders the New Classification and 
 Arrangement of Phonography possible. 
 
 II. It simplifies the outlines of many more words than does the 
 old plan. 
 
 WOBDS THAT ABE WKITTBN ACCOBDING TO THE NEW PLAN. 
 
 Lengthen to add -ter and -der in the following words : finder, found- 
 er, fainter, fender, vaunter, venter, vender, thunder, assenter, asunder, 
 O'Shanter, meander, maunder, mentor, mender, minter. Lander, 
 islander, lender, wander, winder, wonder, winter, yonder, bander, 
 hinder, hinder, haunter, hunter, hinter, slander, solander, slender, 
 sellander, cylinder, flounder, flinder, there-under, fomenter, in- 
 ventor, pomander, lavender, remainder, palender, inlander, sala- 
 mander, tormentor, germander. 
 
 WOBDS THAT ABE WMTTEN ACCOBDUTa TO THE OLD PLAN. 
 
 Veteran, eastern, slattern, hawthorn, lantern, subaltern, northern, 
 southern, moderation, alteration, alliteration, inveteration, oblitera- 
 tian, adulteration, filtration, modem, concentration. 
 
 III. The improvement to the outlines of the words that are writ- 
 ten according to the new plan, is greater than the improvement to 
 the outlines of those words that are written according to the old 
 plan. [See illustrations to heading II.] 
 
 IV. The outlines given by the new plan may all be vocalized, 
 
 * Adopted by Mr. I. Pitman in his Eleventh Edition of Phonography. 
 
* LENGTHENING PEIITCIPLE OF PHONOGEAPHT. 
 
 ■while those resulting from the use of the old plan frequently can 
 not receive all their vowel-signs ; as in moderation, alteration, etc. 
 Hence the new plan is the more natural one, and the outlines that 
 it gives, even in unvocalized Phonography, will be more legible. 
 
 V. It greatly extends the application of the phraseographic prin- 
 ciple of indicating tlwir, tfiere, ihey wre, and other, by Lengthening. 
 
 PHKASES WEITTBN ACCOBDING TO THE NEW PLAK. 
 
 Lengthen to add their, there, and other in the following : lean-their, 
 mjan-their, wean-their, fan-their, thto-their, than-there-is, then- 
 their, then-there-is, even-there, feign-their, assign-their, Iain-there, 
 vain-their, within-their, win-their, commission-their, won-their, 
 earn-their, loan-their, shun-their, shown-there, shine-there, known- 
 their, demean-there, bemoan-their, woman-there, women-there, 
 roughen-their, fallen-there, malign-their, slain-there, summon-their, 
 concern-their, stolen-their, station-their, examine-their, specimen- 
 there, strengthen-their, lengtlien-their, enliven-their, purloln-their, 
 replevin-their, learn-their, moum-their, wam-their, shown-there, 
 freshen-their, fashion-their, admission-there, sanction-there, men- 
 tion-their, shall-another, show-another, should-another, usually- 
 another, was-another, think- another, that- another, with-another, 
 from-another, for-another, if-another, have-another, of-another, 
 among-another, on-another, in-another, from-another, how-another, 
 beyond-another, yet-another, why-another, when-another, would- 
 another, these-and-other, that-and-other, them-and-other. 
 
 PHRASES WRITTEN ACCORDING TO THE OLD PLAN. 
 
 Further-than, farther-than, flatter-than, harder-than, later-than, 
 louder-than, mightier-than, older-than, shorter-than, sweeter-than, 
 wilder-than, whiter-than, wider-than, lighter-than, after-one, fur- 
 ther-one, another-one, the-other-one, whether-one, have-there-been, 
 all-their-own, or-their-own, feel-their-own, for-all-their-own, for- 
 their-own, from-their-own, have-their-own, if-their-own, in-their- 
 own, over-their-own, shall-their-own, was-their-own, among-their- 
 own, shall-therefore, should-therefore, so-therefore, was-therefore, 
 think-therefore, that-therefore, if-therefore, may-therefore. 
 
 The greatest loss from adopting the new plan is that of not being 
 able to write own after lengthened curves with the n-hook. Still, 
 there is this to be said : own is a comparatively infrequent word, 
 and when it does occur, it may be written almost as easily with 
 the stem N as with the hook ; while thr (in tliiere, ihdr, they are, 
 and other) is of very frequent occurrence, and its stemDHr is much 
 more difficult, and occupies considerably more time in writing, 
 than the stem N. So, when tlierefore is joined after lengthened 
 curves in phrases, instead of using the f-hook for -fore, the stem P 
 or Fr must be employed, and is almost as serviceable. 
 
PHONOGEAPHIC AUTHORSHIP. 
 
 PHONOGKAPHIC AUTHOESHIP. 
 
 In order that the public may not be misled by certain false claims 
 to the authorship or invention of the phonographic improvementfl 
 found in The Complete Phonographer, the following statement has 
 been carefully prepared, in which the credit of each of such im- 
 provements is placed where it properly belongs. The author not 
 only takes pleasure in making this statement, but he feels impelled 
 to do it from a sense of duty and honor, because of the free and 
 generous manner in which the reporters of New York placed 
 at his disposal the results of their experiments and practical 
 experience, while he was preparing The Complete Phonographer 
 for press. 
 
 I. The sign ^-^ for h was proposed and published first in an En- 
 glish phonographic periodical called the " Phonographer," in the 
 year 1851. It was then adopted by some phonographers, who have 
 continued to use it until the present day. But it was not adopted 
 into the system until the publication of The Complete Phonographer. 
 
 II. The Vowel Scale is the one adopted by Isaac Pitman in his 
 Tenth and Eleventh Editions. This subject was also brought for- 
 ward and discussed, though not very earnestly or deeply, in the 
 " Phonographer," in 1851. 
 
 III. The use of a large initial hook on the concave side of curves 
 for Z, and a small hook, similarly placed, for r, was first suggested 
 by Mr. Charles E. Wilbour, in or about the year 1859. The neces- 
 sity for such a scheme of initial hooks, in which the primitive stems 
 should not be changed, was felt and discussed as far back as 1851. 
 At that time, however, experience had not shown the practicability 
 of using initial hooks of two sizes, and so the project was from 
 necessity abandoned. 
 
 IV. The use of large initial hooks on straight stems, for w and y, 
 was suggested by the author in the year 1859. At first, the la-hook 
 was on the r-hook side, and the ^-hook on the Z-hook side. Practice 
 and experience, however, soon showed the present assignment, 
 which is the reverse of that, to be the best. In 1864, the author 
 learned for the first time that the use of the w-hook on T and D 
 was mtroduced in 1837, in Mr. Pitman's first publication on the 
 subject. The lo-hook was also again suggested, in the " Phonog- 
 rapher," in 1851, but it was not adopted. 
 
 V. The use of a small final hook on the circle side of straight 
 stems for / or v, and of a large hook, similarly situated, for shun, 
 
6 PHONOGEAPHIC ATJTHOESHIP. 
 
 was suggested in the " Phonographer," in 1851; and the July 
 number for that year was printed in accordance with the suggestion, 
 
 VI. The use of a large final hook on the ?i-hook side of straight 
 stems for ir, dr, or tJi/r, was first suggested by Mr. Wilbour in or 
 about the year 1859. 
 
 VII. The idea of constructing the double Towel scales of The 
 Complete Phonographer, and the plan upon which they are based, 
 were first suggested by Mr. J. A. MacLauchlan; but the signs 
 adopted for their representation were selected by the author ; and 
 their arrangement was also the result of his labors. 
 
 VIII. The system of Stenotypy used in The Complete Phonog- 
 rapher is the author's. It is, however, similar, in some of its de- 
 tails, to those of Mr. S. P. Andrews and Mr. H. M. Parkhurat. 
 
 IX. In selecting the new word-signs, the author acted in con- 
 junction with Messrs. Charles E. Wilbour, J. A. MacLauchlan, E. 
 P. TJnderhill, Andrew Deyine, and others. 
 
 X. The suffixes for -Ueneas, -fulness, and ^snesa, were first sug- 
 gested by the author. 
 
 XI. The use of the large loop for the consonant sounds stlvr (as 
 in beeause-tJiere, it4s-there, etc.), as well as for str, was first suggested 
 by Mr. MacLauchlan. The use of detached loops for Tms-it, is-it, 
 has-there, is-there, etc., was introduced by the author. 
 
 XII. The use of the lbngthenins Principle to add tr or dr, as 
 well as tlvr, was first suggested by Mr. I. Pitman early in 1856. 
 
 XIII. For the general use of the halting Principle to add the, 
 we are indebted to Mr. Wilbour; although the suggestion of a 
 partial application of the principle dates baclt as far as 1842. 
 
 XIV. The indication of of (and not of of tlie) by proximity, was 
 first adopted by the author. 
 
 XV. The representation of to by writing the following word in 
 the fourth position, i. e., below the line, was proposed in the "Amer- 
 ican Reporter," May, 1848. 
 
 Note. — Those who wish to become more thoroughly informed 
 on this subject, especially in regard to the early history of Phonog- 
 raphy, will find it fully and truthfully set forth, with numerous 
 phonographic illustrations, in the " Defendant's Testimony, in the 
 Case of A. J. Graham vs. Benn Pitman, in Equity." 
 
THE IMPEOVED PHOITOGEAPHT. 7 
 
 HOW THE PHONOGEAPHT OF THE COMPLETE 
 PHONOGEAPHER DIEFERS FROM THE OLD. 
 
 The following are tlie Changes and Improvements introduced 
 into Phonography by The Complete Phonographer : 
 
 SIGN FOR H. 
 
 I. The use of the sign ^-^ for U. 
 
 Note. — It is a principle of Phonography that mnpU sounds be 
 written with simple signs, and compound or double sounds, with com- 
 pound signs. The old signs for h and mp were used in violation of 
 this principle. The new sign for h is superior to the old sign, not 
 only because it is in harmony with the above principle, biit because 
 it is simpler, more easily written, and joins with greater facility 
 to other stems. H is not, however, to be considered as the mate in 
 sound of M because it is paired with it, any more than W, as the 
 mate of R, or Y of L. 
 
 L-HOOKS. 
 
 II. The use of a large initial hook on the inner side of any curve, 
 and a small initial-hook on the circle-side of any straight stem, 
 as an Z-hook; thus, Q_ Fl, <) Zl, o NGl, ,^ Kl, y Bl. 
 
 Note. — To this rule there are no exceptions, while in the old 
 Phonography there were eight stems (L, L, R, NG, S, Z, W, and H) 
 to which the Z-hook could not be attached at all ; and five (SH, 
 ZH, M, N, and B) to which it might be joined, but in an excep- 
 tional, restricted, or special manner only. 
 
 E-HOOK. 
 
 III. The use of a small initial-hook on the inner side of any 
 curve, and a small initial-hook on the side opposite the circle- 
 side of any straight stem, as an /--hook ; thus, '^ Fr, ) Sr, ,^^ Nr, 
 ^NGr, r Zr.^Kr, ^iJr. 
 
 Note. There are also no exceptions to this rule; and 'yet in the 
 old Phonography there were fera. stems (8, Z, L, L, R, B, NG, W, 
 Y, and H) to which the r-hook could not be attached at all ; and 
 eight (F, V, TH, DH, SH, ZH, M, and N) to which it might be 
 joined, but in an exceptional, restricted, or special manner only. 
 
 W AND T HOOKS. 
 
 IV. The use of a large initial hook on any straight stem, on the 
 J-hook side as a w-hook, and on the r-hook side as a y-hodk. ; thus, 
 r- Kw, ,c- Ky, etc. 
 
8 THE IMPROVED PHONOGEAPHT. 
 
 Note. — This is a far better assignment of these hooks, both in 
 principle and practice, than to use the former for Vr, and the lattei 
 for rl. 
 
 HOOK FOH TR, DR, THR, OR DHR. 
 
 v. The use of a large flnal-hook on the m-hook side of any straight 
 stem, for final tr, dr, tkr, or dhr; thus, -^ Ktr, J Tdhr, etc. 
 
 Note — This is a better assignment of this hook than to use it, 
 as does Mr. Pitman, for an additional sJiun-hndk (a large final hook 
 on either side of a straight stem being used by him for shun), thus 
 unnecessarily wasting very valuable stenographic inaterial. It is 
 also a much better assignment of the hook than to appropriate it 
 to represent the final syllable tke — for the following reasons : First, 
 it is much more useful practically. According to Walker's Rhym- 
 ing Dictionary, there are in the English language three hundred 
 and fifty-two words ending in tr, dr, or fhr, in which this hook 
 may be employed with advantage. As all these words, with a 
 few trifling exceptions, are either nouns or verbs, the actual num- 
 ber of the former in which the hook may be employed is tripled 
 by the addition of plurals and possessives ; and the number of 
 the latter quintupled by the addition in each case of the thii'd 
 person singular of the present tense, the present participle, the 
 past tense, and the perfect participle; making a total of some- 
 where between ten and twelve hundred words. On the other 
 hand, of words ending in tme, there are only one hundred and ninety- 
 five, nearly all of which are adjectives which do not in any way 
 furnish additional forms for the hook. Add to this four words end- 
 ing in -tmity, twelve in -timneas, and thirty-eight in -tively, and we 
 only have a total of two hundred and forty-nine. Again, if we 
 compare these two classes of words as to the frequency of their 
 occurrence in speech, the advantage will be found greatly in favor 
 of the tr, dr, etc., use of this hook. And, second, because it secures 
 analogy of representation corresponding to the analogy of words, 
 as between the forms for the actor and the action, as in the words : 
 actor, action ; creator, creation ; dedicator, dedication ; vindicator, 
 vindication; prognosticator, prognostication; propagator, propa- 
 gation ; instigator, instigation ; navigator, navigation ; interrogator, 
 interrogation ; speculator, speculation ; calculator, calculation ; reg- 
 ulator, regulation ; separator, separation ; moderator, moderation ; 
 operator, operation; decorator, decoration; administrator, admin- 
 istration; dictator, dictation; agitator, agitation; imitator, imita- 
 tion; objector, objection; selector, selection; reflector, reflection' 
 
THE IMPEOVED PHONOGEaPHT. 9 
 
 collector, collection ; inspector, inspection ; director, direction ; 
 protector, protection; predictor, prediction; abductor, abduction; 
 contributor, contribution ; prosecutor, prosecution ; persecutor, 
 persecution ; executor, execution. On the contrary, all tliese anal- 
 ogies are lost by the use of this hook for tive. 
 
 LBNGTHENrUa PMNCIPLE. 
 
 VI. The use of the Lengthening principle to add final ir, dr, ihr, 
 or dhr, to any curred stem, whether simple or hooked. 
 
 NoTB. — To this rule there are no exceptions, while in the old 
 Phonography, NG was lengthened to add her or g&r, and MP, to 
 add 'p&r or ber ; and the power of lengthening took effect before, 
 instead of after, final hooks. 
 
 HM,VINa PKmCIPLE. 
 
 VII. The use of the Halving principle to add tOYd, finally to any 
 stem, whether simple or hooked. 
 
 Note. — To this rule there are no exceptions. In the old Pho- 
 nography only sixteen consonant stems (the first sixteen in the 
 Alphabet) followed the rule. Four stems (L, M, N, and E) were 
 halved to add t only, they being changed respectively into half- 
 length Y, MP, NG, and W, for U, md, nd, and rd. Simple W, Y, 
 MP, and NG, as such, could not be halved ; and yet W, and MP 
 with a final hook, and Y with any hook, might be halved. 
 
 BBrEF SIGNS FOR H, W, AKD Y. 
 
 VIII. The rejection from general use of the dot-sign for h, and 
 the brief signs for w and y and a following vowel. 
 
 Note. — This change is an improvement because it makes the 
 outlines of such words as wet, yacht, ward, yell, etc., harmonize with 
 the outlines of met, dot, towaird, tell, and all other similar words. It, 
 however, could not have been adopted without loss until W and Y 
 were allowed to be hooked and modified the same as other stems. 
 
 TOWBL-SCALB. 
 
 . IX. The adoption of the Vowel Scale of Isaac Pitman's Tenth 
 Edition of Phonography, in which the order of the dot vowels is 
 ah, a, e ; the dash vowels remaining the same as before. 
 
 Note. — This is an improvement in principle and practice. In 
 principle, because it pairs the open vowels ah and am, and the 
 close vowels e and oo ; instead of e with aw, and ah with oo ; — and 
 
10 THE IMPEOVED PHONOGEAPHT. 
 
 in practice, because it enables us to dispense with the old trouble' 
 some, and illegible tick -word-signs. For instance, it makes on fall 
 in the first position, and m in the third ; therefore both may be 
 written with the stem N ; — ^it also places at in the first position, and 
 to in the third ; thus enabling us to write both with the stem T. 
 
 NEW WOBD-SIGNS. 
 
 X The rejection of many of the old word-signs, including the 
 ticks for of, or, on, to, hut, and should, and the brief w and y signs for 
 we, with, were, what, would, ye, yea/r, yet, beyond, and yov,; and the 
 substitution of simple stem signs, that wiU admit of being fully 
 hooked and modified to add the words aU, wiU, a/re, our, Or, we, you, 
 own, an, them; there, it, to, the, etc. ; and to which the circles and 
 loops may be attached to add the words as, has, is, his, us, as-his, 
 is-as, as-to, is-it, has-there, is-there, etc. ; — thus greatly extending the 
 use of Phraseography. 
 
 EEJBCTrON OP THE COKRESPONDINa STTLE. 
 
 XL The rejection of the Corresponding Style of Phonography, 
 and the treatment of the system as one unbroken whole, in which 
 there is nothing to be learned at one stage of the learner's progress, 
 which he will be required to unlearn at another. 
 
 cosrcLrsioN. 
 
 The result of all these changes is the production of a harmoni- 
 ous system, easy of acquisition, because simple ; and easily remem- 
 bered and applied, because free from exceptions. The author is well 
 aware that one of the greatest impediments to the general introduc- 
 tion of Phonography heretofore, has been the adoption, from time to 
 time, of changes and modifications of the system. Still, on the 
 other hand, he believes that the only remedy for this evil, and pre- 
 vention for its recurrence in the future, is a complete and absolute 
 return, and rigid adherence, to the simple and beautiful fundamen- 
 tal principles of Phonography. This he has aimed to do Ln all his 
 publications ; and the universal expression of warm approval of 
 his labors, on the part of the unprejudiced press and public, and 
 the thought that he has done something to bring the benefits of 
 this noble Art within reach 'of the masses, are now his abundant 
 reward. 
 
OPINIONS OF PHONOGRAPHERS. 
 
 New Tokk, September 17, 1867. 
 Mb. J. E. MuNsoN, 
 
 Bear Sir, — After an examination of yonr new " Classification and Arrange- 
 ment of the Consonant-Signs of Phonography," and new Enle for Vocalization, 1 
 am satisfied that no greater improvement has been Introduced in Phonography in 
 relation to its harmony and consistency, since the halvikg system was remodeled 
 in or about the year 1844. Without introducing any material change in the prac- 
 tice of writing Phonography, — the only change being an improvement, — it substi- 
 tutes simple rules requiring no exceptions, for a series of rules, many of them 
 arbitrary, and some of them apparently inconsistent. It will certainly afford 
 greatly " increased facility in learning the art" of Phonography. 
 
 Tonrs truly, 
 
 HENET M. PARKHTJEST. 
 
 New Tobk, October 19, 1867. 
 James E. MuNson, 
 
 Dear Sir^—Al\o-w me to express my very great commendation of yonr 
 "New Classification, etc., of Phonography." It seems to me to do away com- 
 pletely with the old stumbling-blocks of arbitrary and inconsistent rules, which 
 the learner had to encounter, and which the teacher could not satisfactorily ex- 
 plain. For its brevity, simplicity, and general perfection, I consider it one of 
 the most valuable improvements which has yet been made. 
 
 Tours, 
 
 JAS. L. CEOSBT. 
 
 New York, October 17, 1867. 
 Mb. J. E. MuNSON, 
 
 I have examined your New Classification and Arrangement of the Con- 
 sonant-Signs of Phonography. The analysis is correct, and the presentation is 
 lucid and concise. In my opinion it will be found a valuable adjunct in learning 
 the art of phonographic shorthand. 
 
 EDWARD P. UNDEEHILL. 
 
 37 Pake Eow, October 18, 1867. 
 Deab Munson, 
 
 Although I have long known that the chief object and effect of your phono- 
 graphic labors have been to systematize and simplify, yet I was hardly prepared to 
 see any considerable result in that direction so briefly and unpretentiously 
 attained as it is in your New Classification and Arrangement, — a happy little 
 piece of work which, in my judgment, does more to abolish anomalies, and 
 therefore to make the Phonographic Art logical, simple, and easy to acquire, than 
 any other that has been done in my time. 
 
 Sincerely yours, 
 
 ANDEEW DEVINB. 
 
12 OPINIONS OF PHONOGRAPHEES. ^^ 
 
 \^ 
 
 » New York, (?ctofier 24pi'^ld trouble- 
 
 Jambs B. Munson, V^ o« f it 
 
 7)«or ^2r,— I have looked over your Classification and Arrangement of the ^-^-^^ ^^ 
 Consonant-Signs of Phonography and Rule for Vocalization with great pleasure. ^ 
 
 What you have done in this work and previously, in simplifying and perfecting 
 Phonography, seems to me of infinite importance. Heretofore it has been too 
 intricate and too much burdened with exceptions to be of wide-spread value ; 
 but I think your persevering labors have made it possible for it to take its i)lace 
 among school studies and become of practical and general use in daily affairs. If 
 this shall prove to be the result of your improvements, you have rendered a ser- 
 vice to the age which ought to take no mean rank beside other more lauded, per- 
 haps, and high-sounding achievements and reforms. 
 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 GEO. WAKEMAN. 
 
 It has been the misfortune of The Art of Phonography that it was originally 
 laden with too many exceptions to the simple and beautiful scientific principles 
 upon which it was founded ; and that during the subsequent period of its devel- 
 opment it has drifted constantly still farther away from its primitive simplicity, 
 and become still more oppressively loaded with exceptions, by straining after 
 detailed and unimportant special advantages. The labors and publications of Mr. 
 Munson have been especially directed to the purpose of retrieving this delightful 
 and valuable art from this overgrowth of superficial complexity. His present 
 " New Classification and Arrangement" of the Principles of Phonography afitect- 
 ing the Simple, Hooked, and Modified Stems, or Consonant-Signs, and his Enle 
 of Vocalization, seem to me an admirable condensation of statement, and a really 
 valuable contribution to the more orderly presentation, and the easier acquisition 
 of the art. 
 
 STEPHEN PEAHL ANDREWS. 
 Brooklyn, October ^^ 1867. 
 
 Skaneateles, N. T., October 11, 1867. 
 Friend Mijnson, 
 
 I am well pleased with your New Classification of Phonographic Consonant- 
 Signs, with their modifications ; not as a change in the system, which it is not, 
 but as an elucidation of success in your eflforts to free shorthand fl"om the em- 
 barrassing anomalies of the past, and which success alone renders this classifica- 
 tion and comprehensive rule for vocalization possiblef. To the doubter of your 
 previous improvements it is worth ten days' time in examining and comparing 
 systems ; and to the student commencing the study of Phonography, it will be 
 worth " ten lessons," and ^Hhree months' application" under the old classifica- 
 tion, rules, and exceptions. 
 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 CHAUNCET B. THORNE. 
 

 if ff J^ 
 
 /3-^.^,^..^,.. 
 
 r^Af^' 
 
 

 
Cornell University Library 
 Z56.M96 C7 1868 
 
 Complete phonographer 
 
 rapher : 
 
 ill 
 
 leing an nducti 
 
 olln 
 
 3 1924 029 486 382 
 
'iM^mW'. 
 
 
 fi-*^' i>r^'f / "^2" t T'. V '.'T'' 
 
 b'^rnaU'i-v^Htttkiu^